[gtkmm/gtkmm-2-22] Regenerated C XML documentation.
- From: Murray Cumming <murrayc src gnome org>
- To: commits-list gnome org
- Cc:
- Subject: [gtkmm/gtkmm-2-22] Regenerated C XML documentation.
- Date: Mon, 13 Sep 2010 20:16:12 +0000 (UTC)
commit aebaf98960bcd7ada15695d8bd1aea4c7d5feba8
Author: Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
Date: Mon Sep 13 21:25:02 2010 +0200
Regenerated C XML documentation.
* gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml:
* gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerated.
* gdk/src/filelist.am:
* gdk/src/gdk_pixbuf_docs.xml: Added this, including it in filelist.am.
Previously it was in gdk_doc.xml.
ChangeLog | 21 +
gdk/src/filelist.am | 1 +
gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml | 3664 +++++---
gdk/src/gdk_pixbuf_docs.xml | 2556 +++++
gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml |23383 ++++++++++++++++++++++---------------------
5 files changed, 17190 insertions(+), 12435 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/ChangeLog b/ChangeLog
index 24ee8a6..d710231 100644
--- a/ChangeLog
+++ b/ChangeLog
@@ -1,3 +1,24 @@
+2010-09-13 Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
+
+ Make sure that deprecated API is inside an ifdef.
+
+ * gtk/gtkmm/comboboxentrytext.[h|cc]:
+ * gtk/src/notebook.hg:
+ * gtk/src/textbuffer.ccg:
+ * gtk/src/textbuffer.hg:
+ * gtk/src/widget.hg: Put anything documented with @deprecated in
+ #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED.
+
+2010-09-13 Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
+
+ Regenerated C XML documentation.
+
+ * gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml:
+ * gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerated.
+ * gdk/src/filelist.am:
+ * gdk/src/gdk_pixbuf_docs.xml: Added this, including it in filelist.am.
+ Previously it was in gdk_doc.xml.
+
2010-09-13 Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>>
MessageDialog: Added get_message_area().
diff --git a/gdk/src/filelist.am b/gdk/src/filelist.am
index e248e23..188fca1 100644
--- a/gdk/src/filelist.am
+++ b/gdk/src/filelist.am
@@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ gdkmm_files_defs = \
gdk_pixbuf_enums.defs \
gdk_signals.defs \
gdk_docs.xml \
+ gdk_pixbuf_docs.xml \
gdk_docs_override.xml
gdkmm_files_hg = \
diff --git a/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml b/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml
index 68d6cec..a4daa77 100644
--- a/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml
+++ b/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml
@@ -176,6 +176,8 @@ only the pixel values of the @values->foreground and @values->background
are filled, use gdk_colormap_query_color() to obtain the rgb values
if you need them.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use Cairo for rendering.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -245,6 +247,10 @@ function is obsolete. See gdk_colormap_free_colors().
<description>
Create a pixmap from a XPM file.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use a #GdkPixbuf instead. You can use
+gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file() to create it.
+If you must use a pixmap, use gdk_pixmap_new() to
+create it and Cairo to draw the pixbuf onto it.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -271,6 +277,7 @@ in which case a default color will be used.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkPixmap
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -356,21 +363,29 @@ This function works on both toplevel and child windows.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_color_copy">
+<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_set_screen">
<description>
-Makes a copy of a color structure. The result
-must be freed using gdk_color_free().
+Sets the screen on which applications will be launched when
+using this context. See also gdk_app_launch_context_set_display().
+
+If both @screen and @display are set, the @screen takes priority.
+If neither @screen or @display are set, the default screen and
+display are used.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor.
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkAppLaunchContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a copy of @color.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_event_get">
@@ -394,6 +409,8 @@ Sets the clip mask for a graphics context from a
rectangle. The clip mask is interpreted relative to the clip
origin. (See gdk_gc_set_clip_origin()).
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use cairo_rectangle() and cairo_clip() in Cairo.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -432,6 +449,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Create a new GC with the given initial values.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use Cairo for rendering.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -451,42 +469,28 @@ are set.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the new graphics context.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_constrain_size">
+<function name="gdk_image_get_visual">
<description>
-Constrains a desired width and height according to a
-set of geometry hints (such as minimum and maximum size).
+Determines the visual that was used to create the image.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkImage should not be used anymore.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="geometry">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGeometry structure
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> a mask indicating what portions of @geometry are set
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> desired width of window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> desired height of the window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_width">
-<parameter_description> location to store resulting width
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_height">
-<parameter_description> location to store resulting height
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GdkVisual
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_drag_context_unref">
@@ -659,22 +663,6 @@ the default root window for the default display.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_gc_unref">
-<description>
-Decrement the reference count of @gc.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_get_update_area">
<description>
Transfers ownership of the update area from @window to the caller
@@ -779,6 +767,26 @@ newly created, if one doesn't exist already.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_get_focus_on_map">
+<description>
+Determines whether or not the desktop environment should be hinted that the
+window does not want to receive input focus when it is mapped.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether or not the window wants to receive input focus when
+it is mapped.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_pango_attr_emboss_color_new">
<description>
Creates a new attribute specifying the color to emboss text with.
@@ -815,7 +823,7 @@ Returns the display of a #GdkDrawable.
<function name="gdk_utf8_to_string_target">
<description>
-Convert an UTF-8 string into the best possible representation
+Converts an UTF-8 string into the best possible representation
as a STRING. The representation of characters not in STRING
is not specified; it may be as pseudo-escape sequences
\x{ABCD}, or it may be in some other form of approximation.
@@ -828,9 +836,10 @@ is not specified; it may be as pseudo-escape sequences
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the newly allocated string, or %NULL if the
+<return> the newly-allocated string, or %NULL if the
conversion failed. (It should not fail for
-any properly formed UTF-8 string.)
+any properly formed UTF-8 string unless system
+limits like memory or file descriptors are exceeded.)
</return>
</function>
@@ -852,32 +861,85 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_colormap_query_color">
+<function name="gdk_drag_context_list_targets">
<description>
-Locates the RGB color in @colormap corresponding to the given
-hardware pixel @pixel. @pixel must be a valid pixel in the
-colormap; it's a programmer error to call this function with a
-pixel which is not in the colormap. Hardware pixels are normally
-obtained from gdk_colormap_alloc_colors(), or from a #GdkImage. (A
-#GdkImage contains image data in hardware format, a #GdkPixbuf
-contains image data in a canonical 24-bit RGB format.)
+Retrieves the list of targets of the context.
-This function is rarely useful; it's used for example to
-implement the eyedropper feature in #GtkColorSelection.
+Since: 2.22
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDragContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GList of targets
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_device_get_source">
+<description>
+Determines the type of the device.
+
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixel">
-<parameter_description> pixel value in hardware display format
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GdkInputSource
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_set_pointer_hooks">
+<description>
+This function allows for hooking into the operation
+of getting the current location of the pointer. This
+is only useful for such low-level tools as an
+event recorder. Applications should never have any
+reason to use this facility.
+
+This function is not multihead safe. For multihead operation,
+see gdk_display_set_pointer_hooks().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="new_hooks">
+<parameter_description> a table of pointers to functions for getting
+quantities related to the current pointer position,
+or %NULL to restore the default table.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="result">
-<parameter_description> #GdkColor with red, green, blue fields initialized
+</parameters>
+<return> the previous pointer hook table
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_display_set_double_click_distance">
+<description>
+Sets the double click distance (two clicks within this distance
+count as a double click and result in a #GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS event).
+See also gdk_display_set_double_click_time().
+Applications should <emphasis>not</emphasis> set this, it is a global
+user-configured setting.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="distance">
+<parameter_description> distance in pixels
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -903,6 +965,24 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_device_get_mode">
+<description>
+Determines the mode of the device.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GdkInputSource
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_colormap_free_colors">
<description>
Frees previously allocated colors.
@@ -1077,23 +1157,40 @@ in @value, %FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_supports_cursor_color">
+<function name="gdk_image_get_pixels">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if multicolored cursors are supported
-on @display. Otherwise, cursors have only a forground
-and a background color.
+Returns a pointer to the pixel data of the image.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.22
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkImage should not be used anymore.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether cursors can have multiple colors.
+<return> the pixel data of the image
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_keymap_get_for_display">
+<description>
+Returns the #GdkKeymap attached to @display.
+
+Since: 2.2
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GdkKeymap attached to @display.
</return>
</function>
@@ -1125,6 +1222,11 @@ Set a tile pixmap for a graphics context.
This will only be used if the fill mode
is %GDK_TILED.
+Deprecated: 2.22: The following code snippet sets a tiling #GdkPixmap
+as the source in Cairo:
+|[gdk_cairo_set_source_pixmap (cr, tile, ts_origin_x, ts_origin_y);
+cairo_pattern_set_extend (cairo_get_source (cr), CAIRO_EXTEND_REPEAT);]|
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -1139,11 +1241,11 @@ is %GDK_TILED.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_gc_set_line_attributes">
+<function name="gdk_x11_gc_get_xgc">
<description>
-Sets various attributes of how lines are drawn. See
-the corresponding members of #GdkGCValues for full
-explanations of the arguments.
+Returns the X GC of a #GdkGC.
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkGC has been replaced by #cairo_t.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1151,44 +1253,8 @@ explanations of the arguments.
<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="line_width">
-<parameter_description> the width of lines.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="line_style">
-<parameter_description> the dash-style for lines.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cap_style">
-<parameter_description> the manner in which the ends of lines are drawn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="join_style">
-<parameter_description> the in which lines are joined together.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_char_width">
-<description>
-Determines the width of a given character.
-
-Deprecated: 2.2: Use gdk_text_extents() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="font">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="character">
-<parameter_description> the character to measure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the width of the character in pixels.
+<return> an Xlib <type>GC</type>.
</return>
</function>
@@ -1203,6 +1269,8 @@ number of colors), a colorcube will be allocated in the colormap.
Calling this function for a GC without a colormap is an error.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gdk_cairo_set_source_color() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -1291,33 +1359,31 @@ should not be used. See gdk_color_change().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_cairo_reset_clip">
+<function name="gdk_font_from_description_for_display">
<description>
-Resets the clip region for a Cairo context created by gdk_cairo_create().
-
-This resets the clip region to the "empty" state for the given drawable.
-This is required for non-native windows since a direct call to
-cairo_reset_clip() would unset the clip region inherited from the
-drawable (i.e. the window clip region), and thus let you e.g.
-draw outside your window.
-
-This is rarely needed though, since most code just create a new cairo_t
-using gdk_cairo_create() each time they want to draw something.
+Loads a #GdkFont based on a Pango font description for use on @display.
+This font will only be an approximation of the Pango font, and
+internationalization will not be handled correctly. This function
+should only be used for legacy code that cannot be easily converted
+to use Pango. Using Pango directly will produce better results.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cr">
-<parameter_description> a #cairo_t
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+<parameter name="font_desc">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoFontDescription.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the newly loaded font, or %NULL if the font
+cannot be loaded.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_set_double_click_time">
@@ -1361,6 +1427,8 @@ You should make no assumptions about the initial reference count.
<description>
Calls a function on each span in the intersection of @region and @spans.
+Deprecated: 2.22: There is no replacement.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="region">
@@ -1391,12 +1459,31 @@ Calls a function on each span in the intersection of @region and @spans.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_supports_shapes">
+<function name="gdk_image_get_byte_order">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if gdk_window_shape_combine_mask() can
-be used to create shaped windows on @display.
+Determines the byte order of the image.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.22
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkImage should not be used anymore.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GdkVisual
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_display_get_name">
+<description>
+Gets the name of the display.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1405,7 +1492,8 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if shaped windows are supported
+<return> a string representing the display name. This string is owned
+by GDK and should not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -1468,6 +1556,10 @@ and locates the value in the array for a given axis use.
<description>
Create a pixmap from data in XPM format.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use a #GdkPixbuf instead. You can use
+gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data() to create it.
+If you must use a pixmap, use gdk_pixmap_new() to
+create it and Cairo to draw the pixbuf onto it.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1494,6 +1586,7 @@ in which case a default color will be used.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkPixmap.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -1775,6 +1868,28 @@ pixbuf with a reference count of 1 if no destination pixbuf was specified, or %N
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_get_children">
+<description>
+Gets the list of children of @window known to GDK.
+This function only returns children created via GDK,
+so for example it's useless when used with the root window;
+it only returns windows an application created itself.
+
+The returned list must be freed, but the elements in the
+list need not be.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> list of child windows inside @window
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_screen_width_mm">
<description>
Returns the width of the default screen in millimeters.
@@ -1858,15 +1973,11 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_set_double_click_distance">
+<function name="gdk_display_get_n_screens">
<description>
-Sets the double click distance (two clicks within this distance
-count as a double click and result in a #GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS event).
-See also gdk_display_set_double_click_time().
-Applications should <emphasis>not</emphasis> set this, it is a global
-user-configured setting.
+Gets the number of screen managed by the @display.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1874,33 +1985,9 @@ Since: 2.4
<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="distance">
-<parameter_description> distance in pixels
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_drag_get_protocol">
-<description>
-Finds out the DND protocol supported by a window.
-
+<return> number of screens.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="xid">
-<parameter_description> the windowing system id of the destination window.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="protocol">
-<parameter_description> location where the supported DND protocol is returned.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the windowing system specific id for the window where
-the drop should happen. This may be @xid or the id of a proxy
-window, or zero if @xid doesn't support Drag and Drop.
</return>
</function>
@@ -2009,38 +2096,55 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_gc_set_colormap">
+<function name="gdk_region_rectangle">
<description>
-Sets the colormap for the GC to the given colormap. The depth
-of the colormap's visual must match the depth of the drawable
-for which the GC was created.
+Creates a new region containing the area @rectangle.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+<parameter name="rectangle">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new region
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_screen_height_mm">
+<function name="gdk_window_get_root_coords">
<description>
-Returns the height of the default screen in millimeters.
-Note that on many X servers this value will not be correct.
+Obtains the position of a window position in root
+window coordinates. This is similar to
+gdk_window_get_origin() but allows you go pass
+in any position in the window, not just the origin.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate in window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate in window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_x">
+<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_y">
+<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the height of the default screen in millimeters,
-though it is not always correct.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_gc_set_font">
@@ -2308,6 +2412,9 @@ variable.
Since: 2.2
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gdk_cairo_set_source_pixbuf() and cairo_paint() or
+cairo_rectangle() and cairo_fill() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -2362,26 +2469,29 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_atom_to_xatom_for_display">
+<function name="gdk_pixmap_foreign_new_for_display">
<description>
-Converts from a #GdkAtom to the X atom for a #GdkDisplay
-with the same string value. The special value %GDK_NONE
-is converted to %None.
+Wraps a native pixmap in a #GdkPixmap.
+This may fail if the pixmap has been destroyed.
+
+For example in the X backend, a native pixmap handle is an Xlib
+<type>XID</type>.
Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkDisplay
+<parameter_description> The #GdkDisplay where @anid is located.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="atom">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkAtom, or %GDK_NONE
+<parameter name="anid">
+<parameter_description> a native pixmap handle.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the X atom corresponding to @atom, or %None
+<return> the newly-created #GdkPixmap wrapper for the
+native pixmap or %NULL if the pixmap has been destroyed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -2433,6 +2543,9 @@ Note that this function uses @color->pixel, use
gdk_gc_set_rgb_fg_color() to specify the foreground
color as red, green, blue components.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gdk_cairo_set_source_color() to use a #GdkColor
+as the source in Cairo.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -2447,20 +2560,18 @@ color as red, green, blue components.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_event_get_time">
+<function name="gdk_screen_get_default">
<description>
-Returns the time stamp from @event, if there is one; otherwise
-returns #GDK_CURRENT_TIME. If @event is %NULL, returns #GDK_CURRENT_TIME.
+Gets the default screen for the default display. (See
+gdk_display_get_default ()).
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> time stamp field from @event
+<return> a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if there is no default display.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -2601,26 +2712,6 @@ value has already been allocated.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_get_toplevel">
-<description>
-Gets the toplevel window that's an ancestor of @window.
-
-Any window type but %GDK_WINDOW_CHILD is considered a
-toplevel window, as is a %GDK_WINDOW_CHILD window that
-has a root window as parent.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the toplevel window containing @window
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_clear_area_e">
<description>
Like gdk_window_clear_area(), but also generates an expose event for
@@ -2701,6 +2792,9 @@ of the GC so that drawing at x - x_offset, y - y_offset with
the offset GC has the same effect as drawing at x, y with the original
GC.
+Deprecated: 2.22: There is no direct replacement, as this is just a
+convenience function for gdk_gc_set_ts_origin and gdk_gc_set_clip_origin().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -2790,6 +2884,26 @@ or %NULL if there is none.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_image_get_bytes_per_pixel">
+<description>
+Determines the number of bytes per pixel of the image.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkImage should not be used anymore.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the bytes per pixel
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_region_intersect">
<description>
Sets the area of @source1 to the intersection of the areas of @source1
@@ -3047,6 +3161,26 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_image_get_width">
+<description>
+Determines the width of the image.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkImage should not be used anymore.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the width
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_query_depths">
<description>
This function returns the available bit depths for the default
@@ -3180,23 +3314,21 @@ was already set in @state.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_color_to_string">
+<function name="gdk_window_get_modal_hint">
<description>
-Returns a textual specification of @color in the hexadecimal form
-<literal>rrrrggggbbbb</literal>, where <literal>r</literal>,
-<literal>g</literal> and <literal>b</literal> are hex digits
-representing the red, green and blue components respectively.
+Determines whether or not the window manager is hinted that @window
+has modal behaviour.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> A toplevel #GdkWindow.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated text string
+<return> whether or not the window has the modal hint set.
</return>
</function>
@@ -3333,6 +3465,36 @@ The return value should not be freed.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_threads_add_timeout">
+<description>
+A wrapper for the common usage of gdk_threads_add_timeout_full()
+assigning the default priority, #G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT.
+
+See gdk_threads_add_timeout_full().
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="interval">
+<parameter_description> the time between calls to the function, in milliseconds
+(1/1000ths of a second)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="function">
+<parameter_description> function to call
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @function
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_x11_xatom_to_atom">
<description>
Convert from an X atom for the default display to the corresponding
@@ -3350,25 +3512,22 @@ Convert from an X atom for the default display to the corresponding
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_invalidate_rect">
+<function name="gdk_gc_set_clip_mask">
<description>
-A convenience wrapper around gdk_window_invalidate_region() which
-invalidates a rectangular region. See
-gdk_window_invalidate_region() for details.
+Sets the clip mask for a graphics context from a bitmap.
+The clip mask is interpreted relative to the clip
+origin. (See gdk_gc_set_clip_origin()).
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use cairo_mask() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rect">
-<parameter_description> rectangle to invalidate or %NULL to invalidate the whole
-window
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkGC.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="invalidate_children">
-<parameter_description> whether to also invalidate child windows
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> a bitmap.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -3514,6 +3673,10 @@ to another, the colormaps should match.
Create a pixmap from data in XPM format using a particular
colormap.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use a #GdkPixbuf instead. You can use
+gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data() to create it.
+If you must use a pixmap, use gdk_pixmap_new() to
+create it and Cairo to draw the pixbuf onto it.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3545,6 +3708,7 @@ in which case a default color will be used.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkPixmap.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -3610,6 +3774,11 @@ Xlib calls mixed with GDK calls on the X11 platform. It may also
matter for toplevel windows, because the window manager may choose
to reparent them.
+Note that you should use gdk_window_get_effective_parent() when
+writing generic code that walks up a window hierarchy, because
+gdk_window_get_parent() will most likely not do what you expect if
+there are offscreen windows in the hierarchy.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3647,31 +3816,6 @@ be sent.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_set_pointer_hooks">
-<description>
-This function allows for hooking into the operation
-of getting the current location of the pointer. This
-is only useful for such low-level tools as an
-event recorder. Applications should never have any
-reason to use this facility.
-
-This function is not multihead safe. For multihead operation,
-see gdk_display_set_pointer_hooks().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="new_hooks">
-<parameter_description> a table of pointers to functions for getting
-quantities related to the current pointer position,
-or %NULL to restore the default table.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the previous pointer hook table
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_display_sync">
<description>
Flushes any requests queued for the windowing system and waits until all
@@ -3751,6 +3895,24 @@ coordinates of X11.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_visual_get_colormap_size">
+<description>
+Returns the size of a colormap for this visual.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="visual">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkVisual.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The size of a colormap that is suitable for @visual.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_pango_attr_stipple_new">
<description>
Creates a new attribute containing a stipple bitmap to be used when
@@ -3768,6 +3930,25 @@ rendering the text.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_has_native">
+<description>
+Checks whether the window has a native window or not. Note that
+you can use gdk_window_ensure_native() if a native window is needed.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the %window has a native window, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_raise">
<description>
Raises @window to the top of the Z-order (stacking order), so that
@@ -3788,6 +3969,24 @@ requests the restack, does not guarantee it.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_drawable_get_display">
+<description>
+Gets the #GdkDisplay associated with a #GdkDrawable.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GdkDisplay associated with @drawable
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_set_hints">
<description>
This function is broken and useless and you should ignore it.
@@ -3865,6 +4064,24 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_is_input_only">
+<description>
+Determines whether or not the window is an input only window.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @window is input only
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_lower">
<description>
Lowers @window to the bottom of the Z-order (stacking order), so that
@@ -4014,6 +4231,22 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_gc_unref">
+<description>
+Decrement the reference count of @gc.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_test_render_sync">
<description>
This function retrives a pixel from @window to force the windowing
@@ -4126,6 +4359,18 @@ pointer grabbed.
Draws a line, using the foreground color and other attributes of
the #GdkGC.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use cairo_line_to() and cairo_stroke() instead.
+Be aware that the default line width in Cairo is 2 pixels and that your
+coordinates need to describe the center of the line. To draw a single
+pixel wide pixel-aligned line, you would use:
+|[cairo_set_line_width (cr, 1.0);
+cairo_set_line_cap (cr, CAIRO_LINE_CAP_SQUARE);
+cairo_move_to (cr, 0.5, 0.5);
+cairo_line_to (cr, 9.5, 0.5);
+cairo_stroke (cr);]|
+See also <ulink url="http://cairographics.org/FAQ/#sharp_lines">the Cairo
+FAQ</ulink> on this topic.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -4176,28 +4421,43 @@ This function is called by the drag source.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drawable_set_data">
+<function name="gdk_window_input_shape_combine_mask">
<description>
-This function is equivalent to g_object_set_data(),
-the #GObject variant should be used instead.
+Like gdk_window_shape_combine_mask(), but the shape applies
+only to event handling. Mouse events which happen while
+the pointer position corresponds to an unset bit in the
+mask will be passed on the window below @window.
+An input shape is typically used with RGBA windows.
+The alpha channel of the window defines which pixels are
+invisible and allows for nicely antialiased borders,
+and the input shape controls where the window is
+"clickable".
+
+On the X11 platform, this requires version 1.1 of the
+shape extension.
+
+On the Win32 platform, this functionality is not present and the
+function does nothing.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> name to store the data under
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> shape mask, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> arbitrary data
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> X position of shape mask with respect to @window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy_func">
-<parameter_description> function to free @data, or %NULL
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> Y position of shape mask with respect to @window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4281,8 +4541,9 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated #GSList of #GdkDisplay objects.
-Free this list with g_slist_free() when you are done with it.
+<return> a newly allocated
+#GSList of #GdkDisplay objects. Free this list with g_slist_free() when you
+are done with it.
</return>
</function>
@@ -4329,6 +4590,41 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_x11_screen_supports_net_wm_hint">
+<description>
+This function is specific to the X11 backend of GDK, and indicates
+whether the window manager supports a certain hint from the
+Extended Window Manager Hints Specification. You can find this
+specification on
+<ulink url="http://www.freedesktop.org">http://www.freedesktop.org</ulink>.
+
+When using this function, keep in mind that the window manager
+can change over time; so you shouldn't use this function in
+a way that impacts persistent application state. A common bug
+is that your application can start up before the window manager
+does when the user logs in, and before the window manager starts
+gdk_x11_screen_supports_net_wm_hint() will return %FALSE for every property.
+You can monitor the window_manager_changed signal on #GdkScreen to detect
+a window manager change.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> the relevant #GdkScreen.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="property">
+<parameter_description> a property atom.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the window manager supports @property
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_begin_resize_drag">
<description>
Begins a window resize operation (for a toplevel window).
@@ -4392,81 +4688,41 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap">
+<function name="gdk_cursor_get_display">
<description>
-Creates a new cursor from a given pixmap and mask. Both the pixmap and mask
-must have a depth of 1 (i.e. each pixel has only 2 values - on or off).
-The standard cursor size is 16 by 16 pixels. You can create a bitmap
-from inline data as in the below example.
-
-<example><title>Creating a custom cursor</title>
-<programlisting>
-/<!-- -->* This data is in X bitmap format, and can be created with the 'bitmap'
-utility. *<!-- -->/
-define cursor1_width 16
-define cursor1_height 16
-static unsigned char cursor1_bits[] = {
-0x80, 0x01, 0x40, 0x02, 0x20, 0x04, 0x10, 0x08, 0x08, 0x10, 0x04, 0x20,
-0x82, 0x41, 0x41, 0x82, 0x41, 0x82, 0x82, 0x41, 0x04, 0x20, 0x08, 0x10,
-0x10, 0x08, 0x20, 0x04, 0x40, 0x02, 0x80, 0x01};
-
-static unsigned char cursor1mask_bits[] = {
-0x80, 0x01, 0xc0, 0x03, 0x60, 0x06, 0x30, 0x0c, 0x18, 0x18, 0x8c, 0x31,
-0xc6, 0x63, 0x63, 0xc6, 0x63, 0xc6, 0xc6, 0x63, 0x8c, 0x31, 0x18, 0x18,
-0x30, 0x0c, 0x60, 0x06, 0xc0, 0x03, 0x80, 0x01};
-
+Returns the display on which the #GdkCursor is defined.
-GdkCursor *cursor;
-GdkPixmap *source, *mask;
-GdkColor fg = { 0, 65535, 0, 0 }; /<!-- -->* Red. *<!-- -->/
-GdkColor bg = { 0, 0, 0, 65535 }; /<!-- -->* Blue. *<!-- -->/
+Since: 2.2
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cursor">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkCursor.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GdkDisplay associated to @cursor
-source = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data (NULL, cursor1_bits,
-cursor1_width, cursor1_height);
-mask = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data (NULL, cursor1mask_bits,
-cursor1_width, cursor1_height);
-cursor = gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap (source, mask, &fg, &bg, 8, 8);
-g_object_unref (source);
-g_object_unref (mask);
+</return>
+</function>
+<function name="gdk_image_get_height">
+<description>
+Determines the height of the image.
-gdk_window_set_cursor (widget->window, cursor);
-</programlisting>
-</example>
+Since: 2.22
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkImage should not be used anymore.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> the pixmap specifying the cursor.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> the pixmap specifying the mask, which must be the same size as
- source
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fg">
-<parameter_description> the foreground color, used for the bits in the source which are 1.
-The color does not have to be allocated first.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bg">
-<parameter_description> the background color, used for the bits in the source which are 0.
-The color does not have to be allocated first.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the horizontal offset of the 'hotspot' of the cursor.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the vertical offset of the 'hotspot' of the cursor.
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GdkCursor.
+<return> the height
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -4475,6 +4731,9 @@ The color does not have to be allocated first.
Draws a #GdkImage onto a drawable.
The depth of the #GdkImage must match the depth of the #GdkDrawable.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Do not use #GdkImage anymore, instead use Cairo image
+surfaces.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -4535,6 +4794,35 @@ presses into account.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_device_get_key">
+<description>
+If @index has a valid keyval, this function will
+fill in @keyval and @modifiers with the keyval settings.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="index">
+<parameter_description> the index of the macro button to get.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> return value for the keyval.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> return value for modifiers.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_set_composited">
<description>
Sets a #GdkWindow as composited, or unsets it. Composited
@@ -4577,34 +4865,49 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_spawn_command_line_on_screen">
+<function name="gdk_window_set_icon_name">
<description>
-Like g_spawn_command_line_async(), except the child process is
-spawned in such an environment that on calling gdk_display_open()
-it would be returned a #GdkDisplay with @screen as the default
-screen.
+Windows may have a name used while minimized, distinct from the
+name they display in their titlebar. Most of the time this is a bad
+idea from a user interface standpoint. But you can set such a name
+with this function, if you like.
-This is useful for applications which wish to launch an application
-on a specific screen.
+After calling this with a non-%NULL @name, calls to gdk_window_set_title()
+will not update the icon title.
-Since: 2.4
+Using %NULL for @name unsets the icon title; further calls to
+gdk_window_set_title() will again update the icon title as well.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="command_line">
-<parameter_description> a command line
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of window while iconified (minimized)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_image_get_image_type">
+<description>
+Determines the type of a given image.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkImage should not be used anymore.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success, %FALSE if error is set.
+<return> the #GdkImageType of the image
</return>
</function>
@@ -4636,6 +4939,53 @@ set override color.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_event_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new event of the given type. All fields are set to 0.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEventType
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly-allocated #GdkEvent. The returned #GdkEvent
+should be freed with gdk_event_free().
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_window_reparent">
+<description>
+Reparents @window into the given @new_parent. The window being
+reparented will be unmapped as a side effect.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_parent">
+<parameter_description> new parent to move @window into
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> X location inside the new parent
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> Y location inside the new parent
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_string_to_compound_text_for_display">
<description>
Convert a string from the encoding of the current
@@ -4748,6 +5098,10 @@ Gets the event mask for @window. See gdk_window_set_events().
<description>
Create a pixmap from a XPM file using a particular colormap.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use a #GdkPixbuf instead. You can use
+gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file() to create it.
+If you must use a pixmap, use gdk_pixmap_new() to
+create it and Cairo to draw the pixbuf onto it.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4779,6 +5133,7 @@ in which case a default color will be used.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkPixmap.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -4806,24 +5161,22 @@ See gtk_window_set_transient_for() if you're using #GtkWindow or
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_destroy">
+<function name="gdk_visual_get_bits_per_rgb">
<description>
-Destroys the window system resources associated with @window and decrements @window's
-reference count. The window system resources for all children of @window are also
-destroyed, but the children's reference counts are not decremented.
-
-Note that a window will not be destroyed automatically when its reference count
-reaches zero. You must call this function yourself before that happens.
+Returns the number of significant bits per red, green and blue value.
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="visual">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkVisual
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The number of significant bits per color value for @visual.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_events_pending">
@@ -4845,6 +5198,11 @@ using this graphics context generate exposure events
for the corresponding regions of the destination
drawable. (See gdk_draw_drawable()).
+Deprecated: 2.22: There is no replacement. If you need to control
+exposures, you must use drawing operations of the underlying window
+system or use gdk_window_invalidate_rect(). Cairo will never
+generate exposures.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -5068,6 +5426,8 @@ number of colors), a colorcube will be allocated in the colormap.
Calling this function for a GC without a colormap is an error.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gdk_cairo_set_source_color() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -5239,29 +5599,52 @@ On Windows, reliably maximizes the window.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_set_screen">
+<function name="gdk_visual_get_depth">
<description>
-Sets the screen on which applications will be launched when
-using this context. See also gdk_app_launch_context_set_display().
+Returns the bit depth of this visual.
-If both @screen and @display are set, the @screen takes priority.
-If neither @screen or @display are set, the default screen and
-display are used.
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="visual">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkVisual.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The bit depth of this visual.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_rectangle_intersect">
+<description>
+Calculates the intersection of two rectangles. It is allowed for
+ dest to be the same as either @src1 or @src2. If the rectangles
+do not intersect, @dest's width and height is set to 0 and its x
+and y values are undefined. If you are only interested in whether
+the rectangles intersect, but not in the intersecting area itself,
+pass %NULL for @dest.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkAppLaunchContext
+<parameter name="src1">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="src2">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest">
+<parameter_description> return location for the
+intersection of @src1 and @src2, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the rectangles intersect.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_process_all_updates">
@@ -5418,6 +5801,8 @@ drawables with any visual.
Since: 2.2
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gdk_screen_get_system_visual()
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="screen">
@@ -5621,6 +6006,10 @@ Draws an arc or a filled 'pie slice'. The arc is defined by the bounding
rectangle of the entire ellipse, and the start and end angles of the part
of the ellipse to be drawn.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use cairo_arc() and cairo_fill() or cairo_stroke()
+instead. Note that arcs just like any drawing operation in Cairo are
+antialiased unless you call cairo_set_antialias().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -5740,53 +6129,121 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_gc_set_clip_mask">
+<function name="gdk_drawable_get_image">
<description>
-Sets the clip mask for a graphics context from a bitmap.
-The clip mask is interpreted relative to the clip
-origin. (See gdk_gc_set_clip_origin()).
+A #GdkImage stores client-side image data (pixels). In contrast,
+#GdkPixmap and #GdkWindow are server-side
+objects. gdk_drawable_get_image() obtains the pixels from a
+server-side drawable as a client-side #GdkImage. The format of a
+#GdkImage depends on the #GdkVisual of the current display, which
+makes manipulating #GdkImage extremely difficult; therefore, in
+most cases you should use gdk_pixbuf_get_from_drawable() instead of
+this lower-level function. A #GdkPixbuf contains image data in a
+canonicalized RGB format, rather than a display-dependent format.
+Of course, there's a convenience vs. speed tradeoff here, so you'll
+want to think about what makes sense for your application.
+
+ x, @y, @width, and @height define the region of @drawable to
+obtain as an image.
+
+You would usually copy image data to the client side if you intend
+to examine the values of individual pixels, for example to darken
+an image or add a red tint. It would be prohibitively slow to
+make a round-trip request to the windowing system for each pixel,
+so instead you get all of them at once, modify them, then copy
+them all back at once.
+
+If the X server or other windowing system backend is on the local
+machine, this function may use shared memory to avoid copying
+the image data.
+
+If the source drawable is a #GdkWindow and partially offscreen
+or obscured, then the obscured portions of the returned image
+will contain undefined data.
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use @drawable as the source and draw to a Cairo image
+surface if you want to download contents to the client.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkGC.
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> a bitmap.
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x coordinate on @drawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y coordinate on @drawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of region to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height or region to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GdkImage containing the contents of @drawable
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_window_invalidate_rect">
+<description>
+A convenience wrapper around gdk_window_invalidate_region() which
+invalidates a rectangular region. See
+gdk_window_invalidate_region() for details.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rect">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to invalidate or %NULL to invalidate the whole
+window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="invalidate_children">
+<parameter_description> whether to also invalidate child windows
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_rectangle_intersect">
+<function name="gdk_window_resize">
<description>
-Calculates the intersection of two rectangles. It is allowed for
- dest to be the same as either @src1 or @src2. If the rectangles
-do not intersect, @dest's width and height is set to 0 and its x
-and y values are undefined. If you are only interested in whether
-the rectangles intersect, but not in the intersecting area itself,
-pass %NULL for @dest.
+Resizes @window; for toplevel windows, asks the window manager to resize
+the window. The window manager may not allow the resize. When using GTK+,
+use gtk_window_resize() instead of this low-level GDK function.
+Windows may not be resized below 1x1.
+
+If you're also planning to move the window, use gdk_window_move_resize()
+to both move and resize simultaneously, for a nicer visual effect.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="src1">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="src2">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> new width of the window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description> return location for the intersection of @src1 and @src2, or %NULL
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> new height of the window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the rectangles intersect.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_device_get_state">
@@ -5816,20 +6273,20 @@ or %NULL.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drawable_get_display">
+<function name="gdk_device_get_has_cursor">
<description>
-Gets the #GdkDisplay associated with a #GdkDrawable.
+Determines whether the pointer follows device motion.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkDisplay associated with @drawable
+<return> %TRUE if the pointer follows device motion
</return>
</function>
@@ -5865,6 +6322,10 @@ results in a filled rectangle 20 pixels wide and 20 pixels high. Calling
results in an outlined rectangle with corners at (0, 0), (0, 20), (20, 20),
and (20, 0), which makes it 21 pixels wide and 21 pixels high.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use cairo_rectangle() and cairo_fill() or cairo_stroke()
+instead. For stroking, the same caveats for converting code apply as for
+gdk_draw_line().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -5926,35 +6387,6 @@ if your application pretends to be multiple applications.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_resize">
-<description>
-Resizes @window; for toplevel windows, asks the window manager to resize
-the window. The window manager may not allow the resize. When using GTK+,
-use gtk_window_resize() instead of this low-level GDK function.
-
-Windows may not be resized below 1x1.
-
-If you're also planning to move the window, use gdk_window_move_resize()
-to both move and resize simultaneously, for a nicer visual effect.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> new width of the window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> new height of the window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_x11_grab_server">
<description>
Call gdk_x11_display_grab() on the default display.
@@ -5997,6 +6429,9 @@ Examples of keyvals are #GDK_a, #GDK_Enter, #GDK_F1, etc.
Draws a point, using the foreground color and other attributes of
the #GdkGC.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use cairo_rectangle() and cairo_fill() or
+cairo_move_to() and cairo_stroke() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -6072,6 +6507,38 @@ Returns the display of a #GdkFont.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_visual_get_red_pixel_details">
+<description>
+Obtains values that are needed to calculate red pixel values in TrueColor
+and DirectColor. The "mask" is the significant bits within the pixel.
+The "shift" is the number of bits left we must shift a primary for it
+to be in position (according to the "mask"). Finally, "precision" refers
+to how much precision the pixel value contains for a particular primary.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="visual">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkVisual.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to a #guint32 to be filled in, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shift">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to a #gint to be filled in, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="precision">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to a #gint to be filled in, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_draw_trapezoids">
<description>
Draws a set of anti-aliased trapezoids. The trapezoids are
@@ -6082,6 +6549,9 @@ likely not useful for applications.
Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use Cairo path contruction functions and cairo_fill()
+instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -6242,21 +6712,69 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_get_state">
+<function name="gdk_visual_get_green_pixel_details">
<description>
-Gets the bitwise OR of the currently active window state flags,
-from the #GdkWindowState enumeration.
+Obtains values that are needed to calculate green pixel values in TrueColor
+and DirectColor. The "mask" is the significant bits within the pixel.
+The "shift" is the number of bits left we must shift a primary for it
+to be in position (according to the "mask"). Finally, "precision" refers
+to how much precision the pixel value contains for a particular primary.
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="visual">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkVisual
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to a #guint32 to be filled in, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shift">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to a #gint to be filled in, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="precision">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to a #gint to be filled in, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> window state bitfield
-</return>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_rgb_find_color">
+<description>
+ colormap should be the colormap for the graphics context and
+drawable you're using to draw. If you're drawing to a #GtkWidget,
+call gtk_widget_get_colormap().
+
+ color should have its %red, %green, and %blue fields initialized;
+gdk_rgb_find_color() will fill in the %pixel field with the best
+matching pixel from a color cube. The color is then ready to be
+used for drawing, e.g. you can call gdk_gc_set_foreground() which
+expects %pixel to be initialized.
+
+In many cases, you can avoid this whole issue by calling
+gdk_gc_set_rgb_fg_color() or gdk_gc_set_rgb_bg_color(), which
+do not expect %pixel to be initialized in advance. If you use those
+functions, there's no need for gdk_rgb_find_color().
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: Cairo handles colors automatically.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_x11_screen_get_screen_number">
@@ -6277,6 +6795,25 @@ its display.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_drag_context_get_actions">
+<description>
+Determines the bitmask of actions proposed by the source if
+gdk_drag_context_suggested_action() returns GDK_ACTION_ASK.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDragContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GdkDragAction flags
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_threads_add_idle_full">
<description>
Adds a function to be called whenever there are no higher priority
@@ -6361,6 +6898,8 @@ See also gdk_draw_glyphs(), gdk_draw_layout().
Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use pango_cairo_show_glyphs() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -6734,41 +7273,46 @@ is gtk_widget_create_pango_layout().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_cursor_unref">
+<function name="gdk_window_process_updates">
<description>
-Removes a reference from @cursor, deallocating the cursor
-if no references remain.
+Sends one or more expose events to @window. The areas in each
+expose event will cover the entire update area for the window (see
+gdk_window_invalidate_region() for details). Normally GDK calls
+gdk_window_process_all_updates() on your behalf, so there's no
+need to call this function unless you want to force expose events
+to be delivered immediately and synchronously (vs. the usual
+case, where GDK delivers them in an idle handler). Occasionally
+this is useful to produce nicer scrolling behavior, for example.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cursor">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkCursor
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="update_children">
+<parameter_description> whether to also process updates for child windows
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_screen_set_font_options">
+<function name="gdk_window_focus">
<description>
-Sets the default font options for the screen. These
-options will be set on any #PangoContext's newly created
-with gdk_pango_context_get_for_screen(). Changing the
-default set of font options does not affect contexts that
-have already been created.
+Sets keyboard focus to @window. In most cases, gtk_window_present()
+should be used on a #GtkWindow, rather than calling this function.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="options">
-<parameter_description> a #cairo_font_options_t, or %NULL to unset any
-previously set default font options.
+<parameter name="timestamp">
+<parameter_description> timestamp of the event triggering the window focus
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6779,6 +7323,10 @@ previously set default font options.
<description>
Draws a number of unconnected lines.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use cairo_move_to(), cairo_line_to() and cairo_stroke()
+instead. See the documentation of gdk_draw_line() for notes on line drawing
+with Cairo.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -6803,6 +7351,26 @@ end points of the lines to be drawn.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_get_composited">
+<description>
+Determines whether @window is composited.
+
+See gdk_window_set_composited().
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the window is composited.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_begin_paint_region">
<description>
Indicates that you are beginning the process of redrawing @region.
@@ -6859,21 +7427,59 @@ gdk_window_begin_paint_region().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_list_visuals">
+<function name="gdk_x11_register_standard_event_type">
<description>
-Lists the available visuals for the default screen.
-(See gdk_screen_list_visuals())
-A visual describes a hardware image data format.
-For example, a visual might support 24-bit color, or 8-bit color,
-and might expect pixels to be in a certain format.
+Registers interest in receiving extension events with type codes
+between @event_base and <literal>event_base + n_events - 1</literal>.
+The registered events must have the window field in the same place
+as core X events (this is not the case for e.g. XKB extension events).
-Call g_list_free() on the return value when you're finished with it.
+If an event type is registered, events of this type will go through
+global and window-specific filters (see gdk_window_add_filter()).
+Unregistered events will only go through global filters.
+GDK may register the events of some X extensions on its own.
+This function should only be needed in unusual circumstances, e.g.
+when filtering XInput extension events on the root window.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event_base">
+<parameter_description> first event type code to register
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_events">
+<parameter_description> number of event type codes to register
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a list of visuals; the list must be freed, but not its contents
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_color_to_string">
+<description>
+Returns a textual specification of @color in the hexadecimal form
+<literal>#rrrrggggbbbb</literal>, where <literal>r</literal>,
+<literal>g</literal> and <literal>b</literal> are hex digits
+representing the red, green and blue components respectively.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly-allocated text string
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -6898,43 +7504,32 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_render_pixmap_and_mask_for_colormap">
+<function name="gdk_colormap_query_color">
<description>
-Creates a pixmap and a mask bitmap which are returned in the @pixmap_return
-and @mask_return arguments, respectively, and renders a pixbuf and its
-corresponding tresholded alpha mask to them. This is merely a convenience
-function; applications that need to render pixbufs with dither offsets or to
-given drawables should use gdk_draw_pixbuf(), and gdk_pixbuf_render_threshold_alpha().
+Locates the RGB color in @colormap corresponding to the given
+hardware pixel @pixel. @pixel must be a valid pixel in the
+colormap; it's a programmer error to call this function with a
+pixel which is not in the colormap. Hardware pixels are normally
+obtained from gdk_colormap_alloc_colors(), or from a #GdkImage. (A
+#GdkImage contains image data in hardware format, a #GdkPixbuf
+contains image data in a canonical 24-bit RGB format.)
-The pixmap that is created uses the #GdkColormap specified by @colormap.
-This colormap must match the colormap of the window where the pixmap
-will eventually be used or an error will result.
+This function is rarely useful; it's used for example to
+implement the eyedropper feature in #GtkColorSelection.
-If the pixbuf does not have an alpha channel, then * mask_return will be set
-to %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkColormap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixmap_return">
-<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created pixmap,
-or %NULL if the pixmap is not needed.
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask_return">
-<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created mask,
-or %NULL if the mask is not needed.
+<parameter name="pixel">
+<parameter_description> pixel value in hardware display format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="alpha_threshold">
-<parameter_description> Threshold value for opacity values.
+<parameter name="result">
+<parameter_description> #GdkColor with red, green, blue fields initialized
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6968,7 +7563,7 @@ pixel_format is unsupported.
<function name="gdk_text_property_to_utf8_list">
<description>
Convert a text property in the giving encoding to
-a list of UTF-8 strings.
+a list of UTF-8 strings.
</description>
@@ -7065,6 +7660,8 @@ A GC will have a colormap if the drawable for which it was created
has a colormap, or if a colormap was set explicitely with
gdk_gc_set_colormap.
+Deprecated: 2.22: There is no replacement. Cairo handles colormaps
+automatically, so there is no need to care about them.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7074,6 +7671,7 @@ gdk_gc_set_colormap.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the colormap of @gc, or %NULL if @gc doesn't have one.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -7186,11 +7784,11 @@ keyboard group and level. See gdk_keymap_translate_keyboard_state().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keys">
-<parameter_description> return location for array of #GdkKeymapKey, or NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for array of #GdkKeymapKey, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyvals">
-<parameter_description> return location for array of keyvals, or NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for array of keyvals, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_entries">
@@ -7251,6 +7849,8 @@ Sets the clip mask for a graphics context from a region structure.
The clip mask is interpreted relative to the clip origin. (See
gdk_gc_set_clip_origin()).
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gdk_cairo_region() and cairo_clip() in Cairo.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -7308,24 +7908,29 @@ allocated.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_region_equal">
+<function name="gdk_screen_set_font_options">
<description>
-Finds out if the two regions are the same.
+Sets the default font options for the screen. These
+options will be set on any #PangoContext's newly created
+with gdk_pango_context_get_for_screen(). Changing the
+default set of font options does not affect contexts that
+have already been created.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="region1">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="region2">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
+<parameter name="options">
+<parameter_description> a #cairo_font_options_t, or %NULL to unset any
+previously set default font options.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @region1 and @region2 are equal.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_region_shrink">
@@ -7333,6 +7938,8 @@ Finds out if the two regions are the same.
Resizes a region by the specified amount.
Positive values shrink the region. Negative values expand it.
+Deprecated: 2.22: There is no replacement for this function.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="region">
@@ -7416,12 +8023,37 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_get_effective_parent">
+<description>
+Obtains the parent of @window, as known to GDK. Works like
+gdk_window_get_parent() for normal windows, but returns the
+window's embedder for offscreen windows.
+
+See also: gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder()
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> effective parent of @window
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_region_rect_equal">
<description>
Finds out if a regions is the same as a rectangle.
Since: 2.18
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gdk_region_new_rect() and gdk_region_equal() to
+achieve the same effect.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="region">
@@ -7484,6 +8116,11 @@ Note that this function uses @color->pixel, use
gdk_gc_set_rgb_bg_color() to specify the background
color as red, green, blue components.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gdk_cairo_set_source_color() to use a #GdkColor
+as the source in Cairo. Note that if you want to draw a background and a
+foreground in Cairo, you need to call drawing functions (like cairo_fill())
+twice.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -7498,6 +8135,24 @@ color as red, green, blue components.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_drag_context_get_suggested_action">
+<description>
+Determines the suggested drag action of the context.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDragContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GdkDragAction value
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_move_resize">
<description>
Equivalent to calling gdk_window_move() and gdk_window_resize(),
@@ -7531,81 +8186,26 @@ move, then resize, if you don't use gdk_window_move_resize().)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_cursor_new_for_display">
+<function name="gdk_screen_list_visuals">
<description>
-Creates a new cursor from the set of builtin cursors.
-Some useful ones are:
-<itemizedlist>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="right_ptr.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_RIGHT_PTR (right-facing arrow)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="crosshair.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_CROSSHAIR (crosshair)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="xterm.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_XTERM (I-beam)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="watch.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_WATCH (busy)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="fleur.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_FLEUR (for moving objects)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="hand1.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_HAND1 (a right-pointing hand)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="hand2.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_HAND2 (a left-pointing hand)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="left_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_LEFT_SIDE (resize left side)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="right_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_RIGHT_SIDE (resize right side)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_left_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_LEFT_CORNER (resize northwest corner)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_right_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_RIGHT_CORNER (resize northeast corner)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_left_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_LEFT_CORNER (resize southwest corner)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_right_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_RIGHT_CORNER (resize southeast corner)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_SIDE (resize top side)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_SIDE (resize bottom side)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="sb_h_double_arrow.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW (move vertical splitter)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="sb_v_double_arrow.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW (move horizontal splitter)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-#GDK_BLANK_CURSOR (Blank cursor). Since 2.16
-</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
+Lists the available visuals for the specified @screen.
+A visual describes a hardware image data format.
+For example, a visual might support 24-bit color, or 8-bit color,
+and might expect pixels to be in a certain format.
+
+Call g_list_free() on the return value when you're finished with it.
Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay for which the cursor will be created
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cursor_type">
-<parameter_description> cursor to create
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> the relevant #GdkScreen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GdkCursor
+<return> a list of visuals; the list must be freed, but not its
+contents
</return>
</function>
@@ -7674,23 +8274,19 @@ The hint must be set before the window is mapped.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_supports_cursor_alpha">
+<function name="gdk_x11_drawable_get_xid">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if cursors can use an 8bit alpha channel
-on @display. Otherwise, cursors are restricted to bilevel
-alpha (i.e. a mask).
+Returns the X resource (window or pixmap) belonging to a #GdkDrawable.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether cursors can have alpha channels.
-
+<return> the ID of @drawable's X resource.
</return>
</function>
@@ -7715,6 +8311,7 @@ Returns the display of a #GdkColormap.
Like gdk_draw_rgb_32_image(), but allows you to specify the dither
offsets. See gdk_draw_rgb_image_dithalign() for more details.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Cairo handles colors automatically.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7776,7 +8373,7 @@ implementing a custom widget.)
The @color must be allocated; gdk_rgb_find_color() is the best way
to allocate a color.
-See also gdk_window_set_back_pixmap().
+See also gdk_window_set_background_pixmap().
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7951,59 +8548,54 @@ gdk_window_clear().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_string_measure">
+<function name="gdk_screen_get_rgba_colormap">
<description>
-Determines the distance from the origin to the rightmost
-portion of a nul-terminated string when drawn. This is not the
-correct value for determining the origin of the next
-portion when drawing text in multiple pieces.
-See gdk_string_width().
-
+Gets a colormap to use for creating windows or pixmaps with an
+alpha channel. The windowing system on which GTK+ is running
+may not support this capability, in which case %NULL will
+be returned. Even if a non-%NULL value is returned, its
+possible that the window's alpha channel won't be honored
+when displaying the window on the screen: in particular, for
+X an appropriate windowing manager and compositing manager
+must be running to provide appropriate display.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="font">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the nul-terminated string to measure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the right bearing of the string in pixels.
-</return>
-</function>
+This functionality is not implemented in the Windows backend.
-<function name="gdk_screen_get_default">
-<description>
-Gets the default screen for the default display. (See
-gdk_display_get_default ()).
+For setting an overall opacity for a top-level window, see
+gdk_window_set_opacity().
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if there is no default display.
+<return> a colormap to use for windows with
+an alpha channel or %NULL if the capability is not available.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_keymap_get_for_display">
+<function name="gdk_display_supports_cursor_color">
<description>
-Returns the #GdkKeymap attached to @display.
+Returns %TRUE if multicolored cursors are supported
+on @display. Otherwise, cursors have only a forground
+and a background color.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay.
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkKeymap attached to @display.
+<return> whether cursors can have multiple colors.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -8118,29 +8710,26 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixmap_foreign_new_for_display">
+<function name="gdk_x11_atom_to_xatom_for_display">
<description>
-Wraps a native pixmap in a #GdkPixmap.
-This may fail if the pixmap has been destroyed.
-
-For example in the X backend, a native pixmap handle is an Xlib
-<type>XID</type>.
+Converts from a #GdkAtom to the X atom for a #GdkDisplay
+with the same string value. The special value %GDK_NONE
+is converted to %None.
Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> The #GdkDisplay where @anid is located.
+<parameter_description> A #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="anid">
-<parameter_description> a native pixmap handle.
+<parameter name="atom">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkAtom, or %GDK_NONE
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the newly-created #GdkPixmap wrapper for the
-native pixmap or %NULL if the pixmap has been destroyed.
+<return> the X atom corresponding to @atom, or %None
</return>
</function>
@@ -8153,6 +8742,8 @@ correct colormap if you get the image from a drawable. If you
create the image from scratch, use the colormap of the drawable you
intend to render the image to.
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkImage should not be used anymore.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="image">
@@ -8188,21 +8779,27 @@ gdk_window_begin_paint_region() for details.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_cursor_get_display">
+<function name="gdk_event_get_root_coords">
<description>
-Returns the display on which the #GdkCursor is defined.
+Extract the root window relative x/y coordinates from an event.
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cursor">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkCursor.
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x_root">
+<parameter_description> location to put root window x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y_root">
+<parameter_description> location to put root window y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkDisplay associated to @cursor
-
+<return> %TRUE if the event delivered root window coordinates
</return>
</function>
@@ -8265,7 +8862,7 @@ Since: 2.2
<function name="gdk_utf8_to_compound_text">
<description>
-Convert from UTF-8 to compound text.
+Convert from UTF-8 to compound text.
</description>
@@ -8315,28 +8912,57 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_gc_get_xgc">
+<function name="gdk_char_width">
<description>
-Returns the X GC of a #GdkGC.
+Determines the width of a given character.
+Deprecated: 2.2: Use gdk_text_extents() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
+<parameter name="font">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="character">
+<parameter_description> the character to measure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an Xlib <type>GC</type>.
+<return> the width of the character in pixels.
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_gc_set_colormap">
+<description>
+Sets the colormap for the GC to the given colormap. The depth
+of the colormap's visual must match the depth of the drawable
+for which the GC was created.
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: There is no replacement. Cairo handles colormaps
+automatically, so there is no need to care about them.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_event_free">
<description>
Frees a #GdkEvent, freeing or decrementing any resources associated with it.
Note that this function should only be called with events returned from
functions such as gdk_event_peek(), gdk_event_get(),
-gdk_event_get_graphics_expose() and gdk_event_copy().
+gdk_event_get_graphics_expose() and gdk_event_copy() and gdk_event_new().
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8411,21 +9037,24 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_event_new">
+<function name="gdk_device_get_axis_use">
<description>
-Creates a new event of the given type. All fields are set to 0.
+Returns the axis use for @index.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkEventType
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="index">
+<parameter_description> the index of the axis.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated #GdkEvent. The returned #GdkEvent
-should be freed with gdk_event_free().
+<return> a #GdkAxisUse specifying how the axis is used.
</return>
</function>
@@ -8468,6 +9097,26 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_color_equal">
+<description>
+Compares two colors.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colora">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="colorb">
+<parameter_description> another #GdkColor.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the two colors compare equal
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_visual_get_best_with_type">
<description>
Get the best visual of the given @visual_type for the default GDK screen.
@@ -8546,6 +9195,25 @@ with g_free().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_get_accept_focus">
+<description>
+Determines whether or not the desktop environment shuld be hinted that
+the window does not want to receive input focus.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether or not the window should receive input focus.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_x11_colormap_foreign_new">
<description>
If xcolormap refers to a colormap previously known to GTK+,
@@ -8574,26 +9242,6 @@ object and not call XFreeColormap()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_color_equal">
-<description>
-Compares two colors.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colora">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="colorb">
-<parameter_description> another #GdkColor.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the two colors compare equal
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_set_urgency_hint">
<description>
Toggles whether a window needs the user's
@@ -8654,103 +9302,82 @@ To make the cursor invisible, use %GDK_BLANK_CURSOR.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_rgb_find_color">
+<function name="gdk_window_get_state">
<description>
- colormap should be the colormap for the graphics context and
-drawable you're using to draw. If you're drawing to a #GtkWidget,
-call gtk_widget_get_colormap().
-
- color should have its %red, %green, and %blue fields initialized;
-gdk_rgb_find_color() will fill in the %pixel field with the best
-matching pixel from a color cube. The color is then ready to be
-used for drawing, e.g. you can call gdk_gc_set_foreground() which
-expects %pixel to be initialized.
-
-In many cases, you can avoid this whole issue by calling
-gdk_gc_set_rgb_fg_color() or gdk_gc_set_rgb_bg_color(), which
-do not expect %pixel to be initialized in advance. If you use those
-functions, there's no need for gdk_rgb_find_color().
+Gets the bitwise OR of the currently active window state flags,
+from the #GdkWindowState enumeration.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> window state bitfield
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdkx_visual_get">
+<function name="gdk_list_visuals">
<description>
-Returns a #GdkVisual corresponding to a X visual.
+Lists the available visuals for the default screen.
+(See gdk_screen_list_visuals())
+A visual describes a hardware image data format.
+For example, a visual might support 24-bit color, or 8-bit color,
+and might expect pixels to be in a certain format.
+
+Call g_list_free() on the return value when you're finished with it.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="xvisualid">
-<parameter_description> a X visual id.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkVisual.
+<return> a list of visuals; the list must be freed, but not its contents
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_register_standard_event_type">
+<function name="gdk_window_coords_from_parent">
<description>
-Registers interest in receiving extension events with type codes
-between @event_base and <literal>event_base + n_events - 1</literal>.
-The registered events must have the window field in the same place
-as core X events (this is not the case for e.g. XKB extension events).
+Transforms window coordinates from a parent window to a child
+window, where the parent window is the normal parent as returned by
+gdk_window_get_parent() for normal windows, and the window's
+embedder as returned by gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder() for
+offscreen windows.
-If an event type is registered, events of this type will go through
-global and window-specific filters (see gdk_window_add_filter()).
-Unregistered events will only go through global filters.
-GDK may register the events of some X extensions on its own.
+For normal windows, calling this function is equivalent to subtracting
+the return values of gdk_window_get_position() from the parent coordinates.
+For offscreen windows however (which can be arbitrarily transformed),
+this function calls the GdkWindow::from-embedder: signal to translate
+the coordinates.
-This function should only be needed in unusual circumstances, e.g.
-when filtering XInput extension events on the root window.
+You should always use this function when writing generic code that
+walks down a window hierarchy.
-Since: 2.4
+See also: gdk_window_coords_to_parent()
+
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a child window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="event_base">
-<parameter_description> first event type code to register
+<parameter name="parent_x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate in parent's coordinate system
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_events">
-<parameter_description> number of event type codes to register
+<parameter name="parent_y">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate in parent's coordinate system
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_cairo_set_source_color">
-<description>
-Sets the specified #GdkColor as the source color of @cr.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cr">
-<parameter_description> a #cairo_t
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate in child's coordinate system
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate in child's coordinate system
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -8795,6 +9422,9 @@ The list is statically allocated and should not be freed.
Draws a number of points, using the foreground color and other
attributes of the #GdkGC.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use @n_points calls to cairo_rectangle() and
+cairo_fill() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -8817,19 +9447,23 @@ attributes of the #GdkGC.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_drawable_get_xid">
+<function name="gdk_display_supports_cursor_alpha">
<description>
-Returns the X resource (window or pixmap) belonging to a #GdkDrawable.
+Returns %TRUE if cursors can use an 8bit alpha channel
+on @display. Otherwise, cursors are restricted to bilevel
+alpha (i.e. a mask).
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable.
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the ID of @drawable's X resource.
+<return> whether cursors can have alpha channels.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -8944,28 +9578,24 @@ Return the best available visual type for the default GDK screen.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_event_get_root_coords">
+<function name="gdk_cairo_set_source_color">
<description>
-Extract the root window relative x/y coordinates from an event.
+Sets the specified #GdkColor as the source color of @cr.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x_root">
-<parameter_description> location to put root window x coordinate
+<parameter name="cr">
+<parameter_description> a #cairo_t
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y_root">
-<parameter_description> location to put root window y coordinate
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the event delivered root window coordinates
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_get_root_origin">
@@ -8992,63 +9622,58 @@ window coordinates.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_process_updates">
+<function name="gdk_cursor_unref">
<description>
-Sends one or more expose events to @window. The areas in each
-expose event will cover the entire update area for the window (see
-gdk_window_invalidate_region() for details). Normally GDK calls
-gdk_window_process_all_updates() on your behalf, so there's no
-need to call this function unless you want to force expose events
-to be delivered immediately and synchronously (vs. the usual
-case, where GDK delivers them in an idle handler). Occasionally
-this is useful to produce nicer scrolling behavior, for example.
+Removes a reference from @cursor, deallocating the cursor
+if no references remain.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="update_children">
-<parameter_description> whether to also process updates for child windows
+<parameter name="cursor">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkCursor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_font_from_description_for_display">
+<function name="gdk_cairo_reset_clip">
<description>
-Loads a #GdkFont based on a Pango font description for use on @display.
-This font will only be an approximation of the Pango font, and
-internationalization will not be handled correctly. This function
-should only be used for legacy code that cannot be easily converted
-to use Pango. Using Pango directly will produce better results.
+Resets the clip region for a Cairo context created by gdk_cairo_create().
-Since: 2.2
+This resets the clip region to the "empty" state for the given drawable.
+This is required for non-native windows since a direct call to
+cairo_reset_clip() would unset the clip region inherited from the
+drawable (i.e. the window clip region), and thus let you e.g.
+draw outside your window.
+
+This is rarely needed though, since most code just create a new cairo_t
+using gdk_cairo_create() each time they want to draw something.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="cr">
+<parameter_description> a #cairo_t
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="font_desc">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoFontDescription.
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the newly loaded font, or %NULL if the font
-cannot be loaded.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_draw_polygon">
<description>
Draws an outlined or filled polygon.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use cairo_line_to() or cairo_append_path() and
+cairo_fill() or cairo_stroke() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -9220,6 +9845,24 @@ an equal number of times to begin processing exposes.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_device_get_name">
+<description>
+Determines the name of the device.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a name
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_screen_get_active_window">
<description>
Returns the screen's currently active window.
@@ -9375,6 +10018,8 @@ call this function.
Since: 2.2
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gdk_screen_get_system_colormap()
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="screen">
@@ -9404,21 +10049,40 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_open_default_libgtk_only">
+<function name="gdk_draw_string">
<description>
-Opens the default display specified by command line arguments or
-environment variables, sets it as the default display, and returns
-it. gdk_parse_args must have been called first. If the default
-display has previously been set, simply returns that. An internal
-function that should not be used by applications.
+Draws a string of characters in the given font or fontset.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gdk_draw_layout() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable (a #GdkWindow or a #GdkPixmap).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="font">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkFont.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate of the left edge of the text.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate of the baseline of the text.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the string of characters to draw.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default display, if it could be opened,
-otherwise %NULL.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_visual_get_best">
@@ -9559,45 +10223,30 @@ though the amount of data is limited to 20 bytes.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_colors_alloc">
+<function name="gdk_window_set_override_redirect">
<description>
-Allocates colors from a colormap. This function
-is obsolete. See gdk_colormap_alloc_colors().
-For full documentation of the fields, see
-the Xlib documentation for <function>XAllocColorCells()</function>.
+An override redirect window is not under the control of the window manager.
+This means it won't have a titlebar, won't be minimizable, etc. - it will
+be entirely under the control of the application. The window manager
+can't see the override redirect window at all.
+
+Override redirect should only be used for short-lived temporary
+windows, such as popup menus. #GtkMenu uses an override redirect
+window in its implementation, for example.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="contiguous">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the colors should be allocated
-in contiguous color cells.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="planes">
-<parameter_description> an array in which to store the plane masks.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="nplanes">
-<parameter_description> the number of planes to allocate. (Or zero,
-to indicate that the color allocation should not be planar.)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixels">
-<parameter_description> an array into which to store allocated pixel values.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="npixels">
-<parameter_description> the number of pixels in each plane to allocate.
+<parameter name="override_redirect">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if window should be override redirect
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the allocation was successful
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_hide">
@@ -9727,6 +10376,26 @@ withdraws toplevel windows before hiding them.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_image_get_depth">
+<description>
+Determines the depth of the image.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkImage should not be used anymore.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the depth
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_deiconify">
<description>
Attempt to deiconify (unminimize) @window. On X11 the window manager may
@@ -9825,6 +10494,20 @@ already known to GTK+, otherwise warns and return
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GdkAppLaunchContext.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GdkAppLaunchContext
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_drag_find_window">
<description>
Finds the destination window and DND protocol to use at the
@@ -9988,7 +10671,7 @@ the frame) in root window coordinates, use gdk_window_get_origin().
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="rect">
@@ -9999,29 +10682,30 @@ the frame) in root window coordinates, use gdk_window_get_origin().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_gc_set_fill">
+<function name="gdk_visual_get_byte_order">
<description>
-Set the fill mode for a graphics context.
+Returns the byte order of this visual.
+
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> the new fill mode.
+<parameter name="visual">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkVisual.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GdkByteOrder stating the byte order of @visual.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_get_name">
+<function name="gdk_display_supports_shapes">
<description>
-Gets the name of the display.
+Returns %TRUE if gdk_window_shape_combine_mask() can
+be used to create shaped windows on @display.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10030,8 +10714,7 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a string representing the display name. This string is owned
-by GDK and should not be modified or freed.
+<return> %TRUE if shaped windows are supported
</return>
</function>
@@ -10045,14 +10728,59 @@ it's simply the visual GdkRGB would have chosen as the optimal one
in those previous versions. GdkRGB can now render to drawables with
any visual.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gdk_get_system_visual()
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> The #GdkVisual chosen by GdkRGB.
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_render_pixmap_and_mask_for_colormap">
+<description>
+Creates a pixmap and a mask bitmap which are returned in the @pixmap_return
+and @mask_return arguments, respectively, and renders a pixbuf and its
+corresponding tresholded alpha mask to them. This is merely a convenience
+function; applications that need to render pixbufs with dither offsets or to
+given drawables should use gdk_draw_pixbuf(), and gdk_pixbuf_render_threshold_alpha().
+
+The pixmap that is created uses the #GdkColormap specified by @colormap.
+This colormap must match the colormap of the window where the pixmap
+will eventually be used or an error will result.
+
+If the pixbuf does not have an alpha channel, then * mask_return will be set
+to %NULL.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkColormap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixmap_return">
+<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created pixmap,
+or %NULL if the pixmap is not needed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask_return">
+<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created mask,
+or %NULL if the mask is not needed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="alpha_threshold">
+<parameter_description> Threshold value for opacity values.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_set_startup_id">
<description>
When using GTK+, typically you should use gtk_window_set_startup_id()
@@ -10075,17 +10803,49 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_set_child_shapes">
+<function name="gdk_window_coords_to_parent">
<description>
-Sets the shape mask of @window to the union of shape masks
-for all children of @window, ignoring the shape mask of @window
-itself. Contrast with gdk_window_merge_child_shapes() which includes
-the shape mask of @window in the masks to be merged.
+Transforms window coordinates from a child window to its parent
+window, where the parent window is the normal parent as returned by
+gdk_window_get_parent() for normal windows, and the window's
+embedder as returned by gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder() for
+offscreen windows.
+
+For normal windows, calling this function is equivalent to adding
+the return values of gdk_window_get_position() to the child coordinates.
+For offscreen windows however (which can be arbitrarily transformed),
+this function calls the GdkWindow::to-embedder: signal to translate
+the coordinates.
+
+You should always use this function when writing generic code that
+walks up a window hierarchy.
+
+See also: gdk_window_coords_from_parent()
+
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter_description> a child window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate in child's coordinate system
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate in child's coordinate system
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent_x">
+<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate
+in parent's coordinate system, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent_y">
+<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate
+in parent's coordinate system, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10169,78 +10929,28 @@ or %NULL if the name cannot be determined
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_input_shape_combine_mask">
+<function name="gdk_drawable_set_data">
<description>
-Like gdk_window_shape_combine_mask(), but the shape applies
-only to event handling. Mouse events which happen while
-the pointer position corresponds to an unset bit in the
-mask will be passed on the window below @window.
-
-An input shape is typically used with RGBA windows.
-The alpha channel of the window defines which pixels are
-invisible and allows for nicely antialiased borders,
-and the input shape controls where the window is
-"clickable".
-
-On the X11 platform, this requires version 1.1 of the
-shape extension.
-
-On the Win32 platform, this functionality is not present and the
-function does nothing.
+This function is equivalent to g_object_set_data(),
+the #GObject variant should be used instead.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> shape mask, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> X position of shape mask with respect to @window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> Y position of shape mask with respect to @window
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_x11_display_set_cursor_theme">
-<description>
-Sets the cursor theme from which the images for cursor
-should be taken.
-
-If the windowing system supports it, existing cursors created
-with gdk_cursor_new(), gdk_cursor_new_for_display() and
-gdk_cursor_new_for_name() are updated to reflect the theme
-change. Custom cursors constructed with gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap()
-or gdk_cursor_new_from_pixbuf() will have to be handled
-by the application (GTK+ applications can learn about
-cursor theme changes by listening for change notification
-for the corresponding #GtkSetting).
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> name to store the data under
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="theme">
-<parameter_description> the name of the cursor theme to use, or %NULL to unset
-a previously set value
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> arbitrary data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> the cursor size to use, or 0 to keep the previous size
+<parameter name="destroy_func">
+<parameter_description> function to free @data, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10462,6 +11172,24 @@ gdk_window_set_cursor() to unset the cursor of the window
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_device_get_n_axes">
+<description>
+Gets the number of axes of a device.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the number of axes of @device
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_text_height">
<description>
Determines the total height of a given string.
@@ -10549,6 +11277,43 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_destroy">
+<description>
+Destroys the window system resources associated with @window and decrements @window's
+reference count. The window system resources for all children of @window are also
+destroyed, but the children's reference counts are not decremented.
+
+Note that a window will not be destroyed automatically when its reference count
+reaches zero. You must call this function yourself before that happens.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_display_open_default_libgtk_only">
+<description>
+Opens the default display specified by command line arguments or
+environment variables, sets it as the default display, and returns
+it. gdk_parse_args must have been called first. If the default
+display has previously been set, simply returns that. An internal
+function that should not be used by applications.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> the default display, if it could be opened,
+otherwise %NULL.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_event_send_client_message_for_display">
<description>
On X11, sends an X ClientMessage event to a given window. On
@@ -10709,7 +11474,7 @@ close to @window.
<function name="gdk_keymap_get_caps_lock_state">
<description>
-Returns whether the Caps Lock modifer is locked.
+Returns whether the Caps Lock modifer is locked.
Since: 2.16
@@ -10768,6 +11533,8 @@ Determines how the current pixel values and the
pixel values being drawn are combined to produce
the final pixel values.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use cairo_set_operator() with Cairo.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -10811,6 +11578,84 @@ It's deprecated for that reason.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap">
+<description>
+Creates a new cursor from a given pixmap and mask. Both the pixmap and mask
+must have a depth of 1 (i.e. each pixel has only 2 values - on or off).
+The standard cursor size is 16 by 16 pixels. You can create a bitmap
+from inline data as in the below example.
+
+<example><title>Creating a custom cursor</title>
+<programlisting>
+/<!-- -->* This data is in X bitmap format, and can be created with the 'bitmap'
+utility. *<!-- -->/
+#define cursor1_width 16
+#define cursor1_height 16
+static unsigned char cursor1_bits[] = {
+0x80, 0x01, 0x40, 0x02, 0x20, 0x04, 0x10, 0x08, 0x08, 0x10, 0x04, 0x20,
+0x82, 0x41, 0x41, 0x82, 0x41, 0x82, 0x82, 0x41, 0x04, 0x20, 0x08, 0x10,
+0x10, 0x08, 0x20, 0x04, 0x40, 0x02, 0x80, 0x01};
+
+static unsigned char cursor1mask_bits[] = {
+0x80, 0x01, 0xc0, 0x03, 0x60, 0x06, 0x30, 0x0c, 0x18, 0x18, 0x8c, 0x31,
+0xc6, 0x63, 0x63, 0xc6, 0x63, 0xc6, 0xc6, 0x63, 0x8c, 0x31, 0x18, 0x18,
+0x30, 0x0c, 0x60, 0x06, 0xc0, 0x03, 0x80, 0x01};
+
+
+GdkCursor *cursor;
+GdkPixmap *source, *mask;
+GdkColor fg = { 0, 65535, 0, 0 }; /<!-- -->* Red. *<!-- -->/
+GdkColor bg = { 0, 0, 0, 65535 }; /<!-- -->* Blue. *<!-- -->/
+
+
+source = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data (NULL, cursor1_bits,
+cursor1_width, cursor1_height);
+mask = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data (NULL, cursor1mask_bits,
+cursor1_width, cursor1_height);
+cursor = gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap (source, mask, &fg, &bg, 8, 8);
+g_object_unref (source);
+g_object_unref (mask);
+
+
+gdk_window_set_cursor (widget->window, cursor);
+</programlisting>
+</example>
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> the pixmap specifying the cursor.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> the pixmap specifying the mask, which must be the same size as
+ source
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fg">
+<parameter_description> the foreground color, used for the bits in the source which are 1.
+The color does not have to be allocated first.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bg">
+<parameter_description> the background color, used for the bits in the source which are 0.
+The color does not have to be allocated first.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the horizontal offset of the 'hotspot' of the cursor.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the vertical offset of the 'hotspot' of the cursor.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GdkCursor.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_drop_reply">
<description>
Accepts or rejects a drop.
@@ -10910,6 +11755,23 @@ enable.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_event_get_time">
+<description>
+Returns the time stamp from @event, if there is one; otherwise
+returns #GDK_CURRENT_TIME. If @event is %NULL, returns #GDK_CURRENT_TIME.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> time stamp field from @event
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_keyval_to_unicode">
<description>
Convert from a GDK key symbol to the corresponding ISO10646 (Unicode)
@@ -11022,6 +11884,79 @@ or %NULL if there is none.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_set_display">
+<description>
+Sets the display on which applications will be launched when
+using this context. See also gdk_app_launch_context_set_screen().
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkAppLaunchContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_drawable_copy_to_image">
+<description>
+Copies a portion of @drawable into the client side image structure
+ image If @image is %NULL, creates a new image of size @width x @height
+and copies into that. See gdk_drawable_get_image() for further details.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use @drawable as the source and draw to a Cairo image
+surface if you want to download contents to the client.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable, or %NULL if a new @image should be created.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="src_x">
+<parameter_description> x coordinate on @drawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="src_y">
+<parameter_description> y coordinate on @drawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_x">
+<parameter_description> x coordinate within @image. Must be 0 if @image is %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_y">
+<parameter_description> y coordinate within @image. Must be 0 if @image is %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of region to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height or region to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> @image, or a new a #GdkImage containing the contents
+of @drawable
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_pango_renderer_new">
<description>
Creates a new #PangoRenderer for @screen. Normally you can use the
@@ -11060,37 +11995,44 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_screen_supports_net_wm_hint">
+<function name="gdk_string_measure">
<description>
-This function is specific to the X11 backend of GDK, and indicates
-whether the window manager supports a certain hint from the
-Extended Window Manager Hints Specification. You can find this
-specification on
-<ulink url="http://www.freedesktop.org">http://www.freedesktop.org</ulink>.
-
-When using this function, keep in mind that the window manager
-can change over time; so you shouldn't use this function in
-a way that impacts persistent application state. A common bug
-is that your application can start up before the window manager
-does when the user logs in, and before the window manager starts
-gdk_x11_screen_supports_net_wm_hint() will return %FALSE for every property.
-You can monitor the window_manager_changed signal on #GdkScreen to detect
-a window manager change.
+Determines the distance from the origin to the rightmost
+portion of a nul-terminated string when drawn. This is not the
+correct value for determining the origin of the next
+portion when drawing text in multiple pieces.
+See gdk_string_width().
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> the relevant #GdkScreen.
+<parameter name="font">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="property">
-<parameter_description> a property atom.
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the nul-terminated string to measure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the window manager supports @property
+<return> the right bearing of the string in pixels.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_drag_context_get_selected_action">
+<description>
+Determines the action chosen by the drag destination.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDragContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GdkDragAction value
</return>
</function>
@@ -11212,6 +12154,11 @@ the GC. The tile or stipple will be aligned such
that the upper left corner of the tile or stipple
will coincide with this point.
+Deprecated: 2.22: You can set the origin for tiles and stipples in Cairo
+by changing the source's matrix using cairo_pattern_set_matrix(). Or you
+can specify it with gdk_cairo_set_source_pixmap() as shown in the example
+for gdk_gc_set_tile().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -11281,40 +12228,22 @@ but very few honor all possible combinations of bits.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_draw_string">
+<function name="gdk_window_is_shaped">
<description>
-Draws a string of characters in the given font or fontset.
+Determines whether or not the window is shaped.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gdk_draw_layout() instead.
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable (a #GdkWindow or a #GdkPixmap).
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="font">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkFont.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x coordinate of the left edge of the text.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate of the baseline of the text.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the string of characters to draw.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @window is shaped
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_threads_add_idle">
@@ -11342,26 +12271,52 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_set_override_redirect">
+<function name="gdk_x11_display_set_cursor_theme">
<description>
-An override redirect window is not under the control of the window manager.
-This means it won't have a titlebar, won't be minimizable, etc. - it will
-be entirely under the control of the application. The window manager
-can't see the override redirect window at all.
+Sets the cursor theme from which the images for cursor
+should be taken.
-Override redirect should only be used for short-lived temporary
-windows, such as popup menus. #GtkMenu uses an override redirect
-window in its implementation, for example.
+If the windowing system supports it, existing cursors created
+with gdk_cursor_new(), gdk_cursor_new_for_display() and
+gdk_cursor_new_for_name() are updated to reflect the theme
+change. Custom cursors constructed with gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap()
+or gdk_cursor_new_from_pixbuf() will have to be handled
+by the application (GTK+ applications can learn about
+cursor theme changes by listening for change notification
+for the corresponding #GtkSetting).
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="override_redirect">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if window should be override redirect
+<parameter name="theme">
+<parameter_description> the name of the cursor theme to use, or %NULL to unset
+a previously set value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> the cursor size to use, or 0 to keep the previous size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_init">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -11388,6 +12343,38 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_visual_get_blue_pixel_details">
+<description>
+Obtains values that are needed to calculate blue pixel values in TrueColor
+and DirectColor. The "mask" is the significant bits within the pixel.
+The "shift" is the number of bits left we must shift a primary for it
+to be in position (according to the "mask"). Finally, "precision" refers
+to how much precision the pixel value contains for a particular primary.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="visual">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkVisual
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to a #guint32 to be filled in, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shift">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to a #gint to be filled in, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="precision">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to a #gint to be filled in, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_add_option_entries_libgtk_only">
<description>
Appends gdk option entries to the passed in option group. This is
@@ -11403,6 +12390,47 @@ not public API and must not be used by applications.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_colors_alloc">
+<description>
+Allocates colors from a colormap. This function
+is obsolete. See gdk_colormap_alloc_colors().
+For full documentation of the fields, see
+the Xlib documentation for <function>XAllocColorCells()</function>.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="contiguous">
+<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the colors should be allocated
+in contiguous color cells.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="planes">
+<parameter_description> an array in which to store the plane masks.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="nplanes">
+<parameter_description> the number of planes to allocate. (Or zero,
+to indicate that the color allocation should not be planar.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixels">
+<parameter_description> an array into which to store allocated pixel values.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="npixels">
+<parameter_description> the number of pixels in each plane to allocate.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the allocation was successful
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_foreign_new">
<description>
Wraps a native window for the default display in a #GdkWindow.
@@ -11568,31 +12596,36 @@ cairo_destroy() when you are done drawing.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_set_icon_name">
+<function name="gdk_spawn_command_line_on_screen">
<description>
-Windows may have a name used while minimized, distinct from the
-name they display in their titlebar. Most of the time this is a bad
-idea from a user interface standpoint. But you can set such a name
-with this function, if you like.
+Like g_spawn_command_line_async(), except the child process is
+spawned in such an environment that on calling gdk_display_open()
+it would be returned a #GdkDisplay with @screen as the default
+screen.
-After calling this with a non-%NULL @name, calls to gdk_window_set_title()
-will not update the icon title.
+This is useful for applications which wish to launch an application
+on a specific screen.
-Using %NULL for @name unsets the icon title; further calls to
-gdk_window_set_title() will again update the icon title as well.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of window while iconified (minimized)
+<parameter name="command_line">
+<parameter_description> a command line
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success, %FALSE if error is set.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_event_peek">
@@ -11615,6 +12648,9 @@ gdk_event_free().
Copy the set of values from one graphics context
onto another graphics context.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use Cairo for drawing. cairo_save() and cairo_restore()
+can be helpful in cases where you'd have copied a #GdkGC.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="dst_gc">
@@ -11637,11 +12673,13 @@ data to one colormap and visual, but in the current version it can
render to any colormap and visual. So there's no need to call this
function.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gdk_get_system_colormap()
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> the preferred colormap
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -11703,6 +12741,7 @@ Since: 2.2
<description>
Returns the display of a #GdkGC.
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkGC has been replaced by #cairo_t.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11712,6 +12751,7 @@ Returns the display of a #GdkGC.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> an Xlib <type>Display*</type>.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -11719,6 +12759,7 @@ Returns the display of a #GdkGC.
<description>
Create a new graphics context with default values.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use Cairo for rendering.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11729,6 +12770,7 @@ with drawables of the same depth as this one.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the new graphics context.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -11756,6 +12798,24 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_display_is_closed">
+<description>
+Finds out if the display has been closed.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the display is closed.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_pango_layout_line_get_clip_region">
<description>
Obtains a clip region which contains the areas where the given
@@ -11910,6 +12970,24 @@ expected to have their alpha channels drawn correctly on the screen.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_drag_context_get_source_window">
+<description>
+Returns the #GdkWindow where the DND operation started.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDragContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GdkWindow
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_keymap_translate_keyboard_state">
<description>
Translates the contents of a #GdkEventKey into a keyval, effective
@@ -11932,7 +13010,7 @@ be masked out.
</para>
<informalexample><programlisting>
/ * We want to ignore irrelevant modifiers like ScrollLock * /
-define ALL_ACCELS_MASK (GDK_CONTROL_MASK | GDK_SHIFT_MASK | GDK_MOD1_MASK)
+#define ALL_ACCELS_MASK (GDK_CONTROL_MASK | GDK_SHIFT_MASK | GDK_MOD1_MASK)
gdk_keymap_translate_keyboard_state (keymap, event->hardware_keycode,
event->state, event->group,
&keyval, NULL, NULL, &consumed);
@@ -12105,6 +13183,10 @@ a color drawable. The way to draw a bitmap is to set the bitmap as
the stipple on the #GdkGC, set the fill mode to %GDK_STIPPLED, and
then draw the rectangle.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gdk_cairo_set_source_pixmap(), cairo_rectangle()
+and cairo_fill() to draw pixmap on top of other drawables. Also keep
+in mind that the limitations on allowed sources do not apply to Cairo.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -12147,25 +13229,48 @@ then draw the rectangle.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_end_paint">
+<function name="gdk_window_create_similar_surface">
<description>
-Indicates that the backing store created by the most recent call to
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() should be copied onscreen and
-deleted, leaving the next-most-recent backing store or no backing
-store at all as the active paint region. See
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() for full details. It is an error to
-call this function without a matching
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() first.
+Create a new surface that is as compatible as possible with the
+given @window. For example the new surface will have the same
+fallback resolution and font options as @window. Generally, the new
+surface will also use the same backend as @window, unless that is
+not possible for some reason. The type of the returned surface may
+be examined with cairo_surface_get_type().
+Initially the surface contents are all 0 (transparent if contents
+have transparency, black otherwise.)
+
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter_description> window to make new surface similar to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="content">
+<parameter_description> the content for the new surface
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of the new surface
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height of the new surface
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a pointer to the newly allocated surface. The caller
+owns the surface and should call cairo_surface_destroy() when done
+with it.
+
+This function always returns a valid pointer, but it will return a
+pointer to a "nil" surface if @other is already in an error state
+or any other error occurs.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_event_get_graphics_expose">
@@ -12259,64 +13364,42 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drawable_get_image">
+<function name="gdk_gc_set_line_attributes">
<description>
-A #GdkImage stores client-side image data (pixels). In contrast,
-#GdkPixmap and #GdkWindow are server-side
-objects. gdk_drawable_get_image() obtains the pixels from a
-server-side drawable as a client-side #GdkImage. The format of a
-#GdkImage depends on the #GdkVisual of the current display, which
-makes manipulating #GdkImage extremely difficult; therefore, in
-most cases you should use gdk_pixbuf_get_from_drawable() instead of
-this lower-level function. A #GdkPixbuf contains image data in a
-canonicalized RGB format, rather than a display-dependent format.
-Of course, there's a convenience vs. speed tradeoff here, so you'll
-want to think about what makes sense for your application.
-
- x, @y, @width, and @height define the region of @drawable to
-obtain as an image.
-
-You would usually copy image data to the client side if you intend
-to examine the values of individual pixels, for example to darken
-an image or add a red tint. It would be prohibitively slow to
-make a round-trip request to the windowing system for each pixel,
-so instead you get all of them at once, modify them, then copy
-them all back at once.
-
-If the X server or other windowing system backend is on the local
-machine, this function may use shared memory to avoid copying
-the image data.
-
-If the source drawable is a #GdkWindow and partially offscreen
-or obscured, then the obscured portions of the returned image
-will contain undefined data.
+Sets various attributes of how lines are drawn. See
+the corresponding members of #GdkGCValues for full
+explanations of the arguments.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use the Cairo functions cairo_set_line_width(),
+cairo_set_line_join(), cairo_set_line_cap() and cairo_set_dash()
+to affect the stroking behavior in Cairo. Keep in mind that the default
+attributes of a #cairo_t are different from the default attributes of
+a #GdkGC.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x coordinate on @drawable
+<parameter name="line_width">
+<parameter_description> the width of lines.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y coordinate on @drawable
+<parameter name="line_style">
+<parameter_description> the dash-style for lines.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of region to get
+<parameter name="cap_style">
+<parameter_description> the manner in which the ends of lines are drawn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height or region to get
+<parameter name="join_style">
+<parameter_description> the in which lines are joined together.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkImage containing the contents of @drawable
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_gc_set_clip_origin">
@@ -12325,6 +13408,9 @@ Sets the origin of the clip mask. The coordinates are
interpreted relative to the upper-left corner of
the destination drawable of the current operation.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use cairo_translate() before applying the clip path in
+Cairo.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -12343,6 +13429,24 @@ the destination drawable of the current operation.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_cursor_get_cursor_type">
+<description>
+Returns the cursor type for this cursor.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cursor">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkCursor
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GdkCursorType
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_color_change">
<description>
Changes the value of a color that has already
@@ -12369,43 +13473,45 @@ and the new value in the remaining fields.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_get_children">
+<function name="gdk_image_get_bits_per_pixel">
<description>
-Gets the list of children of @window known to GDK.
-This function only returns children created via GDK,
-so for example it's useless when used with the root window;
-it only returns windows an application created itself.
+Determines the number of bits per pixel of the image.
-The returned list must be freed, but the elements in the
-list need not be.
+Since: 2.22
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkImage should not be used anymore.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> list of child windows inside @window
+<return> the bits per pixel
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_get_n_screens">
+<function name="gdk_drag_get_protocol">
<description>
-Gets the number of screen managed by the @display.
+Finds out the DND protocol supported by a window.
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="xid">
+<parameter_description> the windowing system id of the destination window.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="protocol">
+<parameter_description> location where the supported DND protocol is returned.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> number of screens.
-
+<return> the windowing system specific id for the window where
+the drop should happen. This may be @xid or the id of a proxy
+window, or zero if @xid doesn't support Drag and Drop.
</return>
</function>
@@ -12792,6 +13898,7 @@ lot about internationalized text handling, which you don't want to
understand; thus, use gdk_draw_layout() instead of this function,
gdk_draw_layout() handles the details.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use pango_cairo_show_glyphs() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12847,17 +13954,28 @@ Determines the width of a given string.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_new">
+<function name="gdk_window_get_toplevel">
<description>
-Creates a new #GdkAppLaunchContext.
+Gets the toplevel window that's an ancestor of @window.
+
+Any window type but %GDK_WINDOW_CHILD is considered a
+toplevel window, as is a %GDK_WINDOW_CHILD window that
+has a root window as parent.
+
+Note that you should use gdk_window_get_effective_toplevel() when
+you want to get to a window's toplevel as seen on screen, because
+gdk_window_get_toplevel() will most likely not do what you expect
+if there are offscreen windows in the hierarchy.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GdkAppLaunchContext
-
+<return> the toplevel window containing @window
</return>
</function>
@@ -12914,32 +14032,22 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_reparent">
+<function name="gdk_visual_get_visual_type">
<description>
-Reparents @window into the given @new_parent. The window being
-reparented will be unmapped as a side effect.
+Returns the type of visual this is (PseudoColor, TrueColor, etc).
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_parent">
-<parameter_description> new parent to move @window into
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> X location inside the new parent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> Y location inside the new parent
+<parameter name="visual">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkVisual.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GdkVisualType stating the type of @visual.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_gc_set_subwindow">
@@ -12947,6 +14055,11 @@ reparented will be unmapped as a side effect.
Sets how drawing with this GC on a window will affect child
windows of that window.
+Deprecated: 2.22: There is no replacement. If you need to control
+subwindows, you must use drawing operations of the underlying window
+system manually. Cairo will always use %GDK_INCLUDE_INFERIORS on sources
+and masks and %GDK_CLIP_BY_CHILDREN on targets.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -13026,6 +14139,8 @@ Gets the metrics of a nul-terminated string.
Creates a new #GdkRegion using the polygon defined by a
number of points.
+Deprecated: 2.22: There is no replacement. For working with paths, please
+use Cairo.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13044,6 +14159,7 @@ polygon overlaps itself.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GdkRegion based on the given polygon
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -13076,6 +14192,12 @@ Set the stipple bitmap for a graphics context. The
stipple will only be used if the fill mode is
%GDK_STIPPLED or %GDK_OPAQUE_STIPPLED.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Stippling has no direct replacement in Cairo. If you
+want to achieve an identical look, you can use the stipple bitmap as a
+mask. Most likely, this involves rendering the source to an intermediate
+surface using cairo_push_group() first, so that you can then use
+cairo_mask() to achieve the stippled look.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -13206,39 +14328,18 @@ of the text in characters.)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_get_root_coords">
+<function name="gdk_screen_height_mm">
<description>
-Obtains the position of a window position in root
-window coordinates. This is similar to
-gdk_window_get_origin() but allows you go pass
-in any position in the window, not just the origin.
+Returns the height of the default screen in millimeters.
+Note that on many X servers this value will not be correct.
-Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate in window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate in window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_x">
-<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_y">
-<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the height of the default screen in millimeters,
+though it is not always correct.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_add_filter">
@@ -13270,24 +14371,24 @@ in X ClientMessage events.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_focus">
+<function name="gdk_region_equal">
<description>
-Sets keyboard focus to @window. In most cases, gtk_window_present()
-should be used on a #GtkWindow, rather than calling this function.
+Finds out if the two regions are the same.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="region1">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="timestamp">
-<parameter_description> timestamp of the event triggering the window focus
+<parameter name="region2">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @region1 and @region2 are equal.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_fullscreen">
@@ -13345,37 +14446,6 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_screen_get_rgba_colormap">
-<description>
-Gets a colormap to use for creating windows or pixmaps with an
-alpha channel. The windowing system on which GTK+ is running
-may not support this capability, in which case %NULL will
-be returned. Even if a non-%NULL value is returned, its
-possible that the window's alpha channel won't be honored
-when displaying the window on the screen: in particular, for
-X an appropriate windowing manager and compositing manager
-must be running to provide appropriate display.
-
-This functionality is not implemented in the Windows backend.
-
-For setting an overall opacity for a top-level window, see
-gdk_window_set_opacity().
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a colormap to use for windows with
-an alpha channel or %NULL if the capability is not available.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_event_request_motions">
<description>
Request more motion notifies if @event is a motion notify hint event.
@@ -13454,6 +14524,7 @@ will have a colormap if the drawable from which it was created has
a colormap, or if a colormap was set explicitely with
gdk_image_set_colormap().
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkImage should not be used anymore.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13463,6 +14534,7 @@ gdk_image_set_colormap().
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> colormap for the image
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -13490,26 +14562,81 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_screen_list_visuals">
+<function name="gdk_cursor_new_for_display">
<description>
-Lists the available visuals for the specified @screen.
-A visual describes a hardware image data format.
-For example, a visual might support 24-bit color, or 8-bit color,
-and might expect pixels to be in a certain format.
-
-Call g_list_free() on the return value when you're finished with it.
+Creates a new cursor from the set of builtin cursors.
+Some useful ones are:
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="right_ptr.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_RIGHT_PTR (right-facing arrow)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="crosshair.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_CROSSHAIR (crosshair)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="xterm.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_XTERM (I-beam)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="watch.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_WATCH (busy)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="fleur.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_FLEUR (for moving objects)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="hand1.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_HAND1 (a right-pointing hand)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="hand2.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_HAND2 (a left-pointing hand)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="left_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_LEFT_SIDE (resize left side)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="right_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_RIGHT_SIDE (resize right side)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_left_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_LEFT_CORNER (resize northwest corner)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_right_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_RIGHT_CORNER (resize northeast corner)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_left_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_LEFT_CORNER (resize southwest corner)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_right_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_RIGHT_CORNER (resize southeast corner)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_SIDE (resize top side)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_SIDE (resize bottom side)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="sb_h_double_arrow.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW (move vertical splitter)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="sb_v_double_arrow.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW (move horizontal splitter)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+#GDK_BLANK_CURSOR (Blank cursor). Since 2.16
+</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> the relevant #GdkScreen.
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay for which the cursor will be created
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cursor_type">
+<parameter_description> cursor to create
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a list of visuals; the list must be freed, but not its
-contents
+<return> a new #GdkCursor
</return>
</function>
@@ -13772,25 +14899,20 @@ artifacts and unnecessary invalidations.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_set_display">
+<function name="gdkx_visual_get">
<description>
-Sets the display on which applications will be launched when
-using this context. See also gdk_app_launch_context_set_screen().
+Returns a #GdkVisual corresponding to a X visual.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkAppLaunchContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="xvisualid">
+<parameter_description> a X visual id.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #GdkVisual.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_display_pointer_ungrab">
@@ -13813,6 +14935,28 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_gc_set_fill">
+<description>
+Set the fill mode for a graphics context.
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: You can achieve tiling in Cairo by using
+cairo_pattern_set_extend() on the source. For stippling, see the
+deprecation comments on gdk_gc_set_stipple().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fill">
+<parameter_description> the new fill mode.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_screen_get_window_stack">
<description>
Returns a #GList of #GdkWindow<!-- -->s representing the current
@@ -13929,22 +15073,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_region_rectangle">
-<description>
-Creates a new region containing the area @rectangle.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="rectangle">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new region
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_set_role">
<description>
When using GTK+, typically you should use gtk_window_set_role() instead
@@ -13975,6 +15103,29 @@ non-interchangeable kind of window.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_get_effective_toplevel">
+<description>
+Gets the toplevel window that's an ancestor of @window.
+
+Works like gdk_window_get_toplevel(), but treats an offscreen window's
+embedder as its parent, using gdk_window_get_effective_parent().
+
+See also: gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder()
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the effective toplevel window containing @window
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_get_show_events">
<description>
Gets whether event debugging output is enabled.
@@ -14102,6 +15253,9 @@ The way in which joins between lines are draw is determined by the
#GdkCapStyle value in the #GdkGC. This can be set with
gdk_gc_set_line_attributes().
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use cairo_line_to() and cairo_stroke() instead. See the
+documentation of gdk_draw_line() for notes on line drawing with Cairo.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -14185,53 +15339,25 @@ gdk_color_copy().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drawable_copy_to_image">
+<function name="gdk_window_end_paint">
<description>
-Copies a portion of @drawable into the client side image structure
- image If @image is %NULL, creates a new image of size @width x @height
-and copies into that. See gdk_drawable_get_image() for further details.
+Indicates that the backing store created by the most recent call to
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() should be copied onscreen and
+deleted, leaving the next-most-recent backing store or no backing
+store at all as the active paint region. See
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() for full details. It is an error to
+call this function without a matching
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() first.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable, or %NULL if a new @image should be created.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_x">
-<parameter_description> x coordinate on @drawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_y">
-<parameter_description> y coordinate on @drawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_x">
-<parameter_description> x coordinate within @image. Must be 0 if @image is %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_y">
-<parameter_description> y coordinate within @image. Must be 0 if @image is %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of region to get
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height or region to get
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> @image, or a new a #GdkImage containing the contents
-of @drawable
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_gc_set_dashes">
@@ -14247,6 +15373,8 @@ The @dash_offset defines the phase of the pattern,
specifying how many pixels into the dash-list the pattern
should actually begin.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use cairo_set_dash() to set the dash in Cairo.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
@@ -14413,11 +15541,11 @@ structure. The color is <emphasis>not</emphasis> allocated, you
must call gdk_colormap_alloc_color() yourself. The string can
either one of a large set of standard names. (Taken from the X11
<filename>rgb.txt</filename> file), or it can be a hex value in the
-form 'rgb' 'rrggbb' 'rrrgggbbb' or
-'rrrrggggbbbb' where 'r', 'g' and 'b' are hex digits of the
+form '#rgb' '#rrggbb' '#rrrgggbbb' or
+'#rrrrggggbbbb' where 'r', 'g' and 'b' are hex digits of the
red, green, and blue components of the color, respectively. (White
-in the four forms is 'fff' 'ffffff' 'fffffffff' and
-'ffffffffffff')
+in the four forms is '#fff' '#ffffff' '#fffffffff' and
+'#ffffffffffff')
</description>
@@ -14435,6 +15563,27 @@ in the four forms is 'fff' 'ffffff' 'fffffffff' and
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_get_background_pattern">
+<description>
+Gets the pattern used to clear the background on @window. If @window
+does not have its own background and reuses the parent's, %NULL is
+returned and you'll have to query it yourself.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The pattern to use for the background or %NULL to use the
+parent's background.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_visual_get_best_with_both">
<description>
Combines gdk_visual_get_best_with_depth() and gdk_visual_get_best_with_type().
@@ -14514,6 +15663,7 @@ set as the new value for @gc. If you're only setting a few values
on @gc, calling individual "setter" functions is likely more
convenient.
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use Cairo for rendering.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14551,17 +15701,17 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_init">
+<function name="gdk_window_set_child_shapes">
<description>
+Sets the shape mask of @window to the union of shape masks
+for all children of @window, ignoring the shape mask of @window
+itself. Contrast with gdk_window_merge_child_shapes() which includes
+the shape mask of @window in the masks to be merged.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -14670,33 +15820,55 @@ When implementing a #GtkWidget, you should call this function on the widget's
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_threads_add_timeout">
+<function name="gdk_window_constrain_size">
<description>
-A wrapper for the common usage of gdk_threads_add_timeout_full()
-assigning the default priority, #G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT.
-
-See gdk_threads_add_timeout_full().
-
-Since: 2.12
+Constrains a desired width and height according to a
+set of geometry hints (such as minimum and maximum size).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="interval">
-<parameter_description> the time between calls to the function, in milliseconds
-(1/1000ths of a second)
+<parameter name="geometry">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGeometry structure
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="function">
-<parameter_description> function to call
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> a mask indicating what portions of @geometry are set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @function
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> desired width of window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> desired height of the window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_width">
+<parameter_description> location to store resulting width
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_height">
+<parameter_description> location to store resulting height
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_color_copy">
+<description>
+Makes a copy of a color structure. The result
+must be freed using gdk_color_free().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a copy of @color.
</return>
</function>
@@ -14751,6 +15923,26 @@ Determines the width of a given wide-character string.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_image_get_bytes_per_line">
+<description>
+Determines the number of bytes per line of the image.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: #GdkImage should not be used anymore.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the bytes per line
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_x11_display_broadcast_startup_message">
<description>
Sends a startup notification message of type @message_type to
diff --git a/gdk/src/gdk_pixbuf_docs.xml b/gdk/src/gdk_pixbuf_docs.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..34bd256
--- /dev/null
+++ b/gdk/src/gdk_pixbuf_docs.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,2556 @@
+<root>
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_new_with_mime_type">
+<description>
+Creates a new pixbuf loader object that always attempts to parse
+image data as if it were an image of mime type @mime_type, instead of
+identifying the type automatically. Useful if you want an error if
+the image isn't the expected mime type, for loading image formats
+that can't be reliably identified by looking at the data, or if
+the user manually forces a specific mime type.
+
+The list of supported mime types depends on what image loaders
+are installed, but typically "image/png", "image/jpeg", "image/gif",
+"image/tiff" and "image/x-xpixmap" are among the supported mime types.
+To obtain the full list of supported mime types, call
+gdk_pixbuf_format_get_mime_types() on each of the #GdkPixbufFormat
+structs returned by gdk_pixbuf_get_formats().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="mime_type">
+<parameter_description> the mime type to be loaded
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an allocated #GError, or %NULL to ignore errors
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf loader.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_pixels">
+<description>
+Queries a pointer to the pixel data of a pixbuf.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A pointer to the pixbuf's pixel data. Please see <xref linkend="image-data"/>
+for information about how the pixel data is stored in
+memory.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_set_disabled">
+<description>
+Disables or enables an image format. If a format is disabled,
+gdk-pixbuf won't use the image loader for this format to load
+images. Applications can use this to avoid using image loaders
+with an inappropriate license, see gdk_pixbuf_format_get_license().
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="disabled">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to disable the format @format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_is_disabled">
+<description>
+Returns whether this image format is disabled. See
+gdk_pixbuf_format_set_disabled().
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether this image format is disabled.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_n_channels">
+<description>
+Queries the number of channels of a pixbuf.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> Number of channels.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_stream">
+<description>
+Saves @pixbuf to an output stream.
+
+Supported file formats are currently "jpeg", "tiff", "png", "ico" or
+"bmp". See gdk_pixbuf_save_to_buffer() for more details.
+
+The @cancellable can be used to abort the operation from another
+thread. If the operation was cancelled, the error %GIO_ERROR_CANCELLED
+will be returned. Other possible errors are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR
+and %G_IO_ERROR domains.
+
+The stream is not closed.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stream">
+<parameter_description> a #GOutputStream to save the pixbuf to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> name of file format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cancellable">
+<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> list of key-value save options
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the pixbuf was saved successfully, %FALSE if an
+error was set.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_buffer">
+<description>
+Saves pixbuf to a new buffer in format @type, which is currently "jpeg",
+"png", "tiff", "ico" or "bmp". This is a convenience function that uses
+gdk_pixbuf_save_to_callback() to do the real work. Note that the buffer
+is not nul-terminated and may contain embedded nuls.
+If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned and @buffer will be set to
+%NULL. Possible errors include those in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR
+domain.
+
+See gdk_pixbuf_save() for more details.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> location to receive a pointer to the new buffer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer_size">
+<parameter_description> location to receive the size of the new buffer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> name of file format.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> list of key-value save options
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether an error was set
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_rotate_simple">
+<description>
+Rotates a pixbuf by a multiple of 90 degrees, and returns the
+result in a new pixbuf.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="src">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="angle">
+<parameter_description> the angle to rotate by
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if not enough memory could be
+allocated for it.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_is_writable">
+<description>
+Returns whether pixbufs can be saved in the given format.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether pixbufs can be saved in the given format.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_rowstride">
+<description>
+Queries the rowstride of a pixbuf, which is the number of bytes between the start of a row
+and the start of the next row.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> Distance between row starts.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_height">
+<description>
+Queries the height of the bounding box of a pixbuf animation.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> An animation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> Height of the bounding box of the animation.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream_at_scale">
+<description>
+Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from an input stream.
+
+The file format is detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then
+ error will be set. The @cancellable can be used to abort the operation
+from another thread. If the operation was cancelled, the error
+%GIO_ERROR_CANCELLED will be returned. Other possible errors are in
+the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and %G_IO_ERROR domains.
+
+The image will be scaled to fit in the requested size, optionally
+preserving the image's aspect ratio. When preserving the aspect ratio,
+a @width of -1 will cause the image to be scaled to the exact given
+height, and a @height of -1 will cause the image to be scaled to the
+exact given width. When not preserving aspect ratio, a @width or
+ height of -1 means to not scale the image at all in that dimension.
+
+The stream is not closed.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="stream">
+<parameter_description> a #GInputStream to load the pixbuf from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> The width the image should have or -1 to not constrain the width
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> The height the image should have or -1 to not constrain the height
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="preserve_aspect_ratio">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to preserve the image's aspect ratio
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cancellable">
+<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> Return location for an error
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf, or %NULL if any of several error
+conditions occurred: the file could not be opened, the image format is
+not supported, there was not enough memory to allocate the image buffer,
+the stream contained invalid data, or the operation was cancelled.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_width">
+<description>
+Queries the width of the bounding box of a pixbuf animation.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> An animation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> Width of the bounding box of the animation.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_write">
+<description>
+This will cause a pixbuf loader to parse the next @count bytes of
+an image. It will return %TRUE if the data was loaded successfully,
+and %FALSE if an error occurred. In the latter case, the loader
+will be closed, and will not accept further writes. If %FALSE is
+returned, @error will be set to an error from the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR
+or #G_FILE_ERROR domains.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="loader">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buf">
+<parameter_description> Pointer to image data.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> Length of the @buf buffer in bytes.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the write was successful, or %FALSE if the loader
+cannot parse the buffer.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_get_format">
+<description>
+Obtains the available information about the format of the
+currently loading image file.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="loader">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GdkPixbufFormat or %NULL. The return value is owned
+by GdkPixbuf and should not be freed.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_data">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GdkPixbuf out of in-memory image data. Currently only RGB
+images with 8 bits per sample are supported.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> Image data in 8-bit/sample packed format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="colorspace">
+<parameter_description> Colorspace for the image data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_alpha">
+<parameter_description> Whether the data has an opacity channel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bits_per_sample">
+<parameter_description> Number of bits per sample
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> Width of the image in pixels, must be > 0
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> Height of the image in pixels, must be > 0
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rowstride">
+<parameter_description> Distance in bytes between row starts
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy_fn">
+<parameter_description> Function used to free the data when the pixbuf's reference count
+drops to zero, or %NULL if the data should not be freed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy_fn_data">
+<parameter_description> Closure data to pass to the destroy notification function
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created #GdkPixbuf structure with a reference count of 1.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_pixbuf">
+<description>
+Gets the current pixbuf which should be displayed; the pixbuf will
+be the same size as the animation itself
+(gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_width(), gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_height()).
+This pixbuf should be displayed for
+gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_delay_time() milliseconds. The caller
+of this function does not own a reference to the returned pixbuf;
+the returned pixbuf will become invalid when the iterator advances
+to the next frame, which may happen anytime you call
+gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_advance(). Copy the pixbuf to keep it
+(don't just add a reference), as it may get recycled as you advance
+the iterator.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an animation iterator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the pixbuf to be displayed
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_from_pixdata">
+<description>
+Converts a #GdkPixdata to a #GdkPixbuf. If @copy_pixels is %TRUE or
+if the pixel data is run-length-encoded, the pixel data is copied into
+newly-allocated memory; otherwise it is reused.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixdata">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdata to convert into a #GdkPixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="copy_pixels">
+<parameter_description> whether to copy raw pixel data; run-length encoded
+pixel data is always copied.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> location to store possible errors.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GdkPixbuf.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_height">
+<description>
+Queries the height of a pixbuf.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> Height in pixels.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_add_frame">
+<description>
+Adds a new frame to @animation. The @pixbuf must
+have the dimensions specified when the animation
+was constructed.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the pixbuf to add
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_iter">
+<description>
+Get an iterator for displaying an animation. The iterator provides
+the frames that should be displayed at a given time.
+It should be freed after use with g_object_unref().
+
+ start_time would normally come from g_get_current_time(), and
+marks the beginning of animation playback. After creating an
+iterator, you should immediately display the pixbuf returned by
+gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_pixbuf(). Then, you should install a
+timeout (with g_timeout_add()) or by some other mechanism ensure
+that you'll update the image after
+gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_delay_time() milliseconds. Each time
+the image is updated, you should reinstall the timeout with the new,
+possibly-changed delay time.
+
+As a shortcut, if @start_time is %NULL, the result of
+g_get_current_time() will be used automatically.
+
+To update the image (i.e. possibly change the result of
+gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_pixbuf() to a new frame of the animation),
+call gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_advance().
+
+If you're using #GdkPixbufLoader, in addition to updating the image
+after the delay time, you should also update it whenever you
+receive the area_updated signal and
+gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_on_currently_loading_frame() returns
+%TRUE. In this case, the frame currently being fed into the loader
+has received new data, so needs to be refreshed. The delay time for
+a frame may also be modified after an area_updated signal, for
+example if the delay time for a frame is encoded in the data after
+the frame itself. So your timeout should be reinstalled after any
+area_updated signal.
+
+A delay time of -1 is possible, indicating "infinite."
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start_time">
+<parameter_description> time when the animation starts playing
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> an iterator to move over the animation
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_formats">
+<description>
+Obtains the available information about the image formats supported
+by GdkPixbuf.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> A list of #GdkPixbufFormat<!-- -->s describing the supported
+image formats. The list should be freed when it is no longer needed,
+but the structures themselves are owned by #GdkPixbuf and should not be
+freed.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixdata_from_pixbuf">
+<description>
+Converts a #GdkPixbuf to a #GdkPixdata. If @use_rle is %TRUE, the
+pixel data is run-length encoded into newly-allocated memory and a
+pointer to that memory is returned.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixdata">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdata to fill.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the data to fill @pixdata with.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_rle">
+<parameter_description> whether to use run-length encoding for the pixel data.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> If @ure_rle is %TRUE, a pointer to the newly-allocated memory
+for the run-length encoded pixel data, otherwise %NULL.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new, empty animation.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the animation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the animation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rate">
+<parameter_description> the speed of the animation, in frames per second
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly allocated #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_copy_area">
+<description>
+Copies a rectangular area from @src_pixbuf to @dest_pixbuf. Conversion of
+pixbuf formats is done automatically.
+
+If the source rectangle overlaps the destination rectangle on the
+same pixbuf, it will be overwritten during the copy operation.
+Therefore, you can not use this function to scroll a pixbuf.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="src_pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> Source pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="src_x">
+<parameter_description> Source X coordinate within @src_pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="src_y">
+<parameter_description> Source Y coordinate within @src_pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> Width of the area to copy.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> Height of the area to copy.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> Destination pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate within @dest_pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_y">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate within @dest_pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_flip">
+<description>
+Flips a pixbuf horizontally or vertically and returns the
+result in a new pixbuf.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="src">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="horizontal">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to flip horizontally, %FALSE to flip vertically
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if not enough memory could be
+allocated for it.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_delay_time">
+<description>
+Gets the number of milliseconds the current pixbuf should be displayed,
+or -1 if the current pixbuf should be displayed forever. g_timeout_add()
+conveniently takes a timeout in milliseconds, so you can use a timeout
+to schedule the next update.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an animation iterator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> delay time in milliseconds (thousandths of a second)
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_ref">
+<description>
+Adds a reference to an animation.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> An animation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The same as the @animation argument.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_callbackv">
+<description>
+Saves pixbuf to a callback in format @type, which is currently "jpeg",
+"png", "tiff", "ico" or "bmp". If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned. See
+gdk_pixbuf_save_to_callback () for more details.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="save_func">
+<parameter_description> a function that is called to save each block of data that
+the save routine generates.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to the save function.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> name of file format.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="option_keys">
+<parameter_description> name of options to set, %NULL-terminated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="option_values">
+<parameter_description> values for named options
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether an error was set
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_has_alpha">
+<description>
+Queries whether a pixbuf has an alpha channel (opacity information).
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if it has an alpha channel, %FALSE otherwise.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_get_loop">
+<description>
+Gets whether @animation should loop indefinitely when it reaches the end.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the animation loops forever, %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_apply_embedded_orientation">
+<description>
+Takes an existing pixbuf and checks for the presence of an
+associated "orientation" option, which may be provided by the
+jpeg loader (which reads the exif orientation tag) or the
+tiff loader (which reads the tiff orientation tag, and
+compensates it for the partial transforms performed by
+libtiff). If an orientation option/tag is present, the
+appropriate transform will be performed so that the pixbuf
+is oriented correctly.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="src">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkPixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf, or a reference to the
+input pixbuf (with an increased reference count).
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data">
+<description>
+Creates a new pixbuf by parsing XPM data in memory. This data is commonly
+the result of including an XPM file into a program's C source.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> Pointer to inline XPM data.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_license">
+<description>
+Returns information about the license of the image loader for the format. The
+returned string should be a shorthand for a wellknown license, e.g. "LGPL",
+"GPL", "QPL", "GPL/QPL", or "other" to indicate some other license. This
+string should be freed with g_free() when it's no longer needed.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a string describing the license of @format.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_savev">
+<description>
+Saves pixbuf to a file in @type, which is currently "jpeg", "png", "tiff", "ico" or "bmp".
+If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned.
+See gdk_pixbuf_save () for more details.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> name of file to save.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> name of file format.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="option_keys">
+<parameter_description> name of options to set, %NULL-terminated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="option_values">
+<parameter_description> values for named options
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether an error was set
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_add_alpha">
+<description>
+Takes an existing pixbuf and adds an alpha channel to it.
+If the existing pixbuf already had an alpha channel, the channel
+values are copied from the original; otherwise, the alpha channel
+is initialized to 255 (full opacity).
+
+If @substitute_color is %TRUE, then the color specified by (@r, @g, @b) will be
+assigned zero opacity. That is, if you pass (255, 255, 255) for the
+substitute color, all white pixels will become fully transparent.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkPixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="substitute_color">
+<parameter_description> Whether to set a color to zero opacity. If this
+is %FALSE, then the (@r, @g, @b) arguments will be ignored.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="r">
+<parameter_description> Red value to substitute.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="g">
+<parameter_description> Green value to substitute.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="b">
+<parameter_description> Blue value to substitute.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_colorspace">
+<description>
+Queries the color space of a pixbuf.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> Color space.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple">
+<description>
+Create a new #GdkPixbuf containing a copy of @src scaled to
+ dest_width x @dest_height. Leaves @src unaffected. @interp_type
+should be #GDK_INTERP_NEAREST if you want maximum speed (but when
+scaling down #GDK_INTERP_NEAREST is usually unusably ugly). The
+default @interp_type should be #GDK_INTERP_BILINEAR which offers
+reasonable quality and speed.
+
+You can scale a sub-portion of @src by creating a sub-pixbuf
+pointing into @src; see gdk_pixbuf_new_subpixbuf().
+
+For more complicated scaling/compositing see gdk_pixbuf_scale()
+and gdk_pixbuf_composite().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="src">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_width">
+<parameter_description> the width of destination image
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_height">
+<parameter_description> the height of destination image
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="interp_type">
+<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if not enough memory could be
+allocated for it.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_bufferv">
+<description>
+Saves pixbuf to a new buffer in format @type, which is currently "jpeg",
+"tiff", "png", "ico" or "bmp". See gdk_pixbuf_save_to_buffer()
+for more details.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> location to receive a pointer to the new buffer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer_size">
+<parameter_description> location to receive the size of the new buffer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> name of file format.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="option_keys">
+<parameter_description> name of options to set, %NULL-terminated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="option_values">
+<parameter_description> values for named options
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether an error was set
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save">
+<description>
+Saves pixbuf to a file in format @type. By default, "jpeg", "png", "ico"
+and "bmp" are possible file formats to save in, but more formats may be
+installed. The list of all writable formats can be determined in the
+following way:
+
+|[
+void add_if_writable (GdkPixbufFormat *data, GSList **list)
+{
+if (gdk_pixbuf_format_is_writable (data))
+*list = g_slist_prepend (*list, data);
+}
+
+GSList *formats = gdk_pixbuf_get_formats ();
+GSList *writable_formats = NULL;
+g_slist_foreach (formats, add_if_writable, &writable_formats);
+g_slist_free (formats);
+]|
+
+If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned. Possible errors include
+those in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR domain and those in the #G_FILE_ERROR domain.
+
+The variable argument list should be %NULL-terminated; if not empty,
+it should contain pairs of strings that modify the save
+parameters. For example:
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+gdk_pixbuf_save (pixbuf, handle, "jpeg", &error,
+"quality", "100", NULL);
+</programlisting></informalexample>
+
+Currently only few parameters exist. JPEG images can be saved with a
+"quality" parameter; its value should be in the range [0,100].
+
+Text chunks can be attached to PNG images by specifying parameters of
+the form "tEXt::key", where key is an ASCII string of length 1-79.
+The values are UTF-8 encoded strings. The PNG compression level can
+be specified using the "compression" parameter; it's value is in an
+integer in the range of [0,9].
+
+ICC color profiles can also be embedded into PNG and TIFF images.
+The "icc-profile" value should be the complete ICC profile encoded
+into base64.
+
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+gchar *contents;
+gchar *contents_encode;
+gsize length;
+g_file_get_contents ("/home/hughsie/.color/icc/L225W.icm", &contents, &length, NULL);
+contents_encode = g_base64_encode ((const guchar *) contents, length);
+gdk_pixbuf_save (pixbuf, handle, "png", &error,
+"icc-profile", contents_encode,
+NULL);
+</programlisting></informalexample>
+
+TIFF images recognize a "compression" option which acceps an integer value.
+Among the codecs are 1 None, 2 Huffman, 5 LZW, 7 JPEG and 8 Deflate, see
+the libtiff documentation and tiff.h for all supported codec values.
+
+ICO images can be saved in depth 16, 24, or 32, by using the "depth"
+parameter. When the ICO saver is given "x_hot" and "y_hot" parameters,
+it produces a CUR instead of an ICO.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> name of file to save.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> name of file format.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> list of key-value save options
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether an error was set
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_close">
+<description>
+Informs a pixbuf loader that no further writes with
+gdk_pixbuf_loader_write() will occur, so that it can free its
+internal loading structures. Also, tries to parse any data that
+hasn't yet been parsed; if the remaining data is partial or
+corrupt, an error will be returned. If %FALSE is returned, @error
+will be set to an error from the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR or #G_FILE_ERROR
+domains. If you're just cancelling a load rather than expecting it
+to be finished, passing %NULL for @error to ignore it is
+reasonable.
+
+Remember that this does not unref the loader, so if you plan not to
+use it anymore, please g_object_unref() it.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="loader">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for a #GError, or %NULL to ignore errors
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if all image data written so far was successfully
+ passed out via the update_area signal
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_fill">
+<description>
+Clears a pixbuf to the given RGBA value, converting the RGBA value into
+the pixbuf's pixel format. The alpha will be ignored if the pixbuf
+doesn't have an alpha channel.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixel">
+<parameter_description> RGBA pixel to clear to
+(0xffffffff is opaque white, 0x00000000 transparent black)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file">
+<description>
+Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from a file. The file format is
+detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then @error will be set.
+Possible errors are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and #G_FILE_ERROR domains.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> Name of file to load, in the GLib file name encoding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> Return location for an error
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1, or %NULL if
+any of several error conditions occurred: the file could not be opened,
+there was no loader for the file's format, there was not enough memory to
+allocate the image buffer, or the image file contained invalid data.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline">
+<description>
+Create a #GdkPixbuf from a flat representation that is suitable for
+storing as inline data in a program. This is useful if you want to
+ship a program with images, but don't want to depend on any
+external files.
+
+gdk-pixbuf ships with a program called <command>gdk-pixbuf-csource</command>
+which allows for conversion of #GdkPixbufs into such a inline representation.
+In almost all cases, you should pass the <option>--raw</option> flag to
+<command>gdk-pixbuf-csource</command>. A sample invocation would be:
+
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+gdk-pixbuf-csource --raw --name=myimage_inline myimage.png
+</programlisting></informalexample>
+
+For the typical case where the inline pixbuf is read-only static data,
+you don't need to copy the pixel data unless you intend to write to
+it, so you can pass %FALSE for @copy_pixels. (If you pass
+<option>--rle</option> to <command>gdk-pixbuf-csource</command>, a copy
+will be made even if @copy_pixels is %FALSE, so using this option is
+generally a bad idea.)
+
+If you create a pixbuf from const inline data compiled into your
+program, it's probably safe to ignore errors and disable length checks,
+since things will always succeed:
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+pixbuf = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline (-1, myimage_inline, FALSE, NULL);
+</programlisting></informalexample>
+
+For non-const inline data, you could get out of memory. For untrusted
+inline data located at runtime, you could have corrupt inline data in
+addition.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="data_length">
+<parameter_description> Length in bytes of the @data argument or -1 to
+disable length checks
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> Byte data containing a serialized #GdkPixdata structure
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="copy_pixels">
+<parameter_description> Whether to copy the pixel data, or use direct pointers
+ data for the resulting pixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> #GError return location, may be %NULL to ignore errors
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created #GdkPixbuf structure with a reference,
+count of 1, or %NULL if an error occurred.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file_at_size">
+<description>
+Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from a file.
+The file format is detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then
+ error will be set. Possible errors are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and
+#G_FILE_ERROR domains.
+
+The image will be scaled to fit in the requested size, preserving
+the image's aspect ratio. Note that the returned pixbuf may be smaller
+than @width x @height, if the aspect ratio requires it. To load
+and image at the requested size, regardless of aspect ratio, use
+gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file_at_scale().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> Name of file to load, in the GLib file name encoding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> The width the image should have or -1 to not constrain the width
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> The height the image should have or -1 to not constrain the height
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> Return location for an error
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1, or
+%NULL if any of several error conditions occurred: the file could not
+be opened, there was no loader for the file's format, there was not
+enough memory to allocate the image buffer, or the image file contained
+invalid data.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_copy">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GdkPixbuf with a copy of the information in the specified
+ pixbuf
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1, or %NULL if
+not enough memory could be allocated.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_composite">
+<description>
+Creates a transformation of the source image @src by scaling by
+ scale_x and @scale_y then translating by @offset_x and @offset_y.
+This gives an image in the coordinates of the destination pixbuf.
+The rectangle (@dest_x, @dest_y, @dest_width, @dest_height)
+is then composited onto the corresponding rectangle of the
+original destination image.
+
+When the destination rectangle contains parts not in the source
+image, the data at the edges of the source image is replicated
+to infinity.
+
+<figure id="pixbuf-composite-diagram">
+<title>Compositing of pixbufs</title>
+<graphic fileref="composite.png" format="PNG"/>
+</figure>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="src">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf into which to render the results
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_x">
+<parameter_description> the left coordinate for region to render
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_y">
+<parameter_description> the top coordinate for region to render
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the region to render
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the region to render
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offset_x">
+<parameter_description> the offset in the X direction (currently rounded to an integer)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offset_y">
+<parameter_description> the offset in the Y direction (currently rounded to an integer)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scale_x">
+<parameter_description> the scale factor in the X direction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scale_y">
+<parameter_description> the scale factor in the Y direction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="interp_type">
+<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="overall_alpha">
+<parameter_description> overall alpha for source image (0..255)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_mime_types">
+<description>
+Returns the mime types supported by the format.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a %NULL-terminated array of mime types which must be freed with
+g_strfreev() when it is no longer needed.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_unref">
+<description>
+Removes a reference from a pixbuf.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_set_size">
+<description>
+Causes the image to be scaled while it is loaded. The desired
+image size can be determined relative to the original size of
+the image by calling gdk_pixbuf_loader_set_size() from a
+signal handler for the ::size-prepared signal.
+
+Attempts to set the desired image size are ignored after the
+emission of the ::size-prepared signal.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="loader">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> The desired width of the image being loaded.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> The desired height of the image being loaded.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_set_loop">
+<description>
+Sets whether @animation should loop indefinitely when it reaches the end.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="loop">
+<parameter_description> whether to loop the animation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_callback">
+<description>
+Saves pixbuf in format @type by feeding the produced data to a
+callback. Can be used when you want to store the image to something
+other than a file, such as an in-memory buffer or a socket.
+If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned. Possible errors
+include those in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR domain and whatever the save
+function generates.
+
+See gdk_pixbuf_save() for more details.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="save_func">
+<parameter_description> a function that is called to save each block of data that
+the save routine generates.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to the save function.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> name of file format.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> list of key-value save options
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether an error was set
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_is_scalable">
+<description>
+Returns whether this image format is scalable. If a file is in a
+scalable format, it is preferable to load it at the desired size,
+rather than loading it at the default size and scaling the
+resulting pixbuf to the desired size.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether this image format is scalable.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_new_with_type">
+<description>
+Creates a new pixbuf loader object that always attempts to parse
+image data as if it were an image of type @image_type, instead of
+identifying the type automatically. Useful if you want an error if
+the image isn't the expected type, for loading image formats
+that can't be reliably identified by looking at the data, or if
+the user manually forces a specific type.
+
+The list of supported image formats depends on what image loaders
+are installed, but typically "png", "jpeg", "gif", "tiff" and
+"xpm" are among the supported formats. To obtain the full list of
+supported image formats, call gdk_pixbuf_format_get_name() on each
+of the #GdkPixbufFormat structs returned by gdk_pixbuf_get_formats().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image_type">
+<parameter_description> name of the image format to be loaded with the image
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an allocated #GError, or %NULL to ignore errors
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf loader.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_get_animation">
+<description>
+Queries the #GdkPixbufAnimation that a pixbuf loader is currently creating.
+In general it only makes sense to call this function after the "area-prepared"
+signal has been emitted by the loader. If the loader doesn't have enough
+bytes yet (hasn't emitted the "area-prepared" signal) this function will
+return %NULL.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="loader">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The #GdkPixbufAnimation that the loader is loading, or %NULL if
+ not enough data has been read to determine the information.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_static_image">
+<description>
+If an animation is really just a plain image (has only one frame),
+this function returns that image. If the animation is an animation,
+this function returns a reasonable thing to display as a static
+unanimated image, which might be the first frame, or something more
+sophisticated. If an animation hasn't loaded any frames yet, this
+function will return %NULL.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> unanimated image representing the animation
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_bits_per_sample">
+<description>
+Queries the number of bits per color sample in a pixbuf.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> Number of bits per color sample.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_get_pixbuf">
+<description>
+Queries the #GdkPixbuf that a pixbuf loader is currently creating.
+In general it only makes sense to call this function after the
+"area-prepared" signal has been emitted by the loader; this means
+that enough data has been read to know the size of the image that
+will be allocated. If the loader has not received enough data via
+gdk_pixbuf_loader_write(), then this function returns %NULL. The
+returned pixbuf will be the same in all future calls to the loader,
+so simply calling g_object_ref() should be sufficient to continue
+using it. Additionally, if the loader is an animation, it will
+return the "static image" of the animation
+(see gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_static_image()).
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="loader">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The #GdkPixbuf that the loader is creating, or %NULL if not
+enough data has been read to determine how to create the image buffer.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_description">
+<description>
+Returns a description of the format.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a description of the format.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_subpixbuf">
+<description>
+Creates a new pixbuf which represents a sub-region of
+ src_pixbuf The new pixbuf shares its pixels with the
+original pixbuf, so writing to one affects both.
+The new pixbuf holds a reference to @src_pixbuf, so
+ src_pixbuf will not be finalized until the new pixbuf
+is finalized.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="src_pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="src_x">
+<parameter_description> X coord in @src_pixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="src_y">
+<parameter_description> Y coord in @src_pixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of region in @src_pixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height of region in @src_pixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new pixbuf
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_scale">
+<description>
+Creates a transformation of the source image @src by scaling by
+ scale_x and @scale_y then translating by @offset_x and @offset_y,
+then renders the rectangle (@dest_x, @dest_y, @dest_width,
+ dest_height) of the resulting image onto the destination image
+replacing the previous contents.
+
+Try to use gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple() first, this function is
+the industrial-strength power tool you can fall back to if
+gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple() isn't powerful enough.
+
+If the source rectangle overlaps the destination rectangle on the
+same pixbuf, it will be overwritten during the scaling which
+results in rendering artifacts.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="src">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf into which to render the results
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_x">
+<parameter_description> the left coordinate for region to render
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_y">
+<parameter_description> the top coordinate for region to render
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the region to render
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the region to render
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offset_x">
+<parameter_description> the offset in the X direction (currently rounded to an integer)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offset_y">
+<parameter_description> the offset in the Y direction (currently rounded to an integer)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scale_x">
+<parameter_description> the scale factor in the X direction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scale_y">
+<parameter_description> the scale factor in the Y direction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="interp_type">
+<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_unref">
+<description>
+Removes a reference from an animation.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> An animation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_option">
+<description>
+Looks up @key in the list of options that may have been attached to the
+ pixbuf when it was loaded, or that may have been attached by another
+function using gdk_pixbuf_set_option().
+
+For instance, the ANI loader provides "Title" and "Artist" options.
+The ICO, XBM, and XPM loaders provide "x_hot" and "y_hot" hot-spot
+options for cursor definitions. The PNG loader provides the tEXt ancillary
+chunk key/value pairs as options. Since 2.12, the TIFF and JPEG loaders
+return an "orientation" option string that corresponds to the embedded
+TIFF/Exif orientation tag (if present).
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the value associated with @key. This is a nul-terminated
+string that should not be freed or %NULL if @key was not found.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_composite_color">
+<description>
+Creates a transformation of the source image @src by scaling by
+ scale_x and @scale_y then translating by @offset_x and @offset_y,
+then composites the rectangle (@dest_x ,@dest_y, @dest_width,
+ dest_height) of the resulting image with a checkboard of the
+colors @color1 and @color2 and renders it onto the destination
+image.
+
+See gdk_pixbuf_composite_color_simple() for a simpler variant of this
+function suitable for many tasks.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="src">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf into which to render the results
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_x">
+<parameter_description> the left coordinate for region to render
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_y">
+<parameter_description> the top coordinate for region to render
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the region to render
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the region to render
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offset_x">
+<parameter_description> the offset in the X direction (currently rounded to an integer)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offset_y">
+<parameter_description> the offset in the Y direction (currently rounded to an integer)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scale_x">
+<parameter_description> the scale factor in the X direction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scale_y">
+<parameter_description> the scale factor in the Y direction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="interp_type">
+<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="overall_alpha">
+<parameter_description> overall alpha for source image (0..255)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="check_x">
+<parameter_description> the X offset for the checkboard (origin of checkboard is at - check_x, - check_y)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="check_y">
+<parameter_description> the Y offset for the checkboard
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="check_size">
+<parameter_description> the size of checks in the checkboard (must be a power of two)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color1">
+<parameter_description> the color of check at upper left
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color2">
+<parameter_description> the color of the other check
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixdata_to_csource">
+<description>
+Generates C source code suitable for compiling images directly
+into programs.
+
+gdk-pixbuf ships with a program called <command>gdk-pixbuf-csource</command>
+which offers a command line interface to this function.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixdata">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdata to convert to C source.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> used for naming generated data structures or macros.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dump_type">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdataDumpType determining the kind of C
+source to be generated.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly-allocated string containing the C source form
+of @pixdata.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_on_currently_loading_frame">
+<description>
+Used to determine how to respond to the area_updated signal on
+#GdkPixbufLoader when loading an animation. area_updated is emitted
+for an area of the frame currently streaming in to the loader. So if
+you're on the currently loading frame, you need to redraw the screen for
+the updated area.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimationIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the frame we're on is partially loaded, or the last frame
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file_at_scale">
+<description>
+Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from a file. The file format is
+detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then @error will be set.
+Possible errors are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and #G_FILE_ERROR domains.
+The image will be scaled to fit in the requested size, optionally preserving
+the image's aspect ratio.
+
+When preserving the aspect ratio, a @width of -1 will cause the image
+to be scaled to the exact given height, and a @height of -1 will cause
+the image to be scaled to the exact given width. When not preserving
+aspect ratio, a @width or @height of -1 means to not scale the image
+at all in that dimension. Negative values for @width and @height are
+allowed since 2.8.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> Name of file to load, in the GLib file name encoding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> The width the image should have or -1 to not constrain the width
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> The height the image should have or -1 to not constrain the height
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="preserve_aspect_ratio">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to preserve the image's aspect ratio
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> Return location for an error
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1, or %NULL
+if any of several error conditions occurred: the file could not be opened,
+there was no loader for the file's format, there was not enough memory to
+allocate the image buffer, or the image file contained invalid data.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_width">
+<description>
+Queries the width of a pixbuf.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> Width in pixels.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new pixbuf loader object.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf loader.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_is_static_image">
+<description>
+If you load a file with gdk_pixbuf_animation_new_from_file() and it turns
+out to be a plain, unanimated image, then this function will return
+%TRUE. Use gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_static_image() to retrieve
+the image.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the "animation" was really just an image
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_name">
+<description>
+Returns the name of the format.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the name of the format.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_extensions">
+<description>
+Returns the filename extensions typically used for files in the
+given format.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a %NULL-terminated array of filename extensions which must be
+freed with g_strfreev() when it is no longer needed.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_new_from_file">
+<description>
+Creates a new animation by loading it from a file. The file format is
+detected automatically. If the file's format does not support multi-frame
+images, then an animation with a single frame will be created. Possible errors
+are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and #G_FILE_ERROR domains.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> Name of file to load, in the GLib file name encoding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for error
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created animation with a reference count of 1, or %NULL
+if any of several error conditions ocurred: the file could not be opened,
+there was no loader for the file's format, there was not enough memory to
+allocate the image buffer, or the image file contained invalid data.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream">
+<description>
+Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from an input stream.
+
+The file format is detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then
+ error will be set. The @cancellable can be used to abort the operation
+from another thread. If the operation was cancelled, the error
+%GIO_ERROR_CANCELLED will be returned. Other possible errors are in
+the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and %G_IO_ERROR domains.
+
+The stream is not closed.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="stream">
+<parameter_description> a #GInputStream to load the pixbuf from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cancellable">
+<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> Return location for an error
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf, or %NULL if any of several error
+conditions occurred: the file could not be opened, the image format is
+not supported, there was not enough memory to allocate the image buffer,
+the stream contained invalid data, or the operation was cancelled.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_composite_color_simple">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GdkPixbuf by scaling @src to @dest_width x
+ dest_height and compositing the result with a checkboard of colors
+ color1 and @color2.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="src">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_width">
+<parameter_description> the width of destination image
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_height">
+<parameter_description> the height of destination image
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="interp_type">
+<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="overall_alpha">
+<parameter_description> overall alpha for source image (0..255)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="check_size">
+<parameter_description> the size of checks in the checkboard (must be a power of two)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color1">
+<parameter_description> the color of check at upper left
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color2">
+<parameter_description> the color of the other check
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if not enough memory could be
+allocated for it.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixdata_deserialize">
+<description>
+Deserializes (reconstruct) a #GdkPixdata structure from a byte stream.
+The byte stream consists of a straightforward writeout of the
+#GdkPixdata fields in network byte order, plus the @pixel_data
+bytes the structure points to.
+The @pixdata contents are reconstructed byte by byte and are checked
+for validity. This function may fail with %GDK_PIXBUF_CORRUPT_IMAGE
+or %GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_UNKNOWN_TYPE.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixdata">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdata structure to be filled in.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stream_length">
+<parameter_description> length of the stream used for deserialization.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stream">
+<parameter_description> stream of bytes containing a serialized #GdkPixdata structure.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> #GError location to indicate failures (maybe %NULL to ignore errors).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> Upon successful deserialization %TRUE is returned,
+%FALSE otherwise.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_saturate_and_pixelate">
+<description>
+Modifies saturation and optionally pixelates @src, placing the result in
+ dest @src and @dest may be the same pixbuf with no ill effects. If
+ saturation is 1.0 then saturation is not changed. If it's less than 1.0,
+saturation is reduced (the image turns toward grayscale); if greater than
+1.0, saturation is increased (the image gets more vivid colors). If @pixelate
+is %TRUE, then pixels are faded in a checkerboard pattern to create a
+pixelated image. @src and @dest must have the same image format, size, and
+rowstride.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="src">
+<parameter_description> source image
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest">
+<parameter_description> place to write modified version of @src
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="saturation">
+<parameter_description> saturation factor
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixelate">
+<parameter_description> whether to pixelate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixdata_serialize">
+<description>
+Serializes a #GdkPixdata structure into a byte stream.
+The byte stream consists of a straightforward writeout of the
+#GdkPixdata fields in network byte order, plus the @pixel_data
+bytes the structure points to.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixdata">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GdkPixdata structure to serialize.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stream_length_p">
+<parameter_description> location to store the resulting stream length in.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-allocated string containing the serialized
+#GdkPixdata structure.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_copy">
+<description>
+Creates a copy of @format
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the newly allocated copy of a #GdkPixbufFormat. Use
+gdk_pixbuf_format_free() to free the resources when done
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_set_option">
+<description>
+Attaches a key/value pair as an option to a #GdkPixbuf. If %key already
+exists in the list of options attached to @pixbuf, the new value is
+ignored and %FALSE is returned.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE on success.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_free">
+<description>
+Frees the resources allocated when copying a #GdkPixbufFormat
+using gdk_pixbuf_format_copy()
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_ref">
+<description>
+Adds a reference to a pixbuf.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The same as the @pixbuf argument.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GdkPixbuf structure and allocates a buffer for it. The
+buffer has an optimal rowstride. Note that the buffer is not cleared;
+you will have to fill it completely yourself.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colorspace">
+<parameter_description> Color space for image
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_alpha">
+<parameter_description> Whether the image should have transparency information
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bits_per_sample">
+<parameter_description> Number of bits per color sample
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> Width of image in pixels, must be > 0
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> Height of image in pixels, must be > 0
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-created #GdkPixbuf with a reference count of 1, or
+%NULL if not enough memory could be allocated for the image buffer.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_advance">
+<description>
+Possibly advances an animation to a new frame. Chooses the frame based
+on the start time passed to gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_iter().
+
+ current_time would normally come from g_get_current_time(), and
+must be greater than or equal to the time passed to
+gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_iter(), and must increase or remain
+unchanged each time gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_pixbuf() is
+called. That is, you can't go backward in time; animations only
+play forward.
+
+As a shortcut, pass %NULL for the current time and g_get_current_time()
+will be invoked on your behalf. So you only need to explicitly pass
+ current_time if you're doing something odd like playing the animation
+at double speed.
+
+If this function returns %FALSE, there's no need to update the animation
+display, assuming the display had been rendered prior to advancing;
+if %TRUE, you need to call gdk_animation_iter_get_pixbuf() and update the
+display with the new pixbuf.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimationIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="current_time">
+<parameter_description> current time
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the image may need updating
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_file_info">
+<description>
+Parses an image file far enough to determine its format and size.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> The name of the file to identify.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the width of the image, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the height of the image, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GdkPixbufFormat describing the image format of the file
+or %NULL if the image format wasn't recognized. The return value
+is owned by GdkPixbuf and should not be freed.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+</root>
diff --git a/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml b/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
index c543b9a..d4f5dc2 100644
--- a/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
+++ b/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
@@ -16,30 +16,25 @@ by typing in text.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_file">
<description>
-Returns the paper height in units of @unit.
-
-Note that this function takes orientation, but
-not margins into consideration.
-See gtk_page_setup_get_page_height().
+Makes @status_icon display the file @filename.
+See gtk_status_icon_new_from_file() for details.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> a filename
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper height.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row">
@@ -92,48 +87,6 @@ icon for @icon_name.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions">
-<description>
-This is a convenience routine to create a group of radio actions and
-add them to the action group.
-
-The "changed" signal of the first radio action is connected to the
- on_change callback and the accel paths of the actions are set to
-<literal><Actions>/<replaceable>group-name</replaceable>/<replaceable>action-name</replaceable></literal>.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the number of entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
-no action should be activated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="on_change">
-<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner">
<description>
Virtually sets the contents of the specified clipboard by providing
@@ -299,41 +252,24 @@ gtk_icon_info_free()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_ref">
+<function name="gtk_font_button_set_use_size">
<description>
-Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
+If @use_size is %TRUE, the font name will be written using the selected size.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet.
+<parameter name="font_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> @icon_set.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkButton containing a label.
-If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
-If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
-underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
-accelerator called a mnemonic.
-Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="use_size">
+<parameter_description> If %TRUE, font name will be written using the selected size.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkButton
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_get_text">
@@ -459,6 +395,48 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions">
+<description>
+This is a convenience routine to create a group of radio actions and
+add them to the action group.
+
+The "changed" signal of the first radio action is connected to the
+ on_change callback and the accel paths of the actions are set to
+<literal><Actions>/<replaceable>group-name</replaceable>/<replaceable>action-name</replaceable></literal>.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the number of entries
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
+no action should be activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="on_change">
+<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_dialog_set_default_response">
<description>
Sets the last widget in the dialog's action area with the given @response_id
@@ -505,37 +483,30 @@ Sets a child property for @child and @container.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_colormap">
-<description>
-Gets the colormap that will be used to render @widget. No reference will
-be added to the returned colormap; it should not be unreferenced.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the colormap used by @widget
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_color_button_get_color">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint">
<description>
-Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
+This function tells GTK+ that the user interface for your
+application requires users to read across tree rows and associate
+cells with one another. By default, GTK+ will then render the tree
+with alternating row colors. Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> use it
+just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled tree; that's a
+question for the theme. Some themes will draw tree rows in
+alternating colors even when rules are turned off, and users who
+prefer that appearance all the time can choose those themes. You
+should call this function only as a <emphasis>semantic</emphasis>
+hint to the theme engine that your tree makes alternating colors
+useful from a functional standpoint (since it has lots of columns,
+generally).
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the current color.
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tree requires reading across rows
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -587,85 +558,40 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_unmaximize">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_accepts_tab">
<description>
-Asks to unmaximize @window. Note that you shouldn't assume the
-window is definitely unmaximized afterward, because other entities
-(e.g. the user or <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window
-manager</link>) could maximize it again, and not all window
-managers honor requests to unmaximize. But normally the window will
-end up unmaximized. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
-
-You can track maximization via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+Returns whether pressing the Tab key inserts a tab characters.
+gtk_text_view_set_accepts_tab().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if pressing the Tab key inserts a tab character,
+%FALSE if pressing the Tab key moves the keyboard focus.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_position">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_indicator">
<description>
-This function returns the position you need to pass to
-gtk_window_move() to keep @window in its current position. This
-means that the meaning of the returned value varies with window
-gravity. See gtk_window_move() for more details.
-
-If you haven't changed the window gravity, its gravity will be
-#GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST. This means that gtk_window_get_position()
-gets the position of the top-left corner of the window manager
-frame for the window. gtk_window_move() sets the position of this
-same top-left corner.
-
-gtk_window_get_position() is not 100% reliable because the X Window System
-does not specify a way to obtain the geometry of the
-decorations placed on a window by the window manager.
-Thus GTK+ is using a "best guess" that works with most
-window managers.
-
-Moreover, nearly all window managers are historically broken with
-respect to their handling of window gravity. So moving a window to
-its current position as returned by gtk_window_get_position() tends
-to result in moving the window slightly. Window managers are
-slowly getting better over time.
-
-If a window has gravity #GDK_GRAVITY_STATIC the window manager
-frame is not relevant, and thus gtk_window_get_position() will
-always produce accurate results. However you can't use static
-gravity to do things like place a window in a corner of the screen,
-because static gravity ignores the window manager decorations.
-
-If you are saving and restoring your application's window
-positions, you should know that it's impossible for applications to
-do this without getting it somewhat wrong because applications do
-not have sufficient knowledge of window manager state. The Correct
-Mechanism is to support the session management protocol (see the
-"GnomeClient" object in the GNOME libraries for example) and allow
-the window manager to save your window sizes and positions.
+Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_x">
-<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_y">
-<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether the sort indicator arrow is displayed
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_reorderable">
@@ -693,91 +619,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_size">
-<description>
-Sets the default size of a window. If the window's "natural" size
-(its size request) is larger than the default, the default will be
-ignored. More generally, if the default size does not obey the
-geometry hints for the window (gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can
-be used to set these explicitly), the default size will be clamped
-to the nearest permitted size.
-
-Unlike gtk_widget_set_size_request(), which sets a size request for
-a widget and thus would keep users from shrinking the window, this
-function only sets the initial size, just as if the user had
-resized the window themselves. Users can still shrink the window
-again as they normally would. Setting a default size of -1 means to
-use the "natural" default size (the size request of the window).
-
-For more control over a window's initial size and how resizing works,
-investigate gtk_window_set_geometry_hints().
-
-For some uses, gtk_window_resize() is a more appropriate function.
-gtk_window_resize() changes the current size of the window, rather
-than the size to be used on initial display. gtk_window_resize() always
-affects the window itself, not the geometry widget.
-
-The default size of a window only affects the first time a window is
-shown; if a window is hidden and re-shown, it will remember the size
-it had prior to hiding, rather than using the default size.
-
-Windows can't actually be 0x0 in size, they must be at least 1x1, but
-passing 0 for @width and @height is OK, resulting in a 1x1 default size.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width in pixels, or -1 to unset the default width
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height in pixels, or -1 to unset the default height
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_custom">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object with the
-given parameters.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the paper name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="display_name">
-<parameter_description> the human-readable name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the paper width, in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the paper height, in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object, use gtk_paper_size_free()
-to free it
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_set_mark">
<description>
Move the mark to the given position, if not @should_exist,
@@ -813,63 +654,6 @@ immediately
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_dialog_run">
-<description>
-Blocks in a recursive main loop until the @dialog either emits the
-#GtkDialog::response signal, or is destroyed. If the dialog is
-destroyed during the call to gtk_dialog_run(), gtk_dialog_run() returns
-#GTK_RESPONSE_NONE. Otherwise, it returns the response ID from the
-::response signal emission.
-
-Before entering the recursive main loop, gtk_dialog_run() calls
-gtk_widget_show() on the dialog for you. Note that you still
-need to show any children of the dialog yourself.
-
-During gtk_dialog_run(), the default behavior of #GtkWidget::delete-event
-is disabled; if the dialog receives ::delete_event, it will not be
-destroyed as windows usually are, and gtk_dialog_run() will return
-#GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT. Also, during gtk_dialog_run() the dialog
-will be modal. You can force gtk_dialog_run() to return at any time by
-calling gtk_dialog_response() to emit the ::response signal. Destroying
-the dialog during gtk_dialog_run() is a very bad idea, because your
-post-run code won't know whether the dialog was destroyed or not.
-
-After gtk_dialog_run() returns, you are responsible for hiding or
-destroying the dialog if you wish to do so.
-
-Typical usage of this function might be:
-|[
-gint result = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
-switch (result)
-{
-case GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT:
-do_application_specific_something ();
-break;
-default:
-do_nothing_since_dialog_was_cancelled ();
-break;
-}
-gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
-]|
-
-Note that even though the recursive main loop gives the effect of a
-modal dialog (it prevents the user from interacting with other
-windows in the same window group while the dialog is run), callbacks
-such as timeouts, IO channel watches, DND drops, etc, <emphasis>will</emphasis>
-be triggered during a gtk_dialog_run() call.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> response ID
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_accel_group_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkAccelGroup.
@@ -921,27 +705,42 @@ to the slider.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_items">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_clickable">
<description>
-Gets the list of recently used resources in form of #GtkRecentInfo objects.
+Sets the header to be active if @active is %TRUE. When the header is active,
+then it can take keyboard focus, and can be clicked.
-The return value of this function is affected by the "sort-type" and
-"limit" properties of @chooser.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="clickable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the header is active.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_vbox_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkVBox.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="homogeneous">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if all children are to be given equal space allotments.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="spacing">
+<parameter_description> the number of pixels to place by default between children.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated
-list of #GtkRecentInfo objects. You should
-use gtk_recent_info_unref() on every item of the list, and then free
-the list itself using g_list_free().
-
+<return> a new #GtkVBox.
</return>
</function>
@@ -1022,26 +821,6 @@ The returned list must be freed with g_list_free ().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_select_multiple">
-<description>
-Sets whether @chooser can select multiple items.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="select_multiple">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @chooser can select more than one item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_select_range">
<description>
This function moves the "insert" and "selection_bound" marks
@@ -1180,23 +959,61 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website_label">
+<function name="gtk_paint_expander">
<description>
-Returns the label used for the website link.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView. @x and @y specify the
+center the expander. The size of the expander is determined by the
+"expander-size" style property of @widget. (If widget is not
+specified or doesn't have an "expander-size" property, an
+unspecified default size will be used, since the caller doesn't
+have sufficient information to position the expander, this is
+likely not useful.) The expander is expander_size pixels tall
+in the collapsed position and expander_size pixels wide in the
+expanded position.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expander_style">
+<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in; determines
+whether the expander is collapsed, expanded, or in an
+intermediate state.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The label used for the website link. The string is
-owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_inside_word">
@@ -1218,6 +1035,32 @@ correct fix would be to the Pango word break algorithms).
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_binding_entry_skip">
+<description>
+Install a binding on @binding_set which causes key lookups
+to be aborted, to prevent bindings from lower priority sets
+to be activated.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to skip an entry of
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of binding to skip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to skip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_complete">
<description>
Sets whether @page contents are complete. This will make
@@ -1263,30 +1106,23 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_get_property">
+<function name="gtk_button_get_event_window">
<description>
-Gets the value of a child property for @child and @container.
+Returns the button's event window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise.
+This function should be rarely needed.
+
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the property to get
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> a location to return the value
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> @button's event window.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_get_path">
@@ -1327,7 +1163,7 @@ inserted text.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> UTF-8 format text to insert
+<parameter_description> text in UTF-8 format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="len">
@@ -1338,25 +1174,22 @@ inserted text.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_has_tooltip">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_new">
<description>
-Sets the has-tooltip property on @status_icon to @has_tooltip.
-See #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip for more information.
+Creates a new #GtkMountOperation
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_tooltip">
-<parameter_description> whether or not @status_icon has a tooltip
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkMountOperation
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_offscreen_window_get_pixbuf">
@@ -1396,6 +1229,68 @@ Gets the line wrapping for the view.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup">
+<description>
+Creates a new message dialog, which is a simple dialog with an icon
+indicating the dialog type (error, warning, etc.) and some text which
+is marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+When the user clicks a button a "response" signal is emitted with
+response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See #GtkDialog for more details.
+
+Special XML characters in the printf() arguments passed to this
+function will automatically be escaped as necessary.
+(See g_markup_printf_escaped() for how this is implemented.)
+Usually this is what you want, but if you have an existing
+Pango markup string that you want to use literally as the
+label, then you need to use gtk_message_dialog_set_markup()
+instead, since you can't pass the markup string either
+as the format (it might contain '%' characters) or as a string
+argument.
+|[
+GtkWidget *dialog;
+dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (main_application_window,
+GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
+GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
+GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
+NULL);
+gtk_message_dialog_set_markup (GTK_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
+markup);
+]|
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> type of message
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buttons">
+<parameter_description> set of buttons to use
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkMessageDialog
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_mnemonic_activate">
<description>
Activates the targets associated with the mnemonic.
@@ -1419,36 +1314,22 @@ Activates the targets associated with the mnemonic.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_drop_highlight_item">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_use_color">
<description>
-Highlights @toolbar to give an idea of what it would look like
-if @item was added to @toolbar at the position indicated by @index_.
-If @item is %NULL, highlighting is turned off. In that case @index_
-is ignored.
-
-The @tool_item passed to this function must not be part of any widget
-hierarchy. When an item is set as drop highlight item it can not
-added to any widget hierarchy or used as highlight item for another
-toolbar.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem, or %NULL to turn of highlighting
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="index_">
-<parameter_description> a position on @toolbar
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether to use color
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_draw_vline">
@@ -1524,41 +1405,71 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_offscreen_window_get_pixmap">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_remove_action_group">
<description>
-Retrieves a snapshot of the contained widget in the form of
-a #GdkPixmap. If you need to keep this around over window
-resizes then you should add a reference to it.
+Removes an action group from the list of action groups associated
+with @self.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="offscreen">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkOffscreenWindow contained widget.
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group to be removed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixmap pointer to the offscreen pixmap, or %NULL.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_width">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_before">
<description>
-Obtains the width of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
+Inserts a new row before @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will
+be appended to the end of the list. @iter will be changed to point to this
+new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
+values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sibling">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the width of @context
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkButton containing a label.
+If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
+If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
+underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
+accelerator called a mnemonic.
+Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkButton
</return>
</function>
@@ -1644,28 +1555,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_filter_set_name">
-<description>
-Sets the human-readable name of the filter; this is the string
-that will be displayed in the recently used resources selector
-user interface if there is a selectable list of filters.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> then human readable name of @filter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder">
<description>
Adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file chooser.
@@ -1721,6 +1610,21 @@ otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_hide">
+<description>
+Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
+hidden (invisible to the user).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_paper_size_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object by parsing a
@@ -1831,6 +1735,9 @@ This function emits the GtkContainer::set_focus_child signal of
@container. Implementations of #GtkContainer can override the
default behaviour by overriding the class closure of this signal.
+This is function is mostly meant to be used by widgets. Applications can use
+gtk_widget_grab_focus() to manualy set the focus to a specific widget.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="container">
@@ -1910,6 +1817,24 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_box() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_markup_column">
+<description>
+Returns the column with markup text for @icon_view.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the markup column, or -1 if it's unset.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_get_icon_name">
<description>
Gets the icon name and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
@@ -1979,45 +1904,39 @@ Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_is_visible">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_indent">
<description>
-Returns whether the action is effectively visible.
+Gets the default indentation of paragraphs in @text_view.
+Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
+The indentation may be negative.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the action and its associated action group
-are both visible.
-
+<return> number of pixels of indentation
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_get_needed">
+<function name="gtk_action_is_visible">
<description>
-Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the structure
-passed to gtk_file_filter_filter()
-
-This function will not typically be used by applications; it
-is intended principally for use in the implementation of
-#GtkFileChooser.
+Returns whether the action is effectively visible.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
-calling gtk_file_filter_filter()
+<return> %TRUE if the action and its associated action group
+are both visible.
</return>
</function>
@@ -2050,25 +1969,20 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_resizable">
<description>
-Sets the label of the tool item group. The label is displayed in the header
-of the group.
+Returns %TRUE if the @tree_column can be resized by the end user.
-Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the new human-readable label of of the group
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if the @tree_column can be resized.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_insert">
@@ -2098,66 +2012,74 @@ gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_info_bar_add_button">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_numbers">
<description>
-Adds a button with the given text (or a stock button, if button_text
-is a stock ID) and sets things up so that clicking the button will emit
-the "response" signal with the given response_id. The button is appended
-to the end of the info bars's action area. The button widget is
-returned, but usually you don't need it.
+Whether to show recently used resources prepended by a unique number.
-Since: 2.18
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers() instead.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info_bar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="button_text">
-<parameter_description> text of button, or stock ID
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="response_id">
-<parameter_description> response ID for the button
+<parameter name="show_numbers">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to show numbers, %FALSE otherwise
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the button widget that was added
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_direction">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_n_items">
<description>
-Sets the default reading direction for widgets where the
-direction has not been explicitly set by gtk_widget_set_direction().
+Gets the number of tool items in @group.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dir">
-<parameter_description> the new default direction. This cannot be
-%GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE.
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the number of tool items in @group
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_n_items">
+<function name="gtk_test_find_widget">
<description>
-Gets the number of tool items in @group.
+This function will search the descendants of @widget for a widget
+of type @widget_type that has a label matching @label_pattern next
+to it. This is most useful for automated GUI testing, e.g. to find
+the "OK" button in a dialog and synthesize clicks on it.
+However see gtk_test_find_label(), gtk_test_find_sibling() and
+gtk_test_widget_click() for possible caveats involving the search of
+such widgets and synthesizing widget events.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> Container widget, usually a GtkWindow.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label_pattern">
+<parameter_description> Shell-glob pattern to match a label string.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> Type of a aearched for label sibling widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of tool items in @group
+<return> a valid widget if any is found or %NULL.
</return>
</function>
@@ -2321,23 +2243,20 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_filter">
+<function name="gtk_action_unblock_activate">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkRecentFilter object currently used by @chooser to affect
-the display of the recently used resources.
+Reenable activation signals from the action
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkRecentFilter object.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_deleted">
@@ -2359,25 +2278,41 @@ know that the model emitted the "row_deleted" signal.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_view_new_with_markup">
+<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add_signal">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererText
-to it, and makes it show @markup. The text can be
-marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text
-markup language</link>.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Override or install a new key binding for @keyval with @modifiers on
+ binding_set When the binding is activated, @signal_name will be
+emitted on the target widget, with @n_args @Varargs used as
+arguments.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description> the text to display in the cell view
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to install an entry for
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of binding to install
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to install
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="signal_name">
+<parameter_description> signal to execute upon activation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_args">
+<parameter_description> number of arguments to @signal_name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments to @signal_name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_search">
@@ -2506,46 +2441,6 @@ the model will sort using this function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_usize">
-<description>
-Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size
-request will be @width by @height. You can use this function to
-force a widget to be either larger or smaller than it is. The
-strange "usize" name dates from the early days of GTK+, and derives
-from X Window System terminology. In many cases,
-gtk_window_set_default_size() is a better choice for toplevel
-windows than this function; setting the default size will still
-allow users to shrink the window. Setting the usize will force them
-to leave the window at least as large as the usize. When dealing
-with window sizes, gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can be a useful
-function as well.
-
-Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
-translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
-can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
-basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
-correct.
-
-Deprecated: 2.2: Use gtk_widget_set_size_request() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> minimum width, or -1 to unset
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> minimum height, or -1 to unset
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_menu_label">
<description>
Retrieves the menu label widget of the page containing @child.
@@ -2568,31 +2463,6 @@ than the default (the tab label).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_menu_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu widget.
-
-This kind of widget shows the list of recently used resources as
-a menu, each item as a menu item. Each item inside the menu might
-have an icon, representing its MIME type, and a number, for mnemonic
-access.
-
-This widget implements the #GtkRecentChooser interface.
-
-This widget creates its own #GtkRecentManager object. See the
-gtk_recent_chooser_menu_new_for_manager() function to know how to create
-a #GtkRecentChooserMenu widget bound to another #GtkRecentManager object.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_image_targets">
<description>
Add the writable image targets supported by #GtkSelection to
@@ -2613,43 +2483,26 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_completion">
+<function name="gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Sets @completion to be the auxiliary completion object to use with @entry.
-All further configuration of the completion mechanism is done on
- completion using the #GtkEntryCompletion API. Completion is disabled if
- completion is set to %NULL.
+Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
+If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
+If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
+underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
+accelerator called a mnemonic.
+Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkEntryCompletion or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_range_get_show_fill_level">
-<description>
-Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the label with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @range shows the fill level.
+<return> a new #GtkExpander widget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -2672,30 +2525,6 @@ mnemonic character
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget">
-<description>
-Sets @label_widget as the widget that will be used as the label
-for @button. If @label_widget is %NULL the "label" property is used
-as label. If "label" is also %NULL, the label in the stock item
-determined by the "stock_id" property is used as label. If
-"stock_id" is also %NULL, @button does not have a label.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label_widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget used as label, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_style_get_valist">
<description>
Non-vararg variant of gtk_style_get().
@@ -2841,126 +2670,82 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_geometry">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_completion">
<description>
-Obtains information about the location of the status icon
-on screen. This information can be used to e.g. position
-popups like notification bubbles.
-
-See gtk_status_icon_position_menu() for a more convenient
-alternative for positioning menus.
-
-Note that some platforms do not allow GTK+ to provide
-this information, and even on platforms that do allow it,
-the information is not reliable unless the status icon
-is embedded in a notification area, see
-gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
+Returns the auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> return location for the screen, or %NULL if the
-information is not needed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> return location for the area occupied by the status
-icon, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> return location for the orientation of the panel
-in which the status icon is embedded, or %NULL. A panel
-at the top or bottom of the screen is horizontal, a panel
-at the left or right is vertical.
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the location information has
-been filled in
+<return> The auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_vadjustment">
<description>
-Sets @sort_iter to point to the row in @tree_model_sort that corresponds to
-the row pointed at by @child_iter. If @sort_iter was not set, %FALSE
-is returned. Note: a boolean is only returned since 2.14.
+Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the vertical aspect.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sort_iter">
-<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @sort_iter was set, i.e. if @sort_iter is a
-valid iterator pointer to a visible row in the child model.
+<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
+used.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_headers_clickable">
+<function name="gtk_fixed_set_has_window">
<description>
-Allow the column title buttons to be clicked.
+Sets whether a #GtkFixed widget is created with a separate
+#GdkWindow for @widget->window or not. (By default, it will be
+created with no separate #GdkWindow). This function must be called
+while the #GtkFixed is not realized, for instance, immediately after the
+window is created.
+
+This function was added to provide an easy migration path for
+older applications which may expect #GtkFixed to have a separate window.
+
+Deprecated: 2.20: Use gtk_widget_set_has_window() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+<parameter name="fixed">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFixed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the columns are clickable.
+<parameter name="has_window">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if a separate window should be created
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_current_alpha">
<description>
-This function tells GTK+ that the user interface for your
-application requires users to read across tree rows and associate
-cells with one another. By default, GTK+ will then render the tree
-with alternating row colors. Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> use it
-just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled tree; that's a
-question for the theme. Some themes will draw tree rows in
-alternating colors even when rules are turned off, and users who
-prefer that appearance all the time can choose those themes. You
-should call this function only as a <emphasis>semantic</emphasis>
-hint to the theme engine that your tree makes alternating colors
-useful from a functional standpoint (since it has lots of columns,
-generally).
+Returns the current alpha value.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tree requires reading across rows
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_default_icon_list">
@@ -3071,6 +2856,33 @@ uneditable text).
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int_with_default">
+<description>
+Returns the value of @key, interpreted as
+an integer, or the default value.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="def">
+<parameter_description> the default value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the integer value of @key
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_starts_word">
<description>
Determines whether @iter begins a natural-language word. Word
@@ -3138,28 +2950,15 @@ signal and destroy it yourself.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_filename">
+<function name="gtk_vruler_new">
<description>
-Gets the filename for the icon. If the
-%GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN flag was passed
-to gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon(), there may be
-no filename if a builtin icon is returned; in this
-case, you should use gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf().
+Creates a new vertical ruler
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the filename for the icon, or %NULL
-if gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf() should
-be used instead. The return value is owned by
-GTK+ and should not be modified or freed.
-
+<return> a new #GtkVRuler.
</return>
</function>
@@ -3187,36 +2986,42 @@ Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_binding_entry_add_signal() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_hard_margins">
+<function name="gtk_buildable_custom_tag_start">
<description>
-Obtains the hardware printer margins of the #GtkPrintContext, in units.
+This is called for each unknown element under <child>.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="buildable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="top">
-<parameter_description> top hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder used to construct this object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="bottom">
-<parameter_description> bottom hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> child object or %NULL for non-child tags
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="left">
-<parameter_description> left hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="tagname">
+<parameter_description> name of tag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="right">
-<parameter_description> right hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="parser">
+<parameter_description> a #GMarkupParser structure to fill in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> return location for user data that will be passed in
+to parser functions
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the hard margins were retrieved
+<return> %TRUE if a object has a custom implementation, %FALSE
+if it doesn't.
</return>
</function>
@@ -3352,21 +3157,22 @@ g_intern_static_string().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_parent">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_set_screen">
<description>
-Sets the transient parent for windows shown by the
-#GtkMountOperation.
+Sets the screen for an icon theme; the screen is used
+to track the user's currently configured icon theme,
+which might be different for different screens.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -3483,6 +3289,54 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_draw_extension">
+<description>
+Draws an extension, i.e. a notebook tab.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_extension() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the extension
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the extension
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of the extension
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> width of the extension
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_side">
+<parameter_description> the side on to which the extension is attached
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_state">
<description>
Sets the widget state this icon source is intended to be used
@@ -3597,24 +3451,27 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_accepts_tab">
+<function name="gtk_window_unmaximize">
<description>
-Returns whether pressing the Tab key inserts a tab characters.
-gtk_text_view_set_accepts_tab().
+Asks to unmaximize @window. Note that you shouldn't assume the
+window is definitely unmaximized afterward, because other entities
+(e.g. the user or <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window
+manager</link>) could maximize it again, and not all window
+managers honor requests to unmaximize. But normally the window will
+end up unmaximized. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
+
+You can track maximization via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if pressing the Tab key inserts a tab character,
-%FALSE if pressing the Tab key moves the keyboard focus.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_select_iter">
@@ -3635,32 +3492,20 @@ Selects the specified iterator.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_set_size">
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_fraction">
<description>
-Changes the dimensions of a @size to @width x @height.
+Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a custom #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the new width in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the new height in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
+<parameter name="pbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_end_iter">
@@ -3709,25 +3554,20 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_tree_lines">
+<function name="gtk_vscrollbar_new">
<description>
-Sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders in @tree_view.
-This does not have any visible effects for lists.
+Creates a new vertical scrollbar.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="enabled">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable tree line drawing, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new #GtkVScrollbar
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_invisible_new_for_screen">
@@ -3770,23 +3610,37 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_window">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords">
<description>
-Determines whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. See
-gtk_widget_set_has_window().
+Converts bin_window coordinates (see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window())
+to widget relative coordinates.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bx">
+<parameter_description> bin_window X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="by">
+<parameter_description> bin_window Y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wx">
+<parameter_description> return location for widget X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wy">
+<parameter_description> return location for widget Y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_format">
@@ -3907,38 +3761,20 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport">
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_ref">
<description>
-Used to add children without native scrolling capabilities. This
-is simply a convenience function; it is equivalent to adding the
-unscrollable child to a viewport, then adding the viewport to the
-scrolled window. If a child has native scrolling, use
-gtk_container_add() instead of this function.
+Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
-The viewport scrolls the child by moving its #GdkWindow, and takes
-the size of the child to be the size of its toplevel #GdkWindow.
-This will be very wrong for most widgets that support native scrolling;
-for example, if you add a widget such as #GtkTreeView with a viewport,
-the whole widget will scroll, including the column headings. Thus,
-widgets with native scrolling support should not be used with the
-#GtkViewport proxy.
-
-A widget supports scrolling natively if the
-set_scroll_adjustments_signal field in #GtkWidgetClass is non-zero,
-i.e. has been filled in with a valid signal identifier.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the widget you want to scroll
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> @icon_set.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drop_item">
@@ -4038,24 +3874,36 @@ indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_text">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate_yrange">
<description>
-Retrieves the text displayed superimposed on the progress bar,
-if any, otherwise %NULL. The return value is a reference
-to the text, not a copy of it, so will become invalid
-if you change the text in the progress bar.
-
+Ensure that a region of a #GtkTextLayout is valid. The ::changed
+signal will be emitted if any lines are validated.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="anchor">
+<parameter_description> iter pointing into a line that will be used as the
+coordinate origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y0_">
+<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
+which to begin validation. (The offset here is in pixels
+after validation.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y1_">
+<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
+which to end validation. (The offset here is in pixels
+after validation.)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> text, or %NULL; this string is owned by the widget
-and should not be modified or freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset">
@@ -4101,6 +3949,24 @@ or %NULL
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify">
+<description>
+Stops emission of #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on @widget. The
+signals are queued until gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify() is called
+on @widget.
+
+This is the analogue of g_object_freeze_notify() for child properties.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_remove_action">
<description>
Removes an action object from the action group.
@@ -4121,35 +3987,112 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_reset_shapes">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_wrap_license">
<description>
-Recursively resets the shape on this widget and its descendants.
+Sets whether the license text in @about is
+automatically wrapped.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wrap_license">
+<parameter_description> whether to wrap the license
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_wrap_license">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_size">
<description>
-Sets whether the license text in @about is
-automatically wrapped.
+Sets the default size of a window. If the window's "natural" size
+(its size request) is larger than the default, the default will be
+ignored. More generally, if the default size does not obey the
+geometry hints for the window (gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can
+be used to set these explicitly), the default size will be clamped
+to the nearest permitted size.
-Since: 2.8
+Unlike gtk_widget_set_size_request(), which sets a size request for
+a widget and thus would keep users from shrinking the window, this
+function only sets the initial size, just as if the user had
+resized the window themselves. Users can still shrink the window
+again as they normally would. Setting a default size of -1 means to
+use the "natural" default size (the size request of the window).
+
+For more control over a window's initial size and how resizing works,
+investigate gtk_window_set_geometry_hints().
+
+For some uses, gtk_window_resize() is a more appropriate function.
+gtk_window_resize() changes the current size of the window, rather
+than the size to be used on initial display. gtk_window_resize() always
+affects the window itself, not the geometry widget.
+
+The default size of a window only affects the first time a window is
+shown; if a window is hidden and re-shown, it will remember the size
+it had prior to hiding, rather than using the default size.
+
+Windows can't actually be 0x0 in size, they must be at least 1x1, but
+passing 0 for @width and @height is OK, resulting in a 1x1 default size.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap_license">
-<parameter_description> whether to wrap the license
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width in pixels, or -1 to unset the default width
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height in pixels, or -1 to unset the default height
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions_full">
+<description>
+This variant of gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions() adds a
+#GDestroyNotify callback for @user_data.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the number of entries
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
+no action should be activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="on_change">
+<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> destroy notification callback for @user_data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4209,43 +4152,58 @@ widget has not been set then %NULL is returned.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_is_embedded">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_custom">
<description>
-Returns whether the status icon is embedded in a notification
-area.
+Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object with the
+given parameters.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the paper name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="display_name">
+<parameter_description> the human-readable name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the paper width, in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the paper height, in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the status icon is embedded in
-a notification area.
+<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object, use gtk_paper_size_free()
+to free it
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_is_embedded">
<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying a stock icon. Sample stock icon
-names are #GTK_STOCK_OPEN, #GTK_STOCK_QUIT. You can register your
-own stock icon names, see gtk_icon_factory_add_default() and
-gtk_icon_factory_add().
+Returns whether the status icon is embedded in a notification
+area.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon id
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+<return> %TRUE if the status icon is embedded in
+a notification area.
</return>
</function>
@@ -4323,6 +4281,63 @@ Sets whether the entry has a beveled frame around it.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_dialog_run">
+<description>
+Blocks in a recursive main loop until the @dialog either emits the
+#GtkDialog::response signal, or is destroyed. If the dialog is
+destroyed during the call to gtk_dialog_run(), gtk_dialog_run() returns
+#GTK_RESPONSE_NONE. Otherwise, it returns the response ID from the
+::response signal emission.
+
+Before entering the recursive main loop, gtk_dialog_run() calls
+gtk_widget_show() on the dialog for you. Note that you still
+need to show any children of the dialog yourself.
+
+During gtk_dialog_run(), the default behavior of #GtkWidget::delete-event
+is disabled; if the dialog receives ::delete_event, it will not be
+destroyed as windows usually are, and gtk_dialog_run() will return
+#GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT. Also, during gtk_dialog_run() the dialog
+will be modal. You can force gtk_dialog_run() to return at any time by
+calling gtk_dialog_response() to emit the ::response signal. Destroying
+the dialog during gtk_dialog_run() is a very bad idea, because your
+post-run code won't know whether the dialog was destroyed or not.
+
+After gtk_dialog_run() returns, you are responsible for hiding or
+destroying the dialog if you wish to do so.
+
+Typical usage of this function might be:
+|[
+gint result = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
+switch (result)
+{
+case GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT:
+do_application_specific_something ();
+break;
+default:
+do_nothing_since_dialog_was_cancelled ();
+break;
+}
+gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
+]|
+
+Note that even though the recursive main loop gives the effect of a
+modal dialog (it prevents the user from interacting with other
+windows in the same window group while the dialog is run), callbacks
+such as timeouts, IO channel watches, DND drops, etc, <emphasis>will</emphasis>
+be triggered during a gtk_dialog_run() call.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> response ID
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_refilter">
<description>
Emits ::row_changed for each row in the child model, which causes
@@ -4340,22 +4355,49 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_adjustment">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Replaces the #GtkAdjustment associated with @spin_button.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment to replace the existing adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the resolution in dpi
+<return></return>
+</function>
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_container_forall">
+<description>
+Invokes @callback on each child of @container, including children
+that are considered "internal" (implementation details of the
+container). "Internal" children generally weren't added by the user
+of the container, but were added by the container implementation
+itself. Most applications should use gtk_container_foreach(),
+rather than gtk_container_forall().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> a callback
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback_data">
+<parameter_description> callback user data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_slice">
@@ -4419,6 +4461,26 @@ in #GtkEntry, or 0 if there is no maximum.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_set_visible_horizontal">
+<description>
+Sets whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
+<parameter_description> whether the action is visible horizontally
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_set_text_column">
<description>
Sets the model column which @entry_box should use to get strings from
@@ -4440,24 +4502,28 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_top_margin">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_drop_item">
<description>
-Gets the default top margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+Gets the tool item at position (x, y).
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default top margin
+<return> the #GtkToolItem at position (x, y)
</return>
</function>
@@ -4547,20 +4613,19 @@ copy the array.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_palette">
<description>
-Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
+Shows and hides the palette based upon the value of @has_palette.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> a title for the menu in tearoff mode
+<parameter name="has_palette">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if palette is to be visible, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4612,41 +4677,39 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_focus">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new">
<description>
-Draws a focus indicator around the given rectangle on @window using the
-given style.
+Creates a new #GtkFileChooserDialog. This function is analogous to
+gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons().
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_focus() instead.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> Title of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> Open or save mode for the dialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+<parameter name="first_button_text">
+<parameter_description> stock ID or text to go in the first button, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> response ID for the first button, then additional (button, id) pairs, ending with %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkFileChooserDialog
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_settings_get_for_screen">
@@ -4667,113 +4730,64 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_unit">
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_new_with_adjustment">
<description>
-Sets up the transformation for the cairo context obtained from
-#GtkPrintContext in such a way that distances are measured in
-units of @unit.
+Creates a new #GtkProgressBar with an associated #GtkAdjustment.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit to use
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GtkProgressBar.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_attributes">
<description>
-Sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
-for the scrolled window.
-
-The default is %GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT, meaning the child is
-in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right.
-Other values in #GtkCornerType are %GTK_CORNER_TOP_RIGHT,
-%GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, and %GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT.
+Sets a #PangoAttrList; the attributes in the list are applied to the
+label text.
-See also gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement() and
-gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
+<note><para>The attributes set with this function will be applied
+and merged with any other attributes previously effected by way
+of the #GtkLabel:use-underline or #GtkLabel:use-markup properties.
+While it is not recommended to mix markup strings with manually set
+attributes, if you must; know that the attributes will be applied
+to the label after the markup string is parsed.</para></note>
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="window_placement">
-<parameter_description> position of the child window
+<parameter name="attrs">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_slider">
+<function name="gtk_get_event_widget">
<description>
-Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
-given style and orientation.
+If @event is %NULL or the event was not associated with any widget,
+returns %NULL, otherwise returns the widget that received the event
+originally.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> a shadow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the orientation to be used
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_get_default_files">
@@ -4817,31 +4831,37 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_set_valist">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_key_file">
<description>
-Sets one or more child properties for @child and @container.
+Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file. If the
+file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
+#GKeyFileError.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property to set
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use the default
+"Print Settings"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="var_args">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and values, starting
-with @first_prop_name
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_pos">
@@ -4884,6 +4904,30 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_to_key_file">
+<description>
+This function adds the paper size from @size to @key_file.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to save the paper size to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the group to add the settings to in @key_file
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_app_paintable">
<description>
Sets whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
@@ -4942,30 +4986,44 @@ See gtk_text_buffer_move_mark() for details.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_set_title">
<description>
-Moves @iter within a line, to a new <emphasis>character</emphasis>
-(not byte) offset. The given character offset must be less than or
-equal to the number of characters in the line; if equal, @iter
-moves to the start of the next line. See
-gtk_text_iter_set_line_index() if you have a byte index rather than
-a character offset.
+Modifies the @title of the browse dialog used by @button.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button widget to modify.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="char_on_line">
-<parameter_description> a character offset relative to the start of @iter's current line
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the new browse dialog title.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new icon theme object. Icon theme objects are used
+to lookup up an icon by name in a particular icon theme.
+Usually, you'll want to use gtk_icon_theme_get_default()
+or gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen() rather than creating
+a new icon theme object for scratch.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> the newly created #GtkIconTheme object.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_style_get">
<description>
Gets the values of a multiple style properties for @widget_type
@@ -5043,23 +5101,22 @@ Deprecated: 2.8:
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_word_starts">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_is_showing">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start() up to @count times.
+Returns whether the #GtkMountOperation is currently displaying
+a window.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of times to move
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+<return> %TRUE if @op is currently displaying a window
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -5107,23 +5164,46 @@ call gdk_font_ref().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_newv">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_items">
<description>
-Non vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.
+Gets the list of recently used resources in form of #GtkRecentInfo objects.
+The return value of this function is affected by the "sort-type" and
+"limit" properties of @chooser.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="n_columns">
-<parameter_description> number of columns in the tree store
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="types">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GType types for the columns, from first to last
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly allocated
+list of #GtkRecentInfo objects. You should
+use gtk_recent_info_unref() on every item of the list, and then free
+the list itself using g_list_free().
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font">
+<description>
+Gets the currently-selected font.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkTreeStore
+<return> the #GdkFont from the #GtkFontSelection for the
+currently selected font in the dialog, or %NULL if no font is selected
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -5194,28 +5274,23 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_ui">
<description>
-Changes the tab label for @child. If %NULL is specified
-for @tab_label, then the page will have the label 'page N'.
+Creates a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> of the merged UI.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description> the tab label widget to use, or %NULL for default tab
-label.
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of
+the merged UI.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_get_text_length">
@@ -5295,6 +5370,8 @@ are drawn beside the icons instead of below.
Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gtk_icon_view_set_item_orientation()
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="icon_view">
@@ -5390,6 +5467,32 @@ and position to their child widgets.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_prepend">
+<description>
+Prepends a new row to @tree_store. If @parent is non-%NULL, then it will prepend
+the new row before the first child of @parent, otherwise it will prepend a row
+to the top level. @iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row
+will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to
+call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepended row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toggle_action_set_draw_as_radio">
<description>
Sets whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
@@ -5494,133 +5597,98 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_lines">
-<description>
-Moves @count lines backward, if possible (if @count would move
-past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
-the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
-moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
-the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
-moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of lines to move backward
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_ellipsize">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_list">
<description>
-Gets the ellipsization mode of @group.
+Retrieves the list of icons set by gtk_window_set_icon_list().
+The list is copied, but the reference count on each
+member won't be incremented.
-Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #PangoEllipsizeMode of @group
-
+<return> copy of window's icon list
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_show_about_dialog">
<description>
-Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file
+This is a convenience function for showing an application's about box.
+The constructed dialog is associated with the parent window and
+reused for future invocations of this function.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
-to use the default name "Page Setup"
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties, %NULL-terminated
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_send_expose">
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_unselect_range">
<description>
-Very rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
-an expose event signals on a widget. This function is not
-normally used directly. The only time it is used is when
-propagating an expose event to a child %NO_WINDOW widget, and
-that is normally done using gtk_container_propagate_expose().
-
-If you want to force an area of a window to be redrawn,
-use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() or gdk_window_invalidate_region().
-To cause the redraw to be done immediately, follow that call
-with a call to gdk_window_process_updates().
+Unselects a range of nodes, determined by @start_path and @end_path
+inclusive.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a expose #GdkEvent
+<parameter name="start_path">
+<parameter_description> The initial node of the range.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_path">
+<parameter_description> The initial node of the range.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if
-the event was handled)
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_set_image">
+<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color">
<description>
-Set the image of @button to the given widget. Note that
-it depends on the #GtkSettings:gtk-button-images setting whether the
-image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call
-gtk_widget_show() on @image yourself.
+Parses a color in the <link linkend="color=format">format</link> expected
+in a RC file.
+
+Note that theme engines should use gtk_rc_parse_color_full() in
+order to support symbolic colors.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+<parameter name="scanner">
+<parameter_description> a #GScanner
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a widget to set as the image for the button
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GdkColor structure in which to store the result
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %G_TOKEN_NONE if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token
+that was expected but not found
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_grid_lines">
@@ -5681,21 +5749,25 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_handle_position">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_embed_page_setup">
<description>
-Gets the handle position of the handle box. See
-gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
+Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
+Selected page setup is stored as default page setup in #GtkPrintOperation.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="handle_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embed">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to embed page setup selection in the #GtkPrintDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current handle position.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert_after">
@@ -5874,36 +5946,23 @@ GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF);</literal> will create a new #GtkTreeStore with three col
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ruler_get_range">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_owner">
<description>
-Retrieves values indicating the range and current position of a #GtkRuler.
-See gtk_ruler_set_range().
+If the clipboard contents callbacks were set with
+gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner(), and the gtk_clipboard_set_with_data() or
+gtk_clipboard_clear() has not subsequently called, returns the owner set
+by gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ruler">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="lower">
-<parameter_description> location to store lower limit of the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="upper">
-<parameter_description> location to store upper limit of the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> location to store the current position of the mark on the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_size">
-<parameter_description> location to store the maximum size of the ruler used when calculating
-the space to leave for the text, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the owner of the clipboard, if any; otherwise %NULL.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_begin_move_drag">
@@ -6161,41 +6220,75 @@ warning message, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_unset_style">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_spacing">
<description>
-Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_tool_palette_set_style(),
-so that user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
+Returns the value of the ::spacing property.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the space between cells
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_is_important">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_file">
<description>
-Checks whether @action is important or not
+Reads the page setup from the file @file_name.
+See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> the filename to read the page setup from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @action is important
+<return> %TRUE on success
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_alignment">
+<description>
+Sets the renderer's alignment within its available space.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> the x alignment of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> the y alignment of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_screen">
<description>
Returns the #GdkScreen associated with @status_icon.
@@ -6214,33 +6307,72 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_new_from_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_paint_box_gap">
<description>
-Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file Returns a new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored
-page setup, or %NULL if an error occurred.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Draws a box in @window using the given style and state and shadow type,
+leaving a gap in one side.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
-to use the default name "Page Setup"
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_side">
+<parameter_description> side in which to leave the gap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_x">
+<parameter_description> starting position of the gap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_width">
+<parameter_description> width of the gap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the restored #GtkPageSetup
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets">
@@ -6311,21 +6443,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_unset_style">
-<description>
-Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_toolbar_set_style(), so that
-user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_model">
<description>
Sets the model for a #GtkIconView.
@@ -6368,6 +6485,51 @@ the @assistant, if the @assistant has no pages, -1 will be returned
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_send_focus_change">
+<description>
+Sends the focus change @event to @widget
+
+This function is not meant to be used by applications. The only time it
+should be used is when it is necessary for a #GtkWidget to assign focus
+to a widget that is semantically owned by the first widget even though
+it's not a direct child - for instance, a search entry in a floating
+window similar to the quick search in #GtkTreeView.
+
+An example of its usage is:
+
+|[
+GdkEvent *fevent = gdk_event_new (GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE);
+
+fevent->focus_change.type = GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE;
+fevent->focus_change.in = TRUE;
+fevent->focus_change.window = gtk_widget_get_window (widget);
+if (fevent->focus_change.window != NULL)
+g_object_ref (fevent->focus_change.window);
+
+gtk_widget_send_focus_change (widget, fevent);
+
+gdk_event_free (event);
+]|
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent of type GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the return value from the event signal emission: %TRUE
+if the event was handled, and %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_append_text">
<description>
Appends @string to the list of strings stored in @combo_box. Note that
@@ -6411,32 +6573,51 @@ free the list itself using g_list_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_text">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_radio">
<description>
-Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format
-(with printf()-style).
-
-Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
-bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+Returns whether we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_style_attach">
+<description>
+Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the
+colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes
+it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may
+involve the creation of a new style if the style has already
+been attached to a window with a different style and colormap.
+
+Since this function may return a new object, you have to use it
+in the following way:
+<literal>style = gtk_style_attach (style, window)</literal>
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> Either @style, or a newly-created #GtkStyle.
+If the style is newly created, the style parameter
+will be unref'ed, and the new style will have
+a reference count belonging to the caller.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_new">
@@ -6483,28 +6664,35 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_focus_on_click">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_insert_page">
<description>
-Sets whether the combo box will grab focus when it is clicked with
-the mouse. Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places
-like toolbars where you don't want the keyboard focus removed from
-the main area of the application.
+Insert a page into @notebook at the given position.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="focus_on_click">
-<parameter_description> whether the combo box grabs focus when clicked
-with the mouse
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,
+or -1 to append the page after all other pages.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
+page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_style_get_property">
@@ -6592,6 +6780,24 @@ clipboard could not be converted into text form.)
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_overwrite_mode">
+<description>
+Sets overwrite mode
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="overwrite">
+<parameter_description> overwrite mode
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_operation_preview_render_page">
<description>
Renders a page to the preview, using the print context that
@@ -6718,74 +6924,36 @@ gtk_binding_entry_add_signal() on @binding_set.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_stick">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_target_group">
<description>
-Asks to stick @window, which means that it will appear on all user
-desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely
-stuck afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unstick it
-again, and some window managers do not support sticking
-windows. But normally the window will end up stuck. Just don't
-write code that crashes if not.
-
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window.
-
-You can track stickiness via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+Get the target entry for a dragged #GtkToolItemGroup.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #GtkTargetEntry for a dragged group
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_model">
+<function name="gtk_viewport_get_view_window">
<description>
-Sets the model for @cell_view. If @cell_view already has a model
-set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If @model is
-%NULL, then it will unset the old model.
+Gets the view window of the #GtkViewport.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
+<parameter name="viewport">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_menu_label">
-<description>
-Changes the menu label for the page containing @child.
+<return> a #GdkWindow
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the child widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="menu_label">
-<parameter_description> the menu label, or NULL for default
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset">
@@ -6827,6 +6995,26 @@ format's mime-type.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_get_proxies">
+<description>
+Returns the proxy widgets for an action.
+See also gtk_widget_get_action().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
+and must not be modified.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_remove_filter">
<description>
Removes @filter from the list of #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
@@ -6847,20 +7035,31 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_short_label">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_construct">
<description>
-Sets a shorter label text on @action.
+Initializes an item factory.
-Since: 2.16
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="short_label">
-<parameter_description> the label text to set
+<parameter name="container_type">
+<parameter_description> the kind of menu to create; can be
+#GTK_TYPE_MENU_BAR, #GTK_TYPE_MENU or #GTK_TYPE_OPTION_MENU
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the factory path of @ifactory, a string of the form
+<literal>"<name>"</literal>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup to which the accelerators for the
+menu items will be added, or %NULL to create a new one
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6910,6 +7109,31 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_filename">
+<description>
+Gets the filename for the icon. If the
+%GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN flag was passed
+to gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon(), there may be
+no filename if a builtin icon is returned; in this
+case, you should use gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the filename for the icon, or %NULL
+if gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf() should
+be used instead. The return value is owned by
+GTK+ and should not be modified or freed.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_class_find_style_property">
<description>
Finds a style property of a widget class by name.
@@ -6958,23 +7182,23 @@ or %NULL.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_track_visited_links">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_popup">
<description>
-Returns whether the label is currently keeping track
-of clicked links.
+Pops up the menu or dropdown list of @combo_box.
-Since: 2.18
+This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
+applications should have little use for it.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if clicked links are remembered
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_deleted">
@@ -7034,6 +7258,24 @@ See gtk_label_set_line_wrap().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_hadjustment">
+<description>
+Gets the horizontal adjustment of the tool palette.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the horizontal adjustment of @palette
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toolbar_prepend_item">
<description>
Adds a new button to the beginning (top or left edges) of the given toolbar.
@@ -7091,61 +7333,23 @@ Creates a new #GtkStatusbar ready for messages.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_expander">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website_label">
<description>
-Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView. @x and @y specify the
-center the expander. The size of the expander is determined by the
-"expander-size" style property of @widget. (If widget is not
-specified or doesn't have an "expander-size" property, an
-unspecified default size will be used, since the caller doesn't
-have sufficient information to position the expander, this is
-likely not useful.) The expander is expander_size pixels tall
-in the collapsed position and expander_size pixels wide in the
-expanded position.
+Returns the label used for the website link.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expander_style">
-<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in; determines
-whether the expander is collapsed, expanded, or in an
-intermediate state.
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The label used for the website link. The string is
+owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords">
@@ -7175,17 +7379,40 @@ gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()).
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="window_x">
-<parameter_description> window x coordinate return location
+<parameter_description> window x coordinate return location or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="window_y">
-<parameter_description> window y coordinate return location
+<parameter_description> window y coordinate return location or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_height">
+<description>
+Gets the paper height of the #GtkPaperSize, in
+units of @unit.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the paper height
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_title">
<description>
Sets the title of the #GtkWindow. The title of a window will be
@@ -7337,39 +7564,6 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_show_hidden">
-<description>
-Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
-See gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden().
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if hidden files and folders are displayed.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_layout_thaw">
-<description>
-This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_clear_cache">
<description>
This function should almost never be called. It clears the @tree_model_sort
@@ -7528,24 +7722,48 @@ and a suitable target for text is included, otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_vertical">
<description>
-Gets the title of the color selection dialog.
+Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> An internal string, do not free the return value
+<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_chain">
+<description>
+Sets a focus chain, overriding the one computed automatically by GTK+.
+
+In principle each widget in the chain should be a descendant of the
+container, but this is not enforced by this method, since it's allowed
+to set the focus chain before you pack the widgets, or have a widget
+in the chain that isn't always packed. The necessary checks are done
+when the focus chain is actually traversed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="focusable_widgets">
+<parameter_description> the new focus chain
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_homogeneous">
<description>
Sets whether @tool_item is to be allocated the same size as other
@@ -7603,69 +7821,58 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_border">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy">
<description>
-Sets the width the border around the tab labels
-in a notebook. This is equivalent to calling
-gtk_notebook_set_tab_hborder (@notebook, @border_width) followed
-by gtk_notebook_set_tab_vborder (@notebook, @border_width).
+Sets the scrollbar policy for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars.
+
+The policy determines when the scrollbar should appear; it is a value
+from the #GtkPolicyType enumeration. If %GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS, the
+scrollbar is always present; if %GTK_POLICY_NEVER, the scrollbar is
+never present; if %GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC, the scrollbar is present only
+if needed (that is, if the slider part of the bar would be smaller
+than the trough - the display is larger than the page size).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="border_width">
-<parameter_description> width of the border around the tab labels.
+<parameter name="hscrollbar_policy">
+<parameter_description> policy for horizontal bar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkToolButton containing the image and text from a
-stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
-and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
+<parameter name="vscrollbar_policy">
+<parameter_description> policy for vertical bar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkToolButton
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_link_button_new_with_label">
+<function name="gtk_toggle_button_set_mode">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkLinkButton containing a label.
+Sets whether the button is displayed as a separate indicator and label.
+You can call this function on a checkbutton or a radiobutton with
+ draw_indicator = %FALSE to make the button look like a normal button
-Since: 2.10
+This function only affects instances of classes like #GtkCheckButton
+and #GtkRadioButton that derive from #GtkToggleButton,
+not instances of #GtkToggleButton itself.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a valid URI
+<parameter name="toggle_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToggleButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the button
+<parameter name="draw_indicator">
+<parameter_description> if %TRUE, draw the button as a separate indicator
+and label; if %FALSE, draw the button like a normal button
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new link button widget.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_modify_base">
@@ -7743,37 +7950,6 @@ if no transient parent has been set.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_has_frame">
-<description>
-(Note: this is a special-purpose function for the framebuffer port,
-that causes GTK+ to draw its own window border. For most applications,
-you want gtk_window_set_decorated() instead, which tells the window
-manager whether to draw the window border.)
-
-If this function is called on a window with setting of %TRUE, before
-it is realized or showed, it will have a "frame" window around
- window->window, accessible in @window->frame. Using the signal
-frame_event you can receive all events targeted at the frame.
-
-This function is used by the linux-fb port to implement managed
-windows, but it could conceivably be used by X-programs that
-want to do their own window decorations.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> a boolean
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords">
<description>
Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the bin_window
@@ -7807,6 +7983,32 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_printer_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkPrinter.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the printer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="backend">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintBackend
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="virtual_">
+<parameter_description> whether the printer is virtual
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkPrinter
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_group_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkWindowGroup object. Grabs added with
@@ -7843,6 +8045,33 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_markup">
+<description>
+Sets @markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
+the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+
+This function will take care of setting #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip to %TRUE
+and of the default handler for the #GtkStatusIcon::query-tooltip signal.
+
+See also the #GtkStatusIcon:tooltip-markup property and
+gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="markup">
+<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_new_with_attributes">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn with a number of default values. This is
@@ -7965,6 +8194,22 @@ and toggle focus between the colliding widgets otherwise.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_size_group_new">
+<description>
+Create a new #GtkSizeGroup.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="mode">
+<parameter_description> the mode for the new size group.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly created #GtkSizeGroup
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_button_get_image">
<description>
Gets the widget that is currenty set as the image of @button.
@@ -8074,39 +8319,23 @@ g_free (markup);
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_default_page_setup">
<description>
-Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. This icon is used when
-the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
-managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
-frame, or display it in other contexts.
-
-The icon should be provided in whatever size it was naturally
-drawn; that is, don't scale the image before passing it to
-GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired
-final size is known, to allow best quality.
-
-If you have your icon hand-drawn in multiple sizes, use
-gtk_window_set_icon_list(). Then the best size will be used.
-
-This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon_list()
-with a 1-element list.
+Returns the default page setup, see
+gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup().
-See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
-for all windows in your application in one go.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> icon image, or %NULL
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default page setup
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width">
@@ -8135,6 +8364,38 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_drop_highlight_item">
+<description>
+Highlights @toolbar to give an idea of what it would look like
+if @item was added to @toolbar at the position indicated by @index_.
+If @item is %NULL, highlighting is turned off. In that case @index_
+is ignored.
+
+The @tool_item passed to this function must not be part of any widget
+hierarchy. When an item is set as drop highlight item it can not
+added to any widget hierarchy or used as highlight item for another
+toolbar.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem, or %NULL to turn of highlighting
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="index_">
+<parameter_description> a position on @toolbar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_private">
<description>
Returns whether @chooser should display recently used resources
@@ -8214,47 +8475,62 @@ Creates a copy of @source; mostly useful for language bindings.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_item">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_paper_size">
<description>
-Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the item at @path.
-See also gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
-See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT,
+converted to a #GtkPaperSize.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the paper size
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_default_source">
+<function name="gtk_widget_render_icon">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE.
+A convenience function that uses the theme engine and RC file
+settings for @widget to look up @stock_id and render it to
+a pixbuf. @stock_id should be a stock icon ID such as
+#GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. @size should be a size
+such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU. @detail should be a string that
+identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so that
+theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or code.
+
+The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
+the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
+after use with g_object_unref().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> a stock ID
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> (type int) a stock size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1 means
+render at the size of the source and don't scale (if there are
+multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> render detail to pass to theme engine
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default source
-
+<return> a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn't known
</return>
</function>
@@ -8343,6 +8619,36 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_from_file">
+<description>
+Sets the icon for @window.
+Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
+
+This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon()
+with a pixbuf created by loading the image from @filename.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> location of icon file
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="err">
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_cursor_visible">
<description>
Sets whether the insertion cursor should be shown. Generally,
@@ -8389,21 +8695,43 @@ or a method on the #GtkTreeModel interface is called.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_scale_new">
<description>
-Retrieves the title of the browse dialog used by @button. The returned value
-should not be modified or freed.
+Creates a new #GtkScale.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the scale's orientation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment which sets the range of the scale, or
+%NULL to create a new adjustment.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a pointer to the browse dialog's title.
+<return> a new #GtkScale
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_hborder">
+<description>
+Returns the horizontal width of a tab border.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> horizontal width of a tab border
</return>
</function>
@@ -8440,22 +8768,34 @@ this widget).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_name">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable">
<description>
-Gets the name of the #GtkPaperSize.
+This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder
+models that support the #GtkDragSourceIface and the
+#GtkDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
+these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
+model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
+these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
+row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
+the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
+drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
-Since: 2.10
+This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
+reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably
+handle drag and drop manually.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="reorderable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the tree can be reordered.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the name of @size
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_file">
@@ -8506,24 +8846,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_get_storage_type">
-<description>
-Gets the type of representation being used by the #GtkImage
-to store image data. If the #GtkImage has no image data,
-the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> image representation being used
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_scroll_adjustments">
<description>
For widgets that support scrolling, sets the scroll adjustments and
@@ -8552,25 +8874,6 @@ support scrolling.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new_merge_id">
-<description>
-Returns an unused merge id, suitable for use with
-gtk_ui_manager_add_ui().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an unused merge id.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_unregister_serialize_format">
<description>
This function unregisters a rich text format that was previously
@@ -8611,6 +8914,47 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_list">
+<description>
+Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. The icon is used when
+the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
+managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
+frame, or display it in other contexts.
+
+gtk_window_set_icon_list() allows you to pass in the same icon in
+several hand-drawn sizes. The list should contain the natural sizes
+your icon is available in; that is, don't scale the image before
+passing it to GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute,
+when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.
+
+By passing several sizes, you may improve the final image quality
+of the icon, by reducing or eliminating automatic image scaling.
+
+Recommended sizes to provide: 16x16, 32x32, 48x48 at minimum, and
+larger images (64x64, 128x128) if you have them.
+
+See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
+for all windows in your application in one go.
+
+Note that transient windows (those who have been set transient for another
+window using gtk_window_set_transient_for()) will inherit their
+icon from their transient parent. So there's no need to explicitly
+set the icon on transient windows.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> list of #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_set_position">
<description>
Sets the cursor position in an entry to the given value.
@@ -8673,31 +9017,20 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_query">
+<function name="gtk_scale_get_draw_value">
<description>
-Queries an accelerator group for all entries matching @accel_key and
- accel_mods
+Returns whether the current value is displayed as a string
+next to the slider.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to query
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> location to return the number of entries found, or %NULL
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an array of @n_entries #GtkAccelGroupEntry elements, or %NULL. The array is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
+<return> whether the current value is displayed as a string
</return>
</function>
@@ -8802,31 +9135,62 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_delete_text">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_active_iter">
<description>
-Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
-those characters at positions from @start_pos up to, but not including
- end_pos If @end_pos is negative, then the the characters deleted
-are those from @start_pos to the end of the text.
+Sets @iter to point to the current active item, if it exists.
-Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_pos">
-<parameter_description> start position
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_pos">
-<parameter_description> end position
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_new_with_model">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget with the model initialized to @model.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> the model.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_accessible_get_widget">
+<description>
+Gets the #GtkWidget corresponding to the #GtkAccessible. The returned widget
+does not have a reference added, so you do not need to unref it.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accessible">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccessible
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> pointer to the #GtkWidget corresponding to
+the #GtkAccessible, or %NULL.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_layout_clear">
@@ -8864,25 +9228,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_exists">
-<description>
-Checks whether the resource pointed by @info still exists. At
-the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the resource exists
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_item">
<description>
Get the dragged item from the selection.
@@ -9002,31 +9347,19 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_action_widget">
+<function name="gtk_widget_ensure_style">
<description>
-Sets @widget as one of the action widgets. Depending on the pack type
-the widget will be placed before or after the tabs. You can use
-a #GtkBox if you need to pack more than one widget on the same side.
-
-Note that action widgets are "internal" children of the notebook and thus
-not included in the list returned from gtk_container_foreach().
-
-Since: 2.20
+Ensures that @widget has a style (@widget->style). Not a very useful
+function; most of the time, if you want the style, the widget is
+realized, and realized widgets are guaranteed to have a style
+already.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pack_type">
-<parameter_description> pack type of the action widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -9103,16 +9436,23 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_vseparator_new">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_animation">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkVSeparator.
-
+Causes the #GtkImage to display the given animation (or display
+nothing, if you set the animation to %NULL).
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbufAnimation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkVSeparator.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_parent_window">
@@ -9265,57 +9605,61 @@ anchor is returned (with no new reference count added). Otherwise,
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_unblock_activate_from">
+<function name="gtk_binding_set_new">
<description>
-Re-enables calls to the gtk_action_activate()
-function by signals on the given proxy widget. This undoes the
-blocking done by gtk_action_block_activate_from().
+GTK+ maintains a global list of binding sets. Each binding set has
+a unique name which needs to be specified upon creation.
-This function is intended for use by action implementations.
-Since: 2.4
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="set_name">
+<parameter_description> unique name of this binding set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> new binding set
+</return>
+</function>
-Deprecated: 2.16: activatables are now responsible for activating the
-action directly so this doesnt apply anymore.
+<function name="gtk_icon_size_register_alias">
+<description>
+Registers @alias as another name for @target.
+So calling gtk_icon_size_from_name() with @alias as argument
+will return @target.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="alias">
+<parameter_description> an alias for @target
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> a proxy widget
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> an existing icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing">
+<function name="gtk_offscreen_window_get_pixmap">
<description>
-Informs the cell renderer that the editing is stopped.
-If @canceled is %TRUE, the cell renderer will emit the
-#GtkCellRenderer::editing-canceled signal.
-
-This function should be called by cell renderer implementations
-in response to the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal of
-#GtkCellEditable.
+Retrieves a snapshot of the contained widget in the form of
+a #GdkPixmap. If you need to keep this around over window
+resizes then you should add a reference to it.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="canceled">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the editing has been canceled
+<parameter name="offscreen">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkOffscreenWindow contained widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GdkPixmap pointer to the offscreen pixmap, or %NULL.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_button_new_with_mnemonic">
@@ -9404,44 +9748,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new file-selecting button widget.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the title of the browse dialog.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the open mode for the widget.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new button widget.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_get_size">
-<description>
-Returns the size of the table (number of tags)
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> number of tags in @table
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_color_button_new">
<description>
Creates a new color button. This returns a widget in the form of
@@ -9644,39 +9950,6 @@ Determines whether the color selector has a color palette.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits">
-<description>
-Sets the translator credits string which is displayed in
-the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog.
-
-The intended use for this string is to display the translator
-of the language which is currently used in the user interface.
-Using gettext(), a simple way to achieve that is to mark the
-string for translation:
-|[
-gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits (about, _("translator-credits"));
-]|
-It is a good idea to use the customary msgid "translator-credits" for this
-purpose, since translators will already know the purpose of that msgid, and
-since #GtkAboutDialog will detect if "translator-credits" is untranslated
-and hide the tab.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="translator_credits">
-<parameter_description> the translator credits
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_path">
<description>
Obtains the path in which to look for IM modules. See the documentation
@@ -9779,6 +10052,53 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_geometry">
+<description>
+Obtains information about the location of the status icon
+on screen. This information can be used to e.g. position
+popups like notification bubbles.
+
+See gtk_status_icon_position_menu() for a more convenient
+alternative for positioning menus.
+
+Note that some platforms do not allow GTK+ to provide
+this information, and even on platforms that do allow it,
+the information is not reliable unless the status icon
+is embedded in a notification area, see
+gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> return location for the screen, or %NULL if the
+information is not needed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> return location for the area occupied by the status
+icon, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> return location for the orientation of the panel
+in which the status icon is embedded, or %NULL. A panel
+at the top or bottom of the screen is horizontal, a panel
+at the left or right is vertical.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the location information has
+been filled in
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_get_pixel_size">
<description>
Gets the pixel size used for named icons.
@@ -9797,6 +10117,32 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_item">
+<description>
+Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the item at @path.
+See also gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
+See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_border_window_size">
<description>
Gets the width of the specified border window. See
@@ -9873,6 +10219,26 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_insert_text() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_modify_font">
+<description>
+Sets the font to use for a widget. All other style values are left
+untouched. See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="font_desc">
+<parameter_description> the font description to use, or %NULL to undo
+the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_font().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_statusbar_remove">
<description>
Forces the removal of a message from a statusbar's stack.
@@ -9974,21 +10340,23 @@ user can't interact with them. Insensitive widgets are known as
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_show_progress">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_increments">
<description>
-If @show_progress is %TRUE, the print operation will show a
-progress dialog during the print operation.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Sets the step and page increments for spin_button. This affects how
+quickly the value changes when the spin button's arrows are activated.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_progress">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to show a progress dialog
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 1 press.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 2 press.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10074,6 +10442,26 @@ Tags in the buffer for @text_view may override the defaults.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_expander_get_label_fill">
+<description>
+Returns whether the label widget will fill all available horizontal
+space allocated to @expander.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the label widget will fill all available horizontal
+space
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings">
<description>
Sets the print settings for @op. This is typically used to
@@ -10238,6 +10626,77 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_filter_set_name">
+<description>
+Sets the human-readable name of the filter; this is the string
+that will be displayed in the recently used resources selector
+user interface if there is a selectable list of filters.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> then human readable name of @filter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_set_has_frame">
+<description>
+(Note: this is a special-purpose function for the framebuffer port,
+that causes GTK+ to draw its own window border. For most applications,
+you want gtk_window_set_decorated() instead, which tells the window
+manager whether to draw the window border.)
+
+If this function is called on a window with setting of %TRUE, before
+it is realized or showed, it will have a "frame" window around
+ window->window, accessible in @window->frame. Using the signal
+frame_event you can receive all events targeted at the frame.
+
+This function is used by the linux-fb port to implement managed
+windows, but it could conceivably be used by X-programs that
+want to do their own window decorations.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> a boolean
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_toolbar_reconfigured">
+<description>
+Emits the signal #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured on @tool_item.
+#GtkToolbar and other #GtkToolShell implementations use this function
+to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order">
<description>
Changes the appearance of the sort indicator.
@@ -10449,25 +10908,27 @@ older one.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_artists">
+<function name="gtk_widget_common_ancestor">
<description>
-Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab
-of the secondary credits dialog.
+Find the common ancestor of @widget_a and @widget_b that
+is closest to the two widgets.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="widget_a">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="artists">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
+<parameter name="widget_b">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the closest common ancestor of @widget_a and
+ widget_b or %NULL if @widget_a and @widget_b do not
+share a common ancestor.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_page_set">
@@ -10625,6 +11086,34 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_maximize">
+<description>
+Asks to maximize @window, so that it becomes full-screen. Note that
+you shouldn't assume the window is definitely maximized afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unmaximize it
+again, and not all window managers support maximization. But
+normally the window will end up maximized. Just don't write code
+that crashes if not.
+
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+in which case the window will be maximized when it appears onscreen
+initially.
+
+You can track maximization via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_style_detach">
<description>
Detaches a style from a window. If the style is not attached
@@ -10724,81 +11213,19 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_size_request">
-<description>
-Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using
-gtk_widget_set_size_request(). A value of -1 stored in @width or
- height indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly
-and the natural requisition of the widget will be used intead. See
-gtk_widget_set_size_request(). To get the size a widget will
-actually use, call gtk_widget_size_request() instead of
-this function.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_index">
-<description>
-Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
-<emphasis>byte</emphasis> index. The given byte index must be at
-the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
-encoded character.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="byte_on_line">
-<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_lines">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_is_valid">
<description>
-Moves @count visible lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
-past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
-the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
-moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
-the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
-moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
+Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of lines to move forward
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-
+<return> %TRUE if any invalid regions were found
</return>
</function>
@@ -10919,82 +11346,129 @@ returned, but usually you don't need it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_embed_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_level_indentation">
<description>
-Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
-Selected page setup is stored as default page setup in #GtkPrintOperation.
+Sets the amount of extra indentation for child levels to use in @tree_view
+in addition to the default indentation. The value should be specified in
+pixels, a value of 0 disables this feature and in this case only the default
+indentation will be used.
+This does not have any visible effects for lists.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="embed">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to embed page setup selection in the #GtkPrintDialog
+<parameter name="indentation">
+<parameter_description> the amount, in pixels, of extra indentation in @tree_view.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_level_indentation">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_unselect_path">
<description>
-Sets the amount of extra indentation for child levels to use in @tree_view
-in addition to the default indentation. The value should be specified in
-pixels, a value of 0 disables this feature and in this case only the default
-indentation will be used.
-This does not have any visible effects for lists.
+Unselects the row at @path.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="indentation">
-<parameter_description> the amount, in pixels, of extra indentation in @tree_view.
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be unselected.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_get_row_drag_data">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_line">
<description>
-Obtains a @tree_model and @path from selection data of target type
-%GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW. Normally called from a drag_data_received handler.
-This function can only be used if @selection_data originates from the same
-process that's calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
-is being passed around. If you aren't in the same process, then you'll
-get memory corruption. In the #GtkTreeDragDest drag_data_received handler,
-you can assume that selection data of type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW is
-in from the current process. The returned path must be freed with
-gtk_tree_path_free().
+Returns %TRUE if @iter points to the start of the paragraph
+delimiter characters for a line (delimiters will be either a
+newline, a carriage return, a carriage return followed by a
+newline, or a Unicode paragraph separator character). Note that an
+iterator pointing to the \n of a \r\n pair will not be counted as
+the end of a line, the line ends before the \r. The end iterator is
+considered to be at the end of a line, even though there are no
+paragraph delimiter chars there.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @iter is at the end of a line
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_from_accel_closure">
+<description>
+Finds the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected;
+see gtk_accel_group_connect().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="closure">
+<parameter_description> a #GClosure
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> row in @tree_model
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected, or %NULL.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_add_source">
+<description>
+Icon sets have a list of #GtkIconSource, which they use as base
+icons for rendering icons in different states and sizes. Icons are
+scaled, made to look insensitive, etc. in
+gtk_icon_set_render_icon(), but #GtkIconSet needs base images to
+work with. The base images and when to use them are described by
+a #GtkIconSource.
+
+This function copies @source, so you can reuse the same source immediately
+without affecting the icon set.
+
+An example of when you'd use this function: a web browser's "Back
+to Previous Page" icon might point in a different direction in
+Hebrew and in English; it might look different when insensitive;
+and it might change size depending on toolbar mode (small/large
+icons). So a single icon set would contain all those variants of
+the icon, and you might add a separate source for each one.
+
+You should nearly always add a "default" icon source with all
+fields wildcarded, which will be used as a fallback if no more
+specific source matches. #GtkIconSet always prefers more specific
+icon sources to more generic icon sources. The order in which you
+add the sources to the icon set does not matter.
+
+gtk_icon_set_new_from_pixbuf() creates a new icon set with a
+default icon source based on the given pixbuf.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @selection_data had target type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW and
-is otherwise valid
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_row_spacing">
@@ -11083,29 +11557,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_add_filter">
-<description>
-Adds @filter to the list of #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
-
-If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
-gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter().
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position">
<description>
Moves @iter forward by a single cursor position. Cursor positions
@@ -11293,6 +11744,22 @@ array of targets, otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_direction_wildcarded">
+<description>
+Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any text direction variant
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source">
<description>
Returns the index of the icon which is the source of the current
@@ -11398,27 +11865,6 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_label_set_selectable().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_get_animation">
-<description>
-Gets the #GdkPixbufAnimation being displayed by the #GtkImage.
-The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_ANIMATION (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
-The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
-returned animation.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the displayed animation, or %NULL if
-the image is empty
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_activate_default">
<description>
Activates the default widget for the window, unless the current
@@ -11438,34 +11884,35 @@ focused widget is activated.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages">
+<function name="gtk_selection_owner_set_for_display">
<description>
-Sets the number of pages in the document.
-
-This <emphasis>must</emphasis> be set to a positive number
-before the rendering starts. It may be set in a
-#GtkPrintOperation::begin-print signal hander.
-
-Note that the page numbers passed to the
-#GtkPrintOperation::request-page-setup
-and #GtkPrintOperation::draw-page signals are 0-based, i.e. if
-the user chooses to print all pages, the last ::draw-page signal
-will be for page @n_pages - 1.
+Claim ownership of a given selection for a particular widget, or,
+if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #Gdkdisplay where the selection is set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_pages">
-<parameter_description> the number of pages
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> new selection owner (a #GdkWidget), or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the selection to claim.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time_">
+<parameter_description> timestamp with which to claim the selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> TRUE if the operation succeeded
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_set_modified">
@@ -11490,34 +11937,6 @@ bit flips, the buffer emits a "modified-changed" signal.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_preedit_string">
-<description>
-Set the preedit string and attributes. The preedit string is a
-string showing text that is currently being edited and not
-yet committed into the buffer.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="preedit_string">
-<parameter_description> a string to display at the insertion point
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="preedit_attrs">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList of attributes that apply to @preedit_string
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cursor_pos">
-<parameter_description> position of cursor within preedit string in chars
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_attributes_copy_values">
<description>
Copies the values from @src to @dest so that @dest has the same values
@@ -11537,31 +11956,6 @@ as @src. Frees existing values in @dest.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_stock">
-<description>
-Retrieves the stock id used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
-no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
-pixbuf, icon name or gicon).
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A stock id, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
-wasn't set from a stock id
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_from_ppd">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object by using
@@ -11598,24 +11992,34 @@ to free it
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_right_margin">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_clipboard">
<description>
-Gets the default right margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+Returns the clipboard object for the given selection to
+be used with @widget. @widget must have a #GdkDisplay
+associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel
+window.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkAtom which identifies the clipboard
+to use. %GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the
+default clipboard. Another common value
+is %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, which gives
+the primary X selection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default right margin
+<return> the appropriate clipboard object. If no
+clipboard already exists, a new one will
+be created. Once a clipboard object has
+been created, it is persistent for all time.
</return>
</function>
@@ -11627,6 +12031,8 @@ whether the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below.
Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 2.22: Use gtk_icon_view_get_item_orientation()
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="icon_view">
@@ -11710,24 +12116,24 @@ called by models after the child state of a node changes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_action_groups">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard">
<description>
-Returns the list of action groups associated with @self.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Adds @clipboard to the list of clipboards in which the selection
+contents of @buffer are available. In most cases, @clipboard will be
+the #GtkClipboard of type %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY for a view of @buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GList of
-action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
-and should not be modified.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_bytes_in_line">
@@ -11757,23 +12163,39 @@ including the paragraph delimiters.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_relief_style">
+<function name="gtk_im_context_simple_add_table">
<description>
-Returns the relief style of buttons on @toolbar. See
-gtk_button_set_relief().
+Adds an additional table to search to the input context.
+Each row of the table consists of @max_seq_len key symbols
+followed by two #guint16 interpreted as the high and low
+words of a #gunicode value. Tables are searched starting
+from the last added.
-Since: 2.4
+The table must be sorted in dictionary order on the
+numeric value of the key symbol fields. (Values beyond
+the length of the sequence should be zero.)
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+<parameter name="context_simple">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIMContextSimple
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> the table
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_seq_len">
+<parameter_description> Maximum length of a sequence in the table
+(cannot be greater than #GTK_MAX_COMPOSE_LEN)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_seqs">
+<parameter_description> number of sequences in the table
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_size">
@@ -11794,24 +12216,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_previous_color">
-<description>
-Fills @color in with the original color value.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the original color value.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_sensitive">
<description>
Returns the cell renderer's sensitivity.
@@ -11851,33 +12255,6 @@ on the bottom or left.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment">
-<description>
-Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when
-the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.
-See gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
-the adjustment.
-
-The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system
-as the entry.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor
-is moved, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_n_pages">
<description>
Returns the number of pages in the @assistant
@@ -11934,45 +12311,29 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_set">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_focus_on_map">
<description>
-Stores new data into a #GtkSelectionData object. Should
-<emphasis>only</emphasis> be called from a selection handler callback.
-Zero-terminates the stored data.
+Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_focus_on_map().
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> the type of selection data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> format (number of bits in a unit)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> pointer to the data (will be copied)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> length of the data
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if window should receive the input focus when
+mapped.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_action">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_select_multiple">
<description>
-Sets the type of operation that the chooser is performing; the
-user interface is adapted to suit the selected action. For example,
-an option to create a new folder might be shown if the action is
-%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE but not if the action is
-%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.
+Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
+selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple().
Since: 2.4
@@ -11982,37 +12343,10 @@ Since: 2.4
<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action that the file selector is performing
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_current_page">
-<description>
-Switches the page to @page_num. Note that this will only be necessary
-in custom buttons, as the @assistant flow can be set with
-gtk_assistant_set_forward_page_func().
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> %TRUE if multiple files can be selected.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_num">
-<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
-If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
-than the number of pages in the @assistant, nothing
-will be done.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_box_pack_start_defaults">
@@ -12109,37 +12443,6 @@ Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_insert_page">
-<description>
-Insert a page into @notebook at the given position.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,
-or -1 to append the page after all other pages.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
-page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_focus_on_click">
<description>
Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
@@ -12177,25 +12480,6 @@ gtk_container_set_resize_mode ().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_clickable">
-<description>
-Sets the header to be active if @active is %TRUE. When the header is active,
-then it can take keyboard focus, and can be clicked.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="clickable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the header is active.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values">
<description>
Creates a new row at @position. @iter will be changed to point to this
@@ -12245,23 +12529,25 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_width_chars">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_copyright">
<description>
-Retrieves the desired width of @label, in characters. See
-gtk_label_set_width_chars().
+Sets the copyright string to display in the about dialog.
+This should be a short string of one or two lines.
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="copyright">
+<parameter_description> (allow-none) the copyright string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the width of the label in characters.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_im_context_focus_in">
@@ -12418,37 +12704,53 @@ will then disallow lowering the dialog below the parent.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_size_register_alias">
+<function name="gtk_style_set_background">
<description>
-Registers @alias as another name for @target.
-So calling gtk_icon_size_from_name() with @alias as argument
-will return @target.
+Sets the background of @window to the background color or pixmap
+specified by @style for the given state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="alias">
-<parameter_description> an alias for @target
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> an existing icon size
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_pixmap_new">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_height">
<description>
+Returns the page height in units of @unit.
+
+Note that this function takes orientation and
+margins into consideration.
+See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the page height.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_select_path">
@@ -12469,41 +12771,24 @@ Select the row at @path.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add_signal">
+<function name="gtk_printer_is_virtual">
<description>
-Override or install a new key binding for @keyval with @modifiers on
- binding_set When the binding is activated, @signal_name will be
-emitted on the target widget, with @n_args @Varargs used as
-arguments.
+Returns whether the printer is virtual (i.e. does not
+represent actual printer hardware, but something like
+a CUPS class).
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to install an entry for
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of binding to install
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to install
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="signal_name">
-<parameter_description> signal to execute upon activation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_args">
-<parameter_description> number of arguments to @signal_name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments to @signal_name
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @printer is virtual
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_test_list_all_types">
@@ -12524,67 +12809,36 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_show_fill_level">
<description>
-Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
-If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
-If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
-underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
-accelerator called a mnemonic.
-Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
+Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the label with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkExpander widget.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_indent">
-<description>
-Gets the default indentation of paragraphs in @text_view.
-Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
-The indentation may be negative.
-
+<return> %TRUE if @range shows the fill level.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> number of pixels of indentation
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_add">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_headers_clickable">
<description>
-Adds @widget to @container. Typically used for simple containers
-such as #GtkWindow, #GtkFrame, or #GtkButton; for more complicated
-layout containers such as #GtkBox or #GtkTable, this function will
-pick default packing parameters that may not be correct. So
-consider functions such as gtk_box_pack_start() and
-gtk_table_attach() as an alternative to gtk_container_add() in
-those cases. A widget may be added to only one container at a time;
-you can't place the same widget inside two different containers.
+Allow the column title buttons to be clicked.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget to be placed inside @container
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the columns are clickable.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -12610,33 +12864,38 @@ the current label is removed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_parse">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_hard_margins">
<description>
-Parses a string representing an accelerator. The
-format looks like "<Control>a" or "<Shift><Alt>F1" or
-"<Release>z" (the last one is for key release).
-The parser is fairly liberal and allows lower or upper case,
-and also abbreviations such as "<Ctl>" and "<Ctrl>".
+Obtains the hardware printer margins of the #GtkPrintContext, in units.
-If the parse fails, @accelerator_key and @accelerator_mods will
-be set to 0 (zero).
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accelerator">
-<parameter_description> string representing an accelerator
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accelerator_key">
-<parameter_description> return location for accelerator keyval
+<parameter name="top">
+<parameter_description> top hardware printer margin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
-<parameter_description> return location for accelerator modifier mask
+<parameter name="bottom">
+<parameter_description> bottom hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left">
+<parameter_description> left hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right">
+<parameter_description> right hardware printer margin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the hard margins were retrieved
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_adjustment">
@@ -12658,28 +12917,33 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status_string">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_value">
<description>
-Returns a string representation of the status of the
-print operation. The string is translated and suitable
-for displaying the print status e.g. in a #GtkStatusbar.
+Sets the data in the cell specified by @iter and @column.
+The type of @value must be convertible to the type of the
+column.
-Use gtk_print_operation_get_status() to obtain a status
-value that is suitable for programmatic use.
-
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> column number to modify
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> new value for the cell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a string representation of the status
-of the print operation
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_license">
@@ -12725,29 +12989,24 @@ in addition to calling this function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_title">
+<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label">
<description>
-Sets a title for @page. The title is displayed in the header
-area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
+Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem whose child is a simple #GtkLabel.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the new title for @page
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text for the label
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_binding_set_activate">
@@ -12779,119 +13038,88 @@ Find a key binding matching @keyval and @modifiers within
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new">
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_toplevel">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileChooserDialog. This function is analogous to
-gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons().
+Determines whether @widget is a toplevel widget. Currently only
+#GtkWindow and #GtkInvisible are toplevel widgets. Toplevel
+widgets have no parent widget.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> Title of the dialog, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> Open or save mode for the dialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_button_text">
-<parameter_description> stock ID or text to go in the first button, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> response ID for the first button, then additional (button, id) pairs, ending with %NULL
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkFileChooserDialog
+<return> %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_draw">
+<function name="gtk_draw_focus">
<description>
-In GTK+ 1.2, this function would immediately render the
-region @area of a widget, by invoking the virtual draw method of a
-widget. In GTK+ 2.0, the draw method is gone, and instead
-gtk_widget_draw() simply invalidates the specified region of the
-widget, then updates the invalid region of the widget immediately.
-Usually you don't want to update the region immediately for
-performance reasons, so in general gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() is
-a better choice if you want to draw a region of a widget.
+Draws a focus indicator around the given rectangle on @window using the
+given style.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_focus() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> area to draw
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_key_file">
-<description>
-Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file. If the
-file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
-#GKeyFileError.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use the default
-"Print Settings"
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_set_valist">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem containing a label. The label
-will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
-in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
+Sets one or more child properties for @child and @container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> group the radio menu item is inside
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property to set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="var_args">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and values, starting
+with @first_prop_name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkRadioMenuItem
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_stock_list_ids">
@@ -12908,54 +13136,6 @@ and each string in the list must be freed with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels">
-<description>
-Returns a newly allocated list of the widgets, normally labels, for
-which this widget is a the target of a mnemonic (see for example,
-gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()).
-
-The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you
-want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving
-callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you
-<emphasis>must</emphasis> call <literal>g_list_foreach (result,
-(GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)</literal> first, and then unref all the
-widgets afterwards.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the list of
-mnemonic labels; free this list
-with g_list_free() when you are done with it.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_grab_focus">
-<description>
-Causes @widget to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
-inside. @widget must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
-something like #GtkFrame won't work.
-
-More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
-gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_set_always_show_image">
<description>
If %TRUE, the menu item will ignore the #GtkSettings:gtk-menu-images
@@ -13023,22 +13203,28 @@ a class used in gtk_binding_set_by_class().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_width_chars">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_gicon">
<description>
-Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget's entry and/or label.
+See gtk_image_new_from_gicon() for details.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> an icon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> an icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an integer width (in characters) that the button will use to size itself.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_show_expanders">
@@ -13067,72 +13253,33 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_box_gap">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_new_from_key_file">
<description>
-Draws a box in @window using the given style and state and shadow type,
-leaving a gap in one side.
+Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file Returns a new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored
+page setup, or %NULL if an error occurred.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_side">
-<parameter_description> side in which to leave the gap
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_x">
-<parameter_description> starting position of the gap
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
+to use the default name "Page Setup"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_width">
-<parameter_description> width of the gap
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the restored #GtkPageSetup
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_scrollable">
@@ -13176,23 +13323,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_numeric">
-<description>
-Returns whether non-numeric text can be typed into the spin button.
-See gtk_spin_button_set_numeric().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if only numeric text can be entered
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_has_grab">
<description>
Determines whether the widget is currently grabbing events, so it
@@ -13214,18 +13344,26 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_target_group">
+<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_model">
<description>
-Get the target entry for a dragged #GtkToolItemGroup.
+Sets the model for @cell_view. If @cell_view already has a model
+set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If @model is
+%NULL, then it will unset the old model.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkTargetEntry for a dragged group
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_add_ui">
@@ -13277,26 +13415,6 @@ is added after its siblings.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem whose child is a simple #GtkLabel.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text for the label
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkRadioMenuItem
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_button_set_focus_on_click">
<description>
Sets whether the button will grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
@@ -13470,38 +13588,6 @@ Unselects the specified iterator.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_find_widget">
-<description>
-This function will search the descendants of @widget for a widget
-of type @widget_type that has a label matching @label_pattern next
-to it. This is most useful for automated GUI testing, e.g. to find
-the "OK" button in a dialog and synthesize clicks on it.
-However see gtk_test_find_label(), gtk_test_find_sibling() and
-gtk_test_widget_click() for possible caveats involving the search of
-such widgets and synthesizing widget events.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> Container widget, usually a GtkWindow.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label_pattern">
-<parameter_description> Shell-glob pattern to match a label string.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_type">
-<parameter_description> Type of a aearched for label sibling widget.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a valid widget if any is found or %NULL.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label_text">
<description>
Creates a new label and sets it as the tab label for the page
@@ -13525,6 +13611,23 @@ containing @child.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_unset_style">
+<description>
+Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_tool_palette_set_style(),
+so that user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_calendar_new">
<description>
Creates a new calendar, with the current date being selected.
@@ -13589,43 +13692,42 @@ algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_margin">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_exists">
<description>
-Sets the ::margin property which specifies the space
-which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right
-of the icon view.
+Checks whether the resource pointed by @info still exists. At
+the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="margin">
-<parameter_description> the margin
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the resource exists
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_set_new">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_opacity_control">
<description>
-GTK+ maintains a global list of binding sets. Each binding set has
-a unique name which needs to be specified upon creation.
+Sets the @colorsel to use or not use opacity.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="set_name">
-<parameter_description> unique name of this binding set
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_opacity">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @colorsel can set the opacity, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> new binding set
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_expander_get_use_markup">
@@ -13648,42 +13750,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_expander">
-<description>
-Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_expander() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expander_style">
-<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkIconView widget
@@ -13716,6 +13782,41 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_aspect_frame_set">
+<description>
+Set parameters for an existing #GtkAspectFrame.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="aspect_frame">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAspectFrame
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> Horizontal alignment of the child within the allocation of
+the #GtkAspectFrame. This ranges from 0.0 (left aligned)
+to 1.0 (right aligned)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> Vertical alignment of the child within the allocation of
+the #GtkAspectFrame. This ranges from 0.0 (left aligned)
+to 1.0 (right aligned)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ratio">
+<parameter_description> The desired aspect ratio.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="obey_child">
+<parameter_description> If %TRUE, @ratio is ignored, and the aspect
+ratio is taken from the requistion of the child.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_add_with_properties">
<description>
Adds @widget to @container, setting child properties at the same time.
@@ -13744,32 +13845,6 @@ with @first_prop_name
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_height">
-<description>
-Returns the page height in units of @unit.
-
-Note that this function takes orientation and
-margins into consideration.
-See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height().
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the page height.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_accel_map_change_entry">
<description>
Changes the @accel_key and @accel_mods currently associated with @accel_path.
@@ -13806,23 +13881,26 @@ g_intern_static_string().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_max_width_chars">
+<function name="gtk_container_set_resize_mode">
<description>
-Retrieves the desired maximum width of @label, in characters. See
-gtk_label_set_width_chars().
+Sets the resize mode for the container.
-Since: 2.6
+The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
+will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
+or executed immediately.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resize_mode">
+<parameter_description> the new resize mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the maximum width of the label in characters.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_has_frame">
@@ -13869,48 +13947,30 @@ the length will be determined with <function>strlen()</function>.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_maximize">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_space">
<description>
-Asks to maximize @window, so that it becomes full-screen. Note that
-you shouldn't assume the window is definitely maximized afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unmaximize it
-again, and not all window managers support maximization. But
-normally the window will end up maximized. Just don't write code
-that crashes if not.
-
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
-in which case the window will be maximized when it appears onscreen
-initially.
-
-You can track maximization via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+Adds a new space to the end of the toolbar.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_rules_hint">
+<function name="gtk_widget_pop_colormap">
<description>
-Gets the setting set by gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint().
-
+Removes a colormap pushed with gtk_widget_push_colormap().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if rules are useful for the user of this tree
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_set_lower_stepper_sensitivity">
@@ -13934,54 +13994,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_extension">
-<description>
-Draws an extension, i.e. a notebook tab.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_extension() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the extension
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the extension
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the extension
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> width of the extension
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_side">
-<parameter_description> the side on to which the extension is attached
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_rc_get_style">
<description>
Finds all matching RC styles for a given widget,
@@ -14242,49 +14254,54 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_slider_range">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_title">
<description>
-This function returns sliders range along the long dimension,
-in widget->window coordinates.
-
-This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+Sets a title for @page. The title is displayed in the header
+area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="slider_start">
-<parameter_description> return location for the slider's start, or %NULL
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="slider_end">
-<parameter_description> return location for the slider's end, or %NULL
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the new title for @page
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_use_color">
+<function name="gtk_widget_draw">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR.
-
-Since: 2.10
+In GTK+ 1.2, this function would immediately render the
+region @area of a widget, by invoking the virtual draw method of a
+widget. In GTK+ 2.0, the draw method is gone, and instead
+gtk_widget_draw() simply invalidates the specified region of the
+widget, then updates the invalid region of the widget immediately.
+Usually you don't want to update the region immediately for
+performance reasons, so in general gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() is
+a better choice if you want to draw a region of a widget.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> area to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether to use color
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_toggle_button_set_inconsistent">
@@ -14313,30 +14330,69 @@ visual appearance, it doesn't affect the semantics of the button.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_width_chars">
<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_gicon() for details.
+Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget's entry and/or label.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> an icon
+</parameters>
+<return> an integer width (in characters) that the button will use to size itself.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_padding">
+<description>
+Sets the renderer's padding.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> an icon size
+<parameter name="xpad">
+<parameter_description> the x padding of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypad">
+<parameter_description> the y padding of the cell renderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_view_new_with_markup">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererText
+to it, and makes it show @markup. The text can be
+marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text
+markup language</link>.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="markup">
+<parameter_description> the text to display in the cell view
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_all">
<description>
Selects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
@@ -14373,33 +14429,6 @@ to it, you have to call g_object_ref() on it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_file">
-<description>
-Reads the page setup from the file @file_name.
-See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file_name">
-<parameter_description> the filename to read the page setup from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_extension_events">
<description>
Sets the extension events mask to @mode. See #GdkExtensionMode
@@ -14568,45 +14597,21 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser">
+<function name="gtk_window_has_group">
<description>
-Installs a style property on a widget class.
+Returns whether @window has an explicit window group.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="klass">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidgetClass
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pspec">
-<parameter_description> the #GParamSpec for the style property
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parser">
-<parameter_description> the parser for the style property
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_printer_is_virtual">
-<description>
-Returns whether the printer is virtual (i.e. does not
-represent actual printer hardware, but something like
-a CUPS class).
-
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer is virtual
+<return> %TRUE if @window has an explicit window group.
+Since 2.22
</return>
</function>
@@ -14851,38 +14856,18 @@ g_intern_static_string().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_custom">
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_pulse">
<description>
-Adds rule to a filter that allows files based on a custom callback
-function. The bitfield @needed which is passed in provides information
-about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
-this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
-it isn't needed by the filter.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
+Causes the progress bar to enter "activity mode," where a block
+bounces back and forth. Each call to gtk_progress_bar_pulse()
+causes the block to move by a little bit (the amount of movement
+per pulse is determined by gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="needed">
-<parameter_description> bitfield of flags indicating the information that the custom
-filter function needs.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> callback function; if the function returns %TRUE, then
-the file will be displayed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> function to call to free @data when it is no longer needed.
+<parameter name="pbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -14932,26 +14917,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_lookup">
-<description>
-Look up a named tag.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of a tag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The tag, or %NULL if none by that name is in the table.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_pulse_step">
<description>
Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step().
@@ -15014,24 +14979,25 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_type">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_is_equal">
<description>
-Gets the page type of @page.
+Compares two #GtkPaperSize objects.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+<parameter name="size1">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="size2">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page type of @page.
+<return> %TRUE, if @size1 and @size2
+represent the same paper size
</return>
</function>
@@ -15056,6 +15022,31 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_menu_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu widget.
+
+This kind of widget shows the list of recently used resources as
+a menu, each item as a menu item. Each item inside the menu might
+have an icon, representing its MIME type, and a number, for mnemonic
+access.
+
+This widget implements the #GtkRecentChooser interface.
+
+This widget creates its own #GtkRecentManager object. See the
+gtk_recent_chooser_menu_new_for_manager() function to know how to create
+a #GtkRecentChooserMenu widget bound to another #GtkRecentManager object.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_window">
<description>
Retrieves the #GdkWindow corresponding to an area of the text view;
@@ -15121,45 +15112,68 @@ used directly as the label text.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_has_default_sort_func">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_action">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if the model has a default sort function. This is used
-primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
-go back to the default state, or not.
+Returns the #GtkAction that @widget is a proxy for.
+See also gtk_action_get_proxies().
+Since: 2.10
+
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_get_related_action() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="sortable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSortable
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
+<return> the action that a widget is a proxy for, or
+%NULL, if it is not attached to an action.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_bounds">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_right_margin">
<description>
-Retrieves the first and last iterators in the buffer, i.e. the
-entire buffer lies within the range [ start,@end).
+Gets the right margin in units of @unit.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with first position in the buffer
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with the end iterator
+</parameters>
+<return> the right margin
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name">
+<description>
+Creates a status icon displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
+If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated
+appropriately.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_job_set_track_print_status">
@@ -15225,6 +15239,27 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern">
+<description>
+Adds a rule that allows resources based on a pattern matching their
+display name.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pattern">
+<parameter_description> a file pattern
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int">
<description>
Returns the integer value of @key, or 0.
@@ -15264,38 +15299,66 @@ gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCheckMenuItem containing a label. The label
-will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
-in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
+Returns the column of @tree_view's model which is being used for
+displaying tooltips on @tree_view's rows.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkCheckMenuItem
+<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+used, or -1 if this is disabled.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_set_alpha">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_set_hard_margins">
<description>
-Sets the current opacity to be @alpha.
-
-Since: 2.4
+set the hard margins in pixel coordinates
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="alpha">
-<parameter_description> an integer between 0 and 65535.
+<parameter name="top">
+<parameter_description> top hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bottom">
+<parameter_description> bottom hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left">
+<parameter_description> left hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right">
+<parameter_description> right hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_unselect_all">
+<description>
+Unselects all the items inside @chooser.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -15350,6 +15413,36 @@ pairs, ending with %NULL
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_geometry_hints">
+<description>
+This function sets up hints about how a window can be resized by
+the user. You can set a minimum and maximum size; allowed resize
+increments (e.g. for xterm, you can only resize by the size of a
+character); aspect ratios; and more. See the #GdkGeometry struct.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geometry_widget">
+<parameter_description> widget the geometry hints will be applied to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geometry">
+<parameter_description> struct containing geometry information
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geom_mask">
+<parameter_description> mask indicating which struct fields should be paid attention to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_spacing">
<description>
Sets the spacing field of @tree_column, which is the number of pixels to
@@ -15413,27 +15506,42 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_path_is_selected">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_connect">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if the icon pointed to by @path is currently
-selected. If @path does not point to a valid location, %FALSE is returned.
+Installs an accelerator in this group. When @accel_group is being activated
+in response to a call to gtk_accel_groups_activate(), @closure will be
+invoked if the @accel_key and @accel_mods from gtk_accel_groups_activate()
+match those of this connection.
-Since: 2.6
+The signature used for the @closure is that of #GtkAccelGroupActivate.
+
+Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can only be
+connected to one accelerator group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to check selection on.
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_flags">
+<parameter_description> a flag mask to configure this accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="closure">
+<parameter_description> closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @path is selected.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_activate">
@@ -15475,6 +15583,30 @@ not be %TRUE for the widget.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_pack_start">
+<description>
+Packs the @cell into the beginning of the column. If @expand is %FALSE, then
+the @cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is divided
+evenly between cells for which @expand is %TRUE.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkCellRenderer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @tree_column.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_rows_reordered">
<description>
Emits the "rows-reordered" signal on @tree_model. This should be called by
@@ -15506,6 +15638,24 @@ i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_binding_set_by_class">
+<description>
+This function returns the binding set named after the type name of
+the passed in class structure. New binding sets are created on
+demand by this function.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="object_class">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkObject class
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the binding set corresponding to @object_class
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_lines">
<description>
Moves @count lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
@@ -15661,22 +15811,62 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_markup">
+<function name="gtk_aspect_frame_new">
<description>
-Sets the text of the message dialog to be @str, which is marked
-up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
-language</link>.
+Create a new #GtkAspectFrame.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> Label text.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>)
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> Horizontal alignment of the child within the allocation of
+the #GtkAspectFrame. This ranges from 0.0 (left aligned)
+to 1.0 (right aligned)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> Vertical alignment of the child within the allocation of
+the #GtkAspectFrame. This ranges from 0.0 (left aligned)
+to 1.0 (right aligned)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ratio">
+<parameter_description> The desired aspect ratio.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="obey_child">
+<parameter_description> If %TRUE, @ratio is ignored, and the aspect
+ratio is taken from the requistion of the child.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GtkAspectFrame.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_set">
+<description>
+Precursor of g_object_set().
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_set() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> name of first property to set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties,
+%NULL-terminated
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -15685,7 +15875,9 @@ Since: 2.4
<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_child">
<description>
-Returns the current focus child widget inside @container.
+Returns the current focus child widget inside @container. This is not the
+currently focused widget. That can be obtained by calling
+gtk_window_get_focus().
Since: 2.14
@@ -15696,8 +15888,8 @@ Since: 2.14
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The child widget which has the focus
-inside @container, or %NULL if none is set.
+<return> The child widget which will recieve the focus inside @container when
+the @conatiner is focussed, or %NULL if none is set.
</return>
</function>
@@ -15791,89 +15983,66 @@ Gets the visual that will be used to render @widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_hline">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_tooltip_text">
<description>
-Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
-using the given style and state.
+Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
+position in @entry.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x1">
-<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x2">
-<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> the icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_is_adjusting">
-<description>
-Gets the current state of the @colorsel.
-
+<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. Free the returned string
+with g_free() when done.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the user is currently dragging a color around, and %FALSE
-if the selection has stopped.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_vbox_new">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_custom">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkVBox.
+Adds rule to a filter that allows files based on a custom callback
+function. The bitfield @needed which is passed in provides information
+about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
+this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
+it isn't needed by the filter.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="homogeneous">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if all children are to be given equal space allotments.
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="spacing">
-<parameter_description> the number of pixels to place by default between children.
+<parameter name="needed">
+<parameter_description> bitfield of flags indicating the information that the custom
+filter function needs.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> callback function; if the function returns %TRUE, then
+the file will be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="notify">
+<parameter_description> function to call to free @data when it is no longer needed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkVBox.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_n_copies">
@@ -15896,20 +16065,30 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_vadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the vertical aspect.
+Sets @sort_iter to point to the row in @tree_model_sort that corresponds to
+the row pointed at by @child_iter. If @sort_iter was not set, %FALSE
+is returned. Note: a boolean is only returned since 2.14.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sort_iter">
+<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child_iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
-used.
+<return> %TRUE, if @sort_iter was set, i.e. if @sort_iter is a
+valid iterator pointer to a visible row in the child model.
</return>
</function>
@@ -15986,51 +16165,20 @@ of the same dialog.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_space">
-<description>
-Inserts a new space in the toolbar at the specified position.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the number of widgets after which a space should be inserted.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_activatable">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_role">
<description>
-Returns whether the icon is activatable.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
+This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
-</return>
-</function>
+In combination with the window title, the window role allows a
+<link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> to identify "the
+same" window when an application is restarted. So for example you
+might set the "toolbox" role on your app's toolbox window, so that
+when the user restarts their session, the window manager can put
+the toolbox back in the same place.
-<function name="gtk_window_get_modal">
-<description>
-Returns whether the window is modal. See gtk_window_set_modal().
+If a window already has a unique title, you don't need to set the
+role, since the WM can use the title to identify the window when
+restoring the session.
</description>
@@ -16039,10 +16187,12 @@ Returns whether the window is modal. See gtk_window_set_modal().
<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="role">
+<parameter_description> unique identifier for the window to be used when restoring a session
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the window is set to be modal and
-establishes a grab when shown
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_from_gicon">
@@ -16113,74 +16263,59 @@ mode is changed to #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_file">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_model">
<description>
-Gets the #GFile that should be previewed in a custom preview
-Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri().
+Returns the model the #GtkIconView is based on. Returns %NULL if the
+model is unset.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GFile for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file
-is selected. Free with g_object_unref().
+<return> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_begin">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_file">
<description>
-Initiates a drag on the source side. The function
-only needs to be used when the application is
-starting drags itself, and is not needed when
-gtk_drag_source_set() is used.
+Gets the #GFile that should be previewed in a custom preview
+Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the source widget.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> The targets (data formats) in which the
-source can provide the data.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="actions">
-<parameter_description> A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> The button the user clicked to start the drag.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> The event that triggered the start of the drag.
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the context for this drag.
+<return> the #GFile for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file
+is selected. Free with g_object_unref().
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_pulse">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_support_selection">
<description>
-Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
-Causes the progress bar to enter "activity mode," where a block
-bounces back and forth. Each call to gtk_progress_bar_pulse()
-causes the block to move by a little bit (the amount of movement
-per pulse is determined by gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()).
+Sets whether selection is supported by #GtkPrintOperation.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="support_selection">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to support selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -16351,6 +16486,29 @@ correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary algorithms).
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_compare">
+<description>
+A qsort()-style function that returns negative if @lhs is less than
+ rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
+Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
+is less than the second character in the buffer.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="lhs">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rhs">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_pdf">
<description>
Returns whether the printer accepts input in
@@ -16391,21 +16549,36 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_column_spacing">
+<function name="gtk_draw_string">
<description>
-Sets the ::column-spacing property which specifies the space
-which is inserted between the columns of the icon view.
+Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
-Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="column_spacing">
-<parameter_description> the column spacing
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the string to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -16430,6 +16603,44 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_page_set">
+<description>
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSet value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_from_widget">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem adding it to the same group as @group.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size">
<description>
Retrieves the icon size for the toolbar. See gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size().
@@ -16467,32 +16678,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_search_column">
-<description>
-Sets @column as the column where the interactive search code should
-search in for the current model.
-
-If the search column is set, users can use the "start-interactive-search"
-key binding to bring up search popup. The enable-search property controls
-whether simply typing text will also start an interactive search.
-
-Note that @column refers to a column of the current model. The search
-column is reset to -1 when the model is changed.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> the column of the model to search in, or -1 to disable searching
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn.
@@ -16595,6 +16780,23 @@ gtk_menu_item_set_submenu() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_get_modal">
+<description>
+Returns whether the window is modal. See gtk_window_set_modal().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the window is set to be modal and
+establishes a grab when shown
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_text">
<description>
Sets @text as the contents of the tooltip.
@@ -16622,26 +16824,6 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_selection_set_select_multiple">
-<description>
-Sets whether the user is allowed to select multiple files in the file list.
-Use gtk_file_selection_get_selections () to get the list of selected files.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filesel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSelection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="select_multiple">
-<parameter_description> whether or not the user is allowed to select multiple
-files in the file list.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon">
<description>
Looks up a named icon and returns a structure containing
@@ -17064,29 +17246,6 @@ aligned with the menu popup position (only useful for GtkOptionMenu).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_alignment">
-<description>
-Sets the alignment for the contents of the entry. This controls
-the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed
-text is shorter than the width of the entry.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
-Reversed for RTL layouts
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_line_end">
<description>
Moves the iterator to point to the paragraph delimiter characters,
@@ -17155,20 +17314,6 @@ padding on the sides)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_separator_tool_item_new">
-<description>
-Create a new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action">
<description>
This is a utility function for #GtkActivatable implementors.
@@ -17445,72 +17590,60 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_width">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_focus">
<description>
-Sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width
-to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will
-automatically determine a suitable item size.
+Determines whether @widget can own the input focus. See
+gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="item_width">
-<parameter_description> the width for each item
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation">
+<function name="gtk_layout_get_hadjustment">
<description>
-Sets whether a file chooser in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode will present
-a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists. This
-is %FALSE by default.
-
-Regardless of this setting, the @chooser will emit the
-#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal when appropriate.
+This function should only be called after the layout has been
+placed in a #GtkScrolledWindow or otherwise configured for
+scrolling. It returns the #GtkAdjustment used for communication
+between the horizontal scrollbar and @layout.
-If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to %TRUE.
-You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
-#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal; please refer to its documentation
-for the details.
+See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="do_overwrite_confirmation">
-<parameter_description> whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> horizontal scroll adjustment
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_value">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all">
<description>
-Gets the current value of the range.
+Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> current value of the range.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_text">
@@ -17650,66 +17783,57 @@ in @path, or %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon">
<description>
-Creates a new message dialog, which is a simple dialog with an icon
-indicating the dialog type (error, warning, etc.) and some text which
-is marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-When the user clicks a button a "response" signal is emitted with
-response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See #GtkDialog for more details.
+Registers a built-in icon for icon theme lookups. The idea
+of built-in icons is to allow an application or library
+that uses themed icons to function requiring files to
+be present in the file system. For instance, the default
+images for all of GTK+'s stock icons are registered
+as built-icons.
-Special XML characters in the printf() arguments passed to this
-function will automatically be escaped as necessary.
-(See g_markup_printf_escaped() for how this is implemented.)
-Usually this is what you want, but if you have an existing
-Pango markup string that you want to use literally as the
-label, then you need to use gtk_message_dialog_set_markup()
-instead, since you can't pass the markup string either
-as the format (it might contain '%' characters) or as a string
-argument.
-|[
-GtkWidget *dialog;
-dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (main_application_window,
-GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
-GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
-GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
-NULL);
-gtk_message_dialog_set_markup (GTK_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
-markup);
-]|
+In general, if you use gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon()
+you should also install the icon in the icon theme, so
+that the icon is generally available.
+
+This function will generally be used with pixbufs loaded
+via gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline().
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> flags
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> type of message
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the icon to register
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="buttons">
-<parameter_description> set of buttons to use
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> the size at which to register the icon (different
+images can be registered for the same icon name
+at different sizes.)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> #GdkPixbuf that contains the image to use
+for @icon_name.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_cell_editable_editing_done">
+<description>
+Emits the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_editable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkMessageDialog
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_set_visible_column">
@@ -17976,6 +18100,24 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_button_get_title">
+<description>
+Gets the title of the color selection dialog.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> An internal string, do not free the return value
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_class_find_child_property">
<description>
Finds a child property of a container class by name.
@@ -18057,30 +18199,6 @@ g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_get_size">
-<description>
-Gets the size that has been set on the layout, and that determines
-the total extents of the layout's scrollbar area. See
-gtk_layout_set_size ().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> location to store the width set on @layout, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> location to store the height set on @layout, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_expand">
<description>
Return %TRUE if the column expands to take any available space.
@@ -18173,73 +18291,70 @@ UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_construct">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position">
<description>
-Initializes an item factory.
+Like gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position(), but moves backward.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="container_type">
-<parameter_description> the kind of menu to create; can be
-#GTK_TYPE_MENU_BAR, #GTK_TYPE_MENU or #GTK_TYPE_OPTION_MENU
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the factory path of @ifactory, a string of the form
-<literal>"<name>"</literal>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup to which the accelerators for the
-menu items will be added, or %NULL to create a new one
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if we moved
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_bounds">
<description>
-Like gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position(), but moves backward.
-
+Retrieves the first and last iterators in the buffer, i.e. the
+entire buffer lies within the range [ start,@end).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with first position in the buffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with the end iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if we moved
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_right_margin">
+<function name="gtk_drag_set_icon_pixbuf">
<description>
-Gets the right margin in units of @unit.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Sets @pixbuf as the icon for a given drag.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the context for a drag. (This must be called
+with a context for the source side of a drag)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf to use as the drag icon.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="hot_x">
+<parameter_description> the X offset within @widget of the hotspot.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="hot_y">
+<parameter_description> the Y offset within @widget of the hotspot.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the right margin
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_context_get_height">
@@ -18331,23 +18446,21 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_set_context_id">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs">
<description>
-Sets the context id for @context.
-
-This causes the currently active slave of @context to be
-replaced by the slave corresponding to the new context id.
+Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff
+menu item.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> the id to use
+<parameter name="add_tearoffs">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to add tearoff menu items
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18423,22 +18536,25 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_set_screen">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_key_file">
<description>
-Sets the screen for an icon theme; the screen is used
-to track the user's currently configured icon theme,
-which might be different for different screens.
+This function adds the page setup from @setup to @key_file.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to save the page setup to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the group to add the settings to in @key_file,
+or %NULL to use the default name "Page Setup"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18585,22 +18701,20 @@ be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column">
+<function name="gtk_entry_new_with_buffer">
<description>
-Returns the column of @tree_view's model which is being used for
-displaying tooltips on @tree_view's rows.
+Creates a new entry with the specified text buffer.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> The buffer to use for the new #GtkEntry.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
-used, or -1 if this is disabled.
+<return> a new #GtkEntry
</return>
</function>
@@ -18713,20 +18827,20 @@ e.g. use 1 to display 1.0, 2 to display 1.00, etc
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_has_selection">
+<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets">
<description>
-Sets whether a selection exists.
+Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list of the drag source. The targets
+are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
+use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
+gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_selection">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE indicates that a selection exists
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18926,100 +19040,76 @@ by default.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_set_hard_margins">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_set_alpha">
<description>
-set the hard margins in pixel coordinates
+Sets the current opacity to be @alpha.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="top">
-<parameter_description> top hardware printer margin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bottom">
-<parameter_description> bottom hardware printer margin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="left">
-<parameter_description> left hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="right">
-<parameter_description> right hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="alpha">
+<parameter_description> an integer between 0 and 65535.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_size">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_context">
<description>
-Obtains the current size of @window. If @window is not onscreen,
-it returns the size GTK+ will suggest to the <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> for the initial window
-size (but this is not reliably the same as the size the window
-manager will actually select). The size obtained by
-gtk_window_get_size() is the last size received in a
-#GdkEventConfigure, that is, GTK+ uses its locally-stored size,
-rather than querying the X server for the size. As a result, if you
-call gtk_window_resize() then immediately call
-gtk_window_get_size(), the size won't have taken effect yet. After
-the window manager processes the resize request, GTK+ receives
-notification that the size has changed via a configure event, and
-the size of the window gets updated.
-
-Note 1: Nearly any use of this function creates a race condition,
-because the size of the window may change between the time that you
-get the size and the time that you perform some action assuming
-that size is the current size. To avoid race conditions, connect to
-"configure-event" on the window and adjust your size-dependent
-state to match the size delivered in the #GdkEventConfigure.
-
-Note 2: The returned size does <emphasis>not</emphasis> include the
-size of the window manager decorations (aka the window frame or
-border). Those are not drawn by GTK+ and GTK+ has no reliable
-method of determining their size.
-
-Note 3: If you are getting a window size in order to position
-the window onscreen, there may be a better way. The preferred
-way is to simply set the window's semantic type with
-gtk_window_set_type_hint(), which allows the window manager to
-e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of
-dialogs with gtk_window_set_transient_for() window managers
-will often center the dialog over its parent window. It's
-much preferred to let the window manager handle these
-things rather than doing it yourself, because all apps will
-behave consistently and according to user prefs if the window
-manager handles it. Also, the window manager can take the size
-of the window decorations/border into account, while your
-application cannot.
+This function is supposed to be used in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
+signal handler for #GtkTreeView. The @x, @y and @keyboard_tip values
+which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this
+function without modification.
-In any case, if you insist on application-specified window
-positioning, there's <emphasis>still</emphasis> a better way than
-doing it yourself - gtk_window_set_position() will frequently
-handle the details for you.
+The return value indicates whether there is a tree view row at the given
+coordinates (%TRUE) or not (%FALSE) for mouse tooltips. For keyboard
+tooltips the row returned will be the cursor row. When %TRUE, then any of
+ model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
+that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
+to be relative to @tree_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyboard_tip">
+<parameter_description> whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeModel or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeIter or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_defer_drawing">
@@ -19079,6 +19169,24 @@ method to clear the preedit state.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_horizontal">
+<description>
+Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_button_get_use_font">
<description>
Returns whether the selected font is used in the label.
@@ -19191,32 +19299,6 @@ you'd like the layout to use for scrolling, pass %NULL for
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_before">
-<description>
-Inserts a new row before @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will
-be appended to the end of the list. @iter will be changed to point to this
-new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
-values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sibling">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_mark_new">
<description>
Creates a text mark. Add it to a buffer using gtk_text_buffer_add_mark().
@@ -19247,31 +19329,6 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_key_file">
-<description>
-This function adds the page setup from @setup to @key_file.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to save the page setup to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the group to add the settings to in @key_file,
-or %NULL to use the default name "Page Setup"
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_info_copy">
<description>
Make a copy of a #GtkIconInfo.
@@ -19290,28 +19347,25 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_foreach">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment">
<description>
-Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
-If @func returns %TRUE, then the tree ceases to be walked, and
-gtk_tree_model_foreach() returns.
+Returns the text alignment used for @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
+#GtkToolItem should call this function to find out how text should
+be aligned.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> A function to be called on each row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> User data to passed to func.
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #gfloat indicating the horizontal text alignment
+used for @tool_item
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_expand_row">
@@ -19356,43 +19410,20 @@ Tests whether an iterator is at the start of a display line.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_default">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_remove_space">
<description>
-Determines whether @widget can be a default widget. See
-gtk_widget_set_can_default().
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget can be a default widget, %FALSE otherwise
-
-</return>
-</function>
+Removes a space from the specified position.
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_pack_start">
-<description>
-Packs the @cell into the beginning of the column. If @expand is %FALSE, then
-the @cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is divided
-evenly between cells for which @expand is %TRUE.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkCellRenderer.
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @tree_column.
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the index of the space to remove.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19420,48 +19451,29 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_x">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_startup_id">
<description>
-Keeping the iterator on the same line of the layout, move it to the
-specified X coordinate. The lines of a wrapped paragraph are
-treated as distinct for this operation.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Startup notification identifiers are used by desktop environment to
+track application startup, to provide user feedback and other
+features. This function changes the corresponding property on the
+underlying GdkWindow. Normally, startup identifier is managed
+automatically and you should only use this function in special cases
+like transferring focus from other processes. You should use this
+function before calling gtk_window_present() or any equivalent
+function generating a window map event.
-<function name="gtk_label_set_angle">
-<description>
-Sets the angle of rotation for the label. An angle of 90 reads from
-from bottom to top, an angle of 270, from top to bottom. The angle
-setting for the label is ignored if the label is selectable,
-wrapped, or ellipsized.
+This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="angle">
-<parameter_description> the angle that the baseline of the label makes with
-the horizontal, in degrees, measured counterclockwise
+<parameter name="startup_id">
+<parameter_description> a string with startup-notification identifier
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19510,26 +19522,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_set_visible">
-<description>
-Changes the visible of @action_group.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible">
-<parameter_description> new visiblity
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_container_set_reallocate_redraws">
<description>
Sets the @reallocate_redraws flag of the container to the given value.
@@ -19621,6 +19613,24 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_select_function">
+<description>
+Returns the current selection function.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The function.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_prefix">
<description>
Requests a prefix insertion.
@@ -19723,24 +19733,25 @@ gtk_get_default_language ().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_drag_source">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_add_filter">
<description>
-Sets the tool palette as a drag source.
-Enables all groups and items in the tool palette as drag sources
-on button 1 and button 3 press with copy and move actions.
-See gtk_drag_source_set().
+Adds @filter to the list of filters that the user can select between.
+When a filter is selected, only files that are passed by that
+filter are displayed.
-Since: 2.20
+Note that the @chooser takes ownership of the filter, so you have to
+ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkToolPaletteDragTarget<!-- -->s
-which the widget should support
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19788,6 +19799,24 @@ e.g. for #GtkTreeView, a string representation of #GtkTreePath
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_margin">
+<description>
+Returns the value of the ::margin property.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the space at the borders
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_paint_handle">
<description>
Draws a handle as used in #GtkHandleBox and #GtkPaned.
@@ -19913,6 +19942,30 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_radio">
+<description>
+If @radio is %TRUE, the cell renderer renders a radio toggle
+(i.e. a toggle in a group of mutually-exclusive toggles).
+If %FALSE, it renders a check toggle (a standalone boolean option).
+This can be set globally for the cell renderer, or changed just
+before rendering each cell in the model (for #GtkTreeView, you set
+up a per-row setting using #GtkTreeViewColumn to associate model
+columns with cell renderer properties).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="radio">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to make the toggle look like a radio button
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter">
<description>
Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path.
@@ -19937,6 +19990,29 @@ Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_path_is_selected">
+<description>
+Returns %TRUE if the icon pointed to by @path is currently
+selected. If @path does not point to a valid location, %FALSE is returned.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to check selection on.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @path is selected.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accel_map_add_entry">
<description>
Registers a new accelerator with the global accelerator map.
@@ -20012,32 +20088,6 @@ format's mime-type.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_current_page">
-<description>
-Switches to the page number @page_num.
-
-Note that due to historical reasons, GtkNotebook refuses
-to switch to a page unless the child widget is visible.
-Therefore, it is recommended to show child widgets before
-adding them to a notebook.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_num">
-<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
-If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
-than the number of pages in the notebook, nothing
-will be done.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_lookup_by_gicon">
<description>
Looks up an icon and returns a structure containing
@@ -20073,29 +20123,28 @@ wasn't found. Free with gtk_icon_info_free()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_capabilities">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget">
<description>
-Returns the printer's capabilities.
-
-This is useful when you're using #GtkPrintUnixDialog's manual-capabilities
-setting and need to know which settings the printer can handle and which
-you must handle yourself.
-
-This will return 0 unless the printer's details are available, see
-gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
+Sets @label_widget as the widget that will be used as the label
+for @button. If @label_widget is %NULL the "label" property is used
+as label. If "label" is also %NULL, the label in the stock item
+determined by the "stock_id" property is used as label. If
+"stock_id" is also %NULL, @button does not have a label.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label_widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget used as label, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the printer's capabilities
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_menu_get_show_numbers">
@@ -20137,21 +20186,27 @@ with g_slist_free(), and the files with g_object_unref().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_visible">
+<function name="gtk_misc_get_alignment">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if @tree_column is visible.
-
+Gets the X and Y alignment of the widget within its allocation.
+See gtk_misc_set_alignment().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="misc">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMisc
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of @misc, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> location to store Y alignment of @misc, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the column is visible or not. If it is visible, then
-the tree will show the column.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_printer">
@@ -20175,28 +20230,49 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_path_to_child_path">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_get_color">
<description>
-Converts @sorted_path to a path on the child model of @tree_model_sort.
-That is, @sorted_path points to a location in @tree_model_sort. The
-returned path will point to the same location in the model not being
-sorted. If @sorted_path does not point to a location in the child model,
-%NULL is returned.
+Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="sorted_path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the current color.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
-</return>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes">
+<description>
+Sets the attributes in the list as the attributes of @tree_column.
+The attributes should be in attribute/column order, as in
+gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute(). All existing attributes
+are removed, and replaced with the new attributes.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell_renderer">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer we're setting the attributes of
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_error_quark">
@@ -20213,21 +20289,25 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_direction">
+<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Obtains the text direction this icon source applies to. The return
-value is only useful/meaningful if the text direction is <emphasis>not</emphasis>
-wildcarded.
-
+Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem containing a label. The label
+will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
+in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> group the radio menu item is inside
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> text direction this source matches
+<return> a new #GtkRadioMenuItem
</return>
</function>
@@ -20270,20 +20350,32 @@ mark exists in the buffer.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_fraction">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_set_size">
<description>
-Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
+Changes the dimensions of a @size to @width x @height.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a custom #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the new width in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the new height in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_width">
@@ -20309,21 +20401,29 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_extension_events">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_swap">
<description>
-Retrieves the extension events the widget will receive; see
-gdk_input_set_extension_events().
+Swaps @a and @b in @store. Note that this function only works with
+unsorted stores.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="a">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="b">
+<parameter_description> Another #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> extension events for @widget
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_shape_combine_mask">
@@ -20501,32 +20601,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_path_to_path">
-<description>
-Converts @child_path to a path relative to @filter. That is, @child_path
-points to a path in the child model. The rerturned path will point to the
-same row in the filtered model. If @child_path isn't a valid path on the
-child model or points to a row which is not visible in @filter, then %NULL
-is returned.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_direction">
<description>
Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction
@@ -20575,19 +20649,29 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_inverted">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_pixbuf">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_range_set_inverted().
+Retrieves the image used for the icon.
+
+Unlike the other methods of setting and getting icon data, this
+method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
+#GdkPixbuf, a #GIcon, a stock item, or an icon name.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the range is inverted
+<return> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if no icon is set for this position.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -20635,22 +20719,19 @@ the clipboard could not be converted into an image.)
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_spacing">
+<function name="gtk_widget_show_all">
<description>
-Returns the value of the ::spacing property.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
+a container).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the space between cells
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_set_invisible_char">
@@ -20763,6 +20844,43 @@ otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_widget_to_tree_coords">
+<description>
+Converts bin_window coordinates to coordinates for the
+tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).
+
+Deprecated: 2.12: Due to historial reasons the name of this function is
+incorrect. For converting coordinates relative to the widget to
+bin_window coordinates, please see
+gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wx">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to bin_window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wy">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate relative to bin_window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tx">
+<parameter_description> return location for tree X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ty">
+<parameter_description> return location for tree Y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_displayed_row">
<description>
Returns a #GtkTreePath referring to the currently
@@ -20802,36 +20920,6 @@ submenu is passed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_lookup_color">
-<description>
-Looks up @color_name in the style's logical color mappings,
-filling in @color and returning %TRUE if found, otherwise
-returning %FALSE. Do not cache the found mapping, because
-it depends on the #GtkStyle and might change when a theme
-switch occurs.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the logical color to look up
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkColor to fill in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the mapping was found.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_tips">
<description>
Sets whether to show a tooltips containing the full path of each
@@ -20882,48 +20970,37 @@ the return value is 0.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_text_column">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_free">
<description>
-Returns the column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Frees a #GtkSelectionData structure returned from
+gtk_selection_data_copy().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the column containing the strings
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_forward_display_line">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_get_screen">
<description>
-Moves the given @iter forward by one display (wrapped) line.
-A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
-separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
-Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
-wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
-same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
-they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
-views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
+Gets the screen on which windows of the #GtkMountOperation
+will be shown.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+<return> the screen on which windows of @op are shown
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -21032,33 +21109,15 @@ algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_job_new">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_default_colormap">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPrintJob.
+Obtains the default colormap used to create widgets.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the job title
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPrintJob
-
+<return> default widget colormap
</return>
</function>
@@ -21099,12 +21158,12 @@ Unselects all the nodes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_window">
<description>
-Sets the colormap for the widget to the given value. Widget must not
-have been previously realized. This probably should only be used
-from an <function>init()</function> function (i.e. from the constructor
-for the widget).
+Determines whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. See
+gtk_widget_set_has_window().
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21112,12 +21171,10 @@ for the widget).
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a colormap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_clipboard_clear">
@@ -21156,6 +21213,30 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_alignment">
+<description>
+Fills in @xalign and @yalign with the appropriate values of @cell.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x alignment of the cell, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y alignment of the cell, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_ctree_insert_node">
<description>
@@ -21333,22 +21414,56 @@ Removes all rows from the list store.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_no_show_all">
+<function name="gtk_draw_expander">
<description>
-Returns the current value of the GtkWidget:no-show-all property,
-which determines whether calls to gtk_widget_show_all() and
-gtk_widget_hide_all() will affect this widget.
+Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView.
-Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_expander() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expander_style">
+<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current value of the "no-show-all" property.
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_action_get_gicon">
+<description>
+Gets the gicon of @action.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The action's #GIcon if one is set.
</return>
</function>
@@ -21372,6 +21487,29 @@ be popped up or -1, if no monitor has been set
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_hsv_is_adjusting">
+<description>
+An HSV color selector can be said to be adjusting if multiple rapid
+changes are being made to its value, for example, when the user is
+adjusting the value with the mouse. This function queries whether
+the HSV color selector is being adjusted or not.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="hsv">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkHSV
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value,
+since they may be transitory, or %FALSE if they should consider
+the color value status to be final.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_keep_above">
<description>
Asks to keep @window above, so that it stays on top. Note that
@@ -21472,27 +21610,46 @@ at (@x, @y), or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_button_get_font_name">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_prepend">
<description>
-Retrieves the name of the currently selected font. This name includes
-style and size information as well. If you want to render something
-with the font, use this string with pango_font_description_from_string() .
-If you're interested in peeking certain values (family name,
-style, size, weight) just query these properties from the
-#PangoFontDescription object.
+Prepends a new row to @list_store. @iter will be changed to point to this new
+row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
+values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="font_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepend row
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an internal copy of the font name which must not be freed.
+<return></return>
+</function>
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_unset">
+<description>
+Removes any value associated with @key.
+This has the same effect as setting the value to %NULL.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_group_get_action">
@@ -21520,7 +21677,8 @@ Since: 2.4
<function name="gtk_dialog_set_has_separator">
<description>
Sets whether the dialog has a separator above the buttons.
-%TRUE by default.
+
+Deprecated: 2.22: This function will be removed in GTK+ 3
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21624,6 +21782,39 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip">
+<description>
+Sets the #GtkTooltips object to be used for arrow button which
+pops up the menu. See gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip() for setting
+a tooltip on the whole #GtkMenuToolButton.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip_text()
+instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuToolButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltips">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTooltips object to be used
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tip_text">
+<parameter_description> text to be used as tooltip text for tool_item
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tip_private">
+<parameter_description> text to be used as private tooltip text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_scale_get_value_pos">
<description>
Gets the position in which the current value is displayed.
@@ -21691,45 +21882,27 @@ g_object_ref (scrolled_window->hscrollbar);
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_drag_dest_item">
-<description>
-Gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted item, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_queue_resize_no_redraw">
+<function name="gtk_font_button_get_font_name">
<description>
-This function works like gtk_widget_queue_resize(),
-except that the widget is not invalidated.
+Retrieves the name of the currently selected font. This name includes
+style and size information as well. If you want to render something
+with the font, use this string with pango_font_description_from_string() .
+If you're interested in peeking certain values (family name,
+style, size, weight) just query these properties from the
+#PangoFontDescription object.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="font_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an internal copy of the font name which must not be freed.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_remove">
@@ -21754,31 +21927,22 @@ last one.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_move_before">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_use_markup">
<description>
-Moves @iter in @tree_store to the position before @position. @iter and
- position should be in the same level. Note that this function only
-works with unsorted stores. If @position is %NULL, @iter will be
-moved to the end of the level.
+Returns whether the label's text is interpreted as marked up with
+the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
+language</link>. See gtk_label_set_use_markup ().
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter or %NULL.
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_visible_text">
@@ -21869,29 +22033,27 @@ This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_item_row">
<description>
-Precursor of g_object_set().
+Gets the row in which the item @path is currently
+displayed. Row numbers start at 0.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_set() instead.
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description> name of first property to set
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties,
-%NULL-terminated
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreePath of the item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The row in which the item is displayed
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_toggle_action_set_active">
@@ -21914,6 +22076,36 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_wmclass">
+<description>
+Don't use this function. It sets the X Window System "class" and
+"name" hints for a window. According to the ICCCM, you should
+always set these to the same value for all windows in an
+application, and GTK+ sets them to that value by default, so calling
+this function is sort of pointless. However, you may want to call
+gtk_window_set_role() on each window in your application, for the
+benefit of the session manager. Setting the role allows the window
+manager to restore window positions when loading a saved session.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wmclass_name">
+<parameter_description> window name hint
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wmclass_class">
+<parameter_description> window class hint
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_filename">
<description>
Gets the filename for the currently selected file in
@@ -21939,48 +22131,6 @@ be represented with a local filename. Free with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_comments">
-<description>
-Returns the comments string.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The comments. The string is owned by the about
-dialog and must not be modified.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_style_set_background">
-<description>
-Sets the background of @window to the background color or pixmap
-specified by @style for the given state.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_hide_on_delete">
<description>
Utility function; intended to be connected to the #GtkWidget::delete-event
@@ -22045,27 +22195,67 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_accept_focus">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_tree_coords">
<description>
-Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to receive
-the input focus. This function sets this hint.
+Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the
+tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to let this window receive input focus
+<parameter name="wx">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wy">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate relative to the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tx">
+<parameter_description> return location for tree X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ty">
+<parameter_description> return location for tree Y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_remove_accelerator">
+<description>
+Removes an accelerator from @widget, previously installed with
+gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> widget to install an accelerator on
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> accel group for this widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> GDK keyval of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier key combination of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment">
<description>
Returns the vertical scrollbar's adjustment, used to connect the
@@ -22102,6 +22292,38 @@ Sets the visibility of @tree_column.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_test_widget_send_key">
+<description>
+This function will generate keyboard press and release events in
+the middle of the first GdkWindow found that belongs to @widget.
+For %GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets like GtkButton, this will often be an
+input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget->window.
+Certain caveats should be considered when using this function, in
+particular because the mouse pointer is warped to the key press
+location, see gdk_test_simulate_key() for details.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> Widget to generate a key press and release on.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> A Gdk keyboard value.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> Keyboard modifiers the event is setup with.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> wether all actions neccessary for the key event simulation were carried out successfully.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_bool_with_default">
<description>
Returns the boolean represented by the value
@@ -22181,6 +22403,29 @@ i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_name">
+<description>
+Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
+If this is not set, it defaults to g_get_application_name().
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the program name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_child_detached">
<description>
Whether the handlebox's child is currently detached.
@@ -22199,23 +22444,25 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_completion_prefix">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_current_page">
<description>
-Get the original text entered by the user that triggered
-the completion or %NULL if there's no completion ongoing.
+Sets the current page number. If @current_page is not -1, this enables
+the current page choice for the range of pages to print.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="current_page">
+<parameter_description> the current page number.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the prefix for the current completion
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_image">
@@ -22276,22 +22523,22 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_insert_text() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_headers_visible">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_row_separator_func">
<description>
-Sets the visibility state of the headers.
+Returns the current row separator function.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="headers_visible">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the headers are visible
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current row separator function.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_range">
@@ -22327,14 +22574,24 @@ so expect those.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_update">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_padding">
<description>
-Manually force an update of the spin button.
+Fills in @xpad and @ypad with the appropriate values of @cell.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpad">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x padding of the cell, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypad">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y padding of the cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -22474,42 +22731,19 @@ must be connected to an accelerator group; see gtk_accel_group_connect().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_bar_get_child_pack_direction">
-<description>
-Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar.
-See gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction().
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="menubar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the child pack direction
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_max_length">
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_get_priority">
<description>
-Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in
- buffer See gtk_entry_buffer_set_max_length().
+Get the tag priority.
-Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the maximum allowed number of characters
-in #GtkEntryBuffer, or 0 if there is no maximum.
-
+<return> The tag's priority.
</return>
</function>
@@ -22588,22 +22822,24 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_from_widget">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_alignment">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem adding it to the same group as @group.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Sets the alignment of the title or custom widget inside the column header.
+The alignment determines its location inside the button -- 0.0 for left, 0.5
+for center, 1.0 for right.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioMenuItem
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> The alignment, which is between [0.0 and 1.0] inclusive.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_action_get_current_value">
@@ -22693,36 +22929,46 @@ within the preedit string.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate_yrange">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_can_focus">
<description>
-Ensure that a region of a #GtkTextLayout is valid. The ::changed
-signal will be emitted if any lines are validated.
+Specifies whether @widget can own the input focus. See
+gtk_widget_grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a
+widget.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="anchor">
-<parameter_description> iter pointing into a line that will be used as the
-coordinate origin
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y0_">
-<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
-which to begin validation. (The offset here is in pixels
-after validation.)
+<parameter name="can_focus">
+<parameter_description> whether or not @widget can own the input focus.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y1_">
-<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
-which to end validation. (The offset here is in pixels
-after validation.)
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_text">
+<description>
+Retrieves the text displayed superimposed on the progress bar,
+if any, otherwise %NULL. The return value is a reference
+to the text, not a copy of it, so will become invalid
+if you change the text in the progress bar.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> text, or %NULL; this string is owned by the widget
+and should not be modified or freed.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_with_values">
@@ -22816,36 +23062,60 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path">
+<function name="gtk_activatable_get_related_action">
<description>
-Set the accelerator path on @menu_item, through which runtime changes of the
-menu item's accelerator caused by the user can be identified and saved to
-persistant storage (see gtk_accel_map_save() on this).
-To setup a default accelerator for this menu item, call
-gtk_accel_map_add_entry() with the same @accel_path.
-See also gtk_accel_map_add_entry() on the specifics of accelerator paths,
-and gtk_menu_set_accel_path() for a more convenient variant of this function.
+Gets the related #GtkAction for @activatable.
-This function is basically a convenience wrapper that handles calling
-gtk_widget_set_accel_path() with the appropriate accelerator group for
-the menu item.
+Since: 2.16
-Note that you do need to set an accelerator on the parent menu with
-gtk_menu_set_accel_group() for this to work.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the related #GtkAction if one is set.
-Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
-pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
-g_intern_static_string().
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_wrap_width">
+<description>
+Sets the wrap width of @combo_box to be @width. The wrap width is basically
+the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out
+in a table.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenuItem
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> accelerator path, corresponding to this menu item's
-functionality, or %NULL to unset the current path.
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> Preferred number of columns
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_file_selection_set_select_multiple">
+<description>
+Sets whether the user is allowed to select multiple files in the file list.
+Use gtk_file_selection_get_selections () to get the list of selected files.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filesel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSelection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="select_multiple">
+<parameter_description> whether or not the user is allowed to select multiple
+files in the file list.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -22942,36 +23212,6 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_requisition_free">
-<description>
-Frees a #GtkRequisition.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="requisition">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRequisition
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_space">
-<description>
-Adds a new space to the end of the toolbar.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_clipboard_get">
<description>
Returns the clipboard object for the given selection.
@@ -22992,76 +23232,46 @@ owned by GTK+, must not be freed or unreffed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_width">
<description>
-Returns whether the input focus is within this GtkWindow.
-For real toplevel windows, this is identical to gtk_window_is_active(),
-but for embedded windows, like #GtkPlug, the results will differ.
+Returns the current size of @tree_column in pixels.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the input focus is within this GtkWindow
-
+<return> The current width of @tree_column.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify">
-<description>
-Stops emission of #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on @widget. The
-signals are queued until gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify() is called
-on @widget.
-
-This is the analogue of g_object_freeze_notify() for child properties.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_button_box_set_child_secondary">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_select_uri">
<description>
-Sets whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
-A typical use of a secondary child is the help button in a dialog.
+Selects @uri inside @chooser.
-This group appears after the other children if the style
-is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_START, %GTK_BUTTONBOX_SPREAD or
-%GTK_BUTTONBOX_EDGE, and before the other children if the style
-is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_END. For horizontal button boxes, the definition
-of before/after depends on direction of the widget (see
-gtk_widget_set_direction()). If the style is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_START
-or %GTK_BUTTONBOX_END, then the secondary children are aligned at
-the other end of the button box from the main children. For the
-other styles, they appear immediately next to the main children.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButtonBox
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child of @widget
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a URI
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_secondary">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the @child appears in a secondary group of the
-button box.
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for a #GError, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @uri was found.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_label">
@@ -23134,19 +23344,21 @@ to a widget
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_state_wildcarded">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_use_underline">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_state_wildcarded().
+Returns whether an embedded underline in the label indicates a
+mnemonic. See gtk_label_set_use_underline().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any widget state variant
+<return> %TRUE whether an embedded underline in the label indicates
+the mnemonic accelerator keys.
</return>
</function>
@@ -23241,6 +23453,26 @@ that somewhat like strcmp() returning 0 for equality
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_list">
+<description>
+Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
+had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them to set up a
+window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the
+icon for all windows in your app at once.
+
+See gtk_window_set_icon_list() for more details.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a list of #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkIMMulticontext.
@@ -23357,21 +23589,73 @@ is searched in the current directory.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status_string">
<description>
-Makes @status_icon display the file @filename.
-See gtk_status_icon_new_from_file() for details.
+Returns a string representation of the status of the
+print operation. The string is translated and suitable
+for displaying the print status e.g. in a #GtkStatusbar.
-Since: 2.10
+Use gtk_print_operation_get_status() to obtain a status
+value that is suitable for programmatic use.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> a filename
+</parameters>
+<return> a string representation of the status
+of the print operation
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height">
+<description>
+Returns the paper height in units of @unit.
+
+Note that this function takes orientation, but
+not margins into consideration.
+See gtk_page_setup_get_page_height().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the paper height.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_realized">
+<description>
+Marks the widget as being realized.
+
+This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
+"realize" or "unrealize" implementation.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="realized">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to mark the widget as realized
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -23519,14 +23803,20 @@ Returns %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_unlock">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_select_multiple">
<description>
-Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_group_lock() on this @accel_group.
+Sets whether @chooser can select multiple items.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="select_multiple">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @chooser can select more than one item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -23574,45 +23864,30 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_iter_is_valid">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_get_property">
<description>
-WARNING: This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
-purposes.
-
-Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeStore.
-
-Since: 2.2
+Gets the value of a child property for @child and @container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_size_group_new">
-<description>
-Create a new #GtkSizeGroup.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="mode">
-<parameter_description> the mode for the new size group.
+<parameter name="property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the property to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> a location to return the value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly created #GtkSizeGroup
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_attributes_new">
@@ -23646,8 +23921,9 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> array containing information about which forms should be stored
-or %NULL to indicate that all forms should be stored.
+<parameter_description> array containing information about which forms
+should be stored or %NULL to indicate that all forms should
+be stored.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_targets">
@@ -23739,6 +24015,36 @@ one way or the other.)
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_get_layout_offsets">
+<description>
+Obtains the coordinates where the scale will draw the
+#PangoLayout representing the text in the scale. Remember
+when using the #PangoLayout function you need to convert to
+and from pixels using PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
+
+If the #GtkScale:draw-value property is %FALSE, the return
+values are undefined.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_iter_copy">
<description>
Creates a dynamically allocated tree iterator as a copy of @iter.
@@ -23759,20 +24065,23 @@ You must free this iter with gtk_tree_iter_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_unblock_activate">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_filter">
<description>
-Reenable activation signals from the action
+Gets the #GtkRecentFilter object currently used by @chooser to affect
+the display of the recently used resources.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GtkRecentFilter object.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_tooltip_window">
@@ -23906,6 +24215,44 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_direction">
+<description>
+Gets the reading direction for a particular widget. See
+gtk_widget_set_direction().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the reading direction for the widget.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_stock">
+<description>
+Creates a status icon displaying a stock icon. Sample stock icon
+names are #GTK_STOCK_OPEN, #GTK_STOCK_QUIT. You can register your
+own stock icon names, see gtk_icon_factory_add_default() and
+gtk_icon_factory_add().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon id
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_is_cursor_position">
<description>
See gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() or #PangoLogAttr or
@@ -24081,50 +24428,21 @@ docked horizontally.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_visible_horizontal">
-<description>
-Sets whether @action is visible when horizontal
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
-<parameter_description> whether the action is visible horizontally
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_set_role">
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_clear_attributes">
<description>
-This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
-
-In combination with the window title, the window role allows a
-<link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> to identify "the
-same" window when an application is restarted. So for example you
-might set the "toolbox" role on your app's toolbox window, so that
-when the user restarts their session, the window manager can put
-the toolbox back in the same place.
-
-If a window already has a unique title, you don't need to set the
-role, since the WM can use the title to identify the window when
-restoring the session.
+Clears all existing attributes previously set with
+gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="role">
-<parameter_description> unique identifier for the window to be used when restoring a session
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -24194,23 +24512,30 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_search_column">
<description>
-Gets the currently-selected font.
+Sets @column as the column where the interactive search code should
+search in for the current model.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name() instead.
+If the search column is set, users can use the "start-interactive-search"
+key binding to bring up search popup. The enable-search property controls
+whether simply typing text will also start an interactive search.
+
+Note that @column refers to a column of the current model. The search
+column is reset to -1 when the model is changed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fsd">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> the column of the model to search in, or -1 to disable searching
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkFont from the #GtkFontSelection for the
-currently selected font in the dialog, or %NULL if no font is selected
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_old_editable_changed">
@@ -24263,26 +24588,42 @@ typing.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_entry_skip">
+<function name="gtk_box_pack_start">
<description>
-Install a binding on @binding_set which causes key lookups
-to be aborted, to prevent bindings from lower priority sets
-to be activated.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Adds @child to @box, packed with reference to the start of @box.
+The @child is packed after any other child packed with reference
+to the start of @box.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to skip an entry of
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of binding to skip
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to skip
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated to
+ box The extra space will be divided evenly between all children of
+ box that use this option
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fill">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if space given to @child by the @expand option is
+actually allocated to @child, rather than just padding it. This
+parameter has no effect if @expand is set to %FALSE. A child is
+always allocated the full height of a #GtkHBox and the full width
+of a #GtkVBox. This option affects the other dimension
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding">
+<parameter_description> extra space in pixels to put between this child and its
+neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by
+#GtkBox:spacing property. If @child is a widget at one of the
+reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
+ child and the reference edge of @box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -24357,24 +24698,6 @@ Returns %TRUE if @descendant is a descendant of @path.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_plus_button">
-<description>
-Retrieves the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_drag_source_drag_data_get">
<description>
Asks the #GtkTreeDragSource to fill in @selection_data with a
@@ -24402,50 +24725,6 @@ longer found in the model!
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_cursor_positions">
-<description>
-Moves up to @count visible cursor positions. See
-gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position() for details.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of positions to move
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_clear_attributes">
-<description>
-Clears all existing attributes previously set with
-gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_tag_toggle">
<description>
Moves forward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
@@ -24472,6 +24751,25 @@ if no toggle is found.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query">
+<description>
+Triggers a new tooltip query on @display, in order to update the current
+visible tooltip, or to show/hide the current tooltip. This function is
+useful to call when, for example, the state of the widget changed by a
+key press.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_deserialize_set_can_create_tags">
<description>
Use this function to allow a rich text deserialization function to
@@ -24606,6 +24904,28 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_arrow_set">
+<description>
+Sets the direction and style of the #GtkArrow, @arrow.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="arrow">
+<parameter_description> a widget of type #GtkArrow.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="arrow_type">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkArrowType.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkShadowType.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_accel_path">
<description>
Retrieve the accelerator path that was previously set on @menu_item.
@@ -24627,31 +24947,22 @@ functionality, or %NULL if not set
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_markup">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution">
<description>
-Sets @markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
-the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-
-This function will take care of setting #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip to %TRUE
-and of the default handler for the #GtkStatusIcon::query-tooltip signal.
-
-See also the #GtkStatusIcon:tooltip-markup property and
-gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon, or %NULL
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the resolution in dpi
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_draw_hline">
@@ -24795,6 +25106,30 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_auto_startup_notification">
+<description>
+By default, after showing the first #GtkWindow, GTK+ calls
+gdk_notify_startup_complete(). Call this function to disable
+the automatic startup notification. You might do this if your
+first window is a splash screen, and you want to delay notification
+until after your real main window has been shown, for example.
+
+In that example, you would disable startup notification
+temporarily, show your splash screen, then re-enable it so that
+showing the main window would automatically result in notification.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to automatically do startup notification
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_file">
<description>
Obtains the path to the IM modules file. See the documentation
@@ -24827,39 +25162,48 @@ If the element at @iter is a pixbuf, the pixbuf is returned
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_adjustment">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_width">
<description>
-Replaces the #GtkAdjustment associated with @spin_button.
+Returns the page width in units of @unit.
+
+Note that this function takes orientation and
+margins into consideration.
+See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment to replace the existing adjustment
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the page width.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_ensure_style">
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_location">
<description>
-Ensures that @widget has a style (@widget->style). Not a very useful
-function; most of the time, if you want the style, the widget is
-realized, and realized widgets are guaranteed to have a style
-already.
+Returns a description of the location of the printer.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the location of @printer
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed">
@@ -25002,6 +25346,28 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_top_margin">
+<description>
+Gets the default top margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the default top margin
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_selection_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkFontSelection.
@@ -25062,23 +25428,19 @@ has been set to the resulting #GtkRequisition.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_age">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_new">
<description>
-Gets the number of days elapsed since the last update of the resource
-pointed by @info.
+Creates a new text buffer.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a tag table, or %NULL to create a new one
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a positive integer containing the number of days elapsed
-since the time this resource was last modified.
-
+<return> a new text buffer
</return>
</function>
@@ -25124,20 +25486,19 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_from_accel_closure">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_prev_page">
<description>
-Finds the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected;
-see gtk_accel_group_connect().
+Switches to the previous page. Nothing happens if the current page
+is the first page.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="closure">
-<parameter_description> a #GClosure
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected, or %NULL.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter">
@@ -25379,6 +25740,37 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order_from_array">
+<description>
+Sets an alternative button order. If the
+#GtkSettings:gtk-alternative-button-order setting is set to %TRUE,
+the dialog buttons are reordered according to the order of the
+response ids in @new_order.
+
+See gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order() for more information.
+
+This function is for use by language bindings.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_params">
+<parameter_description> the number of response ids in @new_order
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> an array of response ids of @dialog's buttons
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_get_width_chars">
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_width_chars().
@@ -25515,36 +25907,6 @@ functionality.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_row_separator_func">
-<description>
-Sets the row separator function, which is used to determine
-whether a row should be drawn as a separator. If the row separator
-function is %NULL, no separators are drawn. This is the default value.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewRowSeparatorFunc
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> user data to pass to @func, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_value">
<description>
Get the value in the @spin_button.
@@ -25561,21 +25923,20 @@ Get the value in the @spin_button.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_lower">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_visibility">
<description>
-Retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment.
+Retrieves whether the text in @entry is visible. See
+gtk_entry_set_visibility().
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The current minimum value of the adjustment.
-
+<return> %TRUE if the text is currently visible
</return>
</function>
@@ -25661,32 +26022,36 @@ may be %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_pop_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_rules_hint">
<description>
-Removes a colormap pushed with gtk_widget_push_colormap().
+Gets the setting set by gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint().
+
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if rules are useful for the user of this tree
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_copy">
<description>
-Returns the name of the themed icon for the window,
-see gtk_window_set_icon_name().
+Copies an existing #GtkPaperSize.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="other">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the icon name or %NULL if the window has
-no themed icon
+<return> a copy of @other
</return>
</function>
@@ -25729,68 +26094,75 @@ gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags() is just a convenience function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_prepend">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_increments">
<description>
-Prepends a new row to @tree_store. If @parent is non-%NULL, then it will prepend
-the new row before the first child of @parent, otherwise it will prepend a row
-to the top level. @iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row
-will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to
-call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
+Gets the current step and page the increments used by @spin_button. See
+gtk_spin_button_set_increments().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepended row
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> location to store step increment, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> location to store page increment, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_increments">
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_parse">
<description>
-Gets the current step and page the increments used by @spin_button. See
-gtk_spin_button_set_increments().
+Parses a string representing an accelerator. The
+format looks like "<Control>a" or "<Shift><Alt>F1" or
+"<Release>z" (the last one is for key release).
+The parser is fairly liberal and allows lower or upper case,
+and also abbreviations such as "<Ctl>" and "<Ctrl>".
+Key names are parsed using gdk_keyval_from_name(). For character keys the
+name is not the symbol, but the lowercase name, e.g. one would use
+"<Ctrl>minus" instead of "<Ctrl>-".
+
+If the parse fails, @accelerator_key and @accelerator_mods will
+be set to 0 (zero).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="accelerator">
+<parameter_description> string representing an accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> location to store step increment, or %NULL
+<parameter name="accelerator_key">
+<parameter_description> return location for accelerator keyval
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> location to store page increment, or %NULL
+<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
+<parameter_description> return location for accelerator modifier mask
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_palette">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_title">
<description>
-Shows and hides the palette based upon the value of @has_palette.
+Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_palette">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if palette is to be visible, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> a title for the menu in tearoff mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -25863,6 +26235,28 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_expander_set_label_fill">
+<description>
+Sets whether the label widget should fill all available horizontal space
+allocated to @expander.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label_fill">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the label should should fill all available horizontal
+space
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_label_set_ellipsize">
<description>
Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") to the text
@@ -25916,7 +26310,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget that will be used as icon widget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMisc widget that will be used as icon widget, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -25925,6 +26319,66 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_markup">
+<description>
+Sets the text of the message dialog to be @str, which is marked
+up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
+language</link>.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="str">
+<parameter_description> markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_duplex">
+<description>
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether to print the output in duplex.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_view_set_editable">
+<description>
+Sets the default editability of the #GtkTextView. You can override
+this default setting with tags in the buffer, using the "editable"
+attribute of tags.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> whether it's editable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_decorated">
<description>
By default, windows are decorated with a title bar, resize
@@ -26179,32 +26633,6 @@ unrefd.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_drop_item">
-<description>
-Gets the tool item at position (x, y).
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkToolItem at position (x, y)
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_get_icon_set">
<description>
Gets the icon set and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
@@ -26231,6 +26659,37 @@ icon size, or %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_im_context_filter_keypress">
+<description>
+Allow the #GtkEntry input method to internally handle key press
+and release events. If this function returns %TRUE, then no further
+processing should be done for this key event. See
+gtk_im_context_filter_keypress().
+
+Note that you are expected to call this function from your handler
+when overriding key event handling. This is needed in the case when
+you need to insert your own key handling between the input method
+and the default key event handling of the #GtkEntry.
+See gtk_text_view_reset_im_context() for an example of use.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the key event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the input method handled the key event.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_has_rc_style">
<description>
Determines if the widget style has been looked up through the rc mechanism.
@@ -26250,6 +26709,29 @@ mechanism, %FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_alignment">
+<description>
+Sets the alignment for the contents of the entry. This controls
+the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed
+text is shorter than the width of the entry.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
+Reversed for RTL layouts
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_cell">
<description>
Sets the tip area of @tooltip to the area which @cell occupies in
@@ -26341,39 +26823,21 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_artists">
<description>
-Registers a built-in icon for icon theme lookups. The idea
-of built-in icons is to allow an application or library
-that uses themed icons to function requiring files to
-be present in the file system. For instance, the default
-images for all of GTK+'s stock icons are registered
-as built-icons.
-
-In general, if you use gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon()
-you should also install the icon in the icon theme, so
-that the icon is generally available.
-
-This function will generally be used with pixbufs loaded
-via gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline().
+Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab
+of the secondary credits dialog.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the icon to register
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> the size at which to register the icon (different
-images can be registered for the same icon name
-at different sizes.)
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> #GdkPixbuf that contains the image to use
-for @icon_name.
+<parameter name="artists">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26429,22 +26893,14 @@ Removes a focus chain explicitly set with gtk_container_set_focus_chain().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_logo_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_widget_reset_shapes">
<description>
-Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in the about dialog.
-If it is %NULL, the default window icon set with
-gtk_window_set_default_icon() will be used.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Recursively resets the shape on this widget and its descendants.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26544,62 +27000,68 @@ selected. Free with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_current_page">
<description>
-Sets a #PangoAttrList; the attributes in the list are applied to the
-label text.
+Switches the page to @page_num. Note that this will only be necessary
+in custom buttons, as the @assistant flow can be set with
+gtk_assistant_set_forward_page_func().
-<note><para>The attributes set with this function will be applied
-and merged with any other attributes previously effected by way
-of the #GtkLabel:use-underline or #GtkLabel:use-markup properties.
-While it is not recommended to mix markup strings with manually set
-attributes, if you must; know that the attributes will be applied
-to the label after the markup string is parsed.</para></note>
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="attrs">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList
+<parameter name="page_num">
+<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
+If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
+than the number of pages in the @assistant, nothing
+will be done.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_string">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_column_spacing">
<description>
-Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
+Sets the ::column-spacing property which specifies the space
+which is inserted between the columns of the icon view.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
+<parameter name="column_spacing">
+<parameter_description> the column spacing
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_unit">
+<description>
+Sets up the transformation for the cairo context obtained from
+#GtkPrintContext in such a way that distances are measured in
+units of @unit.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the string to draw
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit to use
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26625,6 +27087,26 @@ Tags in the buffer may override the default.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_style">
+<description>
+Retrieves whether the tool shell has text, icons, or both. Tool items must
+not call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_style()
+instead.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the current style of @shell
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_selection_data_set_text">
<description>
Sets the contents of the selection from a UTF-8 encoded string.
@@ -26841,28 +27323,21 @@ window.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_window">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name">
<description>
-Sets a widget's window. This function should only be used in a
-widget's GtkWidget::realize() implementation. The %window passed is
-usually either new window created with gdk_window_new(), or the
-window of its parent widget as returned by
-gtk_widget_get_parent_window().
-
-Widgets must indicate whether they will create their own #GdkWindow
-by calling gtk_widget_set_has_window(). This is usually done in the
-widget's init() function.
+Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
+If this is not set, it defaults to g_get_application_name().
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the program name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26936,27 +27411,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_expand_to_path">
-<description>
-Expands the row at @path. This will also expand all parent rows of
- path as necessary.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> path to a row.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_table_get_row_spacing">
<description>
Gets the amount of space between row @row, and
@@ -26999,41 +27453,21 @@ See gtk_entry_buffer_set_text().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_orientation">
-<description>
-Retrieves the current orientation of the toolbar. See
-gtk_toolbar_set_orientation().
-
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_get_orientation() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the orientation
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_dither">
+<function name="gtk_widget_queue_resize_no_redraw">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
+This function works like gtk_widget_queue_resize(),
+except that the widget is not invalidated.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the dithering that is used
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_info_has_application">
@@ -27079,6 +27513,72 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_get_size">
+<description>
+Obtains the current size of @window. If @window is not onscreen,
+it returns the size GTK+ will suggest to the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> for the initial window
+size (but this is not reliably the same as the size the window
+manager will actually select). The size obtained by
+gtk_window_get_size() is the last size received in a
+#GdkEventConfigure, that is, GTK+ uses its locally-stored size,
+rather than querying the X server for the size. As a result, if you
+call gtk_window_resize() then immediately call
+gtk_window_get_size(), the size won't have taken effect yet. After
+the window manager processes the resize request, GTK+ receives
+notification that the size has changed via a configure event, and
+the size of the window gets updated.
+
+Note 1: Nearly any use of this function creates a race condition,
+because the size of the window may change between the time that you
+get the size and the time that you perform some action assuming
+that size is the current size. To avoid race conditions, connect to
+"configure-event" on the window and adjust your size-dependent
+state to match the size delivered in the #GdkEventConfigure.
+
+Note 2: The returned size does <emphasis>not</emphasis> include the
+size of the window manager decorations (aka the window frame or
+border). Those are not drawn by GTK+ and GTK+ has no reliable
+method of determining their size.
+
+Note 3: If you are getting a window size in order to position
+the window onscreen, there may be a better way. The preferred
+way is to simply set the window's semantic type with
+gtk_window_set_type_hint(), which allows the window manager to
+e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of
+dialogs with gtk_window_set_transient_for() window managers
+will often center the dialog over its parent window. It's
+much preferred to let the window manager handle these
+things rather than doing it yourself, because all apps will
+behave consistently and according to user prefs if the window
+manager handles it. Also, the window manager can take the size
+of the window decorations/border into account, while your
+application cannot.
+
+In any case, if you insist on application-specified window
+positioning, there's <emphasis>still</emphasis> a better way than
+doing it yourself - gtk_window_set_position() will frequently
+handle the details for you.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_rc_reset_styles">
<description>
This function recomputes the styles for all widgets that use a
@@ -27104,28 +27604,50 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_screen">
+<function name="gtk_container_add">
<description>
-Sets the #GdkScreen where the @window is displayed; if
-the window is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
-then remapped on the new screen.
-
-Since: 2.2
+Adds @widget to @container. Typically used for simple containers
+such as #GtkWindow, #GtkFrame, or #GtkButton; for more complicated
+layout containers such as #GtkBox or #GtkTable, this function will
+pick default packing parameters that may not be correct. So
+consider functions such as gtk_box_pack_start() and
+gtk_table_attach() as an alternative to gtk_container_add() in
+those cases. A widget may be added to only one container at a time;
+you can't place the same widget inside two different containers.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow.
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a widget to be placed inside @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_fraction">
+<description>
+Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
+See gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction().
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_item_factory_set_translate_func">
<description>
Sets a function to be used for translating the path elements before they
@@ -27196,30 +27718,58 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_select_uri">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_entry">
<description>
-Selects @uri inside @chooser.
+Returns the #GtkEntry which is currently in use as interactive search
+entry for @tree_view. In case the built-in entry is being used, %NULL
+will be returned.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a URI
+</parameters>
+<return> the entry currently in use as search entry.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_button_box_set_child_secondary">
+<description>
+Sets whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
+A typical use of a secondary child is the help button in a dialog.
+
+This group appears after the other children if the style
+is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_START, %GTK_BUTTONBOX_SPREAD or
+%GTK_BUTTONBOX_EDGE, and before the other children if the style
+is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_END. For horizontal button boxes, the definition
+of before/after depends on direction of the widget (see
+gtk_widget_set_direction()). If the style is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_START
+or %GTK_BUTTONBOX_END, then the secondary children are aligned at
+the other end of the button box from the main children. For the
+other styles, they appear immediately next to the main children.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButtonBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a child of @widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_secondary">
+<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the @child appears in a secondary group of the
+button box.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @uri was found.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_item_factory_delete_entries">
@@ -27247,24 +27797,6 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_use_underline">
-<description>
-Returns whether an embedded underline in the label indicates a
-mnemonic. See gtk_label_set_use_underline().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE whether an embedded underline in the label indicates
-the mnemonic accelerator keys.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_operation_preview_is_selected">
<description>
Returns whether the given page is included in the set of pages that
@@ -27307,44 +27839,22 @@ is allowed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_position">
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_add">
<description>
-Retrieves the iterator pointing to the character at buffer
-coordinates @x and @y. Buffer coordinates are coordinates for
-the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portion.
-If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert
-those to buffer coordinates with
-gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords().
-
-Note that this is different from gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_location(),
-which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions <emphasis>between</emphasis>
-characters.
+Add a tag to the table. The tag is assigned the highest priority
+in the table.
-Since: 2.6
+ tag must not be in a tag table already, and may not have
+the same name as an already-added tag.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="trailing">
-<parameter_description> if non-%NULL, location to store an integer indicating where
-in the grapheme the user clicked. It will either be
-zero, or the number of characters in the grapheme.
-0 represents the trailing edge of the grapheme.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x position, in buffer coordinates
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y position, in buffer coordinates
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27365,6 +27875,24 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_option_menu_get_history">
+<description>
+Retrieves the index of the currently selected menu item. The menu
+items are numbered from top to bottom, starting with 0.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkComboBox instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="option_menu">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkOptionMenu
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> index of the selected menu item, or -1 if there are no menu items
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toolbar_prepend_space">
<description>
Adds a new space to the beginning of the toolbar.
@@ -27402,24 +27930,18 @@ Free with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_new">
<description>
-Modifies the @title of the browse dialog used by @button.
+Creates a new #GtkPageSetup.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the button widget to modify.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the new browse dialog title.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkPageSetup.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets">
@@ -27505,63 +28027,26 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_box_pack_start">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_cursor_positions">
<description>
-Adds @child to @box, packed with reference to the start of @box.
-The @child is packed after any other child packed with reference
-to the start of @box.
+Moves up to @count visible cursor positions. See
+gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position() for details.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated to
- box The extra space will be divided evenly between all children of
- box that use this option
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if space given to @child by the @expand option is
-actually allocated to @child, rather than just padding it. This
-parameter has no effect if @expand is set to %FALSE. A child is
-always allocated the full height of a #GtkHBox and the full width
-of a #GtkVBox. This option affects the other dimension
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding">
-<parameter_description> extra space in pixels to put between this child and its
-neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by
-#GtkBox:spacing property. If @child is a widget at one of the
-reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
- child and the reference edge of @box
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of positions to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_label_get_mnemonic_widget">
-<description>
-Retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut) of this
-label. See gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
-
+<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the target of the label's mnemonic, or %NULL if none
-has been set and the default algorithm will be used.
</return>
</function>
@@ -27600,40 +28085,48 @@ mnemonic set up it returns #GDK_VoidSymbol.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_location">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_bottom_margin">
<description>
-Returns a description of the location of the printer.
+Sets the bottom margin of the #GtkPageSetup.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="margin">
+<parameter_description> the new bottom margin in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the units for @margin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the location of @printer
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_bin_get_child">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_gicon">
<description>
-Gets the child of the #GtkBin, or %NULL if the bin contains
-no child widget. The returned widget does not have a reference
-added, so you do not need to unref it.
+Sets the icon of @action.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="bin">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBin
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> the #GIcon to set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> pointer to child of the #GtkBin
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_icon_widget">
@@ -27677,6 +28170,36 @@ saving during an accelerator map dump).
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_row_separator_func">
+<description>
+Sets the row separator function, which is used to determine
+whether a row should be drawn as a separator. If the row separator
+function is %NULL, no separators are drawn. This is the default value.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewRowSeparatorFunc
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @func, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_char">
<description>
Moves @iter forward by one character offset. Note that images
@@ -27699,52 +28222,20 @@ convenience when writing loops.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_set_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_get_size">
<description>
-Sets the alignment of the child. This property has no effect unless
-the child is a #GtkMisc or a #GtkAligment.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> the horizontal position of the child, 0.0 is left aligned,
-1.0 is right aligned
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> the vertical position of the child, 0.0 is top aligned,
-1.0 is bottom aligned
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Returns the size of the table (number of tags)
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_set_model">
-<description>
-Sets the model of @tree_model_sort to be @model. If @model is %NULL,
-then the old model is unset. The sort function is unset as a result
-of this call. The model will be in an unsorted state until a sort
-function is set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModelSort.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> number of tags in @table
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bounds">
@@ -27930,21 +28421,52 @@ the menu is unposted
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_from_file">
<description>
-Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
-If this is not set, it defaults to g_get_application_name().
+Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
+had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them from a file
+on disk. Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> location of icon file
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the program name
+<parameter name="err">
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_window">
+<description>
+Sets a widget's window. This function should only be used in a
+widget's GtkWidget::realize() implementation. The %window passed is
+usually either new window created with gdk_window_new(), or the
+window of its parent widget as returned by
+gtk_widget_get_parent_window().
+
+Widgets must indicate whether they will create their own #GdkWindow
+by calling gtk_widget_set_has_window(). This is usually done in the
+widget's init() function.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27986,30 +28508,6 @@ Gets the update policy of @range. See gtk_range_set_update_policy().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_chain">
-<description>
-Sets a focus chain, overriding the one computed automatically by GTK+.
-
-In principle each widget in the chain should be a descendant of the
-container, but this is not enforced by this method, since it's allowed
-to set the focus chain before you pack the widgets, or have a widget
-in the chain that isn't always packed. The necessary checks are done
-when the focus chain is actually traversed.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="focusable_widgets">
-<parameter_description> the new focus chain
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_draw_handle">
<description>
Draws a handle as used in #GtkHandleBox and #GtkPaned.
@@ -28058,24 +28556,6 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_handle() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_orientable_get_orientation">
-<description>
-Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="orientable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkOrientable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the orientation of the @orientable.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_class_list_style_properties">
<description>
Returns all style properties of a widget class.
@@ -28098,6 +28578,24 @@ be freed with g_free().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_orientable_get_orientation">
+<description>
+Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="orientable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkOrientable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the orientation of the @orientable.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_model">
<description>
Returns the model for @cell_view. If no model is used %NULL is
@@ -28414,27 +28912,6 @@ Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_set_orientation() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_current_page">
-<description>
-Sets the current page number. If @current_page is not -1, this enables
-the current page choice for the range of pages to print.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="current_page">
-<parameter_description> the current page number.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_box_set_spacing">
<description>
Sets the #GtkBox:spacing property of @box, which is the
@@ -28454,76 +28931,49 @@ number of pixels to place between children of @box.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_buildable_custom_tag_start">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_ancestor">
<description>
-This is called for each unknown element under <child>.
+Gets the first ancestor of @widget with type @widget_type. For example,
+<literal>gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)</literal> gets
+the first #GtkBox that's an ancestor of @widget. No reference will be
+added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note
+about checking for a toplevel #GtkWindow in the docs for
+gtk_widget_get_toplevel().
+
+Note that unlike gtk_widget_is_ancestor(), gtk_widget_get_ancestor()
+considers @widget to be an ancestor of itself.
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buildable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder used to construct this object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> child object or %NULL for non-child tags
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tagname">
-<parameter_description> name of tag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parser">
-<parameter_description> a #GMarkupParser structure to fill in
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> return location for user data that will be passed in
-to parser functions
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> ancestor type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if a object has a custom implementation, %FALSE
-if it doesn't.
-
+<return> the ancestor widget, or %NULL if not found
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_move_item">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_reorderable">
<description>
-Changes the location of a recently used resource from @uri to @new_uri.
-
-Please note that this function will not affect the resource pointed
-by the URIs, but only the URI used in the recently used resources list.
+Retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop.
+See gtk_icon_view_set_reorderable().
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> the URI of a recently used resource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_uri">
-<parameter_description> the new URI of the recently used resource, or %NULL to
-remove the item pointed by @uri in the list
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success.
+<return> %TRUE if the list can be reordered.
</return>
</function>
@@ -28592,42 +29042,19 @@ is open. Do not ref or unref it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_add_source">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_use_underline">
<description>
-Icon sets have a list of #GtkIconSource, which they use as base
-icons for rendering icons in different states and sizes. Icons are
-scaled, made to look insensitive, etc. in
-gtk_icon_set_render_icon(), but #GtkIconSet needs base images to
-work with. The base images and when to use them are described by
-a #GtkIconSource.
-
-This function copies @source, so you can reuse the same source immediately
-without affecting the icon set.
-
-An example of when you'd use this function: a web browser's "Back
-to Previous Page" icon might point in a different direction in
-Hebrew and in English; it might look different when insensitive;
-and it might change size depending on toolbar mode (small/large
-icons). So a single icon set would contain all those variants of
-the icon, and you might add a separate source for each one.
-
-You should nearly always add a "default" icon source with all
-fields wildcarded, which will be used as a fallback if no more
-specific source matches. #GtkIconSet always prefers more specific
-icon sources to more generic icon sources. The order in which you
-add the sources to the icon set does not matter.
-
-gtk_icon_set_new_from_pixbuf() creates a new icon set with a
-default icon source based on the given pixbuf.
+If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
+used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -28659,23 +29086,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_visibility">
-<description>
-Retrieves whether the text in @entry is visible. See
-gtk_entry_set_visibility().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the text is currently visible
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_uri">
<description>
Gets the URI currently selected by @chooser.
@@ -28741,38 +29151,39 @@ Returns whether the statusbar has a resize grip.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_factory_remove_default">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy">
<description>
-Removes an icon factory from the list of default icon
-factories. Not normally used; you might use it for a library that
-can be unloaded or shut down.
+Sets the update behavior of a spin button. This determines whether the
+spin button is always updated or only when a valid value is set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="factory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory previously added with gtk_icon_factory_add_default()
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="policy">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButtonUpdatePolicy value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_text_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_icons">
<description>
-Retrieves the current text orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
-call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()
-instead.
+Retrieves whether @chooser should show an icon near the resource.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="shell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current text orientation of @shell
+<return> %TRUE if the icons should be displayed, %FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
@@ -28832,6 +29243,35 @@ action, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
+<description>
+Sets @filter_iter to point to the row in @filter that corresponds to the
+row pointed at by @child_iter. If @filter_iter was not set, %FALSE is
+returned.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filter_iter">
+<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child_iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE, if @filter_iter was set, i.e. if @child_iter is a
+valid iterator pointing to a visible row in child model.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate">
<description>
Validate regions of a #GtkTextLayout. The ::changed signal will
@@ -28907,50 +29347,28 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_ui">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label">
<description>
-Creates a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> of the merged UI.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Changes the tab label for @child. If %NULL is specified
+for @tab_label, then the page will have the label 'page N'.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of
-the merged UI.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_view_backward_display_line_start">
-<description>
-Moves the given @iter backward to the next display line start.
-A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
-separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
-Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
-wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
-same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
-they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
-views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the page
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the tab label widget to use, or %NULL for default tab
+label.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_selection_get_select_multiple">
@@ -29006,45 +29424,31 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_starts_display_line">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_requisition">
<description>
-Determines whether @iter is at the start of a display line.
-See gtk_text_view_forward_display_line() for an explanation of
-display lines vs. paragraphs.
-
+Retrieves the widget's requisition.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter begins a wrapped line
-</return>
-</function>
+This function should only be used by widget implementations in
+order to figure whether the widget's requisition has actually
+changed after some internal state change (so that they can call
+gtk_widget_queue_resize() instead of gtk_widget_queue_draw()).
-<function name="gtk_window_group_list_windows">
-<description>
-Returns a list of the #GtkWindows that belong to @window_group.
+Normally, gtk_widget_size_request() should be used.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindowGroup
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="requisition">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkRequisition to copy to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly-allocated list of
-windows inside the group.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_get_menu">
@@ -29106,6 +29510,33 @@ with the widget.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement">
+<description>
+Sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
+for the scrolled window.
+
+The default is %GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT, meaning the child is
+in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right.
+Other values in #GtkCornerType are %GTK_CORNER_TOP_RIGHT,
+%GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, and %GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT.
+
+See also gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement() and
+gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window_placement">
+<parameter_description> position of the child window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify">
<description>
Reverts the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify().
@@ -29181,9 +29612,9 @@ Specifies whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. Note that
all realized widgets have a non-%NULL "window" pointer
(gtk_widget_get_window() never returns a %NULL window when a widget
is realized), but for many of them it's actually the #GdkWindow of
-one of its parent widgets. Widgets that create a %window for
-themselves in GtkWidget::realize() however must announce this by
-calling this function with @has_window = %TRUE.
+one of its parent widgets. Widgets that do not create a %window for
+themselves in GtkWidget::realize() must announce this by
+calling this function with @has_window = %FALSE.
This function should only be called by widget implementations,
and they should call it in their init() function.
@@ -29345,113 +29776,76 @@ gtk_frame_set_label_widget().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_name">
+<function name="gtk_init_with_args">
<description>
-Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask
-into a string parseable by gtk_accelerator_parse().
-For example, if you pass in #GDK_q and #GDK_CONTROL_MASK,
-this function returns "<Control>q".
-
-If you need to display accelerators in the user interface,
-see gtk_accelerator_get_label().
+This function does the same work as gtk_init_check().
+Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
+and it automatically generates nicely formatted
+<option>--help</option> output. Note that your program will
+be terminated after writing out the help output.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accelerator_key">
-<parameter_description> accelerator keyval
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
-<parameter_description> accelerator modifier mask
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parameter_string">
+<parameter_description> a string which is displayed in
+the first line of <option>--help</option> output, after
+<literal><replaceable>programname</replaceable> [OPTION...]</literal>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry<!-- -->s
+describing the options of your program
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="translation_domain">
+<parameter_description> a translation domain to use for translating
+the <option>--help</option> output for the options in @entries
+with gettext(), or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> a return location for errors
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated accelerator name
+<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
+%FALSE otherwise.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_parse_geometry">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_size">
<description>
-Parses a standard X Window System geometry string - see the
-manual page for X (type 'man X') for details on this.
-gtk_window_parse_geometry() does work on all GTK+ ports
-including Win32 but is primarily intended for an X environment.
-
-If either a size or a position can be extracted from the
-geometry string, gtk_window_parse_geometry() returns %TRUE
-and calls gtk_window_set_default_size() and/or gtk_window_move()
-to resize/move the window.
-
-If gtk_window_parse_geometry() returns %TRUE, it will also
-set the #GDK_HINT_USER_POS and/or #GDK_HINT_USER_SIZE hints
-indicating to the window manager that the size/position of
-the window was user-specified. This causes most window
-managers to honor the geometry.
-
-Note that for gtk_window_parse_geometry() to work as expected, it has
-to be called when the window has its "final" size, i.e. after calling
-gtk_widget_show_all() on the contents and gtk_window_set_geometry_hints()
-on the window.
-|[
-#include <gtk/gtk.h>
-
-static void
-fill_with_content (GtkWidget *vbox)
-{
-/ * fill with content... * /
-}
-
-int
-main (int argc, char *argv[])
-{
-GtkWidget *window, *vbox;
-GdkGeometry size_hints = {
-100, 50, 0, 0, 100, 50, 10, 10, 0.0, 0.0, GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST
-};
-
-gtk_init (&argc, &argv);
-
-window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
-vbox = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
-
-gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), vbox);
-fill_with_content (vbox);
-gtk_widget_show_all (vbox);
-
-gtk_window_set_geometry_hints (GTK_WINDOW (window),
-window,
-&size_hints,
-GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE |
-GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE |
-GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC);
-
-if (argc > 1)
-{
-if (!gtk_window_parse_geometry (GTK_WINDOW (window), argv[1]))
-fprintf (stderr, "Failed to parse '%s'\n", argv[1]);
-}
-
-gtk_widget_show_all (window);
-gtk_main ();
+Gets the size in pixels that is available for the image.
+Stock icons and named icons adapt their size automatically
+if the size of the notification area changes. For other
+storage types, the size-changed signal can be used to
+react to size changes.
-return 0;
-}
-]|
+Note that the returned size is only meaningful while the
+status icon is embedded (see gtk_status_icon_is_embedded()).
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="geometry">
-<parameter_description> geometry string
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if string was parsed successfully
+<return> the size that is available for the image
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -29513,6 +29907,24 @@ page in the notebook
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_previous_color">
+<description>
+Fills @color in with the original color value.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the original color value.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_target_list_add_text_targets">
<description>
Appends the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
@@ -29603,31 +30015,22 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_model">
<description>
-Sets the area of the widget, where the contents of this tooltip apply,
-to be @rect (in widget coordinates). This is especially useful for
-properly setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView rows and cells, #GtkIconViews,
-etc.
-
-For setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView, please refer to the convenience
-functions for this: gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row() and
-gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell().
+Returns the #GtkTreeModel which is acting as data source for @combo_box.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rect">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_paper_size">
@@ -29825,21 +30228,20 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_job_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_buffer">
<description>
-Gets the job title.
+Gets the text buffer used by the layout. See
+gtk_text_layout_set_buffer().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="job">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the title of @job
-
+<return> the text buffer used by the layout.
</return>
</function>
@@ -29990,56 +30392,25 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_layout">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_create_row_drag_icon">
<description>
-Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
+Creates a #GdkPixmap representation of the row at @path.
+This image is used for a drag icon.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_text">
-<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
-graphics context of @style
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> the layout to draw
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath in @tree_view
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly-allocated pixmap of the drag icon.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_current_page">
@@ -30067,6 +30438,31 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_filename">
+<description>
+Selects a filename. If the file name isn't in the current
+folder of @chooser, then the current folder of @chooser will
+be changed to the folder containing @filename.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> the filename to select
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
+selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_color_button_get_use_alpha">
<description>
Does the color selection dialog use the alpha channel?
@@ -30104,6 +30500,31 @@ and must not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_use_full_page">
+<description>
+If @full_page is %TRUE, the transformation for the cairo context
+obtained from #GtkPrintContext puts the origin at the top left
+corner of the page (which may not be the top left corner of the
+sheet, depending on page orientation and the number of pages per
+sheet). Otherwise, the origin is at the top left corner of the
+imageable area (i.e. inside the margins).
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="full_page">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to set up the #GtkPrintContext for the full page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_line_at_y">
<description>
Gets the #GtkTextIter at the start of the line containing
@@ -30146,6 +30567,27 @@ Creates a new toolbar.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_set_model">
+<description>
+Sets the model of @tree_model_sort to be @model. If @model is %NULL,
+then the old model is unset. The sort function is unset as a result
+of this call. The model will be in an unsorted state until a sort
+function is set.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModelSort.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name">
<description>
Sets the currently selected font.
@@ -30245,22 +30687,21 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_active_iter">
<description>
-Calling this function signals to the toolbar that the
-overflow menu item for @tool_item has changed. If the
-overflow menu is visible when this function it called,
-the menu will be rebuilt.
-
-The function must be called when the tool item changes what it
-will do in response to the #GtkToolItem::create-menu-proxy signal.
+Sets the current active item to be the one referenced by @iter, or
+unsets the active item if @iter is %NULL.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -30374,30 +30815,34 @@ should be ellipsized.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_text">
+<function name="gtk_print_error_quark">
<description>
-Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
-with text @text. If you want the action item to have markup, use
-gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_markup().
+Registers an error quark for #GtkPrintOperation if necessary.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="index_">
-<parameter_description> The index of the item to insert.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> Text of the item to insert.
+</parameters>
+<return> The error quark used for #GtkPrintOperation errors.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_equal_func">
+<description>
+Returns the compare function currently in use.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the currently used compare function for the search code.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties">
@@ -30507,22 +30952,24 @@ context id.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_new">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_scale">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkMountOperation
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> the scale in percent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkMountOperation
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_display">
@@ -30640,45 +31087,18 @@ used.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_complete">
<description>
-Adds a child at fixed coordinates in one of the text widget's
-windows. The window must have nonzero size (see
-gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()). Note that the child
-coordinates are given relative to the #GdkWindow in question, and
-that these coordinates have no sane relationship to scrolling. When
-placing a child in #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, scrolling is
-irrelevant, the child floats above all scrollable areas. But when
-placing a child in one of the scrollable windows (border windows or
-text window), you'll need to compute the child's correct position
-in buffer coordinates any time scrolling occurs or buffer changes
-occur, and then call gtk_text_view_move_child() to update the
-child's position. Unfortunately there's no good way to detect that
-scrolling has occurred, using the current API; a possible hack
-would be to update all child positions when the scroll adjustments
-change or the text buffer changes. See bug 64518 on
-bugzilla.gnome.org for status of fixing this issue.
+Requests a completion operation, or in other words a refiltering of the
+current list with completions, using the current key. The completion list
+view will be updated accordingly.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="which_window">
-<parameter_description> which window the child should appear in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpos">
-<parameter_description> X position of child in window coordinates
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypos">
-<parameter_description> Y position of child in window coordinates
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -30791,7 +31211,9 @@ each column number followed by the value to be set.
The list is terminated by a -1. For example, to set column 0 with type
%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write <literal>gtk_list_store_set (store, iter,
0, "Foo", -1)</literal>.
-The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
+
+The value will be referenced by the store if it is a %G_TYPE_OBJECT, and it
+will be copied if it is a %G_TYPE_STRING or %G_TYPE_BOXED.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -30811,14 +31233,11 @@ The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_widget_unparent">
<description>
-Returns the clipboard object for the given selection to
-be used with @widget. @widget must have a #GdkDisplay
-associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel
-window.
-
-Since: 2.2
+This function is only for use in widget implementations.
+Should be called by implementations of the remove method
+on #GtkContainer, to dissociate a child from the container.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -30826,35 +31245,8 @@ Since: 2.2
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkAtom which identifies the clipboard
-to use. %GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the
-default clipboard. Another common value
-is %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, which gives
-the primary X selection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the appropriate clipboard object. If no
-clipboard already exists, a new one will
-be created. Once a clipboard object has
-been created, it is persistent for all time.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new ui manager object.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return> a new ui manager object.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest">
@@ -30903,6 +31295,32 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_lines">
+<description>
+Moves @count lines backward, if possible (if @count would move
+past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
+the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
+the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
+moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of lines to move backward
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_scrollable">
<description>
Returns whether the tab label area has arrows for scrolling. See
@@ -30941,22 +31359,20 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_n_copies">
<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
-If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated
-appropriately.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+<return> the number of copies to print
</return>
</function>
@@ -31043,23 +31459,24 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_opacity_control">
+<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_text_orientation">
<description>
-Sets the @colorsel to use or not use opacity.
+Retrieves the current text orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
+call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()
+instead.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_opacity">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @colorsel can set the opacity, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current text orientation of @shell
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_iter_is_selected">
@@ -31082,27 +31499,6 @@ Returns %TRUE if the row at @iter is currently selected.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_settings">
-<description>
-Gets a new #GtkPrintSettings object that represents the
-current values in the print dialog. Note that this creates a
-<emphasis>new object</emphasis>, and you need to unref it
-if don't want to keep it.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPrintSettings object with the values from @dialog
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end">
<description>
Moves forward to the next visible word end. (If @iter is currently on a
@@ -31251,39 +31647,26 @@ be clamped to the range 0-65536.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_double_buffered">
+<function name="gtk_style_lookup_icon_set">
<description>
-Widgets are double buffered by default; you can use this function
-to turn off the buffering. "Double buffered" simply means that
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() and gdk_window_end_paint() are called
-automatically around expose events sent to the
-widget. gdk_window_begin_paint() diverts all drawing to a widget's
-window to an offscreen buffer, and gdk_window_end_paint() draws the
-buffer to the screen. The result is that users see the window
-update in one smooth step, and don't see individual graphics
-primitives being rendered.
-
-In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don't flicker,
-so you would only use this function to turn off double buffering
-if you had special needs and really knew what you were doing.
+Looks up @stock_id in the icon factories associated with @style
+and the default icon factory, returning an icon set if found,
+otherwise %NULL.
-Note: if you turn off double-buffering, you have to handle
-expose events, since even the clearing to the background color or
-pixmap will not happen automatically (as it is done in
-gdk_window_begin_paint()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="double_buffered">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to double-buffer a widget
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> icon set of @stock_id
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_side_image">
@@ -31393,33 +31776,56 @@ is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_get_default_mod_mask">
-<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_accelerator_set_default_mod_mask().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the default accelerator modifier mask
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget">
+<function name="gtk_paint_diamond">
<description>
-Sets the label of the tool item group.
-The label widget is displayed in the header of the group, in place
-of the usual label.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Draws a diamond in the given rectangle on @window using the given
+parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="label_widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget to be displayed in place of the usual label
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -31442,45 +31848,76 @@ Gets the units used for a #GtkRuler. See gtk_ruler_set_metric().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_get_sizes">
+<function name="gtk_draw_arrow">
<description>
-Obtains a list of icon sizes this icon set can render. The returned
-array must be freed with g_free().
+Draws an arrow in the given rectangle on @window using the given
+parameters. @arrow_type determines the direction of the arrow.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_arrow() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="sizes">
-<parameter_description> return location
-for array of sizes
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_sizes">
-<parameter_description> location to store number of elements in returned array
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="arrow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of arrow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fill">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the arrow tip should be filled
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_newv">
<description>
-Gets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
+Non vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="n_columns">
+<parameter_description> number of columns in the tree store
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="types">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GType types for the columns, from first to last
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page orientation
-
+<return> a new #GtkTreeStore
</return>
</function>
@@ -31563,6 +32000,24 @@ Creates a new #GtkTreePath. This structure refers to a row.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_hadjustment">
+<description>
+Gets the horizontal-scrolling #GtkAdjustment.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> pointer to the horizontal #GtkAdjustment
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_draw_option">
<description>
Draws a radio button indicator in the given rectangle on @window with
@@ -31629,28 +32084,6 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_info_new_for_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Creates a #GtkIconInfo for a #GdkPixbuf.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the pixbuf to wrap in a #GtkIconInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkIconInfo
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_detachable">
<description>
Returns whether the tab contents can be detached from @notebook.
@@ -31714,23 +32147,6 @@ to a stock icon.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_justification">
-<description>
-Gets the default justification of paragraphs in @text_view.
-Tags in the buffer may override the default.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> default justification
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_buildable_custom_tag_end">
<description>
This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
@@ -31764,91 +32180,145 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_new">
+<function name="gtk_widget_send_expose">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellRendererToggle. Adjust rendering
-parameters using object properties. Object properties can be set
-globally (with g_object_set()). Also, with #GtkTreeViewColumn, you
-can bind a property to a value in a #GtkTreeModel. For example, you
-can bind the "active" property on the cell renderer to a boolean value
-in the model, thus causing the check button to reflect the state of
-the model.
+Very rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
+an expose event signals on a widget. This function is not
+normally used directly. The only time it is used is when
+propagating an expose event to a child %NO_WINDOW widget, and
+that is normally done using gtk_container_propagate_expose().
+
+If you want to force an area of a window to be redrawn,
+use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() or gdk_window_invalidate_region().
+To cause the redraw to be done immediately, follow that call
+with a call to gdk_window_process_updates().
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a expose #GdkEvent
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new cell renderer
+<return> return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if
+the event was handled)
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_foreach">
+<function name="gtk_menu_set_screen">
<description>
-Calls @func for each key-value pair of @settings.
+Sets the #GdkScreen on which the menu will be displayed.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> (scope call) the function to call
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @func
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if the screen should be
+determined by the widget the menu is attached to.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_visible_range">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_added">
<description>
-Sets @start_path and @end_path to be the first and last visible path.
-Note that there may be invisible paths in between.
-
-Both paths should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() after use.
+Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
+was added to the recently used resources list.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for start of region, or %NULL
+</parameters>
+<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
+the resource was added to the list, or -1 on failure.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_path_to_path">
+<description>
+Converts @child_path to a path relative to @filter. That is, @child_path
+points to a path in the child model. The rerturned path will point to the
+same row in the filtered model. If @child_path isn't a valid path on the
+child model or points to a row which is not visible in @filter, then %NULL
+is returned.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for end of region, or %NULL
+<parameter name="child_path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if valid paths were placed in @start_path and @end_path
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_new_with_model">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_item">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkIconView widget with the model @model.
+Inserts a new item into the toolbar. You must specify the position
+in the toolbar where it will be inserted.
-Since: 2.6
+ callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
+arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> The model.
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> give your toolbar button a label.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_text">
+<parameter_description> a string that appears when the user holds the mouse over this item.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
+<parameter_description> use with #GtkTipsQuery.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to any data you wish to be passed to the callback.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkIconView widget.
+<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -31890,29 +32360,27 @@ or %NULL if the mark is deleted.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color">
+<function name="gtk_button_set_image">
<description>
-Parses a color in the <link linkend="color=format">format</link> expected
-in a RC file.
-
-Note that theme engines should use gtk_rc_parse_color_full() in
-order to support symbolic colors.
+Set the image of @button to the given widget. Note that
+it depends on the #GtkSettings:gtk-button-images setting whether the
+image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call
+gtk_widget_show() on @image yourself.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scanner">
-<parameter_description> a #GScanner
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GdkColor structure in which to store the result
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a widget to set as the image for the button
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %G_TOKEN_NONE if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token
-that was expected but not found
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_cursor_visible">
@@ -31932,21 +32400,26 @@ shown, even if the text is editable.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_focus">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_gicon">
<description>
-Determines whether @widget can own the input focus. See
-gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
+Retrieves the #GIcon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
+The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_GICON (see gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()).
+The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
+returned #GIcon.
-Since: 2.18
+If this function fails, @icon is left unchanged;
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty
</return>
</function>
@@ -32034,22 +32507,6 @@ Emits the "row-changed" signal on @tree_model.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_new_with_adjustment">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkProgressBar with an associated #GtkAdjustment.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkProgressBar.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_get_context_id">
<description>
Gets the id of the currently active slave of the @context.
@@ -32171,6 +32628,26 @@ for @tool_item.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_word_starts">
+<description>
+Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start() up to @count times.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of times to move
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_pixbuf">
<description>
Gets the #GdkPixbuf being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
@@ -32229,31 +32706,27 @@ Copies a stock item, mostly useful for language bindings and not in applications
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_get_label">
+<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_name">
<description>
-Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded
-underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup, as set by
-gtk_expander_set_label(). If the label text has not been set the
-return value will be %NULL. This will be the case if you create an
-empty button with gtk_button_new() to use as a container.
-
-Note that this function behaved differently in versions prior to
-2.14 and used to return the label text stripped of embedded
-underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. This problem can
-be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label
-widget.
+Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
+If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
+displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
+will be updated appropriately.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="expander">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The text of the label widget. This string is owned
-by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
+<return> a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
</return>
</function>
@@ -32386,26 +32859,23 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_bottom_margin">
+<function name="gtk_icon_factory_add_default">
<description>
-Gets the default bottom margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Adds an icon factory to the list of icon factories searched by
+gtk_style_lookup_icon_set(). This means that, for example,
+gtk_image_new_from_stock() will be able to find icons in @factory.
+There will normally be an icon factory added for each library or
+application that comes with icons. The default icon factories
+can be overridden by themes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="factory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default bottom margin
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_get_label">
@@ -32489,25 +32959,34 @@ in the buffer may override the default.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_get_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation">
<description>
-This function should only be called after the layout has been
-placed in a #GtkScrolledWindow or otherwise configured for
-scrolling. It returns the #GtkAdjustment used for communication
-between the horizontal scrollbar and @layout.
+Sets whether a file chooser in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode will present
+a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists. This
+is %FALSE by default.
-See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
+Regardless of this setting, the @chooser will emit the
+#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal when appropriate.
+If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to %TRUE.
+You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
+#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal; please refer to its documentation
+for the details.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="do_overwrite_confirmation">
+<parameter_description> whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> horizontal scroll adjustment
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_print_pages">
@@ -32594,39 +33073,36 @@ Creates a new #GtkNotebook widget with no pages.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_keep_below">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_cursor">
<description>
-Asks to keep @window below, so that it stays in bottom. Note that
-you shouldn't assume the window is definitely below afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could not keep it below,
-and not all window managers support putting windows below. But
-normally the window will be kept below. Just don't write code
-that crashes if not.
-
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
-in which case the window will be kept below when it appears onscreen
-initially.
-
-You can track the below state via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
-
-Note that, according to the <ulink
-url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec">Extended Window
-Manager Hints</ulink> specification, the above state is mainly meant
-for user preferences and should not be used by applications e.g. for
-drawing attention to their dialogs.
+Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
+useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row. If
+ focus_column is not %NULL, then focus is given to the column specified by
+it. Additionally, if @focus_column is specified, and @start_editing is
+%TRUE, then editing should be started in the specified cell.
+This function is often followed by @gtk_widget_grab_focus (@tree_view)
+in order to give keyboard focus to the widget. Please note that editing
+can only happen when the widget is realized.
-Since: 2.4
+If @path is invalid for @model, the current cursor (if any) will be unset
+and the function will return without failing.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> whether to keep @window below other windows
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="focus_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start_editing">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the specified cell should start being edited.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -32883,15 +33359,21 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_socket_new">
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_plus_button">
<description>
-Create a new empty #GtkSocket.
+Retrieves the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkSocket.
+<return> the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -32915,22 +33397,21 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_filename">
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_icon_name">
<description>
-Retrieves the source filename, or %NULL if none is set. The
-filename is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
-persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
+Gets the name of the icon to use for the printer.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> image filename. This string must not be modified
-or freed.
+<return> the icon name for @printer
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -32962,27 +33443,24 @@ user collapses a row, or a row is deleted.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_justify">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_has_tag">
<description>
-Sets the alignment of the lines in the text of the label relative to
-each other. %GTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT is the default value when the
-widget is first created with gtk_label_new(). If you instead want
-to set the alignment of the label as a whole, use
-gtk_misc_set_alignment() instead. gtk_label_set_justify() has no
-effect on labels containing only a single line.
+Returns %TRUE if @iter is within a range tagged with @tag.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="jtype">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkJustification
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @iter is tagged with @tag
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_double">
@@ -33073,21 +33551,26 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_valid">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_fixed_size">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if the @reference is non-%NULL and refers to a current valid
-path.
-
+Sets the renderer size to be explicit, independent of the properties set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="reference">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the cell renderer, or -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the cell renderer, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_cursor_positions">
@@ -33204,23 +33687,70 @@ gtk_widget_set_style() and go back to the default style
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_toplevel">
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_selected_rows">
<description>
-Determines whether @widget is a toplevel widget. Currently only
-#GtkWindow and #GtkInvisible are toplevel widgets. Toplevel
-widgets have no parent widget.
+Creates a list of path of all selected rows. Additionally, if you are
+planning on modifying the model after calling this function, you may
+want to convert the returned list into a list of #GtkTreeRowReference<!-- -->s.
+To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
-Since: 2.18
+To free the return value, use:
+|[
+g_list_foreach (list, (GFunc) gtk_tree_path_free, NULL);
+g_list_free (list);
+]|
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to set to the #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> A #GList containing a #GtkTreePath for each selected row.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column_with_attributes">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn and inserts it into the @tree_view at
+ position If @position is -1, then the newly created column is inserted at
+the end. The column is initialized with the attributes given. If @tree_view
+has "fixed_height" mode enabled, then the new column will have its sizing
+property set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> The position to insert the new column in.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> The title to set the header to.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkCellRenderer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
</return>
</function>
@@ -33456,28 +33986,6 @@ removed by the recently used resources list, and %FALSE otherwise.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_drag_dest_row">
-<description>
-Gets information about the row that is highlighted for feedback.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted row, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_ends">
<description>
Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end() up to @count times.
@@ -33527,22 +34035,20 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_context">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hadjustment">
<description>
-Creates a new #PangoContext that can be used with the
-#GtkPrintContext.
+Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the horizontal aspect.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new Pango context for @context
-
+<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
+used.
</return>
</function>
@@ -33677,42 +34183,6 @@ Sets the size of the scrollable area of the layout.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_append_page_menu">
-<description>
-Appends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
-label in the popup menu.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="menu_label">
-<parameter_description> the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
-menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
-is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
-a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
-If @tab_label is not a #GtkLabel, @menu_label must be
-specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the appended
-page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_printer_get_name">
<description>
Returns the name of the printer.
@@ -33834,60 +34304,72 @@ If the model is frozen, the file will only show up after it is thawn.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_owner">
+<function name="gtk_ruler_get_range">
<description>
-If the clipboard contents callbacks were set with
-gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner(), and the gtk_clipboard_set_with_data() or
-gtk_clipboard_clear() has not subsequently called, returns the owner set
-by gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner().
-
+Retrieves values indicating the range and current position of a #GtkRuler.
+See gtk_ruler_set_range().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+<parameter name="ruler">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="lower">
+<parameter_description> location to store lower limit of the ruler, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="upper">
+<parameter_description> location to store upper limit of the ruler, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> location to store the current position of the mark on the ruler, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_size">
+<parameter_description> location to store the maximum size of the ruler used when calculating
+the space to leave for the text, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the owner of the clipboard, if any; otherwise %NULL.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_display_name">
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_focus">
<description>
-Gets the human-readable name of the #GtkPaperSize.
+Determines if the widget is the focus widget within its
+toplevel. (This does not mean that the %HAS_FOCUS flag is
+necessarily set; %HAS_FOCUS will only be set if the
+toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.)
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the human-readable name of @size
-
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_misc_get_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_expand_to_path">
<description>
-Gets the X and Y alignment of the widget within its allocation.
-See gtk_misc_set_alignment().
+Expands the row at @path. This will also expand all parent rows of
+ path as necessary.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="misc">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMisc
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of @misc, or %NULL
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> location to store Y alignment of @misc, or %NULL
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> path to a row.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -33937,20 +34419,20 @@ range of columns.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_length">
+<function name="gtk_viewport_get_bin_window">
<description>
-Retrieves the length in characters of the buffer.
+Gets the bin window of the #GtkViewport.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+<parameter name="viewport">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The number of characters in the buffer.
+<return> a #GdkWindow
</return>
</function>
@@ -33973,46 +34455,76 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_ref">
+<function name="gtk_radio_action_get_group">
<description>
-Adds a reference to a widget. This function is exactly the same
-as calling g_object_ref(), and exists mostly for historical
-reasons. It can still be convenient to avoid casting a widget
-to a #GObject, it saves a small amount of typing.
+Returns the list representing the radio group for this object.
+Note that the returned list is only valid until the next change
+to the group.
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use g_object_ref() instead.
+A common way to set up a group of radio group is the following:
+|[
+GSList *group = NULL;
+GtkRadioAction *action;
+
+while (/ * more actions to add * /)
+{
+action = gtk_radio_action_new (...);
+
+gtk_radio_action_set_group (action, group);
+group = gtk_radio_action_get_group (action);
+}
+]|
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the widget that was referenced
+<return> the list representing the radio group for this object
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_allocation">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_chars_in_line">
<description>
-Sets the widget's allocation. This should not be used
-directly, but from within a widget's size_allocate method.
+Returns the number of characters in the line containing @iter,
+including the paragraph delimiters.
-Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="allocation">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
+</parameters>
+<return> number of characters in the line
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_ref">
+<description>
+Adds a reference to a widget. This function is exactly the same
+as calling g_object_ref(), and exists mostly for historical
+reasons. It can still be convenient to avoid casting a widget
+to a #GObject, it saves a small amount of typing.
+
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use g_object_ref() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the widget that was referenced
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_append">
@@ -34063,6 +34575,28 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_margin">
+<description>
+Sets the ::margin property which specifies the space
+which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right
+of the icon view.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="margin">
+<parameter_description> the margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_vscale_new_with_range">
<description>
Creates a new vertical scale widget that lets the user input a
@@ -34163,6 +34697,24 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_n_pages">
+<description>
+Gets the number of pages in a notebook.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the number of pages in the notebook.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_show">
<description>
Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn't shown will
@@ -34187,24 +34739,6 @@ toplevel container is realized and mapped.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_completion">
-<description>
-Returns the auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_set_reserve_toggle_size">
<description>
Sets whether the menu should reserve space for drawing toggles
@@ -34408,31 +34942,23 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_requisition">
+<function name="gtk_window_group_list_windows">
<description>
-Retrieves the widget's requisition.
-
-This function should only be used by widget implementations in
-order to figure whether the widget's requisition has actually
-changed after some internal state change (so that they can call
-gtk_widget_queue_resize() instead of gtk_widget_queue_draw()).
-
-Normally, gtk_widget_size_request() should be used.
+Returns a list of the #GtkWindows that belong to @window_group.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="requisition">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkRequisition to copy to
+<parameter name="window_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindowGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly-allocated list of
+windows inside the group.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_line_yrange">
@@ -34482,22 +35008,25 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_single_line_mode">
+<function name="gtk_layout_set_hadjustment">
<description>
-Returns whether the label is in single line mode.
+Sets the horizontal scroll adjustment for the layout.
+
+See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> new scroll adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE when the label is in single line mode.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_pack_end">
@@ -34618,6 +35147,29 @@ g_free().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_valid">
+<description>
+Determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute
+a valid keyboard accelerator. For example, the #GDK_a keyval
+plus #GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a "Ctrl+a" accelerator.
+But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_Control_L keyval
+as an accelerator.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> a GDK keyval
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> modifier mask
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the accelerator is valid
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_func">
<description>
Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be @sort_func. If
@@ -34773,6 +35325,10 @@ for language bindings to use.
<description>
Removes the visual marker from a particular day.
+Note that this function always returns %TRUE, and you should
+ignore the return value. In GTK+ 3, this function will not
+return a value.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34813,24 +35369,6 @@ automatically, or explicitly using gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_current_page">
-<description>
-Returns the page number of the current page.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the current
-page in the notebook. If the notebook has no pages, then
--1 will be returned.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_accel_map_lock_path">
<description>
Locks the given accelerator path. If the accelerator map doesn't yet contain
@@ -35050,6 +35588,33 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_container_child_get">
+<description>
+Gets the values of one or more child properties for @child and @container.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_prop_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> return location for the first property, followed
+optionally by more name/return location pairs, followed by %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_button_set_use_underline">
<description>
If true, an underline in the text of the button label indicates
@@ -35120,22 +35685,22 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_slider_size_fixed">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_new">
<description>
-This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+Creates a new recent manager object. Recent manager objects are used to
+handle the list of recently used resources. A #GtkRecentManager object
+monitors the recently used resources list, and emits the "changed" signal
+each time something inside the list changes.
-See gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed().
+#GtkRecentManager objects are expensive: be sure to create them only when
+needed. You should use gtk_recent_manager_get_default() instead.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the range's slider has a fixed size.
+<return> A newly created #GtkRecentManager object.
</return>
</function>
@@ -35313,6 +35878,34 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_snap_to_ticks().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_iconify">
+<description>
+Asks to iconify (i.e. minimize) the specified @window. Note that
+you shouldn't assume the window is definitely iconified afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could deiconify it
+again, or there may not be a window manager in which case
+iconification isn't possible, etc. But normally the window will end
+up iconified. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
+
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+in which case the window will be iconified before it ever appears
+onscreen.
+
+You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_reverse">
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE.
@@ -35353,22 +35946,31 @@ will not "adopt" it.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_create_menu_item">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered">
<description>
-Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()
+know that the model emitted the "rows_reordered" signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> A #GObject
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The parent path of the reordered signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The iter pointing to the parent of the reordered
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> The new order of rows
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a menu item connected to the action.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_change_palette_with_screen_hook">
@@ -35479,36 +36081,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_geometry_hints">
-<description>
-This function sets up hints about how a window can be resized by
-the user. You can set a minimum and maximum size; allowed resize
-increments (e.g. for xterm, you can only resize by the size of a
-character); aspect ratios; and more. See the #GdkGeometry struct.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="geometry_widget">
-<parameter_description> widget the geometry hints will be applied to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="geometry">
-<parameter_description> struct containing geometry information
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="geom_mask">
-<parameter_description> mask indicating which struct fields should be paid attention to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_path_new_first">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreePath. The string representation of this path is "0"
@@ -35732,20 +36304,20 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_direction">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child model.
-
+Sets the default reading direction for widgets where the
+direction has not been explicitly set by gtk_widget_set_direction().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="child_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+<parameter name="dir">
+<parameter_description> the new default direction. This cannot be
+%GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkTreeModel.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_manual_capabilities">
@@ -35847,24 +36419,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_markup_column">
-<description>
-Returns the column with markup text for @icon_view.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the markup column, or -1 if it's unset.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_is_end">
<description>
Returns %TRUE if @iter is the end iterator, i.e. one past the last
@@ -35884,30 +36438,6 @@ iterator.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_buildable_parser_finished">
-<description>
-Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
-<link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder UI definition</link>.
-Note that this will be called once for each time
-gtk_builder_add_from_file() or gtk_builder_add_from_string()
-is called on a builder.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buildable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_stock_lookup">
<description>
Fills @item with the registered values for @stock_id, returning %TRUE
@@ -36055,20 +36585,25 @@ action, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_vscrollbar_new">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_tree_lines">
<description>
-Creates a new vertical scrollbar.
+Sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders in @tree_view.
+This does not have any visible effects for lists.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="enabled">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable tree line drawing, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkVScrollbar
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_documenters">
@@ -36304,31 +36839,30 @@ gtk_tree_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_groups_activate">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_move_child">
<description>
-Finds the first accelerator in any #GtkAccelGroup attached
-to @object that matches @accel_key and @accel_mods, and
-activates that accelerator.
-
+Updates the position of a child, as for gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> the #GObject, usually a #GtkWindow, on which
-to activate the accelerator.
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> accelerator keyval from a key event
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> child widget already added to the text view
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> keyboard state mask from a key event
+<parameter name="xpos">
+<parameter_description> new X position in window coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypos">
+<parameter_description> new Y position in window coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_icon_size">
@@ -36424,52 +36958,55 @@ Recursively hides a widget and any child widgets.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_show_about_dialog">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_key_file">
<description>
-This is a convenience function for showing an application's about box.
-The constructed dialog is associated with the parent window and
-reused for future invocations of this function.
+Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties, %NULL-terminated
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
+to use the default name "Page Setup"
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_compare">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_wrap_width">
<description>
-A qsort()-style function that returns negative if @lhs is less than
- rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
-Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
-is less than the second character in the buffer.
+Returns the wrap width which is used to determine the number of columns
+for the popup menu. If the wrap width is larger than 1, the combo box
+is in table mode.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="lhs">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rhs">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
+<return> the wrap width.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -36517,34 +37054,70 @@ If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget">
+<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_string">
<description>
-Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
+Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
+UI definition</link> building only the requested objects and merges
+them with the current contents of @builder.
+
+Upon errors 0 will be returned and @error will be assigned a
+#GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR or #G_MARKUP_ERROR domain.
+
+<note><para>
+If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
+its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
+#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
+</para></note>
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_editable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> the string to parse
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> the length of @buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="object_ids">
+<parameter_description> nul-terminated array of objects to build
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_radio">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_parent">
<description>
-Returns whether we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes.
+Sets the transient parent for windows shown by the
+#GtkMountOperation.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_layout_get_vadjustment">
@@ -36589,77 +37162,42 @@ map dump.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init_with_args">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_menu_label">
<description>
-This function does the same work as gtk_init_check().
-Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
-and it automatically generates nicely formatted
-<option>--help</option> output. Note that your program will
-be terminated after writing out the help output.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Changes the menu label for the page containing @child.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parameter_string">
-<parameter_description> a string which is displayed in
-the first line of <option>--help</option> output, after
-<literal><replaceable>programname</replaceable> [OPTION...]</literal>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry<!-- -->s
-describing the options of your program
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="translation_domain">
-<parameter_description> a translation domain to use for translating
-the <option>--help</option> output for the options in @entries
-with gettext(), or %NULL
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the child widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> a return location for errors
+<parameter name="menu_label">
+<parameter_description> the menu label, or NULL for default
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
-%FALSE otherwise.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_short_label">
<description>
-Sets the scrollbar policy for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars.
+Sets a shorter label text on @action.
-The policy determines when the scrollbar should appear; it is a value
-from the #GtkPolicyType enumeration. If %GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS, the
-scrollbar is always present; if %GTK_POLICY_NEVER, the scrollbar is
-never present; if %GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC, the scrollbar is present only
-if needed (that is, if the slider part of the bar would be smaller
-than the trough - the display is larger than the page size).
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hscrollbar_policy">
-<parameter_description> policy for horizontal bar
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="vscrollbar_policy">
-<parameter_description> policy for vertical bar
+<parameter name="short_label">
+<parameter_description> the label text to set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -36701,6 +37239,90 @@ gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_parse_geometry">
+<description>
+Parses a standard X Window System geometry string - see the
+manual page for X (type 'man X') for details on this.
+gtk_window_parse_geometry() does work on all GTK+ ports
+including Win32 but is primarily intended for an X environment.
+
+If either a size or a position can be extracted from the
+geometry string, gtk_window_parse_geometry() returns %TRUE
+and calls gtk_window_set_default_size() and/or gtk_window_move()
+to resize/move the window.
+
+If gtk_window_parse_geometry() returns %TRUE, it will also
+set the #GDK_HINT_USER_POS and/or #GDK_HINT_USER_SIZE hints
+indicating to the window manager that the size/position of
+the window was user-specified. This causes most window
+managers to honor the geometry.
+
+Note that for gtk_window_parse_geometry() to work as expected, it has
+to be called when the window has its "final" size, i.e. after calling
+gtk_widget_show_all() on the contents and gtk_window_set_geometry_hints()
+on the window.
+|[
+#include <gtk/gtk.h>
+
+static void
+fill_with_content (GtkWidget *vbox)
+{
+/ * fill with content... * /
+}
+
+int
+main (int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+GtkWidget *window, *vbox;
+GdkGeometry size_hints = {
+100, 50, 0, 0, 100, 50, 10, 10, 0.0, 0.0, GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST
+};
+
+gtk_init (&argc, &argv);
+
+window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
+vbox = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
+
+gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), vbox);
+fill_with_content (vbox);
+gtk_widget_show_all (vbox);
+
+gtk_window_set_geometry_hints (GTK_WINDOW (window),
+window,
+&size_hints,
+GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE |
+GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE |
+GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC);
+
+if (argc > 1)
+{
+if (!gtk_window_parse_geometry (GTK_WINDOW (window), argv[1]))
+fprintf (stderr, "Failed to parse '%s'\n", argv[1]);
+}
+
+gtk_widget_show_all (window);
+gtk_main ();
+
+return 0;
+}
+]|
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geometry">
+<parameter_description> geometry string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if string was parsed successfully
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_size_from_name">
<description>
Looks up the icon size associated with @name.
@@ -36776,23 +37398,85 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_default_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_printer_backend_load_modules">
<description>
-Returns the default page setup, see
-gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup().
-Since: 2.10
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return>
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_set_frame_dimensions">
+<description>
+(Note: this is a special-purpose function intended for the framebuffer
+port; see gtk_window_set_has_frame(). It will have no effect on the
+window border drawn by the window manager, which is the normal
+case when using the X Window system.)
+
+For windows with frames (see gtk_window_set_has_frame()) this function
+can be used to change the size of the frame border.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow that has a frame
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left">
+<parameter_description> The width of the left border
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="top">
+<parameter_description> The height of the top border
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right">
+<parameter_description> The width of the right border
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bottom">
+<parameter_description> The height of the bottom border
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default page setup
+<return></return>
+</function>
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon">
+<description>
+Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. This icon is used when
+the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
+managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
+frame, or display it in other contexts.
+
+The icon should be provided in whatever size it was naturally
+drawn; that is, don't scale the image before passing it to
+GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired
+final size is known, to allow best quality.
+
+If you have your icon hand-drawn in multiple sizes, use
+gtk_window_set_icon_list(). Then the best size will be used.
+
+This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon_list()
+with a 1-element list.
+
+See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
+for all windows in your application in one go.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> icon image, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_visible">
@@ -36887,38 +37571,31 @@ Obtains the selected date from a #GtkCalendar.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_action_get_group">
+<function name="gtk_editable_delete_text">
<description>
-Returns the list representing the radio group for this object.
-Note that the returned list is only valid until the next change
-to the group.
-
-A common way to set up a group of radio group is the following:
-|[
-GSList *group = NULL;
-GtkRadioAction *action;
-
-while (/ * more actions to add * /)
-{
-action = gtk_radio_action_new (...);
-
-gtk_radio_action_set_group (action, group);
-group = gtk_radio_action_get_group (action);
-}
-]|
+Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
+those characters at positions from @start_pos up to, but not including
+ end_pos If @end_pos is negative, then the the characters deleted
+are those from @start_pos to the end of the text.
-Since: 2.4
+Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start_pos">
+<parameter_description> start position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_pos">
+<parameter_description> end position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the list representing the radio group for this object
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_cursor">
@@ -37020,6 +37697,30 @@ meaningful order.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_drag_dest_item">
+<description>
+Gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted item, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pos">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkAssistant.
@@ -37193,27 +37894,56 @@ that was expected but not found
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_line">
+<function name="gtk_paint_layout">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if @iter points to the start of the paragraph
-delimiter characters for a line (delimiters will be either a
-newline, a carriage return, a carriage return followed by a
-newline, or a Unicode paragraph separator character). Note that an
-iterator pointing to the \n of a \r\n pair will not be counted as
-the end of a line, the line ends before the \r. The end iterator is
-considered to be at the end of a line, even though there are no
-paragraph delimiter chars there.
-
+Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_text">
+<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
+graphics context of @style
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> the layout to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter is at the end of a line
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_container_class_list_child_properties">
@@ -37300,25 +38030,24 @@ GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_new_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_image_get_animation">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkToggleToolButton containing the image and text from a
-stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
-and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
+Gets the #GdkPixbufAnimation being displayed by the #GtkImage.
+The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_ANIMATION (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
+The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
+returned animation.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkToggleToolButton
-
+<return> the displayed animation, or %NULL if
+the image is empty
</return>
</function>
@@ -37450,29 +38179,14 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_value">
+<function name="gtk_requisition_free">
<description>
-Sets the data in the cell specified by @iter and @column.
-The type of @value must be convertible to the type of the
-column.
-
+Frees a #GtkRequisition.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> column number to modify
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> new value for the cell
+<parameter name="requisition">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRequisition
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -37546,26 +38260,24 @@ the format understood by gtk_accelerator_parse(), or "" for no acceler
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_common_ancestor">
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_get_message_area">
<description>
-Find the common ancestor of @widget_a and @widget_b that
-is closest to the two widgets.
-
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget_a">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_b">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the closest common ancestor of @widget_a and
- widget_b or %NULL if @widget_a and @widget_b do not
-share a common ancestor.
+<return> A #GtkVBox corresponding to the "message area" in the
+ message_dialog This is the box where the dialog's primary and secondary
+labels are packed. You can add your own extra content to that box and it
+will appear below those labels, on the right side of the dialog's image (or
+on the left for right-to-left languages). See gtk_dialog_get_content_area()
+for the corresponding function in the parent #GtkDialog.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -37608,30 +38320,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_bottom_margin">
-<description>
-Sets the bottom margin of the #GtkPageSetup.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="margin">
-<parameter_description> the new bottom margin in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the units for @margin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout">
<description>
Creates a new #PangoLayout that is suitable for use
@@ -37651,24 +38339,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_overwrite_mode">
-<description>
-Sets overwrite mode
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="overwrite">
-<parameter_description> overwrite mode
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_bindings_activate">
<description>
Find a key binding matching @keyval and @modifiers and activate the
@@ -37740,6 +38410,34 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_init_check">
+<description>
+This function does the same work as gtk_init() with only
+a single change: It does not terminate the program if the GUI can't be
+initialized. Instead it returns %FALSE on failure.
+
+This way the application can fall back to some other means of communication
+with the user - for example a curses or command line interface.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
+main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
+Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
+%FALSE otherwise.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_markup">
<description>
Sets @tooltip as the contents of the tooltip for the icon at
@@ -37771,45 +38469,33 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs">
+<function name="gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area">
<description>
-Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff
-menu item.
+Sets the area of the widget, where the contents of this tooltip apply,
+to be @rect (in widget coordinates). This is especially useful for
+properly setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView rows and cells, #GtkIconViews,
+etc.
-Since: 2.6
+For setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView, please refer to the convenience
+functions for this: gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row() and
+gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell().
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="add_tearoffs">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to add tearoff menu items
+<parameter name="rect">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_model">
-<description>
-Returns the #GtkTreeModel which is acting as data source for @combo_box.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_side_image">
<description>
Gets the header image for @page.
@@ -37833,27 +38519,6 @@ if there's no side image for the page.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_prepend">
-<description>
-Prepends a new row to @list_store. @iter will be changed to point to this new
-row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
-values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepend row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_drag_source_set_target_list">
<description>
Changes the target types that this widget offers for drag-and-drop.
@@ -37911,38 +38576,48 @@ itself, excluding surrounding borders and the tree expander area.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_connect">
+<function name="gtk_paint_hline">
<description>
-Installs an accelerator in this group. When @accel_group is being activated
-in response to a call to gtk_accel_groups_activate(), @closure will be
-invoked if the @accel_key and @accel_mods from gtk_accel_groups_activate()
-match those of this connection.
-
-The signature used for the @closure is that of #GtkAccelGroupActivate.
-
-Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can only be
-connected to one accelerator group.
+Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
+using the given style and state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_flags">
-<parameter_description> a flag mask to configure this accelerator
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="closure">
-<parameter_description> closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x1">
+<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x2">
+<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -38019,40 +38694,6 @@ Recursively expands all nodes in the @tree_view.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_query_tab_label_packing">
-<description>
-Query the packing attributes for the tab label of the page
-containing @child.
-
-Deprecated: 2.20: Modify the #GtkNotebook:tab-expand and
-#GtkNotebook:tab-fill child properties instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> location to store the expand value (or NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> location to store the fill value (or NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pack_type">
-<parameter_description> location to store the pack_type (or NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_cursor_visible">
<description>
Find out whether the cursor is being displayed.
@@ -38218,87 +38859,91 @@ Same as gtk_text_iter_forward_search(), but moves backward.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_append_index">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_type_hint">
<description>
-Appends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
-increased.
+By setting the type hint for the window, you allow the window
+manager to decorate and handle the window in a way which is
+suitable to the function of the window in your application.
+
+This function should be called before the window becomes visible.
+
+gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience functions in GTK+
+will sometimes call gtk_window_set_type_hint() on your behalf.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="index_">
-<parameter_description> The index.
+<parameter name="hint">
+<parameter_description> the window type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_button_new_with_font">
+<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_set_context_id">
<description>
-Creates a new font picker widget.
+Sets the context id for @context.
-Since: 2.4
+This causes the currently active slave of @context to be
+replaced by the slave corresponding to the new context id.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fontname">
-<parameter_description> Name of font to display in font selection dialog
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> the id to use
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new font picker widget.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets">
+<function name="gtk_font_button_new_with_font">
<description>
-Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list of the drag source. The targets
-are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
-use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
-gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+Creates a new font picker widget.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+<parameter name="fontname">
+<parameter_description> Name of font to display in font selection dialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new font picker widget.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_width">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_has_selection">
<description>
-Returns the page width in units of @unit.
-
-Note that this function takes orientation and
-margins into consideration.
-See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width().
+Sets whether a selection exists.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="has_selection">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE indicates that a selection exists
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page width.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_child_anchor_get_widgets">
@@ -38319,44 +38964,46 @@ The returned list should be freed with g_list_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_startup_id">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_angle">
<description>
-Startup notification identifiers are used by desktop environment to
-track application startup, to provide user feedback and other
-features. This function changes the corresponding property on the
-underlying GdkWindow. Normally, startup identifier is managed
-automatically and you should only use this function in special cases
-like transferring focus from other processes. You should use this
-function before calling gtk_window_present() or any equivalent
-function generating a window map event.
-
-This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
+Sets the angle of rotation for the label. An angle of 90 reads from
+from bottom to top, an angle of 270, from top to bottom. The angle
+setting for the label is ignored if the label is selectable,
+wrapped, or ellipsized.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="startup_id">
-<parameter_description> a string with startup-notification identifier
+<parameter name="angle">
+<parameter_description> the angle that the baseline of the label makes with
+the horizontal, in degrees, measured counterclockwise
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_new">
+<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_ps">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget.
+Returns whether the printer accepts input in
+PostScript format.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
+<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -38519,24 +39166,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_unset_invisible_char">
-<description>
-Unsets the invisible char previously set with
-gtk_entry_set_invisible_char(). So that the
-default invisible char is used again.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_foreach">
<description>
Calls @func on each tag in @table, with user data @data.
@@ -38561,45 +39190,51 @@ over it (you can't add/remove tags).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_size">
+<function name="gtk_print_job_new">
<description>
-Gets the size in pixels that is available for the image.
-Stock icons and named icons adapt their size automatically
-if the size of the notification area changes. For other
-storage types, the size-changed signal can be used to
-react to size changes.
-
-Note that the returned size is only meaningful while the
-status icon is embedded (see gtk_status_icon_is_embedded()).
+Creates a new #GtkPrintJob.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the job title
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the size that is available for the image
+<return> a new #GtkPrintJob
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_buffer">
+<function name="gtk_print_job_get_title">
<description>
-Gets the text buffer used by the layout. See
-gtk_text_layout_set_buffer().
+Gets the job title.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+<parameter name="job">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text buffer used by the layout.
+<return> the title of @job
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -38699,6 +39334,41 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_double_buffered">
+<description>
+Widgets are double buffered by default; you can use this function
+to turn off the buffering. "Double buffered" simply means that
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() and gdk_window_end_paint() are called
+automatically around expose events sent to the
+widget. gdk_window_begin_paint() diverts all drawing to a widget's
+window to an offscreen buffer, and gdk_window_end_paint() draws the
+buffer to the screen. The result is that users see the window
+update in one smooth step, and don't see individual graphics
+primitives being rendered.
+
+In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don't flicker,
+so you would only use this function to turn off double buffering
+if you had special needs and really knew what you were doing.
+
+Note: if you turn off double-buffering, you have to handle
+expose events, since even the clearing to the background color or
+pixmap will not happen automatically (as it is done in
+gdk_window_begin_paint()).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="double_buffered">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to double-buffer a widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_tag_set_priority">
<description>
Sets the priority of a #GtkTextTag. Valid priorities are
@@ -38881,24 +39551,32 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_quality">
+<function name="gtk_widget_create_pango_layout">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
+Creates a new #PangoLayout with the appropriate font map,
+font description, and base direction for drawing text for
+this widget.
+
+If you keep a #PangoLayout created in this way around, in order to
+notify the layout of changes to the base direction or font of this
+widget, you must call pango_layout_context_changed() in response to
+the #GtkWidget::style-set and #GtkWidget::direction-changed signals
+for the widget.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="quality">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintQuality value
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> text to set on the layout (can be %NULL)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new #PangoLayout
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_set_default_sort_func">
@@ -38935,24 +39613,6 @@ is %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, the model will be unsorted.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_viewport_get_bin_window">
-<description>
-Gets the bin window of the #GtkViewport.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="viewport">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkWindow
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_calendar_get_display_options">
<description>
Returns the current display options of @calendar.
@@ -39065,24 +39725,39 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_socket_get_id">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_append_page_menu">
<description>
-Gets the window ID of a #GtkSocket widget, which can then
-be used to create a client embedded inside the socket, for
-instance with gtk_plug_new().
-
-The #GtkSocket must have already be added into a toplevel window
-before you can make this call.
+Appends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
+label in the popup menu.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="socket_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket.
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menu_label">
+<parameter_description> the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
+menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
+is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
+a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
+If @tab_label is not a #GtkLabel, @menu_label must be
+specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the window ID for the socket
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the appended
+page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
</return>
</function>
@@ -39113,27 +39788,25 @@ mnemonic character
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_media_type">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_visible">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE.
-
-The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
-<!-- FIXME link here -->
+Returns whether the status icon is visible or not.
+Note that being visible does not guarantee that
+the user can actually see the icon, see also
+gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="media_type">
-<parameter_description> the media type
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the status icon is visible
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_style">
@@ -39154,19 +39827,23 @@ Alters the view of @toolbar to display either icons only, text only, or both.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_widget">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_completion">
<description>
-Sets the widget in the header to be @widget. If widget is %NULL, then the
-header button is set with a #GtkLabel set to the title of @tree_column.
+Sets @completion to be the auxiliary completion object to use with @entry.
+All further configuration of the completion mechanism is done on
+ completion using the #GtkEntryCompletion API. Completion is disabled if
+ completion is set to %NULL.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> A child #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkEntryCompletion or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -39265,29 +39942,6 @@ Removes a window from a #GtkWindowGroup.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_present_with_time">
-<description>
-Presents a window to the user in response to a user interaction.
-If you need to present a window without a timestamp, use
-gtk_window_present(). See gtk_window_present() for details.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="timestamp">
-<parameter_description> the timestamp of the user interaction (typically a
-button or key press event) which triggered this call
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_range_set_update_policy">
<description>
Sets the update policy for the range. #GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS means that
@@ -39313,19 +39967,23 @@ drag operation.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_new">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_age">
<description>
-Creates a new text buffer.
+Gets the number of days elapsed since the last update of the resource
+pointed by @info.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a tag table, or %NULL to create a new one
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new text buffer
+<return> a positive integer containing the number of days elapsed
+since the time this resource was last modified.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -39357,25 +40015,6 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_select_region() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_popup">
-<description>
-Pops up the menu or dropdown list of @combo_box.
-
-This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
-applications should have little use for it.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_inline_completion">
<description>
Returns whether the common prefix of the possible completions should
@@ -39395,16 +40034,20 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_error_quark">
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_lower">
<description>
-Registers an error quark for #GtkPrintOperation if necessary.
+Retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The error quark used for #GtkPrintOperation errors.
+<return> The current minimum value of the adjustment.
</return>
</function>
@@ -39542,26 +40185,6 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_style">
-<description>
-Retrieves whether the tool shell has text, icons, or both. Tool items must
-not call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_style()
-instead.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="shell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the current style of @shell
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_activate_focus">
<description>
Activates the current focused widget within the window.
@@ -39598,6 +40221,43 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_calendar_set_detail_func">
+<description>
+Installs a function which provides Pango markup with detail information
+for each day. Examples for such details are holidays or appointments. That
+information is shown below each day when #GtkCalendar:show-details is set.
+A tooltip containing with full detail information is provided, if the entire
+text should not fit into the details area, or if #GtkCalendar:show-details
+is not set.
+
+The size of the details area can be restricted by setting the
+#GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars and #GtkCalendar:detail-height-rows
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> a function providing details for each day.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func invokations.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> a function for releasing @data.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords">
<description>
Converts coordinates on the window identified by @win to buffer
@@ -39625,11 +40285,11 @@ gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()).
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="buffer_x">
-<parameter_description> buffer x coordinate return location
+<parameter_description> buffer x coordinate return location or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="buffer_y">
-<parameter_description> buffer y coordinate return location
+<parameter_description> buffer y coordinate return location or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -39656,45 +40316,49 @@ offset back into an iterator.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_set_color">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_iter_is_valid">
<description>
-Sets the current color to be @color.
+WARNING: This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
+purposes.
-Since: 2.4
+Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeStore.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkColor to set the current color with.
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_create_row_drag_icon">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_set_color">
<description>
-Creates a #GdkPixmap representation of the row at @path.
-This image is used for a drag icon.
+Sets the current color to be @color.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath in @tree_view
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkColor to set the current color with.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated pixmap of the drag icon.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_finishings">
@@ -39797,31 +40461,6 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_filename">
-<description>
-Selects a filename. If the file name isn't in the current
-folder of @chooser, then the current folder of @chooser will
-be changed to the folder containing @filename.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> the filename to select
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
-selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_embed_page_setup">
<description>
Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::embed-page-setup property.
@@ -39866,60 +40505,22 @@ as plaintext
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_diamond">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_is_important">
<description>
-Draws a diamond in the given rectangle on @window using the given
-parameters.
+Checks whether @action is important or not
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @action is important
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label_from_widget">
@@ -40093,59 +40694,24 @@ Obtains the location of @anchor within @buffer.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_detachable">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_foreach">
<description>
-Sets whether the tab can be detached from @notebook to another
-notebook or widget.
-
-Note that 2 notebooks must share a common group identificator
-(see gtk_notebook_set_group_id ()) to allow automatic tabs
-interchange between them.
-
-If you want a widget to interact with a notebook through DnD
-(i.e.: accept dragged tabs from it) it must be set as a drop
-destination and accept the target "GTK_NOTEBOOK_TAB". The notebook
-will fill the selection with a GtkWidget** pointing to the child
-widget that corresponds to the dropped tab.
-|[
-static void
-on_drop_zone_drag_data_received (GtkWidget *widget,
-GdkDragContext *context,
-gint x,
-gint y,
-GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
-guint info,
-guint time,
-gpointer user_data)
-{
-GtkWidget *notebook;
-GtkWidget **child;
-
-notebook = gtk_drag_get_source_widget (context);
-child = (void*) selection_data->data;
-
-process_widget (*child);
-gtk_container_remove (GTK_CONTAINER (notebook), *child);
-}
-]|
-
-If you want a notebook to accept drags from other widgets,
-you will have to set your own DnD code to do it.
+Calls @func for each key-value pair of @settings.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> (scope call) the function to call
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="detachable">
-<parameter_description> whether the tab is detachable or not
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @func
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40194,20 +40760,18 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_unparent">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new">
<description>
-This function is only for use in widget implementations.
-Should be called by implementations of the remove method
-on #GtkContainer, to dissociate a child from the container.
+Creates a new ui manager object.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new ui manager object.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_toggled_tags">
@@ -40235,60 +40799,57 @@ does <emphasis>not</emphasis> have the tag applied to it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_hsv_is_adjusting">
+<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_new">
<description>
-An HSV color selector can be said to be adjusting if multiple rapid
-changes are being made to its value, for example, when the user is
-adjusting the value with the mouse. This function queries whether
-the HSV color selector is being adjusted or not.
+Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton, adding it to @group.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="hsv">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkHSV
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> An existing radio button group, or %NULL if you are creating a new group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value,
-since they may be transitory, or %FALSE if they should consider
-the color value status to be final.
+<return> The new #GtkRadioToolButton
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_new">
+<function name="gtk_vbutton_box_set_spacing_default">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton, adding it to @group.
+Changes the default spacing that is placed between widgets in an
+vertical button box.
-Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_box_set_spacing() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> An existing radio button group, or %NULL if you are creating a new group
+<parameter name="spacing">
+<parameter_description> an integer value.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The new #GtkRadioToolButton
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget">
<description>
-If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
-used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+Sets the label of the tool item group.
+The label widget is displayed in the header of the group, in place
+of the usual label.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
+<parameter name="label_widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget to be displayed in place of the usual label
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40336,20 +40897,6 @@ to style->font_desc.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_border_free">
-<description>
-Frees a #GtkBorder structure.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="border_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBorder.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char">
<description>
Advances @iter, calling @pred on each character. If
@@ -40509,6 +41056,20 @@ about a file.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spin_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkCellRendererSpin.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkCellRendererSpin
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_get_children">
<description>
Returns the container's non-internal children. See
@@ -40545,17 +41106,51 @@ the currently selected day.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_push_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_disconnect_key">
<description>
-Pushes @cmap onto a global stack of colormaps; the topmost
-colormap on the stack will be used to create all widgets.
-Remove @cmap with gtk_widget_pop_colormap(). There's little
-reason to use this function.
+Removes an accelerator previously installed through
+gtk_accel_group_connect().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cmap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if there was an accelerator which could be
+removed, %FALSE otherwise
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_stick">
+<description>
+Asks to stick @window, which means that it will appear on all user
+desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely
+stuck afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unstick it
+again, and some window managers do not support sticking
+windows. But normally the window will end up stuck. Just don't
+write code that crashes if not.
+
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window.
+
+You can track stickiness via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40721,22 +41316,6 @@ Increments the reference count on @values.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_direction_wildcarded">
-<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any text direction variant
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_editable_start_editing">
<description>
Begins editing on a @cell_editable. @event is the #GdkEvent that began
@@ -40778,19 +41357,25 @@ value changes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_selection">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_uris">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkTreeSelection associated with @tree_view.
+Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeSelection object.
+<return> if
+the selection data contains a list of
+URIs, a newly allocated %NULL-terminated string array
+containing the URIs, otherwise %NULL. If the result is
+non-%NULL it must be freed with g_strfreev().
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -40824,21 +41409,20 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_duplex">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_extension_events">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
+Retrieves the extension events the widget will receive; see
+gdk_input_set_extension_events().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether to print the output in duplex.
-
+<return> extension events for @widget
</return>
</function>
@@ -40909,6 +41493,27 @@ otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_app_paintable">
+<description>
+Determines whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
+an #GtkWidget::expose-event handler.
+
+See gtk_widget_set_app_paintable()
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is app paintable
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_can_default">
<description>
Specifies whether @widget can be a default widget. See
@@ -40973,32 +41578,32 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_remove_accelerator">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_point">
<description>
-Removes an accelerator from @widget, previously installed with
-gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
+Scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible
+area is @tree_x, @tree_y, where @tree_x and @tree_y are specified
+in tree coordinates. The @tree_view must be realized before
+this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be
+using gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell().
+
+If either @tree_x or @tree_y are -1, then that direction isn't scrolled.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> widget to install an accelerator on
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> accel group for this widget
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> GDK keyval of the accelerator
+<parameter name="tree_x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier key combination of the accelerator
+<parameter name="tree_y">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hover_expand">
@@ -41178,70 +41783,41 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_window_creation_hook">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_inverted">
<description>
-Installs a global function used to create a window
-when a detached tab is dropped in an empty area.
+Gets the value set by gtk_range_set_inverted().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkNotebookWindowCreationFunc, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> Destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the range is inverted
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_check">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_window_creation_hook">
<description>
-Draws a check button indicator in the given rectangle on @window with
-the given parameters.
+Installs a global function used to create a window
+when a detached tab is dropped in an empty area.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_check() instead.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkNotebookWindowCreationFunc, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle to draw the check in
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @func
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle to draw the check in
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> Destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -41293,6 +41869,36 @@ or should all have the same requisition in both directions
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action">
+<description>
+Called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and a
+call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() are part of a single
+user-visible operation. The operations between
+gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() and
+gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() can then be grouped when creating
+an undo stack. #GtkTextBuffer maintains a count of calls to
+gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() that have not been closed with
+a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(), and emits the
+"begin-user-action" and "end-user-action" signals only for the
+outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions
+from other user actions.
+
+The "interactive" buffer mutation functions, such as
+gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(), automatically call begin/end
+user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
+no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a
+single call to one of those functions.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_ellipsize">
<description>
Sets the ellipsization mode which should be used by labels in @group.
@@ -41313,22 +41919,15 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_ps">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_new">
<description>
-Returns whether the printer accepts input in
-PostScript format.
+Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
-
+<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -41375,23 +41974,30 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_dpi_y">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_current_page">
<description>
-Obtains the vertical resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
-in dots per inch.
+Switches to the page number @page_num.
-Since: 2.10
+Note that due to historical reasons, GtkNotebook refuses
+to switch to a page unless the child widget is visible.
+Therefore, it is recommended to show child widgets before
+adding them to a notebook.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_num">
+<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
+If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
+than the number of pages in the notebook, nothing
+will be done.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the vertical resolution of @context
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_ensure_update">
@@ -41424,19 +42030,67 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_equal_func">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_single_line_mode">
<description>
-Returns the compare function currently in use.
+Returns whether the label is in single line mode.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the currently used compare function for the search code.
+<return> %TRUE when the label is in single line mode.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_text">
+<description>
+Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
+with text @text. If you want the action item to have markup, use
+gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_markup().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="index_">
+<parameter_description> The index of the item to insert.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> Text of the item to insert.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus">
+<description>
+Returns whether the input focus is within this GtkWindow.
+For real toplevel windows, this is identical to gtk_window_is_active(),
+but for embedded windows, like #GtkPlug, the results will differ.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the input focus is within this GtkWindow
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -41487,30 +42141,6 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_padding">
-<description>
-Fills in @xpad and @ypad with the appropriate values of @cell.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpad">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x padding of the cell, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypad">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y padding of the cell, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_get_title">
<description>
Retrieves the title of the window. See gtk_window_set_title().
@@ -41619,67 +42249,58 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_columns">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_show_hidden">
<description>
-Returns the value of the ::columns property.
+Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
+See gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden().
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of columns, or -1
+<return> %TRUE if hidden files and folders are displayed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_disconnect_key">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_columns">
<description>
-Removes an accelerator previously installed through
-gtk_accel_group_connect().
+Returns the value of the ::columns property.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if there was an accelerator which could be
-removed, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> the number of columns, or -1
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_new">
+<function name="gtk_widget_push_colormap">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkIconSet. A #GtkIconSet represents a single icon
-in various sizes and widget states. It can provide a #GdkPixbuf
-for a given size and state on request, and automatically caches
-some of the rendered #GdkPixbuf objects.
-
-Normally you would use gtk_widget_render_icon() instead of
-using #GtkIconSet directly. The one case where you'd use
-#GtkIconSet is to create application-specific icon sets to place in
-a #GtkIconFactory.
-
+Pushes @cmap onto a global stack of colormaps; the topmost
+colormap on the stack will be used to create all widgets.
+Remove @cmap with gtk_widget_pop_colormap(). There's little
+reason to use this function.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="cmap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkIconSet
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_intersect">
@@ -41823,6 +42444,20 @@ same size). See gtk_box_set_homogeneous().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_vbutton_box_get_layout_default">
+<description>
+Retrieves the current layout used to arrange buttons in button box widgets.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_button_box_get_layout() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> the current #GtkButtonBoxStyle.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_target_list_add">
<description>
Appends another target to a #GtkTargetList.
@@ -41864,6 +42499,27 @@ freed with gtk_border_free()
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_socket_get_id">
+<description>
+Gets the window ID of a #GtkSocket widget, which can then
+be used to create a client embedded inside the socket, for
+instance with gtk_plug_new().
+
+The #GtkSocket must have already be added into a toplevel window
+before you can make this call.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="socket_">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the window ID for the socket
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_progress_pulse">
<description>
Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
@@ -41912,54 +42568,31 @@ may not be UTF-8. See g_filename_from_utf8().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_context">
+<function name="gtk_buildable_construct_child">
<description>
-This function is supposed to be used in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
-signal handler for #GtkTreeView. The @x, @y and @keyboard_tip values
-which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this
-function without modification.
+Constructs a child of @buildable with the name @name.
-The return value indicates whether there is a tree view row at the given
-coordinates (%TRUE) or not (%FALSE) for mouse tooltips. For keyboard
-tooltips the row returned will be the cursor row. When %TRUE, then any of
- model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
-that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
-to be relative to @tree_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
+#GtkBuilder calls this function if a "constructor" has been
+specified in the UI definition.
Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyboard_tip">
-<parameter_description> whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeModel or %NULL
+<parameter name="buildable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkBuildable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> #GtkBuilder used to construct this object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeIter or %NULL
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of child to construct
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row.
+<return> the constructed child
</return>
</function>
@@ -42073,6 +42706,24 @@ instead of backward.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_vadjustment">
+<description>
+Gets the vertical-scrolling #GtkAdjustment.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> pointer to the vertical #GtkAdjustment
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_select_all">
<description>
Selects all the items inside @chooser, if the @chooser supports
@@ -42159,7 +42810,7 @@ to free any allocated memory.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> (inout) (transfer none) An empty #GValue to set.
+<parameter_description> An empty #GValue to set.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42212,24 +42863,24 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_retrieve_proxy_menu_item">
<description>
-Initializes @iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one at the path
-"0") and returns %TRUE. Returns %FALSE if the tree is empty.
+Returns the #GtkMenuItem that was last set by
+gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item(), ie. the #GtkMenuItem
+that is going to appear in the overflow menu.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
+<return> The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
+overflow menu for @tool_item.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -42371,30 +43022,29 @@ or make the icon look insensitive/prelighted.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_item">
<description>
-This inserts the @column into the @tree_view at @position. If @position is
--1, then the column is inserted at the end. If @tree_view has
-"fixed_height" mode enabled, then @column must have its "sizing" property
-set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
+Obtains the menu item which corresponds to @path.
+
+If the widget corresponding to @path is a menu item which opens a
+submenu, then the item is returned. If you are interested in the submenu,
+use gtk_item_factory_get_widget() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be inserted.
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> The position to insert @column in.
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the path to the menu item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
+<return> the menu item for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't
+lead to a menu item
</return>
</function>
@@ -42479,50 +43129,32 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_embed_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing">
<description>
-Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
+Informs the cell renderer that the editing is stopped.
+If @canceled is %TRUE, the cell renderer will emit the
+#GtkCellRenderer::editing-canceled signal.
-Since: 2.18
+This function should be called by cell renderer implementations
+in response to the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal of
+#GtkCellEditable.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="embed">
-<parameter_description> embed page setup selection
+<parameter name="canceled">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the editing has been canceled
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_gicon">
-<description>
-Retrieves the #GIcon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
-The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_GICON (see gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()).
-The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
-returned #GIcon.
-
-If this function fails, @icon is left unchanged;
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_window">
<description>
Returns the #GdkWindow which contains the entry's icon at
@@ -42550,22 +43182,49 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_horizontal">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window">
<description>
-Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
-
-Since: 2.16
+Adds a child at fixed coordinates in one of the text widget's
+windows. The window must have nonzero size (see
+gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()). Note that the child
+coordinates are given relative to the #GdkWindow in question, and
+that these coordinates have no sane relationship to scrolling. When
+placing a child in #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, scrolling is
+irrelevant, the child floats above all scrollable areas. But when
+placing a child in one of the scrollable windows (border windows or
+text window), you'll need to compute the child's correct position
+in buffer coordinates any time scrolling occurs or buffer changes
+occur, and then call gtk_text_view_move_child() to update the
+child's position. Unfortunately there's no good way to detect that
+scrolling has occurred, using the current API; a possible hack
+would be to update all child positions when the scroll adjustments
+change or the text buffer changes. See bug 64518 on
+bugzilla.gnome.org for status of fixing this issue.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="which_window">
+<parameter_description> which window the child should appear in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpos">
+<parameter_description> X position of child in window coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypos">
+<parameter_description> Y position of child in window coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_info_is_local">
@@ -42587,24 +43246,24 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_step_increment">
+<function name="gtk_layout_get_size">
<description>
-Sets the step increment of the adjustment.
-
-See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
-emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
-properties.
-
-Since: 2.14
+Gets the size that has been set on the layout, and that determines
+the total extents of the layout's scrollbar area. See
+gtk_layout_set_size ().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="step_increment">
-<parameter_description> the new step increment
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> location to store the width set on @layout, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> location to store the height set on @layout, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42631,6 +43290,35 @@ items.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels">
+<description>
+Returns a newly allocated list of the widgets, normally labels, for
+which this widget is a the target of a mnemonic (see for example,
+gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()).
+
+The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you
+want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving
+callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you
+<emphasis>must</emphasis> call <literal>g_list_foreach (result,
+(GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)</literal> first, and then unref all the
+widgets afterwards.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the list of
+mnemonic labels; free this list
+with g_list_free() when you are done with it.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing the image and text from a
@@ -42650,8 +43338,8 @@ gtk_accel_map_add_entry() to register it.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup to add the menu items accelerator to,
-or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup to add the menu items
+accelerator to, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42659,20 +43347,26 @@ or %NULL.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_from_widget">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_text_chars">
<description>
-Obtains the item factory from which a widget was created.
+Moves backward by @count text characters (pixbufs, widgets,
+etc. do not count as characters for this). Equivalent to moving
+through the results of gtk_text_iter_get_text (), rather than
+gtk_text_iter_get_slice ().
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of chars to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the item factory from which @widget was created, or %NULL
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
</return>
</function>
@@ -42758,20 +43452,16 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_vertical">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_new">
<description>
-Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
+Creates a new empty #GtkComboBox.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
+<return> A new #GtkComboBox.
</return>
</function>
@@ -42796,19 +43486,20 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spinner_new">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_load">
<description>
-Returns a new cell renderer which will show a spinner to indicate
-activity.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Parses a file previously saved with gtk_accel_map_save() for
+accelerator specifications, and propagates them accordingly.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> a file containing accelerator specifications,
+in the GLib file name encoding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkCellRenderer
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_new">
@@ -42976,30 +43667,20 @@ Makes a copy of a #GtkSelectionData structure and its data.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_image">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_save_fd">
<description>
-Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
-determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
-provide a #GdkPixbuf.
+Filedescriptor variant of gtk_accel_map_save().
-Since: 2.6
+Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="writable">
-<parameter_description> whether to accept only targets for which GTK+ knows
-how to convert a pixbuf into the format
+<parameter name="fd">
+<parameter_description> a valid writable file descriptor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
-and a suitable target for images is included, otherwise %FALSE.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_page_increment">
@@ -43109,29 +43790,23 @@ show invisible text at all.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_class_path">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_hover_selection">
<description>
-Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget's type,
-never uses a custom name set with gtk_widget_set_name().
+Enables of disables the hover selection mode of @tree_view.
+Hover selection makes the selected row follow the pointer.
+Currently, this works only for the selection modes
+%GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE and %GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path_length">
-<parameter_description> location to store the length of the class path, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> (out) (allow-none) location to store the class path as an allocated string, or %NULL
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path_reversed">
-<parameter_description> (out) (allow-none) location to store the reverse class path as an allocated
-string, or %NULL
+<parameter name="hover">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable hover selection mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -43226,46 +43901,22 @@ filename, size, and pixbuf fields if those are not %NULL.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_vertical">
<description>
-You do not need to use this function. Creates a row reference based on
- path This reference will keep pointing to the node pointed to by @path,
-so long as it exists. If @path isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is
-returned. However, unlike references created with
-gtk_tree_row_reference_new(), it does not listen to the model for changes.
-The creator of the row reference must do this explicitly using
-gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted(), gtk_tree_row_reference_deleted(),
-gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered().
-
-These functions must be called exactly once per proxy when the
-corresponding signal on the model is emitted. This single call
-updates all row references for that proxy. Since built-in GTK+
-objects like #GtkTreeView already use this mechanism internally,
-using them as the proxy object will produce unpredictable results.
-Further more, passing the same object as @model and @proxy
-doesn't work for reasons of internal implementation.
-
-This type of row reference is primarily meant by structures that need to
-carefully monitor exactly when a row reference updates itself, and is not
-generally needed by most applications.
+Returns whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically.
+See gtk_tool_item_set_visible_vertical().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> A proxy #GObject
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreePath to monitor
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+<return> Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -43290,6 +43941,41 @@ resource's URI or %NULL. Use g_free() when done using it.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_unlock">
+<description>
+Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_group_lock() on this @accel_group.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_border">
+<description>
+Sets the width the border around the tab labels
+in a notebook. This is equivalent to calling
+gtk_notebook_set_tab_hborder (@notebook, @border_width) followed
+by gtk_notebook_set_tab_vborder (@notebook, @border_width).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="border_width">
+<parameter_description> width of the border around the tab labels.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_dither">
<description>
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
@@ -43476,6 +44162,10 @@ function should return.
Since: 2.10
+Deprecated: 2.22: The length of the list should be managed by the
+view (implementing #GtkRecentChooser), and not by the model (the
+#GtkRecentManager). See #GtkRecentChooser:limit.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="manager">
@@ -43512,10 +44202,30 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_pixels_above_lines">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_unset_rows_drag_dest">
<description>
-Gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.
+Undoes the effect of
+gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this method sets
+#GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_view_reset_im_context">
+<description>
+Reset the input method context of the text view if needed.
+
+This can be necessary in the case where modifying the buffer
+would confuse on-going input method behavior.
+
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -43524,33 +44234,29 @@ Gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> default number of pixels above paragraphs
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toggle_button_set_mode">
+<function name="gtk_link_button_new_with_label">
<description>
-Sets whether the button is displayed as a separate indicator and label.
-You can call this function on a checkbutton or a radiobutton with
- draw_indicator = %FALSE to make the button look like a normal button
+Creates a new #GtkLinkButton containing a label.
-This function only affects instances of classes like #GtkCheckButton
-and #GtkRadioButton that derive from #GtkToggleButton,
-not instances of #GtkToggleButton itself.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToggleButton
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a valid URI
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="draw_indicator">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, draw the button as a separate indicator
-and label; if %FALSE, draw the button like a normal button
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the button
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new link button widget.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_new_from_stock">
@@ -43573,21 +44279,22 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_do_overwrite_confirmation">
<description>
-Returns the website URL.
+Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
+types a file name that already exists.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The website URL. The string is owned by the about
-dialog and must not be modified.
+<return> %TRUE if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog;
+%FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
@@ -43668,7 +44375,9 @@ each column number followed by the value to be set.
The list is terminated by a -1. For example, to set column 0 with type
%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write
<literal>gtk_tree_store_set (store, iter, 0, "Foo", -1)</literal>.
-The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
+
+The value will be referenced by the store if it is a %G_TYPE_OBJECT, and it
+will be copied if it is a %G_TYPE_STRING or %G_TYPE_BOXED.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -43688,31 +44397,6 @@ The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_selection_unselect_range">
-<description>
-Unselects a range of nodes, determined by @start_path and @end_path
-inclusive.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_path">
-<parameter_description> The initial node of the range.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_path">
-<parameter_description> The initial node of the range.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_minimum_key_length">
<description>
Returns the minimum key length as set for @completion.
@@ -43768,33 +44452,103 @@ gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark() for details.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_from_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_new">
<description>
-Reads a paper size from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file
+Creates a new #GtkFileFilter with no rules added to it.
+Such a filter doesn't accept any files, so is not
+particularly useful until you add rules with
+gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type(), gtk_file_filter_add_pattern(),
+or gtk_file_filter_add_custom(). To create a filter
+that accepts any file, use:
+|[
+GtkFileFilter *filter = gtk_file_filter_new ();
+gtk_file_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
+]|
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the papersize from
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkFileFilter
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_no_show_all">
+<description>
+Returns the current value of the GtkWidget:no-show-all property,
+which determines whether calls to gtk_widget_show_all() and
+gtk_widget_hide_all() will affect this widget.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name ofthe group in the key file to read,
-or %NULL to read the first group
+</parameters>
+<return> the current value of the "no-show-all" property.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_paint_resize_grip">
+<description>
+Draws a resize grip in the given rectangle on @window using the given
+parameters.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="edge">
+<parameter_description> the edge in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object with the restored
-paper size, or %NULL if an error occurred.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_attributes_unref">
@@ -43856,34 +44610,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_drag_dest_row_drop_possible">
-<description>
-Determines whether a drop is possible before the given @dest_path,
-at the same depth as @dest_path. i.e., can we drop the data in
- selection_data at that location. @dest_path does not have to
-exist; the return value will almost certainly be %FALSE if the
-parent of @dest_path doesn't exist, though.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="drag_dest">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeDragDest
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_path">
-<parameter_description> destination row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> the data being dragged
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if a drop is possible before @dest_path
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_right_justified">
<description>
Gets whether the menu item appears justified at the right
@@ -43945,9 +44671,9 @@ see the docs for <envar>GTK_PATH</envar> in
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_n_copies">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_dither">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
Since: 2.10
@@ -43958,67 +44684,75 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of copies to print
+<return> the dithering that is used
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_foreach">
<description>
-Returns the text alignment used for @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
-#GtkToolItem should call this function to find out how text should
-be aligned.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
+If @func returns %TRUE, then the tree ceases to be walked, and
+gtk_tree_model_foreach() returns.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> A function to be called on each row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> User data to passed to func.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #gfloat indicating the horizontal text alignment
-used for @tool_item
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_retrieve_proxy_menu_item">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_is_descendant">
<description>
-Returns the #GtkMenuItem that was last set by
-gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item(), ie. the #GtkMenuItem
-that is going to appear in the overflow menu.
+Returns %TRUE if @path is a descendant of @ancestor.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ancestor">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkTreePath
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
-overflow menu for @tool_item.
-
+<return> %TRUE if @ancestor contains @path somewhere below it
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_item_position">
<description>
-Sets the title for the color selection dialog.
+Sets the position of @item in the list of children of @group.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> String containing new window title.
+<parameter name="item">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkToolItem to move to a new position, should
+be a child of @group.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the new position of @item in @group, starting with 0.
+The position -1 means end of list.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44094,58 +44828,64 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_size_group_add_widget">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_track_print_status">
<description>
-Adds a widget to a #GtkSizeGroup. In the future, the requisition
-of the widget will be determined as the maximum of its requisition
-and the requisition of the other widgets in the size group.
-Whether this applies horizontally, vertically, or in both directions
-depends on the mode of the size group. See gtk_size_group_set_mode().
+If track_status is %TRUE, the print operation will try to continue report
+on the status of the print job in the printer queues and printer. This
+can allow your application to show things like "out of paper" issues,
+and when the print job actually reaches the printer.
-When the widget is destroyed or no longer referenced elsewhere, it will
-be removed from the size group.
+This function is often implemented using some form of polling, so it should
+not be enabled unless needed.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to add
+<parameter name="track_status">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to track status after printing
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_get_current_event_state">
<description>
-Sets the icon for @window.
-Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
+If there is a current event and it has a state field, place
+that state field in @state and return %TRUE, otherwise return
+%FALSE.
-This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon()
-with a pixbuf created by loading the image from @filename.
-
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> location of icon file
+<parameter name="state">
+<parameter_description> a location to store the state of the current event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="err">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if there was a current event and it had a state field
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_visible">
+<description>
+Returns %TRUE if @tree_column is visible.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
-
+<return> whether the column is visible or not. If it is visible, then
+the tree will show the column.
</return>
</function>
@@ -44290,6 +45030,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Accessor for whether the dialog has a separator.
+Deprecated: 2.22: This function will be removed in GTK+ 3
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44299,6 +45040,7 @@ Accessor for whether the dialog has a separator.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the dialog has a separator
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -44428,6 +45170,26 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkIconSet. A #GtkIconSet represents a single icon
+in various sizes and widget states. It can provide a #GdkPixbuf
+for a given size and state on request, and automatically caches
+some of the rendered #GdkPixbuf objects.
+
+Normally you would use gtk_widget_render_icon() instead of
+using #GtkIconSet directly. The one case where you'd use
+#GtkIconSet is to create application-specific icon sets to place in
+a #GtkIconFactory.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkIconSet
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_toplevels">
<description>
Obtains a list of all toplevel widgets of the requested types.
@@ -44453,30 +45215,6 @@ all toplevel widgets of the requested types. Free the returned list with g_slis
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_padding">
-<description>
-Sets the renderer's padding.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpad">
-<parameter_description> the x padding of the cell renderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypad">
-<parameter_description> the y padding of the cell renderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_drag_dest_item">
<description>
Sets the item that is highlighted for feedback.
@@ -44547,6 +45285,25 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_append_index">
+<description>
+Appends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
+increased.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="index_">
+<parameter_description> The index.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_set">
<description>
Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon set. Sample stock sizes are
@@ -44659,6 +45416,28 @@ to the last row in @list_store.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_color">
+<description>
+Sets the current color to be @color. The first time this is called, it will
+also set the original color to be @color too.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_color_selection_set_current_color() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> an array of 4 doubles specifying the red, green, blue and opacity
+to set the current color to.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_has_tooltip">
<description>
Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property.
@@ -44720,33 +45499,29 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_header_image">
<description>
-Sets @filter_iter to point to the row in @filter that corresponds to the
-row pointed at by @child_iter. If @filter_iter was not set, %FALSE is
-returned.
+Sets a header image for @page. This image is displayed in the header
+area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter_iter">
-<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model.
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the new header image @page
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @filter_iter was set, i.e. if @child_iter is a
-valid iterator pointing to a visible row in child model.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_hsv_set_metrics">
@@ -44838,23 +45613,16 @@ release it when it is no longer needed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_range_rect">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_colormap">
<description>
-This function returns the area that contains the range's trough
-and its steppers, in widget->window coordinates.
-
-This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Sets the default colormap to use when creating widgets.
+gtk_widget_push_colormap() is a better function to use if
+you only want to affect a few widgets, rather than all widgets.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="range_rect">
-<parameter_description> return location for the range rectangle
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44915,35 +45683,41 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_item_activated">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_opacity">
<description>
-Activates the item determined by @path.
+Fetches the requested opacity for this window. See
+gtk_window_set_opacity().
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be activated
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the requested opacity for this window.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_cut_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rubber_banding">
<description>
-Removes the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
-puts it on the clipboard.
+Enables or disables rubber banding in @tree_view. If the selection mode
+is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select
+multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="enable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable rubber banding
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45130,6 +45904,10 @@ items.
Since: 2.10
+Deprecated: 2.22: The length of the list should be managed by the
+view (implementing #GtkRecentChooser), and not by the model (the
+#GtkRecentManager). See #GtkRecentChooser:limit.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="manager">
@@ -45144,21 +45922,21 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_preview_text">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_current_page">
<description>
-Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
+Returns the page number of the current page.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fsd">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
-This string is owned by the widget and should not be
-modified or freed
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the current
+page in the notebook. If the notebook has no pages, then
+-1 will be returned.
</return>
</function>
@@ -45255,24 +46033,23 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_list">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_dpi_y">
<description>
-Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
-had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them to set up a
-window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the
-icon for all windows in your app at once.
-
-See gtk_window_set_icon_list() for more details.
+Obtains the vertical resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
+in dots per inch.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a list of #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the vertical resolution of @context
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_frame_get_shadow_type">
@@ -45347,6 +46124,32 @@ gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded">
+<description>
+If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used
+as the base image for an icon in any #GtkTextDirection.
+If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the
+text direction the icon source applies to should be set
+with gtk_icon_source_set_direction(), and the icon source
+will only be used with that text direction.
+
+#GtkIconSet prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
+wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to wildcard the text direction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_title">
<description>
Gets the title for @page.
@@ -45422,28 +46225,6 @@ displaying the file.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_lookup_icon_set">
-<description>
-Looks up @stock_id in the icon factories associated with @style
-and the default icon factory, returning an icon set if found,
-otherwise %NULL.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> icon set of @stock_id
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_deserialize">
<description>
This function deserializes rich text in format @format and inserts
@@ -45517,23 +46298,24 @@ defined as @widget->window coordinates for widgets that are not
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_blinking">
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_step_increment">
<description>
-Makes the status icon start or stop blinking.
-Note that blinking user interface elements may be problematic
-for some users, and thus may be turned off, in which case
-this setting has no effect.
+Sets the step increment of the adjustment.
-Since: 2.10
+See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
+emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="blinking">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to turn blinking on, %FALSE to turn it off
+<parameter name="step_increment">
+<parameter_description> the new step increment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45560,34 +46342,6 @@ algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init_check">
-<description>
-This function does the same work as gtk_init() with only
-a single change: It does not terminate the program if the GUI can't be
-initialized. Instead it returns %FALSE on failure.
-
-This way the application can fall back to some other means of communication
-with the user - for example a curses or command line interface.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
-main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
-Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
-%FALSE otherwise.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_unrealize">
<description>
This function is only useful in widget implementations.
@@ -45649,47 +46403,22 @@ no effect.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line">
<description>
-Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
-printf()-style), which is marked up with the
-<link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-
-Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
-bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
-
-Due to an oversight, this function does not escape special XML characters
-like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
-may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
-to escape it.
-
-<informalexample><programlisting>
-gchar *msg;
-
-msg = g_markup_printf_escaped (message_format, ...);
-gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "%s", msg);
-g_free (msg);
-</programlisting></informalexample>
+Returns the line number containing the iterator. Lines in
+a #GtkTextBuffer are numbered beginning with 0 for the first
+line in the buffer.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
- <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>), or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a line number
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_get_for_attach_widget">
@@ -45745,55 +46474,39 @@ of gtk_widget_modify_bg().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_new">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkWindow, which is a toplevel window that can
-contain other widgets. Nearly always, the type of the window should
-be #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL. If you're implementing something like a
-popup menu from scratch (which is a bad idea, just use #GtkMenu),
-you might use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP. #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP is not for
-dialogs, though in some other toolkits dialogs are called "popups".
-In GTK+, #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP means a pop-up menu or pop-up tooltip.
-On X11, popup windows are not controlled by the <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>.
+Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of
+the file that is being previewed; the default is %TRUE. Applications that
+want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to %FALSE and
+display the name themselves in their preview widget.
-If you simply want an undecorated window (no window borders), use
-gtk_window_set_decorated(), don't use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP.
+See also: gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> type of window
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_label">
+<parameter_description> whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkWindow.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_connect_proxy">
+<function name="gtk_layout_thaw">
<description>
-Connects a widget to an action object as a proxy. Synchronises
-various properties of the action with the widget (such as label
-text, icon, tooltip, etc), and attaches a callback so that the
-action gets activated when the proxy widget does.
-
-If the widget is already connected to an action, it is disconnected
-first.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
+This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> the proxy widget
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45834,7 +46547,7 @@ Retrieves the current ellipsize mode for the tool shell. Tool items must not
call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_ellipsize_mode()
instead.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45894,6 +46607,26 @@ gtk_init(), or gtk_init_check().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_color">
+<description>
+Sets @color to be the current color in the GtkColorSelection widget.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_color_selection_get_current_color() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> an array of 4 #gdouble to fill in with the current color.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_set_title">
<description>
Sets the title string for the menu. The title is displayed when the menu
@@ -45963,28 +46696,20 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_get_model">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkImage.
+Returns the model the #GtkTreeModelSort is sorting.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_image_set_from_image() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="val">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkBitmap that indicates which parts of the image should be transparent.
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModelSort
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the "child model" being sorted
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_right_margin">
@@ -46022,24 +46747,29 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_indices_with_depth">
<description>
-Adds a rule allowing a given mime type to @filter.
+Returns the current indices of @path.
+This is an array of integers, each representing a node in a tree.
+It also returns the number of elements in the array.
+The array should not be freed.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkFileFilter
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mime_type">
-<parameter_description> name of a MIME type
+<parameter name="depth">
+<parameter_description> Number of elements returned in the integer array
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The current indices, or %NULL.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paint_spinner">
@@ -46099,26 +46829,22 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_set_accel_group">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_settings">
<description>
-Specifies an @accel_group to add the menu items accelerator to
-(this only applies to stock items so a stock item must already
-be set, make sure to call gtk_image_menu_item_set_use_stock()
-and gtk_menu_item_set_label() with a valid stock item first).
-
-If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators then
-you shouldnt need this (see gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock()).
+Sets the #GtkPrintSettings for the #GtkPrintUnixDialog. Typically,
+this is used to restore saved print settings from a previous print
+operation before the print dialog is shown.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image_menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImageMenuItem
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46165,29 +46891,27 @@ with g_slist_free(), and the filenames with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_transient_for">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_cursor">
<description>
-Dialog windows should be set transient for the main application
-window they were spawned from. This allows <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window managers</link> to e.g. keep the
-dialog on top of the main window, or center the dialog over the
-main window. gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience
-functions in GTK+ will sometimes call
-gtk_window_set_transient_for() on your behalf.
-
-Passing %NULL for @parent unsets the current transient window.
+Fills in @path and @focus_column with the current path and focus column. If
+the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL. If no column
+currently has focus, then * focus_column will be %NULL.
-On Windows, this function puts the child window on top of the parent,
-much as the window manager would have done on X.
+The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() when
+you are done with it.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> parent window, or %NULL
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to be filled with the current cursor path, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="focus_column">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to be filled with the current focus column, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46275,6 +46999,31 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_range_set_increments">
+<description>
+Sets the step and page sizes for the range.
+The step size is used when the user clicks the #GtkScrollbar
+arrows or moves #GtkScale via arrow keys. The page size
+is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> step size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> page size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step">
<description>
Sets the fraction of total progress bar length to move the
@@ -46313,22 +47062,20 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_view_new_with_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_from_widget">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererPixbuf
-to it, and makes its show @pixbuf.
+Obtains the item factory from which a widget was created.
-Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the image to display in the cell view
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
-
+<return> the item factory from which @widget was created, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
@@ -46359,15 +47106,27 @@ with a context for the source side of a drag)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_hide">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment">
<description>
-Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
-hidden (invisible to the user).
+Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when
+the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.
+See gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
+the adjustment.
+
+The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system
+as the entry.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor
+is moved, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46444,53 +47203,24 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_arrow">
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_get_sizes">
<description>
-Draws an arrow in the given rectangle on @window using the given
-parameters. @arrow_type determines the direction of the arrow.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_arrow() instead.
+Obtains a list of icon sizes this icon set can render. The returned
+array must be freed with g_free().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="arrow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of arrow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the arrow tip should be filled
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
+<parameter name="sizes">
+<parameter_description> return location
+for array of sizes
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
+<parameter name="n_sizes">
+<parameter_description> location to store number of elements in returned array
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46516,20 +47246,26 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_button_set_use_size">
+<function name="gtk_table_get_size">
<description>
-If @use_size is %TRUE, the font name will be written using the selected size.
+Returns the number of rows and columns in the table.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="font_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_size">
-<parameter_description> If %TRUE, font name will be written using the selected size.
+<parameter name="rows">
+<parameter_description> return location for the number of
+rows, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="columns">
+<parameter_description> return location for the number
+of columns, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46662,57 +47398,39 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_new">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_width">
<description>
-Creates a new empty #GtkComboBox.
+Obtains the width of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkComboBox.
+<return> the width of @context
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_render_icon">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_default_source">
<description>
-A convenience function that uses the theme engine and RC file
-settings for @widget to look up @stock_id and render it to
-a pixbuf. @stock_id should be a stock icon ID such as
-#GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. @size should be a size
-such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU. @detail should be a string that
-identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so that
-theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or code.
-
-The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
-the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
-after use with g_object_unref().
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> a stock ID
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> (type int) a stock size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1 means
-render at the size of the source and don't scale (if there are
-multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> render detail to pass to theme engine
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn't known
+<return> the default source
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -46734,28 +47452,57 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_numbers">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label">
<description>
-Whether to show recently used resources prepended by a unique number.
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers() instead.
+Sets the label of the tool item group. The label is displayed in the header
+of the group.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_numbers">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to show numbers, %FALSE otherwise
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the new human-readable label of of the group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_info_bar_add_button">
+<description>
+Adds a button with the given text (or a stock button, if button_text
+is a stock ID) and sets things up so that clicking the button will emit
+the "response" signal with the given response_id. The button is appended
+to the end of the info bars's action area. The button widget is
+returned, but usually you don't need it.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="info_bar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="button_text">
+<parameter_description> text of button, or stock ID
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="response_id">
+<parameter_description> response ID for the button
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the button widget that was added
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_get_pixmap">
<description>
Gets the pixmap and mask being displayed by the #GtkImage.
@@ -46784,73 +47531,24 @@ mask, or %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_add_filter">
-<description>
-Adds @filter to the list of filters that the user can select between.
-When a filter is selected, only files that are passed by that
-filter are displayed.
-
-Note that the @chooser takes ownership of the filter, so you have to
-ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int_with_default">
-<description>
-Returns the value of @key, interpreted as
-an integer, or the default value.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="def">
-<parameter_description> the default value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the integer value of @key
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_remove_action_group">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_drag_source">
<description>
-Removes an action group from the list of action groups associated
-with @self.
+Sets the tool palette as a drag source.
+Enables all groups and items in the tool palette as drag sources
+on button 1 and button 3 press with copy and move actions.
+See gtk_drag_source_set().
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group to be removed
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkToolPaletteDragTarget<!-- -->s
+which the widget should support
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -47014,27 +47712,10 @@ mnemonic character
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_get_event_widget">
-<description>
-If @event is %NULL or the event was not associated with any widget,
-returns %NULL, otherwise returns the widget that received the event
-originally.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_paint_box">
+<function name="gtk_paint_slider">
<description>
-Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
+Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
+given style and orientation.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -47051,7 +47732,7 @@ Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+<parameter_description> a shadow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
@@ -47068,64 +47749,64 @@ output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the box
+<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the box
+<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the box
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the box
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the orientation to be used
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_table_get_homogeneous">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_gicon">
<description>
-Returns whether the table cells are all constrained to the same
-width and height. (See gtk_table_set_homogenous ())
+Makes @status_icon display the #GIcon.
+See gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon() for details.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTable
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a GIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the cells are all constrained to the same size
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_get_type_from_name">
+<function name="gtk_table_get_homogeneous">
<description>
-Looks up a type by name, using the virtual function that
-#GtkBuilder has for that purpose. This is mainly used when
-implementing the #GtkBuildable interface on a type.
+Returns whether the table cells are all constrained to the same
+width and height. (See gtk_table_set_homogenous ())
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type_name">
-<parameter_description> type name to lookup
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GType found for @type_name or #G_TYPE_INVALID
-if no type was found
-
+<return> %TRUE if the cells are all constrained to the same size
</return>
</function>
@@ -47168,24 +47849,67 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_list">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_orientation">
<description>
-Retrieves the list of icons set by gtk_window_set_icon_list().
-The list is copied, but the reference count on each
-member won't be incremented.
+Sets the ::item-orientation property which determines whether
+the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below.
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the relative position of texts and icons
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> copy of window's icon list
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_ellipsize">
+<description>
+Gets the ellipsization mode of @group.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #PangoEllipsizeMode of @group
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_logo_icon_name">
+<description>
+Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in the about dialog.
+If it is %NULL, the default window icon set with
+gtk_window_set_default_icon() will be used.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_selected_items">
<description>
Creates a list of paths of all selected items. Additionally, if you are
@@ -47406,6 +48130,29 @@ views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_range_get_range_rect">
+<description>
+This function returns the area that contains the range's trough
+and its steppers, in widget->window coordinates.
+
+This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="range_rect">
+<parameter_description> return location for the range rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_layout_get_cells">
<description>
Returns the cell renderers which have been added to @cell_layout.
@@ -47426,29 +48173,15 @@ g_list_free() when no longer needed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_new">
+<function name="gtk_vbutton_box_new">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPrinter.
+Creates a new vertical button box.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the printer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="backend">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintBackend
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="virtual_">
-<parameter_description> whether the printer is virtual
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPrinter
-
+<return> a new button box #GtkWidget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -47501,29 +48234,26 @@ character in @str will match embedded pixbufs or child widgets.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_new">
<description>
-Sets the attributes in the list as the attributes of @tree_column.
-The attributes should be in attribute/column order, as in
-gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute(). All existing attributes
-are removed, and replaced with the new attributes.
+Creates a new file-selecting button widget.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell_renderer">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer we're setting the attributes of
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the title of the browse dialog.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the open mode for the widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new button widget.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_uris">
@@ -47558,53 +48288,46 @@ one way or the other.)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_create_pango_layout">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_stock">
<description>
-Creates a new #PangoLayout with the appropriate font map,
-font description, and base direction for drawing text for
-this widget.
-
-If you keep a #PangoLayout created in this way around, in order to
-notify the layout of changes to the base direction or font of this
-widget, you must call pango_layout_context_changed() in response to
-the #GtkWidget::style-set and #GtkWidget::direction-changed signals
-for the widget.
+Retrieves the stock id used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
+no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
+pixbuf, icon name or gicon).
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> text to set on the layout (can be %NULL)
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #PangoLayout
+<return> A stock id, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
+wasn't set from a stock id
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_new">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_title">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkScale.
+Retrieves the title of the browse dialog used by @button. The returned value
+should not be modified or freed.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the scale's orientation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment which sets the range of the scale, or
-%NULL to create a new adjustment.
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkScale
+<return> a pointer to the browse dialog's title.
</return>
</function>
@@ -47708,20 +48431,49 @@ Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_save_fd">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_item_orientation">
<description>
-Filedescriptor variant of gtk_accel_map_save().
+Returns the value of the ::item-orientation property which determines
+whether the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below.
-Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fd">
-<parameter_description> a valid writable file descriptor
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the relative position of texts and icons
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_image">
+<description>
+Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
+determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
+provide a #GdkPixbuf.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="writable">
+<parameter_description> whether to accept only targets for which GTK+ knows
+how to convert a pixbuf into the format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
+and a suitable target for images is included, otherwise %FALSE.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_set_is_important">
@@ -47746,23 +48498,35 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_animation">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_comments">
<description>
-Causes the #GtkImage to display the given animation (or display
-nothing, if you set the animation to %NULL).
+Returns the comments string.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbufAnimation
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The comments. The string is owned by the about
+dialog and must not be modified.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_vseparator_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkVSeparator.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkVSeparator.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_tooltip_text">
@@ -47891,36 +48655,6 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_get_layout_offsets">
-<description>
-Obtains the coordinates where the scale will draw the
-#PangoLayout representing the text in the scale. Remember
-when using the #PangoLayout function you need to convert to
-and from pixels using PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
-
-If the #GtkScale:draw-value property is %FALSE, the return
-values are undefined.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_dialog_add_action_widget">
<description>
Adds an activatable widget to the action area of a #GtkDialog,
@@ -48064,26 +48798,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_unselect_path">
-<description>
-Unselects the row at @path.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be unselected.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_group_id">
<description>
Sets an group identificator for @notebook, notebooks sharing
@@ -48155,39 +48869,6 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_tree_to_bin_window_coords">
-<description>
-Converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree)
-to bin_window coordinates.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tx">
-<parameter_description> tree X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ty">
-<parameter_description> tree Y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bx">
-<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate relative to bin_window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="by">
-<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate relative to bin_window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_page_setup_unix_dialog_get_page_setup">
<description>
Gets the currently selected page setup from the dialog.
@@ -48206,39 +48887,21 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_context_simple_add_table">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_numeric">
<description>
-Adds an additional table to search to the input context.
-Each row of the table consists of @max_seq_len key symbols
-followed by two #guint16 interpreted as the high and low
-words of a #gunicode value. Tables are searched starting
-from the last added.
+Returns whether non-numeric text can be typed into the spin button.
+See gtk_spin_button_set_numeric().
-The table must be sorted in dictionary order on the
-numeric value of the key symbol fields. (Values beyond
-the length of the sequence should be zero.)
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context_simple">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIMContextSimple
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> the table
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_seq_len">
-<parameter_description> Maximum length of a sequence in the table
-(cannot be greater than #GTK_MAX_COMPOSE_LEN)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_seqs">
-<parameter_description> number of sequences in the table
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if only numeric text can be entered
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_model">
@@ -48266,10 +48929,13 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_select_multiple">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_action">
<description>
-Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
-selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple().
+Sets the type of operation that the chooser is performing; the
+user interface is adapted to suit the selected action. For example,
+an option to create a new folder might be shown if the action is
+%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE but not if the action is
+%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.
Since: 2.4
@@ -48279,10 +48945,12 @@ Since: 2.4
<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action that the file selector is performing
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if multiple files can be selected.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_item_padding">
@@ -48303,25 +48971,23 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_copyright">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_width_chars">
<description>
-Sets the copyright string to display in the about dialog.
-This should be a short string of one or two lines.
+Retrieves the desired width of @label, in characters. See
+gtk_label_set_width_chars().
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="copyright">
-<parameter_description> (allow-none) the copyright string
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the width of the label in characters.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_state">
@@ -48342,34 +49008,22 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_name">
<description>
-This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder
-models that support the #GtkDragSourceIface and the
-#GtkDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
-these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
-model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
-these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
-row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
-the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
-drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
+Gets the name of the #GtkPaperSize.
-This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
-reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably
-handle drag and drop manually.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="reorderable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the tree can be reordered.
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the name of @size
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_previous_alpha">
@@ -48501,18 +49155,24 @@ also set the original color to be @color too.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_progress_new">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_printer_lpi">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellRendererProgress.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="lpi">
+<parameter_description> the resolution in lpi (lines per inch)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new cell renderer
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_iter_to_child_iter">
@@ -48537,23 +49197,29 @@ Sets @child_iter to point to the row pointed to by @sorted_iter.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_hover_selection">
+<function name="gtk_widget_class_path">
<description>
-Enables of disables the hover selection mode of @tree_view.
-Hover selection makes the selected row follow the pointer.
-Currently, this works only for the selection modes
-%GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE and %GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE.
+Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget's type,
+never uses a custom name set with gtk_widget_set_name().
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="hover">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable hover selection mode
+<parameter name="path_length">
+<parameter_description> location to store the length of the class path, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> location to store the class path as an allocated string, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path_reversed">
+<parameter_description> location to store the reverse class path as an allocated
+string, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -48599,25 +49265,22 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_set_screen">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_new">
<description>
-Sets the #GdkScreen on which the menu will be displayed.
+Creates a new #GtkCellRendererToggle. Adjust rendering
+parameters using object properties. Object properties can be set
+globally (with g_object_set()). Also, with #GtkTreeViewColumn, you
+can bind a property to a value in a #GtkTreeModel. For example, you
+can bind the "active" property on the cell renderer to a boolean value
+in the model, thus causing the check button to reflect the state of
+the model.
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if the screen should be
-determined by the widget the menu is attached to.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new cell renderer
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_dest">
@@ -48753,48 +49416,43 @@ Same as gtk_stock_add(), but doesn't copy @items, so
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_is_equal">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_type">
<description>
-Compares two #GtkPaperSize objects.
+Gets the page type of @page.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size1">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size2">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @size1 and @size2
-represent the same paper size
+<return> the page type of @page.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_action">
+<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_has_default_sort_func">
<description>
-Returns the #GtkAction that @widget is a proxy for.
-See also gtk_action_get_proxies().
-
-Since: 2.10
+Returns %TRUE if the model has a default sort function. This is used
+primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
+go back to the default state, or not.
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_get_related_action() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="sortable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSortable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the action that a widget is a proxy for, or
-%NULL, if it is not attached to an action.
-
+<return> %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
</return>
</function>
@@ -48817,67 +49475,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_list">
-<description>
-Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. The icon is used when
-the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
-managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
-frame, or display it in other contexts.
-
-gtk_window_set_icon_list() allows you to pass in the same icon in
-several hand-drawn sizes. The list should contain the natural sizes
-your icon is available in; that is, don't scale the image before
-passing it to GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute,
-when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.
-
-By passing several sizes, you may improve the final image quality
-of the icon, by reducing or eliminating automatic image scaling.
-
-Recommended sizes to provide: 16x16, 32x32, 48x48 at minimum, and
-larger images (64x64, 128x128) if you have them.
-
-See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
-for all windows in your application in one go.
-
-Note that transient windows (those who have been set transient for another
-window using gtk_window_set_transient_for()) will inherit their
-icon from their transient parent. So there's no need to explicitly
-set the icon on transient windows.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> list of #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_added">
-<description>
-Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
-was added to the recently used resources list.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
-the resource was added to the list, or -1 on failure.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_string">
<description>
Parses a string containing a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> and
@@ -48912,6 +49509,31 @@ the return value is 0.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_capabilities">
+<description>
+Returns the printer's capabilities.
+
+This is useful when you're using #GtkPrintUnixDialog's manual-capabilities
+setting and need to know which settings the printer can handle and which
+you must handle yourself.
+
+This will return 0 unless the printer's details are available, see
+gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the printer's capabilities
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_header_relief">
<description>
Set the button relief of the group header.
@@ -48933,26 +49555,33 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_line">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_visible_range">
<description>
-Initializes @iter to the start of the given line.
+Sets @start_path and @end_path to be the first and last visible path.
+Note that there may be invisible paths in between.
+
+Both paths should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() after use.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize
+<parameter name="start_path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for start of region, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="line_number">
-<parameter_description> line number counting from 0
+<parameter name="end_path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for end of region, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if valid paths were placed in @start_path and @end_path
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_editable">
@@ -48972,48 +49601,20 @@ buffer may override this setting for some ranges of text.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_item">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_new_with_model">
<description>
-Inserts a new item into the toolbar. You must specify the position
-in the toolbar where it will be inserted.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+Creates a new #GtkIconView widget with the model @model.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> give your toolbar button a label.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> a string that appears when the user holds the mouse over this item.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> use with #GtkTipsQuery.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to any data you wish to be passed to the callback.
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> The model.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
+<return> A newly created #GtkIconView widget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -49114,46 +49715,36 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions_full">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonic_modifier">
<description>
-This variant of gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions() adds a
-#GDestroyNotify callback for @user_data.
+Returns the mnemonic modifier for this window. See
+gtk_window_set_mnemonic_modifier().
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the number of entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
-no action should be activated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="on_change">
-<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> destroy notification callback for @user_data
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the modifier mask used to activate
+mnemonics on this window.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_separator_tool_item_new">
+<description>
+Create a new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_title">
@@ -49174,20 +49765,23 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new_merge_id">
<description>
-Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
+Returns an unused merge id, suitable for use with
+gtk_ui_manager_add_ui().
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an unused merge id.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_job_set_source_file">
@@ -49332,49 +49926,6 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_get_digits">
-<description>
-Gets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the number of decimal places that are displayed
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_drag_set_icon_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Sets @pixbuf as the icon for a given drag.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> the context for a drag. (This must be called
-with a context for the source side of a drag)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf to use as the drag icon.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hot_x">
-<parameter_description> the X offset within @widget of the hotspot.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hot_y">
-<parameter_description> the Y offset within @widget of the hotspot.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_clear_cache">
<description>
This function should almost never be called. It clears the @filter
@@ -49464,6 +50015,51 @@ this operation.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_path_to_child_path">
+<description>
+Converts @sorted_path to a path on the child model of @tree_model_sort.
+That is, @sorted_path points to a location in @tree_model_sort. The
+returned path will point to the same location in the model not being
+sorted. If @sorted_path does not point to a location in the child model,
+%NULL is returned.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sorted_path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_authors">
+<description>
+Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab
+of the secondary credits dialog.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="authors">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_emit_inserted_text">
<description>
Used when subclassing #GtkEntryBuffer
@@ -49492,6 +50088,45 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_default">
+<description>
+Determines whether @widget can be a default widget. See
+gtk_widget_set_can_default().
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget can be a default widget, %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_action_group_set_visible">
+<description>
+Changes the visible of @action_group.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible">
+<parameter_description> new visiblity
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_paint_tab">
<description>
Draws an option menu tab (i.e. the up and down pointing arrows)
@@ -49603,22 +50238,45 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_margin">
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_get_default_mod_mask">
<description>
-Returns the value of the ::margin property.
+Gets the value set by gtk_accelerator_set_default_mod_mask().
-Since: 2.6
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> the default accelerator modifier mask
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages">
+<description>
+Sets the number of pages in the document.
+
+This <emphasis>must</emphasis> be set to a positive number
+before the rendering starts. It may be set in a
+#GtkPrintOperation::begin-print signal hander.
+
+Note that the page numbers passed to the
+#GtkPrintOperation::request-page-setup
+and #GtkPrintOperation::draw-page signals are 0-based, i.e. if
+the user chooses to print all pages, the last ::draw-page signal
+will be for page @n_pages - 1.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_pages">
+<parameter_description> the number of pages
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the space at the borders
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_container_class_install_child_property">
@@ -49761,25 +50419,22 @@ Creates a new #GtkFontSelectionDialog.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_unset">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_direction">
<description>
-Removes any value associated with @key.
-This has the same effect as setting the value to %NULL.
+Obtains the text direction this icon source applies to. The return
+value is only useful/meaningful if the text direction is <emphasis>not</emphasis>
+wildcarded.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> text direction this source matches
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_widget">
@@ -49817,20 +50472,31 @@ was found.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_get_draw_value">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_query">
<description>
-Returns whether the current value is displayed as a string
-next to the slider.
-
+Queries an accelerator group for all entries matching @accel_key and
+ accel_mods
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to query
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> location to return the number of entries found, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the current value is displayed as a string
+<return> an array of @n_entries #GtkAccelGroupEntry elements, or %NULL. The array is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -49914,33 +50580,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_forall">
-<description>
-Invokes @callback on each child of @container, including children
-that are considered "internal" (implementation details of the
-container). "Internal" children generally weren't added by the user
-of the container, but were added by the container implementation
-itself. Most applications should use gtk_container_foreach(),
-rather than gtk_container_forall().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> a callback
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> callback user data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_current_alpha">
<description>
Sets the current opacity to be @alpha. The first time this is called, it will
@@ -49960,20 +50599,21 @@ also set the original opacity to be @alpha too.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_active">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_mnemonic_widget">
<description>
-Returns whether the cell renderer is active. See
-gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_active().
+Retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut) of this
+label. See gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
+<return> the target of the label's mnemonic, or %NULL if none
+has been set and the default algorithm will be used.
</return>
</function>
@@ -49983,7 +50623,7 @@ Retrieves the current text alignment for the tool shell. Tool items must not
call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment()
instead.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -49997,55 +50637,52 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_point">
+<function name="gtk_expander_get_label">
<description>
-Scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible
-area is @tree_x, @tree_y, where @tree_x and @tree_y are specified
-in tree coordinates. The @tree_view must be realized before
-this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be
-using gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell().
+Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded
+underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup, as set by
+gtk_expander_set_label(). If the label text has not been set the
+return value will be %NULL. This will be the case if you create an
+empty button with gtk_button_new() to use as a container.
-If either @tree_x or @tree_y are -1, then that direction isn't scrolled.
+Note that this function behaved differently in versions prior to
+2.14 and used to return the label text stripped of embedded
+underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. This problem can
+be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label
+widget.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_y">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The text of the label widget. This string is owned
+by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_name">
+<function name="gtk_menu_bar_get_child_pack_direction">
<description>
-Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
-If this is not set, it defaults to g_get_application_name().
-
-Since: 2.6
+Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar.
+See gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction().
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name() instead.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the program name
+<parameter name="menubar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the child pack direction
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_file">
@@ -50157,122 +50794,24 @@ then 0 is returned.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_run">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_vborder">
<description>
-Runs the print operation, by first letting the user modify
-print settings in the print dialog, and then print the document.
-
-Normally that this function does not return until the rendering of all
-pages is complete. You can connect to the
-#GtkPrintOperation::status-changed signal on @op to obtain some
-information about the progress of the print operation.
-Furthermore, it may use a recursive mainloop to show the print dialog.
-
-If you call gtk_print_operation_set_allow_async() or set the
-#GtkPrintOperation:allow-async property the operation will run
-asynchronously if this is supported on the platform. The
-#GtkPrintOperation::done signal will be emitted with the result of the
-operation when the it is done (i.e. when the dialog is canceled, or when
-the print succeeds or fails).
-|[
-if (settings != NULL)
-gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);
-
-if (page_setup != NULL)
-gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup (print, page_setup);
-
-g_signal_connect (print, "begin-print",
-G_CALLBACK (begin_print), &data);
-g_signal_connect (print, "draw-page",
-G_CALLBACK (draw_page), &data);
+Returns the vertical width of a tab border.
-res = gtk_print_operation_run (print,
-GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG,
-parent,
-&error);
-
-if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR)
-{
-error_dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (GTK_WINDOW (parent),
-GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
-GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
-GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
-"Error printing file:\n%s",
-error->message);
-g_signal_connect (error_dialog, "response",
-G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy), NULL);
-gtk_widget_show (error_dialog);
-g_error_free (error);
-}
-else if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
-{
-if (settings != NULL)
-g_object_unref (settings);
-settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
-}
-]|
-
-Note that gtk_print_operation_run() can only be called once on a
-given #GtkPrintOperation.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action to start
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the result of the print operation. A return value of
-%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY indicates that the printing was
-completed successfully. In this case, it is a good idea to obtain
-the used print settings with gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings()
-and store them for reuse with the next print operation. A value of
-%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_IN_PROGRESS means the operation is running
-asynchronously, and will emit the #GtkPrintOperation::done signal when
-done.
+<return> vertical width of a tab border
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_swap">
-<description>
-Swaps @a and @b in @store. Note that this function only works with
-unsorted stores.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="a">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="b">
-<parameter_description> Another #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_focus_on_click">
<description>
Returns whether the combo box grabs focus when it is clicked
@@ -50481,65 +51020,20 @@ cursor in the editable.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_set_add_tearoffs">
-<description>
-Sets the "add_tearoffs" property, which controls whether menus
-generated by this #GtkUIManager will have tearoff menu items.
-
-Note that this only affects regular menus. Generated popup
-menus never have tearoff menu items.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="add_tearoffs">
-<parameter_description> whether tearoff menu items are added
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_add">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_title">
<description>
-Add a tag to the table. The tag is assigned the highest priority
-in the table.
-
- tag must not be in a tag table already, and may not have
-the same name as an already-added tag.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Returns the title of the widget.
-<function name="gtk_icon_size_get_name">
-<description>
-Gets the canonical name of the given icon size. The returned string
-is statically allocated and should not be freed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSize.
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the name of the given icon size.
+<return> the title of the column. This string should not be
+modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -50678,20 +51172,22 @@ cast the object yourself.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_copy">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_name">
<description>
-Copies an existing #GtkPaperSize.
+Returns the name of the themed icon for the window,
+see gtk_window_set_icon_name().
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="other">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a copy of @other
+<return> the icon name or %NULL if the window has
+no themed icon
</return>
</function>
@@ -50721,20 +51217,44 @@ is not a #GIcon
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_set_editable">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_min_width">
<description>
-Sets the default editability of the #GtkTextView. You can override
-this default setting with tags in the buffer, using the "editable"
-attribute of tags.
+Returns the minimum width in pixels of the @tree_column, or -1 if no minimum
+width is set.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> whether it's editable
+</parameters>
+<return> The minimum width of the @tree_column.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_range_get_slider_range">
+<description>
+This function returns sliders range along the long dimension,
+in widget->window coordinates.
+
+This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="slider_start">
+<parameter_description> return location for the slider's start, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="slider_end">
+<parameter_description> return location for the slider's end, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -50758,20 +51278,20 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_unset_rows_drag_dest">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_pixels_above_lines">
<description>
-Undoes the effect of
-gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this method sets
-#GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
+Gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> default number of pixels above paragraphs
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_expander_column">
@@ -50995,6 +51515,26 @@ Creates a new #GtkViewport with the given adjustments.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_append_menuitems">
+<description>
+Add menuitems for various available input methods to a menu;
+the menuitems, when selected, will switch the input method
+for the context and the global default input method.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menushell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuShell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_child_type">
<description>
Returns the type of the children supported by the container.
@@ -51015,42 +51555,49 @@ children.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_bin_get_child">
<description>
-Sets the icon of @action.
+Gets the child of the #GtkBin, or %NULL if the bin contains
+no child widget. The returned widget does not have a reference
+added, so you do not need to unref it.
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> the #GIcon to set
+<parameter name="bin">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> pointer to child of the #GtkBin
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_set_by_class">
+<function name="gtk_button_set_alignment">
<description>
-This function returns the binding set named after the type name of
-the passed in class structure. New binding sets are created on
-demand by this function.
+Sets the alignment of the child. This property has no effect unless
+the child is a #GtkMisc or a #GtkAligment.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object_class">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkObject class
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> the horizontal position of the child, 0.0 is left aligned,
+1.0 is right aligned
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> the vertical position of the child, 0.0 is top aligned,
+1.0 is bottom aligned
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the binding set corresponding to @object_class
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_default_widget">
@@ -51174,43 +51721,36 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_reorderable">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_move_item">
<description>
-Retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop.
-See gtk_icon_view_set_reorderable().
+Changes the location of a recently used resource from @uri to @new_uri.
-Since: 2.8
+Please note that this function will not affect the resource pointed
+by the URIs, but only the URI used in the recently used resources list.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the list can be reordered.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_active_iter">
-<description>
-Sets @iter to point to the current active item, if it exists.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> the URI of a recently used resource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter
+<parameter name="new_uri">
+<parameter_description> the new URI of the recently used resource, or %NULL to
+remove the item pointed by @uri in the list
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set
+<return> %TRUE on success.
</return>
</function>
@@ -51312,55 +51852,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_string">
-<description>
-Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the string to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_get_text">
<description>
Retrieves the contents of the entry widget.
@@ -51387,22 +51878,21 @@ stored.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_do_overwrite_confirmation">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website">
<description>
-Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
-types a file name that already exists.
+Returns the website URL.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog;
-%FALSE otherwise.
+<return> The website URL. The string is owned by the about
+dialog and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
@@ -51536,22 +52026,6 @@ of properties to set on the tag, as with g_object_set().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_new_with_model">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget with the model initialized to @model.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> the model.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_attach_points">
<description>
Fetches the set of attach points for an icon. An attach point
@@ -51581,6 +52055,26 @@ free the array of points with g_free().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_hbox_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkHBox.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="homogeneous">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if all children are to be given equal space allotments.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="spacing">
+<parameter_description> the number of pixels to place by default between children.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkHBox.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_start_iter">
<description>
Initialized @iter with the first position in the text buffer. This
@@ -51700,19 +52194,25 @@ if no toggle is found.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new_with_label">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_not_found">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing a label.
+Sets whether @chooser should display the recently used resources that
+it didn't find. This only applies to local resources.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the menu item.
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="show_not_found">
+<parameter_description> whether to show the local items we didn't find
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_filter_filter">
@@ -51783,32 +52283,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap">
-<description>
-Toggles line wrapping within the #GtkLabel widget. %TRUE makes it break
-lines if text exceeds the widget's size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
-by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.
-
-Note that setting line wrapping to %TRUE does not make the label
-wrap at its parent container's width, because GTK+ widgets
-conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent
-container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
-set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap">
-<parameter_description> the setting
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_column_spacing">
<description>
Returns the value of the ::column-spacing property.
@@ -51868,42 +52342,43 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_has_tag">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_justify">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if @iter is within a range tagged with @tag.
-
+Sets the alignment of the lines in the text of the label relative to
+each other. %GTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT is the default value when the
+widget is first created with gtk_label_new(). If you instead want
+to set the alignment of the label as a whole, use
+gtk_misc_set_alignment() instead. gtk_label_set_justify() has no
+effect on labels containing only a single line.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+<parameter name="jtype">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkJustification
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter is tagged with @tag
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_text">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_valid">
<description>
-Convenience function which constructs a new editable text combo box, which
-is a #GtkComboBoxEntry just displaying strings. If you use this function to
-create a text combo box, you should only manipulate its data source with
-the following convenience functions: gtk_combo_box_append_text(),
-gtk_combo_box_insert_text(), gtk_combo_box_prepend_text() and
-gtk_combo_box_remove_text().
+Returns %TRUE if the @reference is non-%NULL and refers to a current valid
+path.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="reference">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new text #GtkComboBoxEntry.
-
+<return> %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
</return>
</function>
@@ -51969,32 +52444,6 @@ previously selected.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Retrieves the image used for the icon.
-
-Unlike the other methods of setting and getting icon data, this
-method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
-#GdkPixbuf, a #GIcon, a stock item, or an icon name.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if no icon is set for this position.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_im_context_focus_out">
<description>
Notify the input method that the widget to which this
@@ -52157,6 +52606,35 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_action_widget">
+<description>
+Sets @widget as one of the action widgets. Depending on the pack type
+the widget will be placed before or after the tabs. You can use
+a #GtkBox if you need to pack more than one widget on the same side.
+
+Note that action widgets are "internal" children of the notebook and thus
+not included in the list returned from gtk_container_foreach().
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pack_type">
+<parameter_description> pack type of the action widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_item_factory_add_foreign">
<description>
Installs an accelerator for @accel_widget in @accel_group, that causes
@@ -52216,21 +52694,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_show_all">
-<description>
-Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
-a container).
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_paned_set_position">
<description>
Sets the position of the divider between the two panes.
@@ -52268,25 +52731,6 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy">
-<description>
-Sets the update behavior of a spin button. This determines whether the
-spin button is always updated or only when a valid value is set.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="policy">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButtonUpdatePolicy value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_get_sort_column_id">
<description>
Fills in @sort_column_id and @order with the current sort column and the
@@ -52315,98 +52759,81 @@ column ids.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip">
+<function name="gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkTooltips object to be used for arrow button which
-pops up the menu. See gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip() for setting
-a tooltip on the whole #GtkMenuToolButton.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip_text()
-instead.
+Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltips">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkTooltips object to be used
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tip_text">
-<parameter_description> text to be used as tooltip text for tool_item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tip_private">
-<parameter_description> text to be used as private tooltip text
+<parameter name="cell_editable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_string">
+<function name="gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list">
<description>
-Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
-UI definition</link> building only the requested objects and merges
-them with the current contents of @builder.
-
-Upon errors 0 will be returned and @error will be assigned a
-#GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR or #G_MARKUP_ERROR domain.
-
-<note><para>
-If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
-its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
-#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
-</para></note>
+Returns the list of targets this widget can accept from
+drag-and-drop.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> the string to parse
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> the length of @buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="object_ids">
-<parameter_description> nul-terminated array of objects to build
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
-
+<return> the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_im_context_filter_keypress">
<description>
-Returns the list of targets this widget can accept from
-drag-and-drop.
+Allow the #GtkTextView input method to internally handle key press
+and release events. If this function returns %TRUE, then no further
+processing should be done for this key event. See
+gtk_im_context_filter_keypress().
+
+Note that you are expected to call this function from your handler
+when overriding key event handling. This is needed in the case when
+you need to insert your own key handling between the input method
+and the default key event handling of the #GtkTextView.
+|[
+static gboolean
+gtk_foo_bar_key_press_event (GtkWidget *widget,
+GdkEventKey *event)
+{
+if ((key->keyval == GDK_Return || key->keyval == GDK_KP_Enter))
+{
+if (gtk_text_view_im_context_filter_keypress (GTK_TEXT_VIEW (view), event))
+return TRUE;
+}
+
+/ * Do some stuff * /
+
+return GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (gtk_foo_bar_parent_class)->key_press_event (widget, event);
+}
+]|
+
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the key event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
+<return> %TRUE if the input method handled the key event.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -52464,26 +52891,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_scale">
-<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> the scale in percent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_info_match">
<description>
Checks whether two #GtkRecentInfo structures point to the same
@@ -52508,20 +52915,30 @@ resource, %FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_model">
+<function name="gtk_window_present">
<description>
-Sets the model for a #GtkTreeView. If the @tree_view already has a model
-set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If @model is %NULL,
-then it will unset the old model.
+Presents a window to the user. This may mean raising the window
+in the stacking order, deiconifying it, moving it to the current
+desktop, and/or giving it the keyboard focus, possibly dependent
+on the user's platform, window manager, and preferences.
+
+If @window is hidden, this function calls gtk_widget_show()
+as well.
+
+This function should be used when the user tries to open a window
+that's already open. Say for example the preferences dialog is
+currently open, and the user chooses Preferences from the menu
+a second time; use gtk_window_present() to move the already-open dialog
+where the user can see it.
+
+If you are calling this function in response to a user interaction,
+it is preferable to use gtk_window_present_with_time().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeNode.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> The model.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -52728,23 +53145,26 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_factory_add_default">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_bottom_margin">
<description>
-Adds an icon factory to the list of icon factories searched by
-gtk_style_lookup_icon_set(). This means that, for example,
-gtk_image_new_from_stock() will be able to find icons in @factory.
-There will normally be an icon factory added for each library or
-application that comes with icons. The default icon factories
-can be overridden by themes.
+Gets the default bottom margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="factory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default bottom margin
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_assistant_prepend_page">
@@ -52825,25 +53245,6 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_focus">
-<description>
-Determines if the widget is the focus widget within its
-toplevel. (This does not mean that the %HAS_FOCUS flag is
-necessarily set; %HAS_FOCUS will only be set if the
-toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.)
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_group_add_toggle_actions">
<description>
This is a convenience function to create a number of toggle actions and add them
@@ -52877,79 +53278,57 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_visible">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_media_type">
<description>
-Returns whether the status icon is visible or not.
-Note that being visible does not guarantee that
-the user can actually see the icon, see also
-gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE.
+
+The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
+<!-- FIXME link here -->
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="media_type">
+<parameter_description> the media type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the status icon is visible
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_block_activate">
+<function name="gtk_pixmap_new">
<description>
-Disable activation signals from the action
-
-This is needed when updating the state of your proxy
-#GtkActivatable widget could result in calling gtk_action_activate(),
-this is a convenience function to avoid recursing in those
-cases (updating toggle state for instance).
-
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_widget_to_tree_coords">
+<function name="gtk_action_block_activate">
<description>
-Converts bin_window coordinates to coordinates for the
-tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).
+Disable activation signals from the action
-Deprecated: 2.12: Due to historial reasons the name of this function is
-incorrect. For converting coordinates relative to the widget to
-bin_window coordinates, please see
-gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords().
+This is needed when updating the state of your proxy
+#GtkActivatable widget could result in calling gtk_action_activate(),
+this is a convenience function to avoid recursing in those
+cases (updating toggle state for instance).
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wx">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to bin_window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wy">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate relative to bin_window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tx">
-<parameter_description> return location for tree X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ty">
-<parameter_description> return location for tree Y coordinate
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -53013,28 +53392,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_resize_mode">
-<description>
-Sets the resize mode for the container.
-
-The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
-will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
-or executed immediately.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="resize_mode">
-<parameter_description> the new resize mode
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent">
<description>
If @setting is %TRUE, then destroying the transient parent of @window
@@ -53204,47 +53561,47 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_uris">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_selection">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
+Gets the #GtkTreeSelection associated with @tree_view.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> if
-the selection data contains a list of
-URIs, a newly allocated %NULL-terminated string array
-containing the URIs, otherwise %NULL. If the result is
-non-%NULL it must be freed with g_strfreev().
-
+<return> A #GtkTreeSelection object.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_app_paintable">
+<function name="gtk_action_unblock_activate_from">
<description>
-Determines whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
-an #GtkWidget::expose-event handler.
+Re-enables calls to the gtk_action_activate()
+function by signals on the given proxy widget. This undoes the
+blocking done by gtk_action_block_activate_from().
-See gtk_widget_set_app_paintable()
+This function is intended for use by action implementations.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.4
+
+Deprecated: 2.16: activatables are now responsible for activating the
+action directly so this doesnt apply anymore.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> a proxy widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget is app paintable
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_unselect_all">
@@ -53263,30 +53620,90 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_destroy_with_parent">
<description>
-Called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and a
-call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() are part of a single
-user-visible operation. The operations between
-gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() and
-gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() can then be grouped when creating
-an undo stack. #GtkTextBuffer maintains a count of calls to
-gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() that have not been closed with
-a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(), and emits the
-"begin-user-action" and "end-user-action" signals only for the
-outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions
-from other user actions.
+Returns whether the window will be destroyed with its transient parent. See
+gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent ().
-The "interactive" buffer mutation functions, such as
-gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(), automatically call begin/end
-user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
-no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a
-single call to one of those functions.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_drag_dest_row_drop_possible">
+<description>
+Determines whether a drop is possible before the given @dest_path,
+at the same depth as @dest_path. i.e., can we drop the data in
+ selection_data at that location. @dest_path does not have to
+exist; the return value will almost certainly be %FALSE if the
+parent of @dest_path doesn't exist, though.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="drag_dest">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeDragDest
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_path">
+<parameter_description> destination row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> the data being dragged
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if a drop is possible before @dest_path
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_draw_check">
+<description>
+Draws a check button indicator in the given rectangle on @window with
+the given parameters.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_check() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle to draw the check in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle to draw the check in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -53317,6 +53734,25 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_previous_line">
+<description>
+Move the iterator to the beginning of the previous line. The lines
+of a wrapped paragraph are treated as distinct for this operation.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_frame_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkFrame, with optional label @label.
@@ -53360,33 +53796,29 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_buildable_construct_child">
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_reorder">
<description>
-Constructs a child of @buildable with the name @name.
-
-#GtkBuilder calls this function if a "constructor" has been
-specified in the UI definition.
+Re-inserts @cell at @position. Note that @cell has already to be packed
+into @cell_layout for this to function properly.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buildable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkBuildable
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> #GtkBuilder used to construct this object
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to reorder.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of child to construct
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> New position to insert @cell at.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the constructed child
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_popup_single_match">
@@ -53413,22 +53845,47 @@ match
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_depth">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first">
<description>
-Returns the current depth of @path.
+Initializes @iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one at the path
+"0") and returns %TRUE. Returns %FALSE if the tree is empty.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The depth of @path
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_embed_page_setup">
+<description>
+Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embed">
+<parameter_description> embed page setup selection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_tooltip_context">
<description>
This function is supposed to be used in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
@@ -53509,29 +53966,6 @@ of gtk_widget_modify_text().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_text_chars">
-<description>
-Moves backward by @count text characters (pixbufs, widgets,
-etc. do not count as characters for this). Equivalent to moving
-through the results of gtk_text_iter_get_text (), rather than
-gtk_text_iter_get_slice ().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of chars to move
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_calendar_get_detail_width_chars">
<description>
Queries the width of detail cells, in characters.
@@ -53629,27 +54063,35 @@ renderer. This is used primarily by the #GtkTreeView.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_new">
+<function name="gtk_widget_modify_cursor">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileFilter with no rules added to it.
-Such a filter doesn't accept any files, so is not
-particularly useful until you add rules with
-gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type(), gtk_file_filter_add_pattern(),
-or gtk_file_filter_add_custom(). To create a filter
-that accepts any file, use:
-|[
-GtkFileFilter *filter = gtk_file_filter_new ();
-gtk_file_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
-]|
+Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the
+#GtkWidget:cursor-color and #GtkWidget:secondary-cursor-color
+style properties. All other style values are left untouched.
+See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="primary">
+<parameter_description> the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be
+allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
+of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="secondary">
+<parameter_description> the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be
+allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
+of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkFileFilter
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_column_drag_function">
@@ -53765,32 +54207,60 @@ stripped before return.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_track_print_status">
+<function name="gtk_size_group_add_widget">
<description>
-If track_status is %TRUE, the print operation will try to continue report
-on the status of the print job in the printer queues and printer. This
-can allow your application to show things like "out of paper" issues,
-and when the print job actually reaches the printer.
-
-This function is often implemented using some form of polling, so it should
-not be enabled unless needed.
+Adds a widget to a #GtkSizeGroup. In the future, the requisition
+of the widget will be determined as the maximum of its requisition
+and the requisition of the other widgets in the size group.
+Whether this applies horizontally, vertically, or in both directions
+depends on the mode of the size group. See gtk_size_group_set_mode().
-Since: 2.10
+When the widget is destroyed or no longer referenced elsewhere, it will
+be removed from the size group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="size_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="track_status">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to track status after printing
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to add
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_from_key_file">
+<description>
+Reads a paper size from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the papersize from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name ofthe group in the key file to read,
+or %NULL to read the first group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object with the restored
+paper size, or %NULL if an error occurred.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_text_column">
<description>
Sets the column with text for @icon_view to be @column. The text
@@ -53812,19 +54282,22 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_free">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_text_column">
<description>
-Frees a #GtkSelectionData structure returned from
-gtk_selection_data_copy().
+Returns the column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the column containing the strings
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_collate">
@@ -53867,25 +54340,53 @@ and must not be freed or modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_get_screen">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_forward_display_line">
<description>
-Gets the screen on which windows of the #GtkMountOperation
-will be shown.
+Moves the given @iter forward by one display (wrapped) line.
+A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
+separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
+Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
+wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
+same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
+they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the screen on which windows of @op are shown
-
+<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accessible_set_widget">
+<description>
+Sets the #GtkWidget corresponding to the #GtkAccessible.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accessible">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccessible
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_shell_cancel">
<description>
Cancels the selection within the menu shell.
@@ -53902,26 +54403,21 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_valid">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_preview_text">
<description>
-Determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute
-a valid keyboard accelerator. For example, the #GDK_a keyval
-plus #GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a "Ctrl+a" accelerator.
-But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_Control_L keyval
-as an accelerator.
+Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> a GDK keyval
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> modifier mask
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the accelerator is valid
+<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
+This string is owned by the widget and should not be
+modified or freed
</return>
</function>
@@ -53966,24 +54462,62 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_is_descendant">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_position">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if @path is a descendant of @ancestor.
+This function returns the position you need to pass to
+gtk_window_move() to keep @window in its current position. This
+means that the meaning of the returned value varies with window
+gravity. See gtk_window_move() for more details.
+
+If you haven't changed the window gravity, its gravity will be
+#GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST. This means that gtk_window_get_position()
+gets the position of the top-left corner of the window manager
+frame for the window. gtk_window_move() sets the position of this
+same top-left corner.
+
+gtk_window_get_position() is not 100% reliable because the X Window System
+does not specify a way to obtain the geometry of the
+decorations placed on a window by the window manager.
+Thus GTK+ is using a "best guess" that works with most
+window managers.
+
+Moreover, nearly all window managers are historically broken with
+respect to their handling of window gravity. So moving a window to
+its current position as returned by gtk_window_get_position() tends
+to result in moving the window slightly. Window managers are
+slowly getting better over time.
+
+If a window has gravity #GDK_GRAVITY_STATIC the window manager
+frame is not relevant, and thus gtk_window_get_position() will
+always produce accurate results. However you can't use static
+gravity to do things like place a window in a corner of the screen,
+because static gravity ignores the window manager decorations.
+
+If you are saving and restoring your application's window
+positions, you should know that it's impossible for applications to
+do this without getting it somewhat wrong because applications do
+not have sufficient knowledge of window manager state. The Correct
+Mechanism is to support the session management protocol (see the
+"GnomeClient" object in the GNOME libraries for example) and allow
+the window manager to save your window sizes and positions.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ancestor">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkTreePath
+<parameter name="root_x">
+<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_y">
+<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @ancestor contains @path somewhere below it
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_parent_window">
@@ -54004,20 +54538,28 @@ Sets a non default parent window for @widget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_get_model">
+<function name="gtk_image_set">
<description>
-Returns the model the #GtkTreeModelSort is sorting.
+Sets the #GtkImage.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_image_set_from_image() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModelSort
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="val">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkBitmap that indicates which parts of the image should be transparent.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the "child model" being sorted
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_builder_new">
@@ -54054,32 +54596,63 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_ancestor">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_detachable">
<description>
-Gets the first ancestor of @widget with type @widget_type. For example,
-<literal>gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)</literal> gets
-the first #GtkBox that's an ancestor of @widget. No reference will be
-added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note
-about checking for a toplevel #GtkWindow in the docs for
-gtk_widget_get_toplevel().
+Sets whether the tab can be detached from @notebook to another
+notebook or widget.
-Note that unlike gtk_widget_is_ancestor(), gtk_widget_get_ancestor()
-considers @widget to be an ancestor of itself.
+Note that 2 notebooks must share a common group identificator
+(see gtk_notebook_set_group_id ()) to allow automatic tabs
+interchange between them.
+
+If you want a widget to interact with a notebook through DnD
+(i.e.: accept dragged tabs from it) it must be set as a drop
+destination and accept the target "GTK_NOTEBOOK_TAB". The notebook
+will fill the selection with a GtkWidget** pointing to the child
+widget that corresponds to the dropped tab.
+|[
+static void
+on_drop_zone_drag_data_received (GtkWidget *widget,
+GdkDragContext *context,
+gint x,
+gint y,
+GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
+guint info,
+guint time,
+gpointer user_data)
+{
+GtkWidget *notebook;
+GtkWidget **child;
+
+notebook = gtk_drag_get_source_widget (context);
+child = (void*) selection_data->data;
+
+process_widget (*child);
+gtk_container_remove (GTK_CONTAINER (notebook), *child);
+}
+]|
+If you want a notebook to accept drags from other widgets,
+you will have to set your own DnD code to do it.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_type">
-<parameter_description> ancestor type
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detachable">
+<parameter_description> whether the tab is detachable or not
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the ancestor widget, or %NULL if not found
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_set_always_show_image">
@@ -54106,21 +54679,23 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonic_modifier">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label">
<description>
-Returns the mnemonic modifier for this window. See
-gtk_window_set_mnemonic_modifier().
+Returns the label used by the tool button, or %NULL if the tool button
+doesn't have a label. or uses a the label from a stock item. The returned
+string is owned by GTK+, and must not be modified or freed.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the modifier mask used to activate
-mnemonics on this window.
+<return> The label, or %NULL
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -54146,62 +54721,67 @@ in the widget
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_ancestor">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_has_tooltip">
<description>
-Determines whether @widget is somewhere inside @ancestor, possibly with
-intermediate containers.
+Sets the has-tooltip property on @status_icon to @has_tooltip.
+See #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip for more information.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ancestor">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="has_tooltip">
+<parameter_description> whether or not @status_icon has a tooltip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @ancestor contains @widget as a child,
-grandchild, great grandchild, etc.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_set_title">
<description>
-Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
-useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row. If
- focus_column is not %NULL, then focus is given to the column specified by
-it. Additionally, if @focus_column is specified, and @start_editing is
-%TRUE, then editing should be started in the specified cell.
-This function is often followed by @gtk_widget_grab_focus (@tree_view)
-in order to give keyboard focus to the widget. Please note that editing
-can only happen when the widget is realized.
+Sets the title for the color selection dialog.
-If @path is invalid for @model, the current cursor (if any) will be unset
-and the function will return without failing.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> String containing new window title.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="focus_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn, or %NULL
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_ancestor">
+<description>
+Determines whether @widget is somewhere inside @ancestor, possibly with
+intermediate containers.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_editing">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the specified cell should start being edited.
+<parameter name="ancestor">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @ancestor contains @widget as a child,
+grandchild, great grandchild, etc.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_unstick">
@@ -54227,21 +54807,82 @@ on #GtkWidget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_paint_box">
<description>
-Makes @status_icon display the #GIcon.
-See gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon() for details.
+Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
-Since: 2.14
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment">
+<description>
+Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a
+child of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to
+show that widget. This function sets the vertical alignment. See
+gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
+the adjustment and gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment() for setting
+the horizontal adjustment.
+
+The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate
+system as the allocation for immediate children of the container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a GIcon
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus
+is moved among the descendents of @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -54399,24 +55040,50 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end">
+<function name="gtk_window_present_with_time">
<description>
-Moves forward to the next word end. (If @iter is currently on a
-word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
-are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
-language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
-algorithms).
+Presents a window to the user in response to a user interaction.
+If you need to present a window without a timestamp, use
+gtk_window_present(). See gtk_window_present() for details.
+
+Since: 2.8
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="timestamp">
+<parameter_description> the timestamp of the user interaction (typically a
+button or key press event) which triggered this call
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_list_store_reorder">
+<description>
+Reorders @store to follow the order indicated by @new_order. Note that
+this function only works with unsorted stores.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the new position of each child
+to its old position before the re-ordering,
+i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_serialize_formats">
@@ -54444,6 +55111,28 @@ formats.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_line">
+<description>
+Initializes @iter to the start of the given line.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="line_number">
+<parameter_description> line number counting from 0
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_visible">
<description>
Determines whether the widget is visible. Note that this doesn't
@@ -54486,18 +55175,6 @@ Encodes a palette as a string, useful for persistent storage.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_default_colormap">
-<description>
-Obtains the default colormap used to create widgets.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> default widget colormap
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_selection_clear_targets">
<description>
Remove all targets registered for the given selection for the
@@ -54517,19 +55194,18 @@ widget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_preview_text">
<description>
-Triggers a new tooltip query on @display, in order to update the current
-visible tooltip, or to show/hide the current tooltip. This function is
-useful to call when, for example, the state of the widget changed by a
-key press.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the text to display in the preview area
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -54615,38 +55291,43 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() for details.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_set_add_tearoffs">
<description>
-Returns the title of the widget.
+Sets the "add_tearoffs" property, which controls whether menus
+generated by this #GtkUIManager will have tearoff menu items.
+
+Note that this only affects regular menus. Generated popup
+menus never have tearoff menu items.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="add_tearoffs">
+<parameter_description> whether tearoff menu items are added
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the title of the column. This string should not be
-modified or freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_get_current_event_state">
+<function name="gtk_icon_size_get_name">
<description>
-If there is a current event and it has a state field, place
-that state field in @state and return %TRUE, otherwise return
-%FALSE.
-
+Gets the canonical name of the given icon size. The returned string
+is statically allocated and should not be freed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="state">
-<parameter_description> a location to store the state of the current event
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSize.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if there was a current event and it had a state field
+<return> the name of the given icon size.
</return>
</function>
@@ -54724,6 +55405,27 @@ implementation and should be freed by the caller.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_statusbar_remove_all">
+<description>
+Forces the removal of all messages from a statusbar's
+stack with the exact @context_id.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="statusbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusBar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> a context identifier
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_left_gravity">
<description>
Determines whether the mark has left gravity.
@@ -54740,26 +55442,77 @@ Determines whether the mark has left gravity.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_visited">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_expand">
<description>
-Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
-was last visited.
+Sets whether the group should be given extra space.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup which is a child of palette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> whether the group should be given extra space
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
-the resource was last visited, or -1 on failure.
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_name">
+<description>
+Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask
+into a string parseable by gtk_accelerator_parse().
+For example, if you pass in #GDK_q and #GDK_CONTROL_MASK,
+this function returns "<Control>q".
+
+If you need to display accelerators in the user interface,
+see gtk_accelerator_get_label().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accelerator_key">
+<parameter_description> accelerator keyval
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
+<parameter_description> accelerator modifier mask
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly-allocated accelerator name
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_colormap">
+<description>
+Sets the colormap for the widget to the given value. Widget must not
+have been previously realized. This probably should only be used
+from an <function>init()</function> function (i.e. from the constructor
+for the widget).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a colormap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_urgency_hint">
<description>
Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment to draw
@@ -54781,25 +55534,19 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_not_found">
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new_with_label">
<description>
-Sets whether @chooser should display the recently used resources that
-it didn't find. This only applies to local resources.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing a label.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_not_found">
-<parameter_description> whether to show the local items we didn't find
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the menu item.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_set_icon_name">
@@ -55055,20 +55802,22 @@ that add tags.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_min_width">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_orientation">
<description>
-Returns the minimum width in pixels of the @tree_column, or -1 if no minimum
-width is set.
+Retrieves the current orientation of the toolbar. See
+gtk_toolbar_set_orientation().
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_get_orientation() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The minimum width of the @tree_column.
+<return> the orientation
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -55160,49 +55909,40 @@ format's mime-type.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_is_showing">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_new_with_color">
<description>
-Returns whether the #GtkMountOperation is currently displaying
-a window.
+Creates a new color button.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkColor to set the current color with.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @op is currently displaying a window
+<return> a new color button.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_wmclass">
+<function name="gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser">
<description>
-Don't use this function. It sets the X Window System "class" and
-"name" hints for a window. According to the ICCCM, you should
-always set these to the same value for all windows in an
-application, and GTK+ sets them to that value by default, so calling
-this function is sort of pointless. However, you may want to call
-gtk_window_set_role() on each window in your application, for the
-benefit of the session manager. Setting the role allows the window
-manager to restore window positions when loading a saved session.
-
+Installs a style property on a widget class.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="klass">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidgetClass
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wmclass_name">
-<parameter_description> window name hint
+<parameter name="pspec">
+<parameter_description> the #GParamSpec for the style property
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wmclass_class">
-<parameter_description> window class hint
+<parameter name="parser">
+<parameter_description> the parser for the style property
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55227,27 +55967,23 @@ name of the previewed file, %FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_reorder">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_filename">
<description>
-Reorders @store to follow the order indicated by @new_order. Note that
-this function only works with unsorted stores.
+Retrieves the source filename, or %NULL if none is set. The
+filename is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
+persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the new position of each child
-to its old position before the re-ordering,
-i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> image filename. This string must not be modified
+or freed.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_get_tearoff_state">
@@ -55295,6 +56031,23 @@ Same as gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char(), but goes backward from @iter.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_colormap">
+<description>
+Gets the colormap that will be used to render @widget. No reference will
+be added to the returned colormap; it should not be unreferenced.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the colormap used by @widget
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get">
<description>
Gets the value of one or more cells in the row referenced by @iter.
@@ -55305,8 +56058,10 @@ value from column 0 with type %G_TYPE_STRING, you would
write: <literal>gtk_tree_model_get (model, iter, 0, &place_string_here, -1)</literal>,
where <literal>place_string_here</literal> is a <type>gchar*</type> to be
filled with the string.
-If appropriate, the returned values have to be freed or unreferenced.
+Returned values with type %G_TYPE_OBJECT have to be unreferenced, values
+with type %G_TYPE_STRING or %G_TYPE_BOXED have to be freed. Other values are
+passed by value.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -55326,53 +56081,22 @@ If appropriate, the returned values have to be freed or unreferenced.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_orientation">
<description>
-Fills in @xalign and @yalign with the appropriate values of @cell.
+Gets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x alignment of the cell, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y alignment of the cell, or %NULL
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_range_set_increments">
-<description>
-Sets the step and page sizes for the range.
-The step size is used when the user clicks the #GtkScrollbar
-arrows or moves #GtkScale via arrow keys. The page size
-is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.
+<return> the page orientation
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> step size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> page size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_viewport_set_vadjustment">
@@ -55393,36 +56117,28 @@ Sets the vertical adjustment of the viewport.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_frame_dimensions">
+<function name="gtk_action_connect_proxy">
<description>
-(Note: this is a special-purpose function intended for the framebuffer
-port; see gtk_window_set_has_frame(). It will have no effect on the
-window border drawn by the window manager, which is the normal
-case when using the X Window system.)
+Connects a widget to an action object as a proxy. Synchronises
+various properties of the action with the widget (such as label
+text, icon, tooltip, etc), and attaches a callback so that the
+action gets activated when the proxy widget does.
-For windows with frames (see gtk_window_set_has_frame()) this function
-can be used to change the size of the frame border.
+If the widget is already connected to an action, it is disconnected
+first.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow that has a frame
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="left">
-<parameter_description> The width of the left border
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="top">
-<parameter_description> The height of the top border
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="right">
-<parameter_description> The width of the right border
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="bottom">
-<parameter_description> The height of the bottom border
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> the proxy widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55491,24 +56207,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_new_with_color">
-<description>
-Creates a new color button.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkColor to set the current color with.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new color button.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size">
<description>
Sets the width of %GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_LEFT or %GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_RIGHT,
@@ -55537,24 +56235,55 @@ with #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_TEXT, or
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_new_from_file">
<description>
-Retrieves the horizontal focus adjustment for the container. See
-gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment ().
+Reads the print settings from @file_name. Returns a new #GtkPrintSettings
+object with the restored settings, or %NULL if an error occurred. If the
+file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
+#GKeyFileError. See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> the filename to read the settings from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the horizontal focus adjustment, or %NULL if
-none has been set.
+<return> the restored #GtkPrintSettings
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_x">
+<description>
+Keeping the iterator on the same line of the layout, move it to the
+specified X coordinate. The lines of a wrapped paragraph are
+treated as distinct for this operation.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_queue_resize">
<description>
Flags the column, and the cell renderers added to this column, to have
@@ -55572,28 +56301,43 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_draw_layout">
<description>
-Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
-had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them from a file
-on disk. Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
-
-Since: 2.2
+Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> location of icon file
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="err">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_text">
+<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
+graphics context of @style
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> the layout to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_new">
@@ -55621,6 +56365,26 @@ will cause the scrolled window to create them for you.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_arrow_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkArrow widget.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="arrow_type">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkArrowType.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkShadowType.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GtkArrow widget.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_add_accelerator">
<description>
Installs an accelerator for this @widget in @accel_group that causes
@@ -55752,28 +56516,6 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_fixed_size">
-<description>
-Sets the renderer size to be explicit, independent of the properties set.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the cell renderer, or -1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the cell renderer, or -1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_get_pixbuf">
<description>
Gets the #GdkPixbuf being displayed by the #GtkImage.
@@ -55841,21 +56583,33 @@ Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_binding_entry_remove() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits">
<description>
-Adds a rule that allows resources based on a pattern matching their
-display name.
+Sets the translator credits string which is displayed in
+the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog.
-Since: 2.10
+The intended use for this string is to display the translator
+of the language which is currently used in the user interface.
+Using gettext(), a simple way to achieve that is to mark the
+string for translation:
+|[
+gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits (about, _("translator-credits"));
+]|
+It is a good idea to use the customary msgid "translator-credits" for this
+purpose, since translators will already know the purpose of that msgid, and
+since #GtkAboutDialog will detect if "translator-credits" is untranslated
+and hide the tab.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pattern">
-<parameter_description> a file pattern
+<parameter name="translator_credits">
+<parameter_description> the translator credits
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55879,31 +56633,6 @@ the actual width of the column on the screen, just what is requested.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_header_image">
-<description>
-Sets a header image for @page. This image is displayed in the header
-area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the new header image @page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_manager_purge_items">
<description>
Purges every item from the recently used resources list.
@@ -55927,22 +56656,23 @@ recently used resources list.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_ends">
<description>
-Returns the status of the print operation.
-Also see gtk_print_operation_get_status_string().
+Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end() up to @count times.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of times to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the status of the print operation
-
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
</return>
</function>
@@ -55964,40 +56694,58 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_visible">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_is_adjusting">
<description>
-Returns whether the action itself is visible. Note that this doesn't
-necessarily mean effective visibility. See gtk_action_is_sensitive()
-for that.
+Gets the current state of the @colorsel.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the action itself is visible.
-
+<return> %TRUE if the user is currently dragging a color around, and %FALSE
+if the selection has stopped.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spin_new">
+<function name="gtk_scale_get_digits">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellRendererSpin.
+Gets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkCellRendererSpin
-
+<return> the number of decimal places that are displayed
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_reset_im_context">
+<description>
+Reset the input method context of the entry if needed.
+
+This can be necessary in the case where modifying the buffer
+would confuse on-going input method behavior.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_wrap_license">
<description>
Returns whether the license text in @about is
@@ -56017,43 +56765,29 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_layout">
+<function name="gtk_builder_get_type_from_name">
<description>
-Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
+Looks up a type by name, using the virtual function that
+#GtkBuilder has for that purpose. This is mainly used when
+implementing the #GtkBuildable interface on a type.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_text">
-<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
-graphics context of @style
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> the layout to draw
+<parameter name="type_name">
+<parameter_description> type name to lookup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #GType found for @type_name or #G_TYPE_INVALID
+if no type was found
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_scroll_to_mark">
@@ -56121,53 +56855,67 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_fullscreen">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_move_column_after">
<description>
-Asks to place @window in the fullscreen state. Note that you
-shouldn't assume the window is definitely full screen afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unfullscreen it
-again, and not all window managers honor requests to fullscreen
-windows. But normally the window will end up fullscreen. Just
-don't write code that crashes if not.
+Moves @column to be after to @base_column. If @base_column is %NULL, then
+ column is placed in the first position.
-You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="base_column">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved relative to, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_range_get_value">
+<description>
+Gets the current value of the range.
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> current value of the range.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_tooltip_text">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_name">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
-position in @entry.
+See gtk_image_new_from_icon_name() for details.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> the icon position
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> an icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. Free the returned string
-with g_free() when done.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_ppd_name">
@@ -56445,62 +57193,60 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_expand">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_orientation">
<description>
-Returns whether @tool_item is allocated extra space.
-See gtk_tool_item_set_expand().
+Sets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageOrientation value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_invisible_new">
<description>
-Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a
-child of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to
-show that widget. This function sets the vertical alignment. See
-gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
-the adjustment and gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment() for setting
-the horizontal adjustment.
+Creates a new #GtkInvisible.
-The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate
-system as the allocation for immediate children of the container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus
-is moved among the descendents of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkInvisible.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_invisible_new">
+<function name="gtk_test_slider_set_perc">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkInvisible.
+This function will adjust the slider position of all GtkRange
+based widgets, such as scrollbars or scales, it'll also adjust
+spin buttons. The adjustment value of these widgets is set to
+a value between the lower and upper limits, according to the
+ percentage argument.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> valid widget pointer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="percentage">
+<parameter_description> value between 0 and 100.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkInvisible.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_visible_line_index">
@@ -56605,37 +57351,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_selected_rows">
-<description>
-Creates a list of path of all selected rows. Additionally, if you are
-planning on modifying the model after calling this function, you may
-want to convert the returned list into a list of #GtkTreeRowReference<!-- -->s.
-To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
-
-To free the return value, use:
-|[
-g_list_foreach (list, (GFunc) gtk_tree_path_free, NULL);
-g_list_free (list);
-]|
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A pointer to set to the #GtkTreeModel, or NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GList containing a #GtkTreePath for each selected row.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_plug_new">
<description>
Creates a new plug widget inside the #GtkSocket identified
@@ -56654,23 +57369,41 @@ can later be plugged into a #GtkSocket by gtk_socket_add_id().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_opacity">
+<function name="gtk_alignment_set">
<description>
-Fetches the requested opacity for this window. See
-gtk_window_set_opacity().
-
-Since: 2.12
+Sets the #GtkAlignment values.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="alignment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAlignment.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> the horizontal alignment of the child widget, from 0 (left) to 1
+(right).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> the vertical alignment of the child widget, from 0 (top) to 1
+(bottom).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xscale">
+<parameter_description> the amount that the child widget expands horizontally to fill up
+unused space, from 0 to 1.
+A value of 0 indicates that the child widget should never expand.
+A value of 1 indicates that the child widget will expand to fill all of the
+space allocated for the #GtkAlignment.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yscale">
+<parameter_description> the amount that the child widget expands vertically to fill up
+unused space, from 0 to 1. The values are similar to @xscale.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the requested opacity for this window.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_numbers">
@@ -56695,39 +57428,27 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column_with_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_get_needed">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn and inserts it into the @tree_view at
- position If @position is -1, then the newly created column is inserted at
-the end. The column is initialized with the attributes given. If @tree_view
-has "fixed_height" mode enabled, then the new column will have its sizing
-property set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
+Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the structure
+passed to gtk_file_filter_filter()
+This function will not typically be used by applications; it
+is intended principally for use in the implementation of
+#GtkFileChooser.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> The position to insert the new column in.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> The title to set the header to.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkCellRenderer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
+<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
+calling gtk_file_filter_filter()
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -56842,30 +57563,6 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_select_month">
-<description>
-Shifts the calendar to a different month.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="month">
-<parameter_description> a month number between 0 and 11.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="year">
-<parameter_description> the year the month is in.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, always
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_valuesv">
<description>
A variant of gtk_tree_store_set_valist() which takes
@@ -56955,65 +57652,24 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_direction">
-<description>
-Gets the reading direction for a particular widget. See
-gtk_widget_set_direction().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the reading direction for the widget.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_draw_flat_box">
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_lookup">
<description>
-Draws a flat box on @window with the given parameters.
+Look up a named tag.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_flat_box() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the box
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the box
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of a tag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The tag, or %NULL if none by that name is in the table.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_spinner_new">
@@ -57048,49 +57704,23 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_use_drag_window">
<description>
-Call this function before using any other GTK+ functions in your GUI
-applications. It will initialize everything needed to operate the
-toolkit and parses some standard command line options. @argc and
- argv are adjusted accordingly so your own code will
-never see those standard arguments.
-
-Note that there are some alternative ways to initialize GTK+:
-if you are calling gtk_parse_args(), gtk_init_check(),
-gtk_init_with_args() or g_option_context_parse() with
-the option group returned by gtk_get_option_group(), you
-<emphasis>don't</emphasis> have to call gtk_init().
-
-<note><para>
-This function will terminate your program if it was unable to initialize
-the GUI for some reason. If you want your program to fall back to a
-textual interface you want to call gtk_init_check() instead.
-</para></note>
+Returns whether @tool_item has a drag window. See
+gtk_tool_item_set_use_drag_window().
-<note><para>
-Since 2.18, GTK+ calls <literal>signal (SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN)</literal>
-during initialization, to ignore SIGPIPE signals, since these are
-almost never wanted in graphical applications. If you do need to
-handle SIGPIPE for some reason, reset the handler after gtk_init(),
-but notice that other libraries (e.g. libdbus or gvfs) might do
-similar things.
-</para></note>
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
-main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
-Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @tool_item uses a drag window.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_targets_include_uri">
@@ -57203,30 +57833,6 @@ typically either you or gtk_dialog_run() will be monitoring the
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_alignment">
-<description>
-Sets the renderer's alignment within its available space.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> the x alignment of the cell renderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> the y alignment of the cell renderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark">
<description>
Deletes @mark, so that it's no longer located anywhere in the
@@ -57459,26 +58065,6 @@ Removes a target from a target list.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_modify_font">
-<description>
-Sets the font to use for a widget. All other style values are left
-untouched. See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="font_desc">
-<parameter_description> the font description to use, or %NULL to undo
-the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_font().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_group_set_sensitive">
<description>
Changes the sensitivity of @action_group
@@ -57657,20 +58243,41 @@ Looks up the accelerator entry for @accel_path and fills in @key.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_finishings">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_page_setup">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS.
+Obtains the #GtkPageSetup that determines the page
+dimensions of the #GtkPrintContext.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="finishings">
-<parameter_description> the finishings
+</parameters>
+<return> the page setup of @context
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_map_expanded_rows">
+<description>
+Calls @func on all expanded rows.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> A function to be called
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> User data to be passed to the function.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -57716,6 +58323,31 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_label_select_region">
+<description>
+Selects a range of characters in the label, if the label is selectable.
+See gtk_label_set_selectable(). If the label is not selectable,
+this function has no effect. If @start_offset or
+ end_offset are -1, then the end of the label will be substituted.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start_offset">
+<parameter_description> start offset (in characters not bytes)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_offset">
+<parameter_description> end offset (in characters not bytes)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive_at_cursor">
<description>
Calls gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive() at the cursor
@@ -57812,24 +58444,28 @@ will be.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_ends">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end() up to @count times.
+Moves @iter within a line, to a new <emphasis>character</emphasis>
+(not byte) offset. The given character offset must be less than or
+equal to the number of characters in the line; if equal, @iter
+moves to the start of the next line. See
+gtk_text_iter_set_line_index() if you have a byte index rather than
+a character offset.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of times to move
+<parameter name="char_on_line">
+<parameter_description> a character offset relative to the start of @iter's current line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_with_model">
@@ -57944,40 +58580,61 @@ menu items will be added, or %NULL to create a new one
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_add_drag_dest">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible">
<description>
-Sets @palette as drag source (see gtk_tool_palette_set_drag_source())
-and sets @widget as a drag destination for drags from @palette.
-See gtk_drag_dest_set().
+Returns whether the action itself is visible. Note that this doesn't
+necessarily mean effective visibility. See gtk_action_is_sensitive()
+for that.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget which should be a drag destination for @palette
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> the flags that specify what actions GTK+ should take for drops
-on that widget
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the action itself is visible.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_show_progress">
+<description>
+If @show_progress is %TRUE, the print operation will show a
+progress dialog during the print operation.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkToolPaletteDragTarget<!-- -->s which the widget
-should support
+<parameter name="show_progress">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to show a progress dialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="actions">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDragAction<!-- -->s which the widget should suppport
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_copy">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkTreePath as a copy of @path.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkTreePath.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_tabs">
@@ -57999,21 +58656,49 @@ Tags in the buffer may override the default.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_link_button_set_uri">
+<function name="gtk_paint_string">
<description>
-Sets @uri as the URI where the #GtkLinkButton points. As a side-effect
-this unsets the 'visited' state of the button.
+Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
-Since: 2.10
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="link_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLinkButton
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a valid URI
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the string to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -58142,6 +58827,18 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_vpaned_new">
+<description>
+Create a new #GtkVPaned
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GtkVPaned
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_editable_delete_selection">
<description>
Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
@@ -58183,11 +58880,15 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Places a visual marker on a particular day.
+Note that this function always returns %TRUE, and you should
+ignore the return value. In GTK+ 3, this function will not
+return a value.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="day">
@@ -58226,6 +58927,24 @@ if no widget was found
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_separator_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkSeparator with the given orientation.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the separator's orientation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkSeparator.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_visible">
<description>
Sets the visibility state of @widget. Note that setting this to
@@ -58471,6 +59190,28 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_drag_dest_row">
+<description>
+Gets information about the row that is highlighted for feedback.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted row, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pos">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_block_activate_from">
<description>
Disables calls to the gtk_action_activate()
@@ -58498,62 +59239,43 @@ action directly so this doesnt apply anymore.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_resizable">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_unset_style">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if the @tree_column can be resized by the end user.
-
+Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_toolbar_set_style(), so that
+user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if the @tree_column can be resized.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_model">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_size_request">
<description>
-Returns the model the #GtkIconView is based on. Returns %NULL if the
-model is unset.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using
+gtk_widget_set_size_request(). A value of -1 stored in @width or
+ height indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly
+and the natural requisition of the widget will be used intead. See
+gtk_widget_set_size_request(). To get the size a widget will
+actually use, call gtk_widget_size_request() instead of
+this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_fixed_set_has_window">
-<description>
-Sets whether a #GtkFixed widget is created with a separate
-#GdkWindow for @widget->window or not. (By default, it will be
-created with no separate #GdkWindow). This function must be called
-while the #GtkFixed is not realized, for instance, immediately after the
-window is created.
-
-This function was added to provide an easy migration path for
-older applications which may expect #GtkFixed to have a separate window.
-
-Deprecated: 2.20: Use gtk_widget_set_has_window() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="fixed">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFixed
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_window">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if a separate window should be created
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -58605,29 +59327,6 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_diamond() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_move_column_after">
-<description>
-Moves @column to be after to @base_column. If @base_column is %NULL, then
- column is placed in the first position.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="base_column">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved relative to, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_action">
<description>
Looks up an action by following a path. See gtk_ui_manager_get_widget()
@@ -58673,24 +59372,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_hadjustment">
-<description>
-Gets the horizontal adjustment of the tool palette.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the horizontal adjustment of @palette
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_is_text_available">
<description>
Test to see if there is text available to be pasted
@@ -58842,24 +59523,25 @@ page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_window_fullscreen">
<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_icon_name() for details.
+Asks to place @window in the fullscreen state. Note that you
+shouldn't assume the window is definitely full screen afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unfullscreen it
+again, and not all window managers honor requests to fullscreen
+windows. But normally the window will end up fullscreen. Just
+don't write code that crashes if not.
-Since: 2.6
+You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> an icon size
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -58918,30 +59600,6 @@ that expect a pre-sorted range.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_to_key_file">
-<description>
-This function adds the paper size from @size to @key_file.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to save the paper size to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the group to add the settings to in @key_file
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_selection_clear">
<description>
The default handler for the #GtkWidget::selection-clear-event
@@ -58995,6 +59653,30 @@ page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_buildable_parser_finished">
+<description>
+Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
+<link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder UI definition</link>.
+Note that this will be called once for each time
+gtk_builder_add_from_file() or gtk_builder_add_from_string()
+is called on a builder.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buildable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_markup_column">
<description>
Sets the column with markup information for @icon_view to be
@@ -59163,22 +59845,21 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_context">
<description>
-Returns the label used by the tool button, or %NULL if the tool button
-doesn't have a label. or uses a the label from a stock item. The returned
-string is owned by GTK+, and must not be modified or freed.
+Creates a new #PangoContext that can be used with the
+#GtkPrintContext.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The label, or %NULL
+<return> a new Pango context for @context
</return>
</function>
@@ -59203,6 +59884,46 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_factory_remove_default">
+<description>
+Removes an icon factory from the list of default icon
+factories. Not normally used; you might use it for a library that
+can be unloaded or shut down.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="factory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory previously added with gtk_icon_factory_add_default()
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_focus_on_click">
+<description>
+Sets whether the combo box will grab focus when it is clicked with
+the mouse. Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places
+like toolbars where you don't want the keyboard focus removed from
+the main area of the application.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="focus_on_click">
+<parameter_description> whether the combo box grabs focus when clicked
+with the mouse
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment">
<description>
Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a child
@@ -59247,6 +59968,25 @@ for it).
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_label_get_track_visited_links">
+<description>
+Returns whether the label is currently keeping track
+of clicked links.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if clicked links are remembered
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_name">
<description>
Sets the name of this tray icon.
@@ -59299,29 +60039,6 @@ around, you must add a refcount using g_object_ref().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_height">
-<description>
-Gets the paper height of the #GtkPaperSize, in
-units of @unit.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the paper height
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_get_frame_dimensions">
<description>
(Note: this is a special-purpose function intended for the
@@ -59383,6 +60100,20 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new">
+<description>
+Creates an empty status icon object.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_show_uri">
<description>
This is a convenience function for launching the default application
@@ -59426,37 +60157,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_modify_cursor">
-<description>
-Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the
-#GtkWidget:cursor-color and #GtkWidget:secondary-cursor-color
-style properties. All other style values are left untouched.
-See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="primary">
-<parameter_description> the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be
-allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
-of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="secondary">
-<parameter_description> the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be
-allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
-of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_sensitive">
<description>
Returns whether the icon appears sensitive or insensitive.
@@ -59479,84 +60179,66 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_activatable">
+<function name="gtk_widget_queue_resize">
<description>
-Sets whether the icon is activatable.
-
-Since: 2.16
+This function is only for use in widget implementations.
+Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should
+be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request.
+For example, when you change the text in a #GtkLabel, #GtkLabel
+queues a resize to ensure there's enough space for the new text.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="activatable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the icon should be activatable
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_remove_space">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_move_before">
<description>
-Removes a space from the specified position.
+Moves @iter in @tree_store to the position before @position. @iter and
+ position should be in the same level. Note that this function only
+works with unsorted stores. If @position is %NULL, @iter will be
+moved to the end of the level.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the index of the space to remove.
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_paper_size">
-<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT,
-converted to a #GtkPaperSize.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper size
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_use_markup">
+<function name="gtk_image_get_storage_type">
<description>
-Returns whether the label's text is interpreted as marked up with
-the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
-language</link>. See gtk_label_set_use_markup ().
+Gets the type of representation being used by the #GtkImage
+to store image data. If the #GtkImage has no image data,
+the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
+<return> image representation being used
</return>
</function>
@@ -59619,6 +60301,97 @@ Non-vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_run">
+<description>
+Runs the print operation, by first letting the user modify
+print settings in the print dialog, and then print the document.
+
+Normally that this function does not return until the rendering of all
+pages is complete. You can connect to the
+#GtkPrintOperation::status-changed signal on @op to obtain some
+information about the progress of the print operation.
+Furthermore, it may use a recursive mainloop to show the print dialog.
+
+If you call gtk_print_operation_set_allow_async() or set the
+#GtkPrintOperation:allow-async property the operation will run
+asynchronously if this is supported on the platform. The
+#GtkPrintOperation::done signal will be emitted with the result of the
+operation when the it is done (i.e. when the dialog is canceled, or when
+the print succeeds or fails).
+|[
+if (settings != NULL)
+gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);
+
+if (page_setup != NULL)
+gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup (print, page_setup);
+
+g_signal_connect (print, "begin-print",
+G_CALLBACK (begin_print), &data);
+g_signal_connect (print, "draw-page",
+G_CALLBACK (draw_page), &data);
+
+res = gtk_print_operation_run (print,
+GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG,
+parent,
+&error);
+
+if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR)
+{
+error_dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (GTK_WINDOW (parent),
+GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
+GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
+GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
+"Error printing file:\n%s",
+error->message);
+g_signal_connect (error_dialog, "response",
+G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy), NULL);
+gtk_widget_show (error_dialog);
+g_error_free (error);
+}
+else if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
+{
+if (settings != NULL)
+g_object_unref (settings);
+settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
+}
+]|
+
+Note that gtk_print_operation_run() can only be called once on a
+given #GtkPrintOperation.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action to start
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> Return location for errors, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the result of the print operation. A return value of
+%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY indicates that the printing was
+completed successfully. In this case, it is a good idea to obtain
+the used print settings with gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings()
+and store them for reuse with the next print operation. A value of
+%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_IN_PROGRESS means the operation is running
+asynchronously, and will emit the #GtkPrintOperation::done signal when
+done.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_popup_enable">
<description>
Enables the popup menu: if the user clicks with the right mouse button on
@@ -59705,6 +60478,29 @@ needs, use gtk_scale_set_digits() to correct it.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_add_filter">
+<description>
+Adds @filter to the list of #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
+
+If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
+gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_column_type">
<description>
Returns the type of the column.
@@ -59725,6 +60521,26 @@ Returns the type of the column.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_space">
+<description>
+Inserts a new space in the toolbar at the specified position.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the number of widgets after which a space should be inserted.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_list_icons">
<description>
Lists the icons in the current icon theme. Only a subset
@@ -59755,42 +60571,6 @@ with g_list_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_activatable_get_related_action">
-<description>
-Gets the related #GtkAction for @activatable.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="activatable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the related #GtkAction if one is set.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_toolbar_reconfigured">
-<description>
-Emits the signal #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured on @tool_item.
-#GtkToolbar and other #GtkToolShell implementations use this function
-to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_create_drag_icon">
<description>
Creates a #GdkPixmap representation of the item at @path.
@@ -59835,81 +60615,126 @@ If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_object_unref().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_activatable">
<description>
-Gets the gicon of @action.
+Returns whether the icon is activatable.
Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The action's #GIcon if one is set.
+<return> %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_preview_text">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_tooltip_markup">
<description>
-Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
+Gets the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fsd">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the text to display in the preview area
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
+returned string with g_free() when done.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_accel_groups_activate">
<description>
-Adds @clipboard to the list of clipboards in which the selection
-contents of @buffer are available. In most cases, @clipboard will be
-the #GtkClipboard of type %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY for a view of @buffer.
+Finds the first accelerator in any #GtkAccelGroup attached
+to @object that matches @accel_key and @accel_mods, and
+activates that accelerator.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> the #GObject, usually a #GtkWindow, on which
+to activate the accelerator.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> accelerator keyval from a key event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> keyboard state mask from a key event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_focus_on_map">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_action_groups">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_focus_on_map().
+Returns the list of action groups associated with @self.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if window should receive the input focus when
-mapped.
+<return> a #GList of
+action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
+and should not be modified.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_set">
+<description>
+Stores new data into a #GtkSelectionData object. Should
+<emphasis>only</emphasis> be called from a selection handler callback.
+Zero-terminates the stored data.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> the type of selection data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> format (number of bits in a unit)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> pointer to the data (will be copied)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> length of the data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_builder_connect_signals">
<description>
This method is a simpler variation of gtk_builder_connect_signals_full().
@@ -59962,22 +60787,6 @@ stock id to select the stock item for the button.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_colormap">
-<description>
-Sets the default colormap to use when creating widgets.
-gtk_widget_push_colormap() is a better function to use if
-you only want to affect a few widgets, rather than all widgets.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_menu_label_text">
<description>
Retrieves the text of the menu label for the page containing
@@ -60003,30 +60812,23 @@ the widget and must not be freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_expand">
<description>
-If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used
-as the base image for an icon in any #GtkTextDirection.
-If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the
-text direction the icon source applies to should be set
-with gtk_icon_source_set_direction(), and the icon source
-will only be used with that text direction.
+Returns whether @tool_item is allocated extra space.
+See gtk_tool_item_set_expand().
-#GtkIconSet prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
-wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to wildcard the text direction
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_get_group">
@@ -60069,26 +60871,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_orientation">
-<description>
-Sets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageOrientation value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_page_setup_copy">
<description>
Copies a #GtkPageSetup.
@@ -60107,23 +60889,26 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_wrap">
+<function name="gtk_custom_paper_unix_dialog_new">
<description>
-Sets the flag that determines if a spin button value wraps around to the
-opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is exceeded.
+Creates a new custom paper dialog.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the title of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap">
-<parameter_description> a flag indicating if wrapping behavior is performed.
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new #GtkCustomPaperUnixDialog
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_size_group_get_mode">
@@ -60181,21 +60966,21 @@ model is unset.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_tooltip_markup">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_max_width_chars">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon.
+Retrieves the desired maximum width of @label, in characters. See
+gtk_label_set_width_chars().
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
-returned string with g_free() when done.
+<return> the maximum width of the label in characters.
</return>
</function>
@@ -60274,30 +61059,6 @@ accelerators are added or removed from the associated widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_slider_set_perc">
-<description>
-This function will adjust the slider position of all GtkRange
-based widgets, such as scrollbars or scales, it'll also adjust
-spin buttons. The adjustment value of these widgets is set to
-a value between the lower and upper limits, according to the
- percentage argument.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> valid widget pointer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="percentage">
-<parameter_description> value between 0 and 100.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_button_get_focus_on_click">
<description>
Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
@@ -60344,7 +61105,7 @@ Retrieves the current text size group for the tool shell. Tool items must not
call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group()
instead.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60390,21 +61151,6 @@ Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip_text() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_prev_page">
-<description>
-Switches to the previous page. Nothing happens if the current page
-is the first page.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_load_icon">
<description>
Looks up an icon in an icon theme, scales it to the given size
@@ -60524,46 +61270,63 @@ Determines whether the colorsel has an opacity control.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_ends">
+<function name="gtk_drag_begin">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() @count times (or until
-gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() returns %FALSE). If @count is
-negative, moves backward instead of forward.
+Initiates a drag on the source side. The function
+only needs to be used when the application is
+starting drags itself, and is not needed when
+gtk_drag_source_set() is used.
+
+The @event is used to retrieve the timestamp that will be used internally to
+grab the pointer. If @event is #NULL, then GDK_CURRENT_TIME will be used.
+However, you should try to pass a real event in all cases, since that can be
+used by GTK+ to get information about the start position of the drag, for
+example if the @event is a GDK_MOTION_NOTIFY.
+
+Generally there are three cases when you want to start a drag by hand by calling
+this function:
+
+1. During a button-press-event handler, if you want to start a drag immediately
+when the user presses the mouse button. Pass the @event that you have in your
+button-press-event handler.
+
+2. During a motion-notify-event handler, if you want to start a drag when the mouse
+moves past a certain threshold distance after a button-press. Pass the @event that you
+have in your motion-notify-event handler.
+
+3. During a timeout handler, if you want to start a drag after the mouse
+button is held down for some time. Try to save the last event that you got
+from the mouse, using gdk_event_copy(), and pass it to this function
+(remember to free the event with gdk_event_free() when you are done). If you
+can really not pass a real event, pass #NULL instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the source widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of sentences to move
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> The targets (data formats) in which the
+source can provide the data.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_support_selection">
-<description>
-Sets whether selection is supported by #GtkPrintOperation.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="actions">
+<parameter_description> A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="support_selection">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to support selection
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> The button the user clicked to start the drag.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> The event that triggered the start of the drag.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the context for this drag.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_hadjustment">
@@ -60584,81 +61347,40 @@ Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the horizontal scrollbar.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_tree_coords">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_accept_focus">
<description>
-Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the
-tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).
+Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to receive
+the input focus. This function sets this hint.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wx">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wy">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate relative to the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tx">
-<parameter_description> return location for tree X coordinate
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ty">
-<parameter_description> return location for tree Y coordinate
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to let this window receive input focus
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_insertion_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new">
<description>
-Draws a text caret on @drawable at @location. This is not a style function
-but merely a convenience function for drawing the standard cursor shape.
+Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget object. This is an embeddable widget
+used to access the recently used resources list.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="location">
-<parameter_description> location where to draw the cursor (@location->width is ignored)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_primary">
-<parameter_description> if the cursor should be the primary cursor color.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="direction">
-<parameter_description> whether the cursor is left-to-right or
-right-to-left. Should never be #GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="draw_arrow">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to draw a directional arrow on the
-cursor. Should be %FALSE unless the cursor is split.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item">
@@ -60709,22 +61431,15 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rubber_banding">
+<function name="gtk_editable_cut_clipboard">
<description>
-Enables or disables rubber banding in @tree_view. If the selection mode
-is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select
-multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Removes the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
+puts it on the clipboard.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="enable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable rubber banding
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -60902,6 +61617,34 @@ owned by GTK+ and must not be unreffed or modified.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_calendar_select_month">
+<description>
+Shifts the calendar to a different month.
+
+Note that this function always returns %TRUE, and you should
+ignore the return value. In GTK+ 3, this function will not
+return a value.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="month">
+<parameter_description> a month number between 0 and 11.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="year">
+<parameter_description> the year the month is in.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE, always
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_tooltip">
<description>
Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property. See
@@ -60921,6 +61664,21 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_vbutton_box_get_spacing_default">
+<description>
+Retrieves the current default spacing for vertical button boxes. This is the number of pixels
+to be placed between the buttons when they are arranged.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_box_get_spacing() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> the default number of pixels between buttons.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton, adding it to @group.
@@ -60945,6 +61703,40 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_dest_item_at_pos">
+<description>
+Determines the destination item for a given position.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drag_x">
+<parameter_description> the position to determine the destination item for
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drag_y">
+<parameter_description> the position to determine the destination item for
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the item, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pos">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether there is an item at the given position.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_active_text">
<description>
Returns the currently active string in @combo_box or %NULL if none
@@ -61022,38 +61814,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_widget_send_key">
-<description>
-This function will generate keyboard press and release events in
-the middle of the first GdkWindow found that belongs to @widget.
-For %GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets like GtkButton, this will often be an
-input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget->window.
-Certain caveats should be considered when using this function, in
-particular because the mouse pointer is warped to the key press
-location, see gdk_test_simulate_key() for details.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> Widget to generate a key press and release on.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> A Gdk keyboard value.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> Keyboard modifiers the event is setup with.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> wether all actions neccessary for the key event simulation were carried out successfully.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_enum">
<description>
A #GtkRcPropertyParser for use with gtk_settings_install_property_parser()
@@ -61182,24 +61942,6 @@ direction, widget state, or icon size.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_new_with_buffer">
-<description>
-Creates a new entry with the specified text buffer.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> The buffer to use for the new #GtkEntry.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkEntry
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_style">
<description>
Sets the style (text, icons or both) of items in the tool palette.
@@ -61220,30 +61962,6 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_radio">
-<description>
-If @radio is %TRUE, the cell renderer renders a radio toggle
-(i.e. a toggle in a group of mutually-exclusive toggles).
-If %FALSE, it renders a check toggle (a standalone boolean option).
-This can be set globally for the cell renderer, or changed just
-before rendering each cell in the model (for #GtkTreeView, you set
-up a per-row setting using #GtkTreeViewColumn to associate model
-columns with cell renderer properties).
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="radio">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to make the toggle look like a radio button
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_upper">
<description>
Sets the maximum value of the adjustment.
@@ -61272,23 +61990,20 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_proxies">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_justification">
<description>
-Returns the proxy widgets for an action.
-See also gtk_widget_get_action().
+Gets the default justification of paragraphs in @text_view.
+Tags in the buffer may override the default.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
-and must not be modified.
-
+<return> default justification
</return>
</function>
@@ -61313,6 +62028,59 @@ with g_slist_free(), and the filenames with g_free().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_length">
+<description>
+Retrieves the length in characters of the buffer.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The number of characters in the buffer.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_alignment_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkAlignment.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> the horizontal alignment of the child widget, from 0 (left) to 1
+(right).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> the vertical alignment of the child widget, from 0 (top) to 1
+(bottom).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xscale">
+<parameter_description> the amount that the child widget expands horizontally to fill up
+unused space, from 0 to 1.
+A value of 0 indicates that the child widget should never expand.
+A value of 1 indicates that the child widget will expand to fill all of the
+space allocated for the #GtkAlignment.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yscale">
+<parameter_description> the amount that the child widget expands vertically to fill up
+unused space, from 0 to 1. The values are similar to @xscale.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GtkAlignment.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_drag_source_get_target_list">
<description>
Gets the list of targets this widget can provide for
@@ -61350,6 +62118,36 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_lookup_color">
+<description>
+Looks up @color_name in the style's logical color mappings,
+filling in @color and returning %TRUE if found, otherwise
+returning %FALSE. Do not cache the found mapping, because
+it depends on the #GtkStyle and might change when a theme
+switch occurs.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the logical color to look up
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkColor to fill in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the mapping was found.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_cursor_on_cell">
<description>
Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
@@ -61418,6 +62216,28 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_starts_display_line">
+<description>
+Determines whether @iter is at the start of a display line.
+See gtk_text_view_forward_display_line() for an explanation of
+display lines vs. paragraphs.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter begins a wrapped line
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_get_default_language">
<description>
Returns the #PangoLanguage for the default language currently in
@@ -61473,23 +62293,14 @@ Removes a widget from a #GtkSizeGroup.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_realized">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_update">
<description>
-Marks the widget as being realized.
-
-This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
-"realize" or "unrealize" implementation.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Manually force an update of the spin button.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="realized">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to mark the widget as realized
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -61595,6 +62406,22 @@ column @col + 1. See gtk_table_set_col_spacing().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_vbutton_box_set_layout_default">
+<description>
+Sets a new layout mode that will be used by all button boxes.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_button_box_set_layout() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a new #GtkButtonBoxStyle.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_get_activates_default">
<description>
Retrieves the value set by gtk_entry_set_activates_default().
@@ -61747,54 +62574,56 @@ compare to <literal>event->window</literal> to confirm that the e
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_nth_item">
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_text">
<description>
-Returns the @n<!-- -->'th item on @toolbar, or %NULL if the
-toolbar does not contain an @n<!-- -->'th item.
+Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format
+(with printf()-style).
-Since: 2.4
+Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
+bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n">
-<parameter_description> A position on the toolbar
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The @n<!-- -->'th #GtkToolItem on @toolbar, or %NULL if there
-isn't an @n<!-- -->'th item.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_item_position">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_nth_item">
<description>
-Sets the position of @item in the list of children of @group.
+Returns the @n<!-- -->'th item on @toolbar, or %NULL if the
+toolbar does not contain an @n<!-- -->'th item.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="item">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkToolItem to move to a new position, should
-be a child of @group.
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the new position of @item in @group, starting with 0.
-The position -1 means end of list.
+<parameter name="n">
+<parameter_description> A position on the toolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The @n<!-- -->'th #GtkToolItem on @toolbar, or %NULL if there
+isn't an @n<!-- -->'th item.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_apply_button">
@@ -61838,6 +62667,28 @@ See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_width">
+<description>
+Sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width
+to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will
+automatically determine a suitable item size.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="item_width">
+<parameter_description> the width for each item
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_alignment_get_padding">
<description>
Gets the padding on the different sides of the widget.
@@ -61871,35 +62722,23 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order_from_array">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_completion_prefix">
<description>
-Sets an alternative button order. If the
-#GtkSettings:gtk-alternative-button-order setting is set to %TRUE,
-the dialog buttons are reordered according to the order of the
-response ids in @new_order.
-
-See gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order() for more information.
-
-This function is for use by language bindings.
+Get the original text entered by the user that triggered
+the completion or %NULL if there's no completion ongoing.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_params">
-<parameter_description> the number of response ids in @new_order
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> an array of response ids of @dialog's buttons
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the prefix for the current completion
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_calendar_set_display_options">
@@ -61979,19 +62818,31 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_is_valid">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_lines">
<description>
-Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
+Moves @count visible lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
+past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
+the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
+the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
+moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of lines to move forward
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if any invalid regions were found
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -62065,25 +62916,6 @@ removed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_fraction">
-<description>
-Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
-See gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction().
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_tree_coords">
<description>
Converts bin_window coordinates to coordinates for the
@@ -62141,27 +62973,20 @@ use by language bindings.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_current_uri">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_selection">
<description>
-Returns the URI for the currently active link in the label.
-The active link is the one under the mouse pointer or, in a
-selectable label, the link in which the text cursor is currently
-positioned.
+Retrieves the #GtkFontSelection widget embedded in the dialog.
-This function is intended for use in a #GtkLabel::activate-link handler
-or for use in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip handler.
-
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the currently active URI. The string is owned by GTK+ and must
-not be freed or modified.
+<return> the embedded #GtkFontSelection
</return>
</function>
@@ -62456,99 +63281,89 @@ Windows may not be resized smaller than 1 by 1 pixels.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_active_iter">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_display_name">
<description>
-Sets the current active item to be the one referenced by @iter, or
-unsets the active item if @iter is %NULL.
-
- iter must correspond to a path of depth one, or be %NULL.
+Gets the human-readable name of the #GtkPaperSize.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the human-readable name of @size
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_set_detail_func">
+<function name="gtk_widget_grab_focus">
<description>
-Installs a function which provides Pango markup with detail information
-for each day. Examples for such details are holidays or appointments. That
-information is shown below each day when #GtkCalendar:show-details is set.
-A tooltip containing with full detail information is provided, if the entire
-text should not fit into the details area, or if #GtkCalendar:show-details
-is not set.
+Causes @widget to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
+inside. @widget must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
+something like #GtkFrame won't work.
-The size of the details area can be restricted by setting the
-#GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars and #GtkCalendar:detail-height-rows
-properties.
+More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
+gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
-Since: 2.14
+The widget also needs to be realized and mapped. This is indicated by the
+related signals. Grabbing the focus immediately after creating the widget
+will likely fail and cause critical warnings.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> a function providing details for each day.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func invokations.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> a function for releasing @data.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_unselect_all">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap">
<description>
-Unselects all the items inside @chooser.
+Toggles line wrapping within the #GtkLabel widget. %TRUE makes it break
+lines if text exceeds the widget's size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
+by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.
-Since: 2.10
+Note that setting line wrapping to %TRUE does not make the label
+wrap at its parent container's width, because GTK+ widgets
+conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent
+container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
+set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wrap">
+<parameter_description> the setting
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_previous_line">
+<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Move the iterator to the beginning of the previous line. The lines
-of a wrapped paragraph are treated as distinct for this operation.
+Creates a new #GtkCheckMenuItem containing a label. The label
+will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
+in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkCheckMenuItem
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_remove">
@@ -62595,57 +63410,102 @@ or %NULL to unset a previously set custom theme
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_use_full_page">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu">
<description>
-If @full_page is %TRUE, the transformation for the cairo context
-obtained from #GtkPrintContext puts the origin at the top left
-corner of the page (which may not be the top left corner of the
-sheet, depending on page orientation and the number of pages per
-sheet). Otherwise, the origin is at the top left corner of the
-imageable area (i.e. inside the margins).
+Calling this function signals to the toolbar that the
+overflow menu item for @tool_item has changed. If the
+overflow menu is visible when this function it called,
+the menu will be rebuilt.
-Since: 2.10
+The function must be called when the tool item changes what it
+will do in response to the #GtkToolItem::create-menu-proxy signal.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="full_page">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to set up the #GtkPrintContext for the full page
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_use_drag_window">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_right_margin">
<description>
-Returns whether @tool_item has a drag window. See
-gtk_tool_item_set_use_drag_window().
+Gets the default right margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @tool_item uses a drag window.
+<return> the default right margin
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_backend_load_modules">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_index">
+<description>
+Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
+<emphasis>byte</emphasis> index. The given byte index must be at
+the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
+encoded character.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="byte_on_line">
+<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_get_row_drag_data">
<description>
+Obtains a @tree_model and @path from selection data of target type
+%GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW. Normally called from a drag_data_received handler.
+This function can only be used if @selection_data originates from the same
+process that's calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
+is being passed around. If you aren't in the same process, then you'll
+get memory corruption. In the #GtkTreeDragDest drag_data_received handler,
+you can assume that selection data of type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW is
+in from the current process. The returned path must be freed with
+gtk_tree_path_free().
+
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> row in @tree_model
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>
+<return> %TRUE if @selection_data had target type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW and
+is otherwise valid
</return>
</function>
@@ -62785,22 +63645,6 @@ Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_indicator">
-<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether the sort indicator arrow is displayed
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_modified">
<description>
Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
@@ -62906,24 +63750,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_icon_name">
-<description>
-Gets the name of the icon to use for the printer.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the icon name for @printer
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_border">
<description>
A #GtkRcPropertyParser for use with gtk_settings_install_property_parser()
@@ -62980,23 +63806,42 @@ widget is in the buffer.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_new_from_string">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_tabs">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreePath initialized to @path. @path is expected to be a
-colon separated list of numbers. For example, the string "10:4:0" would
-create a path of depth 3 pointing to the 11th child of the root node, the 5th
-child of that 11th child, and the 1st child of that 5th child. If an invalid
-path string is passed in, %NULL is returned.
+Gets the default tabs for @text_view. Tags in the buffer may
+override the defaults. The returned array will be %NULL if
+"standard" (8-space) tabs are used. Free the return value
+with pango_tab_array_free().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The string representation of a path.
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
+<return> copy of default tab array, or %NULL if "standard"
+tabs are used; must be freed with pango_tab_array_free().
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status">
+<description>
+Returns the status of the print operation.
+Also see gtk_print_operation_get_status_string().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the status of the print operation
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -63138,37 +63983,27 @@ gtk_viewport_set_shadow_type().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_chars_in_line">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_current_uri">
<description>
-Returns the number of characters in the line containing @iter,
-including the paragraph delimiters.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> number of characters in the line
-</return>
-</function>
+Returns the URI for the currently active link in the label.
+The active link is the one under the mouse pointer or, in a
+selectable label, the link in which the text cursor is currently
+positioned.
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_n_pages">
-<description>
-Gets the number of pages in a notebook.
+This function is intended for use in a #GtkLabel::activate-link handler
+or for use in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip handler.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of pages in the notebook.
+<return> the currently active URI. The string is owned by GTK+ and must
+not be freed or modified.
</return>
</function>
@@ -63194,26 +64029,6 @@ is no next @iter, %FALSE is returned and @iter is set to be invalid.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_entry">
-<description>
-Returns the #GtkEntry which is currently in use as interactive search
-entry for @tree_view. In case the built-in entry is being used, %NULL
-will be returned.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the entry currently in use as search entry.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line">
<description>
Moves iterator @iter to the start of the line @line_number. If
@@ -63304,44 +64119,45 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_get_priority">
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_max_length">
<description>
-Get the tag priority.
+Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in
+ buffer See gtk_entry_buffer_set_max_length().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The tag's priority.
+<return> the maximum allowed number of characters
+in #GtkEntryBuffer, or 0 if there is no maximum.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_iconify">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_blinking">
<description>
-Asks to iconify (i.e. minimize) the specified @window. Note that
-you shouldn't assume the window is definitely iconified afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could deiconify it
-again, or there may not be a window manager in which case
-iconification isn't possible, etc. But normally the window will end
-up iconified. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
-
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
-in which case the window will be iconified before it ever appears
-onscreen.
+Makes the status icon start or stop blinking.
+Note that blinking user interface elements may be problematic
+for some users, and thus may be turned off, in which case
+this setting has no effect.
-You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+Since: 2.10
+Deprecated: 2.22: This function will be removed in GTK+ 3
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="blinking">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to turn blinking on, %FALSE to turn it off
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -63515,22 +64331,18 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_select_function">
+<function name="gtk_border_free">
<description>
-Returns the current selection function.
-
-Since: 2.14
+Frees a #GtkBorder structure.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
+<parameter name="border_">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBorder.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The function.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_set_adjustment">
@@ -63569,7 +64381,7 @@ cursor position as the insertion point.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> some text in UTF-8 format
+<parameter_description> text in UTF-8 format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="len">
@@ -63700,7 +64512,7 @@ no font is selected. You must free this string with g_free().
<description>
Sets the current sort column to be @sort_column_id. The @sortable will
resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
-#GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal. @sortable may either be
+#GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal. @sort_column_id may either be
a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
<variablelist>
<varlistentry>
@@ -63821,6 +64633,40 @@ as a local filename. Free with g_free()
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport">
+<description>
+Used to add children without native scrolling capabilities. This
+is simply a convenience function; it is equivalent to adding the
+unscrollable child to a viewport, then adding the viewport to the
+scrolled window. If a child has native scrolling, use
+gtk_container_add() instead of this function.
+
+The viewport scrolls the child by moving its #GdkWindow, and takes
+the size of the child to be the size of its toplevel #GdkWindow.
+This will be very wrong for most widgets that support native scrolling;
+for example, if you add a widget such as #GtkTreeView with a viewport,
+the whole widget will scroll, including the column headings. Thus,
+widgets with native scrolling support should not be used with the
+#GtkViewport proxy.
+
+A widget supports scrolling natively if the
+set_scroll_adjustments_signal field in #GtkWidgetClass is non-zero,
+i.e. has been filled in with a valid signal identifier.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the widget you want to scroll
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_size_of_row">
<description>
Sets @requisition to the size needed by @cell_view to display
@@ -63888,20 +64734,24 @@ Returns %TRUE if the user can click on the header for the column.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_icons">
+<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Retrieves whether @chooser should show an icon near the resource.
+Creates a new #GtkToggleToolButton containing the image and text from a
+stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
+and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-Since: 2.10
+It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the icons should be displayed, %FALSE otherwise.
+<return> A new #GtkToggleToolButton
</return>
</function>
@@ -64054,30 +64904,21 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_type_hint">
+<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_handle_position">
<description>
-By setting the type hint for the window, you allow the window
-manager to decorate and handle the window in a way which is
-suitable to the function of the window in your application.
-
-This function should be called before the window becomes visible.
-
-gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience functions in GTK+
-will sometimes call gtk_window_set_type_hint() on your behalf.
+Gets the handle position of the handle box. See
+gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hint">
-<parameter_description> the window type
+<parameter name="handle_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current handle position.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_current_uri">
@@ -64106,26 +64947,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_alignment">
-<description>
-Sets the alignment of the title or custom widget inside the column header.
-The alignment determines its location inside the button -- 0.0 for left, 0.5
-for center, 1.0 for right.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> The alignment, which is between [0.0 and 1.0] inclusive.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_list_contexts">
<description>
Gets the list of contexts available within the current
@@ -64249,6 +65070,24 @@ returned string with g_free() when done.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_unset_invisible_char">
+<description>
+Unsets the invisible char previously set with
+gtk_entry_set_invisible_char(). So that the
+default invisible char is used again.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_uposition">
<description>
Sets the position of a widget. The funny "u" in the name comes from
@@ -64445,22 +65284,47 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line">
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup">
<description>
-Returns the line number containing the iterator. Lines in
-a #GtkTextBuffer are numbered beginning with 0 for the first
-line in the buffer.
+Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
+printf()-style), which is marked up with the
+<link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+
+Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
+bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+
+Due to an oversight, this function does not escape special XML characters
+like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
+may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
+to escape it.
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+gchar *msg;
+
+msg = g_markup_printf_escaped (message_format, ...);
+gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "%s", msg);
+g_free (msg);
+</programlisting></informalexample>
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
+ <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>), or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a line number
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_style_ref">
@@ -64522,103 +65386,19 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords">
-<description>
-Converts bin_window coordinates (see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window())
-to widget relative coordinates.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bx">
-<parameter_description> bin_window X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="by">
-<parameter_description> bin_window Y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wx">
-<parameter_description> return location for widget X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wy">
-<parameter_description> return location for widget Y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new">
-<description>
-Creates an empty status icon object.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_paint_resize_grip">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_widget">
<description>
-Draws a resize grip in the given rectangle on @window using the given
-parameters.
+Sets the widget in the header to be @widget. If widget is %NULL, then the
+header button is set with a #GtkLabel set to the title of @tree_column.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="edge">
-<parameter_description> the edge in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+<parameter_description> A child #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -64765,42 +65545,6 @@ Sets the way @child is packed into @box.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_editable_editing_done">
-<description>
-Emits the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_editable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_can_focus">
-<description>
-Specifies whether @widget can own the input focus. See
-gtk_widget_grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a
-widget.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="can_focus">
-<parameter_description> whether or not @widget can own the input focus.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_set_from_pixbuf">
<description>
See gtk_image_new_from_pixbuf() for details.
@@ -64892,29 +65636,30 @@ of gtk_widget_modify_fg().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_item">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column">
<description>
-Obtains the menu item which corresponds to @path.
-
-If the widget corresponding to @path is a menu item which opens a
-submenu, then the item is returned. If you are interested in the submenu,
-use gtk_item_factory_get_widget() instead.
+This inserts the @column into the @tree_view at @position. If @position is
+-1, then the column is inserted at the end. If @tree_view has
+"fixed_height" mode enabled, then @column must have its "sizing" property
+set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the path to the menu item
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be inserted.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> The position to insert @column in.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the menu item for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't
-lead to a menu item
+<return> The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
</return>
</function>
@@ -64962,63 +65707,88 @@ image or mask; you still need to unref them if you own references.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_load">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spinner_new">
<description>
-Parses a file previously saved with gtk_accel_map_save() for
-accelerator specifications, and propagates them accordingly.
+Returns a new cell renderer which will show a spinner to indicate
+activity.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_name">
-<parameter_description> a file containing accelerator specifications,
-in the GLib file name encoding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkCellRenderer
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label">
+<function name="gtk_window_new">
<description>
-Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of
-the file that is being previewed; the default is %TRUE. Applications that
-want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to %FALSE and
-display the name themselves in their preview widget.
+Creates a new #GtkWindow, which is a toplevel window that can
+contain other widgets. Nearly always, the type of the window should
+be #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL. If you're implementing something like a
+popup menu from scratch (which is a bad idea, just use #GtkMenu),
+you might use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP. #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP is not for
+dialogs, though in some other toolkits dialogs are called "popups".
+In GTK+, #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP means a pop-up menu or pop-up tooltip.
+On X11, popup windows are not controlled by the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>.
-See also: gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()
+If you simply want an undecorated window (no window borders), use
+gtk_window_set_decorated(), don't use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_label">
-<parameter_description> whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> type of window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkWindow.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_vertical">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy">
<description>
-Returns whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically.
-See gtk_tool_item_set_visible_vertical().
+You do not need to use this function. Creates a row reference based on
+ path This reference will keep pointing to the node pointed to by @path,
+so long as it exists. If @path isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is
+returned. However, unlike references created with
+gtk_tree_row_reference_new(), it does not listen to the model for changes.
+The creator of the row reference must do this explicitly using
+gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted(), gtk_tree_row_reference_deleted(),
+gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered().
+
+These functions must be called exactly once per proxy when the
+corresponding signal on the model is emitted. This single call
+updates all row references for that proxy. Since built-in GTK+
+objects like #GtkTreeView already use this mechanism internally,
+using them as the proxy object will produce unpredictable results.
+Further more, passing the same object as @model and @proxy
+doesn't work for reasons of internal implementation.
+
+This type of row reference is primarily meant by structures that need to
+carefully monitor exactly when a row reference updates itself, and is not
+generally needed by most applications.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> A proxy #GObject
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreePath to monitor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
-
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
@@ -65040,27 +65810,37 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model">
<description>
-Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
-If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
-displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
-will be updated appropriately.
+Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child model.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
+<parameter name="child_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon size
+</parameters>
+<return> A new #GtkTreeModel.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_group_get_current_current_grab">
+<description>
+Gets the current grab widget of the given group,
+see gtk_grab_add().
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindowGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
+<return> the current grab widget of the group
</return>
</function>
@@ -65104,26 +65884,27 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_color">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_item_column">
<description>
-Sets the current color to be @color. The first time this is called, it will
-also set the original color to be @color too.
+Gets the column in which the item @path is currently
+displayed. Column numbers start at 0.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_color_selection_set_current_color() instead.
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> an array of 4 doubles specifying the red, green, blue and opacity
-to set the current color to.
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreePath of the item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The column in which the item is displayed
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_composite_name">
@@ -65221,6 +66002,50 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_position">
+<description>
+Retrieves the iterator pointing to the character at buffer
+coordinates @x and @y. Buffer coordinates are coordinates for
+the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portion.
+If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert
+those to buffer coordinates with
+gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords().
+
+Note that this is different from gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_location(),
+which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions <emphasis>between</emphasis>
+characters.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="trailing">
+<parameter_description> if non-%NULL, location to store an integer indicating where
+in the grapheme the user clicked. It will either be
+zero, or the number of characters in the grapheme.
+0 represents the trailing edge of the grapheme.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x position, in buffer coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y position, in buffer coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_embed_page_setup">
<description>
Gets the value of #GtkPrintOperation::embed-page-setup property.
@@ -65318,6 +66143,23 @@ instance with gtk_socket_add_id().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_active">
+<description>
+Returns whether the cell renderer is active. See
+gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_active().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_license">
<description>
Sets the license information to be displayed in the secondary
@@ -65458,37 +66300,6 @@ the state using wrapper functions such as gtk_widget_set_sensitive().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_attach">
-<description>
-Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the
-colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes
-it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may
-involve the creation of a new style if the style has already
-been attached to a window with a different style and colormap.
-
-Since this function may return a new object, you have to use it
-in the following way:
-<literal>style = gtk_style_attach (style, window)</literal>
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Either @style, or a newly-created #GtkStyle.
-If the style is newly created, the style parameter
-will be unref'ed, and the new style will have
-a reference count belonging to the caller.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label">
<description>
Sets @label as the label used for the tool button. The "label" property
@@ -65533,22 +66344,36 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_wrap_width">
+<function name="gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path">
<description>
-Sets the wrap width of @combo_box to be @width. The wrap width is basically
-the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out
-in a table.
+Set the accelerator path on @menu_item, through which runtime changes of the
+menu item's accelerator caused by the user can be identified and saved to
+persistant storage (see gtk_accel_map_save() on this).
+To setup a default accelerator for this menu item, call
+gtk_accel_map_add_entry() with the same @accel_path.
+See also gtk_accel_map_add_entry() on the specifics of accelerator paths,
+and gtk_menu_set_accel_path() for a more convenient variant of this function.
-Since: 2.4
+This function is basically a convenience wrapper that handles calling
+gtk_widget_set_accel_path() with the appropriate accelerator group for
+the menu item.
+
+Note that you do need to set an accelerator on the parent menu with
+gtk_menu_set_accel_group() for this to work.
+
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Preferred number of columns
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> accelerator path, corresponding to this menu item's
+functionality, or %NULL to unset the current path.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -65633,35 +66458,22 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_owner_set_for_display">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_headers_visible">
<description>
-Claim ownership of a given selection for a particular widget, or,
-if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
-
-Since: 2.2
+Sets the visibility state of the headers.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #Gdkdisplay where the selection is set
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> new selection owner (a #GdkWidget), or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the selection to claim.
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description> timestamp with which to claim the selection
+<parameter name="headers_visible">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the headers are visible
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> TRUE if the operation succeeded
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_visible_range">
@@ -65712,6 +66524,39 @@ by one.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_tree_to_bin_window_coords">
+<description>
+Converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree)
+to bin_window coordinates.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tx">
+<parameter_description> tree X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ty">
+<parameter_description> tree Y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bx">
+<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate relative to bin_window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="by">
+<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate relative to bin_window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accel_group_get_modifier_mask">
<description>
Gets a #GdkModifierType representing the mask for this
@@ -65750,24 +66595,18 @@ widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_printer_lpi">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_progress_new">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.
+Creates a new #GtkCellRendererProgress.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="lpi">
-<parameter_description> the resolution in lpi (lines per inch)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new cell renderer
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_layout_add_attribute">
@@ -65802,24 +66641,25 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_wrap_width">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_allocation">
<description>
-Returns the wrap width which is used to determine the number of columns
-for the popup menu. If the wrap width is larger than 1, the combo box
-is in table mode.
+Sets the widget's allocation. This should not be used
+directly, but from within a widget's size_allocate method.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="allocation">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the wrap width.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_get_icon_name">
@@ -65840,24 +66680,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_option_menu_get_history">
-<description>
-Retrieves the index of the currently selected menu item. The menu
-items are numbered from top to bottom, starting with 0.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkComboBox instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="option_menu">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkOptionMenu
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> index of the selected menu item, or -1 if there are no menu items
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_expander_get_use_underline">
<description>
Returns whether an embedded underline in the expander label indicates a
@@ -65878,23 +66700,24 @@ indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_finishings">
<description>
-Obtains the #GtkPageSetup that determines the page
-dimensions of the #GtkPrintContext.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="finishings">
+<parameter_description> the finishings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page setup of @context
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_group_get_sensitive">
@@ -65948,28 +66771,6 @@ has been set to the resulting flags value.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_map_expanded_rows">
-<description>
-Calls @func on all expanded rows.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> A function to be called
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> User data to be passed to the function.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_custom_tab_label">
<description>
Sets the label for the tab holding custom widgets.
@@ -66011,30 +66812,23 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_move_child">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_text">
<description>
-Updates the position of a child, as for gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window().
+Convenience function which constructs a new editable text combo box, which
+is a #GtkComboBoxEntry just displaying strings. If you use this function to
+create a text combo box, you should only manipulate its data source with
+the following convenience functions: gtk_combo_box_append_text(),
+gtk_combo_box_insert_text(), gtk_combo_box_prepend_text() and
+gtk_combo_box_remove_text().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> child widget already added to the text view
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpos">
-<parameter_description> new X position in window coordinates
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypos">
-<parameter_description> new Y position in window coordinates
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new text #GtkComboBoxEntry.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_ctree_node_set_pixtext">
@@ -66050,6 +66844,40 @@ Updates the position of a child, as for gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window().
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_notebook_query_tab_label_packing">
+<description>
+Query the packing attributes for the tab label of the page
+containing @child.
+
+Deprecated: 2.20: Modify the #GtkNotebook:tab-expand and
+#GtkNotebook:tab-fill child properties instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> location to store the expand value (or NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fill">
+<parameter_description> location to store the fill value (or NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pack_type">
+<parameter_description> location to store the pack_type (or NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_plug_construct">
<description>
Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
@@ -66107,24 +66935,20 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_color">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_depth">
<description>
-Sets @color to be the current color in the GtkColorSelection widget.
+Returns the current depth of @path.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_color_selection_get_current_color() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> an array of 4 #gdouble to fill in with the current color.
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The depth of @path
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_dialog_get_action_area">
@@ -66145,26 +66969,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_append_menuitems">
-<description>
-Add menuitems for various available input methods to a menu;
-the menuitems, when selected, will switch the input method
-for the context and the global default input method.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="menushell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuShell
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_info_bar_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkInfoBar object.
@@ -66179,31 +66983,6 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_select_region">
-<description>
-Selects a range of characters in the label, if the label is selectable.
-See gtk_label_set_selectable(). If the label is not selectable,
-this function has no effect. If @start_offset or
- end_offset are -1, then the end of the label will be substituted.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_offset">
-<parameter_description> start offset (in characters not bytes)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_offset">
-<parameter_description> end offset (in characters not bytes)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_get_gicon">
<description>
Gets the #GIcon and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
@@ -66344,6 +67123,28 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_screen">
+<description>
+Sets the #GdkScreen where the @window is displayed; if
+the window is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
+then remapped on the new screen.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_hsv_new">
<description>
Creates a new HSV color selector.
@@ -66412,30 +67213,65 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_present">
+<function name="gtk_init">
<description>
-Presents a window to the user. This may mean raising the window
-in the stacking order, deiconifying it, moving it to the current
-desktop, and/or giving it the keyboard focus, possibly dependent
-on the user's platform, window manager, and preferences.
+Call this function before using any other GTK+ functions in your GUI
+applications. It will initialize everything needed to operate the
+toolkit and parses some standard command line options. @argc and
+ argv are adjusted accordingly so your own code will
+never see those standard arguments.
-If @window is hidden, this function calls gtk_widget_show()
-as well.
+Note that there are some alternative ways to initialize GTK+:
+if you are calling gtk_parse_args(), gtk_init_check(),
+gtk_init_with_args() or g_option_context_parse() with
+the option group returned by gtk_get_option_group(), you
+<emphasis>don't</emphasis> have to call gtk_init().
-This function should be used when the user tries to open a window
-that's already open. Say for example the preferences dialog is
-currently open, and the user chooses Preferences from the menu
-a second time; use gtk_window_present() to move the already-open dialog
-where the user can see it.
+<note><para>
+This function will terminate your program if it was unable to initialize
+the GUI for some reason. If you want your program to fall back to a
+textual interface you want to call gtk_init_check() instead.
+</para></note>
-If you are calling this function in response to a user interaction,
-it is preferable to use gtk_window_present_with_time().
+<note><para>
+Since 2.18, GTK+ calls <literal>signal (SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN)</literal>
+during initialization, to ignore SIGPIPE signals, since these are
+almost never wanted in graphical applications. If you do need to
+handle SIGPIPE for some reason, reset the handler after gtk_init(),
+but notice that other libraries (e.g. libdbus or gvfs) might do
+similar things.
+</para></note>
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
+main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
+Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_model">
+<description>
+Sets the model for a #GtkTreeView. If the @tree_view already has a model
+set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If @model is %NULL,
+then it will unset the old model.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeNode.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> The model.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -66466,6 +67302,26 @@ return the property values, starting with the location for
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_item_activated">
+<description>
+Activates the item determined by @path.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTextView. If you don't call gtk_text_view_set_buffer()
@@ -66501,24 +67357,26 @@ used, or -1 if this is disabled.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_page_set">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
+Creates a new #GtkToolButton containing the image and text from a
+stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
+and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-Since: 2.10
+It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSet value
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkToolButton
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog_async">
@@ -66586,22 +67444,24 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_new">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type">
<description>
-Creates a new icon theme object. Icon theme objects are used
-to lookup up an icon by name in a particular icon theme.
-Usually, you'll want to use gtk_icon_theme_get_default()
-or gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen() rather than creating
-a new icon theme object for scratch.
+Adds a rule allowing a given mime type to @filter.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkFileFilter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mime_type">
+<parameter_description> name of a MIME type
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the newly created #GtkIconTheme object.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_new_with_backend">
@@ -66649,21 +67509,15 @@ of the #GtkTreeView
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_row_separator_func">
+<function name="gtk_socket_new">
<description>
-Returns the current row separator function.
+Create a new empty #GtkSocket.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current row separator function.
-
+<return> the new #GtkSocket.
</return>
</function>
@@ -66680,30 +67534,46 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_auto_startup_notification">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_quality">
<description>
-By default, after showing the first #GtkWindow, GTK+ calls
-gdk_notify_startup_complete(). Call this function to disable
-the automatic startup notification. You might do this if your
-first window is a splash screen, and you want to delay notification
-until after your real main window has been shown, for example.
-
-In that example, you would disable startup notification
-temporarily, show your splash screen, then re-enable it so that
-showing the main window would automatically result in notification.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to automatically do startup notification
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="quality">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintQuality value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end">
+<description>
+Moves forward to the next word end. (If @iter is currently on a
+word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
+are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
+language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
+algorithms).
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_label_get_layout_offsets">
<description>
Obtains the coordinates where the label will draw the #PangoLayout
@@ -66733,50 +67603,50 @@ and from pixels using PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_settings">
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_set_accel_group">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkPrintSettings for the #GtkPrintUnixDialog. Typically,
-this is used to restore saved print settings from a previous print
-operation before the print dialog is shown.
+Specifies an @accel_group to add the menu items accelerator to
+(this only applies to stock items so a stock item must already
+be set, make sure to call gtk_image_menu_item_set_use_stock()
+and gtk_menu_item_set_label() with a valid stock item first).
-Since: 2.10
+If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators then
+you shouldnt need this (see gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock()).
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter name="image_menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImageMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings, or %NULL
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_expand">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_visited">
<description>
-Sets whether the group should be given extra space.
+Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
+was last visited.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup which is a child of palette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> whether the group should be given extra space
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
+the resource was last visited, or -1 on failure.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_test_display_button_window">
@@ -66832,23 +67702,11 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_new">
+<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_hadjustment">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPageSetup.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPageSetup.
-
-</return>
-</function>
+Retrieves the horizontal focus adjustment for the container. See
+gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment ().
-<function name="gtk_container_child_get">
-<description>
-Gets the values of one or more child properties for @child and @container.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -66856,69 +67714,35 @@ Gets the values of one or more child properties for @child and @container.
<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_prop_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property to get
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> return location for the first property, followed
-optionally by more name/return location pairs, followed by %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_new_from_file">
-<description>
-Reads the print settings from @file_name. Returns a new #GtkPrintSettings
-object with the restored settings, or %NULL if an error occurred. If the
-file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
-#GKeyFileError. See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_name">
-<parameter_description> the filename to read the settings from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the restored #GtkPrintSettings
-
+<return> the horizontal focus adjustment, or %NULL if
+none has been set.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_transient_for">
<description>
-Fills in @path and @focus_column with the current path and focus column. If
-the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL. If no column
-currently has focus, then * focus_column will be %NULL.
+Dialog windows should be set transient for the main application
+window they were spawned from. This allows <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window managers</link> to e.g. keep the
+dialog on top of the main window, or center the dialog over the
+main window. gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience
+functions in GTK+ will sometimes call
+gtk_window_set_transient_for() on your behalf.
-The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() when
-you are done with it.
+Passing %NULL for @parent unsets the current transient window.
+
+On Windows, this function puts the child window on top of the parent,
+much as the window manager would have done on X.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A pointer to be filled with the current cursor path, or %NULL
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="focus_column">
-<parameter_description> A pointer to be filled with the current focus column, or %NULL
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> parent window, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -67013,25 +67837,25 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_authors">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_settings">
<description>
-Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab
-of the secondary credits dialog.
+Gets a new #GtkPrintSettings object that represents the
+current values in the print dialog. Note that this creates a
+<emphasis>new object</emphasis>, and you need to unref it
+if don't want to keep it.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="authors">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkPrintSettings object with the values from @dialog
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_header_image">
@@ -67057,22 +67881,48 @@ if there's no header image for the page.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_separator_new">
+<function name="gtk_draw_flat_box">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkSeparator with the given orientation.
+Draws a flat box on @window with the given parameters.
-Since: 2.16
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_flat_box() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the separator's orientation.
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkSeparator.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_new">
@@ -67317,22 +68167,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_current_alpha">
-<description>
-Returns the current alpha value.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_get_composite_name">
<description>
Obtains the composite name of a widget.
@@ -67351,22 +68185,22 @@ longer needed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_new">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_slider_size_fixed">
<description>
-Creates a new recent manager object. Recent manager objects are used to
-handle the list of recently used resources. A #GtkRecentManager object
-monitors the recently used resources list, and emits the "changed" signal
-each time something inside the list changes.
+This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
-#GtkRecentManager objects are expensive: be sure to create them only when
-needed. You should use gtk_recent_manager_get_default() instead.
+See gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed().
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkRecentManager object.
+<return> whether the range's slider has a fixed size.
</return>
</function>
@@ -67527,24 +68361,57 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_queue_resize">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_activatable">
<description>
-This function is only for use in widget implementations.
-Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should
-be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request.
-For example, when you change the text in a #GtkLabel, #GtkLabel
-queues a resize to ensure there's enough space for the new text.
+Sets whether the icon is activatable.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the icon should be activatable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_backward_display_line_start">
+<description>
+Moves the given @iter backward to the next display line start.
+A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
+separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
+Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
+wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
+same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
+they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_fixed_height_mode">
<description>
Returns whether fixed height mode is turned on for @tree_view.
@@ -67622,6 +68489,22 @@ Returns the parent container of @widget.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_state_wildcarded">
+<description>
+Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_state_wildcarded().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any widget state variant
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_style_unref">
<description>
Decrease the reference count of @style.
@@ -67638,43 +68521,63 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: use g_object_unref() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_destroy_with_parent">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_usize">
<description>
-Returns whether the window will be destroyed with its transient parent. See
-gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent ().
+Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size
+request will be @width by @height. You can use this function to
+force a widget to be either larger or smaller than it is. The
+strange "usize" name dates from the early days of GTK+, and derives
+from X Window System terminology. In many cases,
+gtk_window_set_default_size() is a better choice for toplevel
+windows than this function; setting the default size will still
+allow users to shrink the window. Setting the usize will force them
+to leave the window at least as large as the usize. When dealing
+with window sizes, gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can be a useful
+function as well.
+Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
+translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
+can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
+basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
+correct.
+
+Deprecated: 2.2: Use gtk_widget_set_size_request() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> minimum width, or -1 to unset
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> minimum height, or -1 to unset
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_custom_paper_unix_dialog_new">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_wrap">
<description>
-Creates a new custom paper dialog.
-
-Since: 2.18
+Sets the flag that determines if a spin button value wraps around to the
+opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is exceeded.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the title of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter name="wrap">
+<parameter_description> a flag indicating if wrapping behavior is performed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkCustomPaperUnixDialog
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_border_copy">
@@ -67797,74 +68700,93 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new">
+<function name="gtk_draw_insertion_cursor">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget object. This is an embeddable widget
-used to access the recently used resources list.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
-
-</return>
-</function>
+Draws a text caret on @drawable at @location. This is not a style function
+but merely a convenience function for drawing the standard cursor shape.
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_increments">
-<description>
-Sets the step and page increments for spin_button. This affects how
-quickly the value changes when the spin button's arrows are activated.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 1 press.
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 2 press.
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="location">
+<parameter_description> location where to draw the cursor (@location->width is ignored)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_primary">
+<parameter_description> if the cursor should be the primary cursor color.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="direction">
+<parameter_description> whether the cursor is left-to-right or
+right-to-left. Should never be #GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="draw_arrow">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to draw a directional arrow on the
+cursor. Should be %FALSE unless the cursor is split.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_dest_item_at_pos">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_preedit_string">
<description>
-Determines the destination item for a given position.
-
-Since: 2.8
+Set the preedit string and attributes. The preedit string is a
+string showing text that is currently being edited and not
+yet committed into the buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="drag_x">
-<parameter_description> the position to determine the destination item for
+<parameter name="preedit_string">
+<parameter_description> a string to display at the insertion point
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="drag_y">
-<parameter_description> the position to determine the destination item for
+<parameter name="preedit_attrs">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList of attributes that apply to @preedit_string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the item, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="cursor_pos">
+<parameter_description> position of cursor within preedit string in chars
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_relief_style">
+<description>
+Returns the relief style of buttons on @toolbar. See
+gtk_button_set_relief().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether there is an item at the given position.
+<return> The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
</return>
</function>
@@ -67920,6 +68842,8 @@ gtk_status_icon_set_blinking().
Since: 2.10
+Deprecated: 2.22: This function will be removed in GTK+ 3
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="status_icon">
@@ -68011,20 +68935,40 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_copy">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_add_drag_dest">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreePath as a copy of @path.
+Sets @palette as drag source (see gtk_tool_palette_set_drag_source())
+and sets @widget as a drag destination for drags from @palette.
+See gtk_drag_dest_set().
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget which should be a drag destination for @palette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> the flags that specify what actions GTK+ should take for drops
+on that widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkToolPaletteDragTarget<!-- -->s which the widget
+should support
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="actions">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDragAction<!-- -->s which the widget should suppport
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkTreePath.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_collate">
@@ -68095,6 +69039,28 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_new_for_pixbuf">
+<description>
+Creates a #GtkIconInfo for a #GdkPixbuf.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the pixbuf to wrap in a #GtkIconInfo
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GtkIconInfo
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label">
<description>
Adds a widget to the list of mnemonic labels for
@@ -68222,48 +69188,23 @@ page size, it is clamped between @min and @max - page-size.)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_reorder">
-<description>
-Re-inserts @cell at @position. Note that @cell has already to be packed
-into @cell_layout for this to function properly.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to reorder.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> New position to insert @cell at.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_tabs">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_new_from_string">
<description>
-Gets the default tabs for @text_view. Tags in the buffer may
-override the defaults. The returned array will be %NULL if
-"standard" (8-space) tabs are used. Free the return value
-with pango_tab_array_free().
+Creates a new #GtkTreePath initialized to @path. @path is expected to be a
+colon separated list of numbers. For example, the string "10:4:0" would
+create a path of depth 3 pointing to the 11th child of the root node, the 5th
+child of that 11th child, and the 1st child of that 5th child. If an invalid
+path string is passed in, %NULL is returned.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The string representation of a path.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> copy of default tab array, or %NULL if "standard"
-tabs are used; must be freed with pango_tab_array_free().
+<return> A newly-created #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
@@ -68295,6 +69236,27 @@ underlying X11 Window
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_link_button_set_uri">
+<description>
+Sets @uri as the URI where the #GtkLinkButton points. As a side-effect
+this unsets the 'visited' state of the button.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="link_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLinkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a valid URI
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_button_set_title">
<description>
Sets the title for the font selection dialog.
@@ -68374,6 +69336,64 @@ selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_keep_below">
+<description>
+Asks to keep @window below, so that it stays in bottom. Note that
+you shouldn't assume the window is definitely below afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could not keep it below,
+and not all window managers support putting windows below. But
+normally the window will be kept below. Just don't write code
+that crashes if not.
+
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+in which case the window will be kept below when it appears onscreen
+initially.
+
+You can track the below state via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+
+Note that, according to the <ulink
+url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec">Extended Window
+Manager Hints</ulink> specification, the above state is mainly meant
+for user preferences and should not be used by applications e.g. for
+drawing attention to their dialogs.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> whether to keep @window below other windows
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_cell_view_new_with_pixbuf">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererPixbuf
+to it, and makes its show @pixbuf.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the image to display in the cell view
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_sort_column_changed">
<description>
Emits a #GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal on @sortable.
@@ -68462,6 +69482,30 @@ in addition to calling this function.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_assistant_commit">
+<description>
+Erases the visited page history so the back button is not
+shown on the current page, and removes the cancel button
+from subsequent pages.
+
+Use this when the information provided up to the current
+page is hereafter deemed permanent and cannot be modified
+or undone. For example, showing a progress page to track
+a long-running, unreversible operation after the user has
+clicked apply on a confirmation page.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest">
<description>
Turns @icon_view into a drop destination for automatic DND. Calling this
@@ -68518,23 +69562,6 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hadjustment">
-<description>
-Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the horizontal aspect.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
-used.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_columns_autosize">
<description>
Resizes all columns to their optimal width. Only works after the
@@ -68716,24 +69743,6 @@ column 2.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_complete">
-<description>
-Requests a completion operation, or in other words a refiltering of the
-current list with completions, using the current key. The completion list
-view will be updated accordingly.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_connect_accelerator">
<description>
Installs the accelerator for @action if @action has an
@@ -69156,19 +70165,19 @@ representing a node in a tree. This value should not be freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_width">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_adjustment">
<description>
-Returns the current size of @tree_column in pixels.
+Get the adjustment associated with a #GtkSpinButton
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The current width of @tree_column.
+<return> the #GtkAdjustment of @spin_button
</return>
</function>
@@ -69195,27 +70204,6 @@ any focus widget for the toplevel window.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_set_hadjustment">
-<description>
-Sets the horizontal scroll adjustment for the layout.
-
-See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> new scroll adjustment
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_shell_get_take_focus">
<description>
Returns %TRUE if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup.
@@ -69234,46 +70222,43 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered">
+<function name="gtk_action_create_menu_item">
<description>
-Lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()
-know that the model emitted the "rows_reordered" signal.
+Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> A #GObject
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The parent path of the reordered signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The iter pointing to the parent of the reordered
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> The new order of rows
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a menu item connected to the action.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_adjustment">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_ends">
<description>
-Get the adjustment associated with a #GtkSpinButton
+Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() @count times (or until
+gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() returns %FALSE). If @count is
+negative, moves backward instead of forward.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of sentences to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkAdjustment of @spin_button
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
</return>
</function>
[
Date Prev][
Date Next] [
Thread Prev][
Thread Next]
[
Thread Index]
[
Date Index]
[
Author Index]
